JP6326118B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine capable of executing a special game advantageous to a player when a result of a variable display game that displays a plurality of identification information in a variable manner is a predetermined result.

  Conventionally, in a gaming machine, the processing (A) for setting the image data of the symbol (special symbol), the notice, the background, the alerting mode explanation, and the symbol explanation in order from the front of the five display layers, and the arousing mode in order from the front of the five display layers Image B of explanation, symbol explanation, symbol (special symbol), notice, background image data setting B, and arousal explanation, symbol (special symbol), notice, background, symbol explanation in order from the front of the five display layers It is possible to execute the process C for setting data and execute the process B or the process C when it is time to display the explanation of the arousal (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2005-152332 A

  However, in the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, when it is time to display an effect image (an image such as an explanation of arousing mode), process B or process C is executed to identify the effect image as identification information (special symbol). Therefore, depending on the display position and size of the effect image, the identification information may be hidden by the effect image and the identification information may not be visible. If the identification information is not visible, it is difficult to grasp the state of the variable display game (whether it is changing, whether the reach is occurring, etc.), the stop result mode (what the stop symbol is, etc.) Become.

  An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of visually recognizing identification information even when a predetermined effect image appears.

In order to solve the above problems, the invention described in claim 1
In a gaming machine capable of executing a special game advantageous to a player when a result of a variable display game that displays a plurality of identification information in a variable manner is a predetermined result,
Effect control means for displaying the variable display game on the effect display device;
A starting storage means for storing a starting memory as an execution right of the variable display game, with a predetermined number as an upper limit;
The production control means includes
A start memory display corresponding to the start memory stored in the start memory means can be displayed on the effect display device;
A predetermined effect image can be displayed on the effect display device at a predetermined timing;
Additional information can be displayed on the effect display device together with the identification information,
Creating means for creating a display screen to be displayed on the effect display device by one display layer or by a plurality of laminated display layers;
Display control means for displaying the display screen created by the creating means on the effect display device,
The creation means displays a display layer for displaying the identification information, a display layer for displaying the additional information, a display layer for displaying the start-up memory display, and the predetermined effect image. A plurality of display layers including a display layer for generating a predetermined display screen,
On the predetermined display screen, a display layer for displaying the start-up storage display is positioned above the display layer for displaying the identification information, and a display for displaying the predetermined effect image A layer is positioned below the display layer for displaying the identification information, and the display layer for displaying the additional information includes a display layer for displaying the identification information and the predetermined effect image. A matching portion that is located on a lower layer side than the display layer for display and has the same display position as the identification information in the predetermined effect image is hidden by the identification information.

  According to the present invention, it is possible to visually recognize identification information even if a predetermined effect image appears.

It is the perspective view which looked at the gaming machine of one embodiment of the present invention from the front side. It is a front view of a game board. It is a figure explaining a winning device. It is a figure explaining the detail of a package display apparatus. It is a figure explaining the detail of an effect operation part. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the control system of a gaming machine. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the control system of a gaming machine. It is a flowchart explaining a main process. It is a flowchart explaining a main process. It is a flowchart explaining a checksum calculation process. It is a flowchart explaining an initial value random number update process. It is a flowchart explaining a timer interruption process. It is a flowchart explaining an input process. It is a flowchart explaining a switch reading process. It is a flowchart explaining an output process. It is a flowchart explaining a payout command transmission process. It is a flowchart explaining the random number update process 1. FIG. It is a flowchart explaining the random number update process 2. FIG. It is a flowchart explaining a winning opening switch / state monitoring process. It is a flowchart explaining fraud & winning prize monitoring processing. It is a flowchart explaining a winning number counter update process. It is a flowchart explaining a starting port error monitoring process. It is a flowchart explaining a gaming machine state check process. It is a flowchart explaining a payout busy signal check process. It is a flowchart explaining special figure game processing. It is a flowchart explaining a start port switch monitoring process. It is a flowchart explaining a hard random number acquisition process. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure start port switch common process. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure pending | holding information determination process. It is a flowchart explaining prefetch big hit judgment processing. It is a flowchart explaining a big winning opening switch monitoring process. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure usual process. (A) is a flowchart explaining the special figure 1 fluctuation start process, (b) is a flowchart explaining the special figure 2 fluctuation start process. (A) is a flowchart explaining the big hit flag 1 setting process, (b) is a flowchart explaining the big hit flag 2 setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a big hit determination process. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure 1 stop symbol setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure 2 stop symbol setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure information setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a fluctuation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a change start information setting process. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure variation process. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure display process. 10 is a flowchart for explaining fanfare / interval process transition setting process 1; It is a flowchart explaining a fanfare / interval process. It is a flowchart explaining the big winning opening open process. It is a flowchart explaining a big winning opening remaining ball process. It is a flowchart explaining a big hit end process. (A) is a flowchart for explaining the jackpot end setting process 1, and (b) is a flowchart for explaining the jackpot end setting process 2. It is a flowchart explaining the big hit end setting process 3. FIG. It is a flowchart explaining a production command setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a design fluctuation control process. (A) is a flowchart for explaining the sorting process, and (b) is a flowchart for explaining the 2-byte sorting process. It is a flowchart explaining a usual game process. It is a flowchart explaining a gate switch monitoring process. It is a flowchart explaining a general power prize winning switch monitoring process. It is a flowchart explaining a usual figure normal process. It is a flowchart explaining a process change setting process during a common figure change. It is a flowchart explaining the process during usual figure change. It is a flowchart explaining a process during normal map display. It is a flowchart explaining a process during a common figure. It is a flowchart explaining a general electric operation transfer setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a general electric power remaining ball process. It is a flowchart explaining an end process per common figure. It is a flowchart explaining a segment LED edit process. It is a flowchart explaining a magnet fraud monitoring process. It is a flowchart explaining a board radio wave fraud monitoring process. It is a flowchart explaining an external information edit process. It is a flowchart explaining an external information edit process. It is a flowchart explaining a main prize ball signal edit process. It is a flowchart explaining a start port signal edit process. It is a flowchart explaining the power-on reset process in an effect control apparatus. It is a flowchart explaining the main process in an effect control apparatus. It is a flowchart explaining command reception interruption processing. It is a flowchart explaining a received command range check process. It is a flowchart explaining a received command check process. It is a flowchart explaining a received command analysis process. It is a flowchart explaining a variable system command process. It is a flowchart explaining a variation pattern corresponding symbol determination process. It is a flowchart explaining a jackpot command processing. It is a flowchart explaining a symbol type command process. It is a flowchart explaining a single-shot command processing. It is a flowchart explaining a single-shot command processing. It is a flowchart explaining a customer waiting scenario data setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a scenario data setting process. It is a flowchart explaining special figure 1 hold information setting processing. It is a flowchart explaining a change production setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a change production setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a reachless variation setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a stop symbol setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a fluctuation pattern classification process. It is a flowchart explaining random number lottery processing A. It is a flowchart explaining the notice effect setting processing 1. It is a flowchart explaining the cut-in character replacement determination process 1. It is a flowchart explaining the cut-in character replacement determination process 2. It is a flowchart explaining the cut-in character replacement determination process 3. It is a flowchart explaining the cut-in character replacement determination process 3. It is a flowchart explaining the scenario data setting process for PB notice. It is a flowchart explaining the transmission start process between sub. It is a flowchart explaining inter-subtask reception task processing. It is a flowchart explaining the transmission data edit process between sub. It is a flowchart explaining inter sub ack response task processing. It is a flowchart explaining intersub-effects setting processing. It is a flowchart explaining a scenario setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a scenario analysis process. It is a flowchart explaining a scenario analysis process. (A) is a flowchart explaining a motion registration process, (b) is a figure explaining the structure of a motion management area | region, (c) is a figure explaining the structure of a display information area | region. (A) is a flowchart for explaining the motion data initialization process 1, and (b) is a flowchart for explaining the motion data initialization process 2. (A) is a flowchart explaining a motion deletion process, (b) is a flowchart explaining a motion continuation process. (A) is a flowchart for explaining the constant weight processing, and (b) is a flowchart for explaining the variable weight processing. (A) is a flowchart explaining the PB waiting process, and (b) is a flowchart explaining the PB determination branch process. It is a flowchart explaining a symbol stop process. It is a flowchart explaining a design reverse calculation replacement process. It is a flowchart explaining a fluctuation scenario switching process. (A) is a flowchart explaining a repetition process, (b) is a flowchart explaining an end process. It is a flowchart explaining a motion control process. It is a flowchart explaining a motion command execution process. It is a flowchart explaining a motion command execution process. It is a flowchart explaining a bitmap addition process. It is a flowchart explaining a moving image addition process. It is a flowchart explaining a 1 point designation | designated object movement process. (A) is a flowchart for explaining the effect type designation process, and (b) is a flowchart for explaining the effect parameter designation process. (A) is a flowchart for explaining the object deletion process, and (b) is a flowchart for explaining the object change process. It is a flowchart explaining an object moving image decoding process. It is a flowchart explaining a behavior index setting process. It is a flowchart explaining an effect display edit process. It is a flowchart explaining an effect display edit process. It is a flowchart explaining an effect display edit process. It is a flowchart explaining a character drawing process. (A) is a flowchart for explaining the display left symbol conversion process, (b) is a flowchart for explaining the PB color conversion process, and (c) is a flowchart for explaining the reach character conversion process. It is a flowchart explaining a military commander 1 line conversion process. It is a flowchart explaining a VDP interruption process. It is a flowchart explaining V blank start interruption processing. It is a figure which shows an example of the address area | region of a scenario management area | region, and a scenario management area | region. It is a figure which shows an example of the address area | region of a motion management area | region. It is a figure which shows an example of the background scenario table at the time of a customer waiting start. It is a figure which shows an example of the motion table at the time of the left symbol normal fluctuation start. It is a figure which shows an example of the display result by the motion table shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of a data structure of virtual drawing space (frame buffer). It is a figure explaining the difference between 2nd Embodiment and 1st Embodiment. It is a figure explaining the difference between 2nd Embodiment and 1st Embodiment. It is a figure explaining the difference between 2nd Embodiment and 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the address area | region of the motion management area | region in 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the data structure of the virtual drawing space (frame buffer) in 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the display layer structure in 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the display screen produced by the some display layer containing a number part layer and the notice between layers design layer. It is a figure which shows an example of the display screen produced by the some display layer containing a number part layer and the notice between layers design layer. It is a figure which shows an example of the display screen produced by the some display layer containing a number part layer and the notice between layers design layer. It is a figure which shows an example of the display screen produced by the some display layer containing a number part layer and the notice between layers design layer. It is a figure which shows an example of the variation display mode of a decoration design.

<First Embodiment>
DESCRIPTION OF EXEMPLARY EMBODIMENTS Hereinafter, preferred embodiments of the invention will be described with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram of a gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention.

  The gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment includes a front frame 12, and the front frame 12 is assembled to an outer frame (support frame) 11 through a hinge 13 so as to be capable of opening and closing. The game board 30 (see FIG. 2) is stored in a storage portion (not shown) formed on the front side of the front frame 12. In addition, a glass frame 15 (transparent plate holding frame) provided with a cover glass (transparent member) 14 that covers the front surface of the game board 30 is attached to the front frame (main body frame) 12.

  Further, an illuminating device (moving light) 16 having a built-in lamp and motor and a lamp (LED) 17 for paying out abnormality notification are provided in the upper part of the glass frame 15. Further, on the left and right sides of the glass frame 15, there are provided a frame decoration device 18 with a built-in lamp and the like for emitting light for decoration and production, and a speaker (upper speaker) 19a for emitting sound (for example, sound effects). Yes. Further, a speaker (lower speaker) 19 b is also provided below the front frame 12.

Further, at the lower part of the front frame 12, there is an upper plate 21 (storage tray) for supplying game balls to a not-shown hitting ball launcher, and game balls paid out from a payout unit provided on the back side of the gaming machine 10. There are provided an upper tray ball outlet 22 that flows out, a lower tray (receiving tray) 23 for storing game balls paid out in a state where the upper tray 21 is full, an operation unit 24 of the hitting ball launcher, and the like. Further, an effect operation unit 550 that receives an operation input from the player is provided at the upper edge of the upper plate 21. The effect operation unit 550 is an effect button 25 having a built-in effect button switch 25a for receiving a pressing operation input from the player, and the upper surface (press surface) of the effect button 25 is contacted by the player. A touch panel 29 for receiving an operation input is provided. Further, a key 26 for opening and locking the front frame 12 and the glass frame 15 is provided on the lower right side of the front frame 12.
In the present embodiment, the touch panel 29 is provided integrally with the effect button 25, but the touch panel 29 may be separate from the effect button 25. For example, a sub display device is provided in the vicinity of the effect button 25, A touch panel 29 may be provided on the display surface of the sub display device.

  Also, on the front surface of the glass frame 15 above the upper plate 21, a ball lending button 27 that is operated when a player receives a ball lending from an adjacent ball lending machine, and a prepaid card to be discharged from the card unit of the ball lending machine. A discharge button 28 for operating the balance, a balance display section (not shown) for displaying the balance of the prepaid card, and the like are provided. In the gaming machine 10 of this embodiment, the player turns the operation unit 24 so that the ball-striking device feeds the game ball supplied from the upper plate 21 toward the game area 32 on the front surface of the game board 30. Fire. In addition, when the player operates the effect operation unit 550, in the variable display game (decoration special map variable display game) on the display device 41 (see FIG. 2), an effect in which the player's operation is performed is performed. Can do.

  Next, an example of the game board 30 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 30 of the present embodiment.

  On the surface of the game board 30, a substantially circular game area 32 surrounded by the guide rail 31 is formed. The game area 32 is surrounded by resin side cases 33 and guide rails 31 provided at the four corners of the game board 30. In the game area 32, a center case (game production component) 40 provided with a display device 41 is arranged substantially at the center. The display device 41 is attached to a recessed portion provided in the center case 40 at a position deeper than the front surface of the center case 40. That is, the center case 40 surrounds the display area of the display device 41, protrudes forward from the display surface of the display device 41, and is formed so as to make it difficult for a game ball to jump from the surrounding game area 32.

  The display device 41 (variable display device) is configured by a device having a display screen such as an LCD (Liquid Crystal Display) or a CRT (CRT). In an area (display area) where an image of the display screen can be displayed, information relating to a game such as a plurality of identification information (special symbols), a character that produces a special figure variation display game, and a background image that enhances the presentation effect is displayed. . On the display screen of the display device 41, a plurality of special symbols assigned as identification information are variably displayed (variably displayed), and a decorative special figure variation display game corresponding to the special diagram variation display game is played. In addition, an image for an effect based on the progress of the game (for example, a jackpot display image, a fanfare display image, an ending display image, etc.) is displayed on the display screen.

  In addition, a board effect device 44 is provided in the upper right part of the center case 40 to perform a game effect by operating. The board effect device 44 includes two arms each having a sub display device 42 attached to a distal end portion thereof, and the sub display device 42 is moved relative to the display device 41 by rotating the arm around the base end portion. Thus, it is possible to convert between a state where they overlap in the front-rear direction and a state where they do not overlap.

On the lower right side of the center case 40 in the game area 32, a normal symbol start gate (common figure start gate) 34 for providing a start condition for the normal figure change display game is provided. A game ball won in the usual start gate 34 is detected by a gate switch 34a (see FIG. 6).
In the game area 32, three general winning openings 35 are arranged on the lower left side of the center case 40, and one general winning prize is on the lower right side of the center case 40 and below the normal start gate 34. A mouth 35 is arranged. The game balls that have won the general prize opening 35 are detected by a prize opening switch 35a (see FIG. 6).

Also, on the left side of the normal figure start gate 34, there is provided an ordinary variable prize device 37 (start prize opening, start prize area) for giving a start condition for the second special figure fluctuation display game (special figure 2 fluctuation display game). ing.
The normal variation winning device 37 includes a movable member 37b that can be converted into a state in which a game ball can easily flow in by opening in a direction in which the upper end side tilts to the right side, and a partition wall 37d that restricts the flow of the game ball. ing. The movable member 37b normally stands up to maintain a state where the distance from the partition wall 37d is equal to or smaller than the diameter of the game ball, that is, a closed state where the game ball cannot flow (a disadvantageous state for the player). When the result of the normal variation display game becomes a predetermined stop display mode, a game ball is likely to flow into the normal variation winning device 37 by a general electric solenoid 37c (see FIG. 6) as a drive device. It can be changed to a state (a state advantageous to the player). A game ball won in the normal variation winning device 37 is detected by the start port 2 switch 37a (see FIG. 6).

Further, a special variable winning device (large winning mouth) 38 that can be converted into a state where a game ball is not accepted and a state where it is easy to accept depending on the result of the special figure changing display game is arranged below the normal variable winning device 37. Yes.
The special variation winning device 38 has an attacker-type open / close door 38c that can be opened by rotating in a direction in which the upper end side is tilted toward the near side, depending on the result of the special figure variation display game as an auxiliary game. The state is converted from a closed state (closed state unfavorable for the player) to an open state (a state advantageous to the player). That is, the special variable winning device 38 includes, for example, a large winning opening that is opened and closed by an open / close door 38c that is driven by a large winning opening solenoid 38b (see FIG. 6) as a driving device. By converting the closed state from the closed state to the open state, the inflow of game balls into the special winning opening is facilitated, and a predetermined game value (prize ball) is given to the player. Note that a large winning opening switch (count switch) 38a (see FIG. 6) is provided inside the large winning opening (winning area) as detection means for detecting a game ball that has entered the large winning opening. . In the gaming machine of this embodiment, two big prize opening switches 38a are provided, and a game ball that has flowed into the big prize opening is detected by any of the big prize opening switches 38a. In this way, by providing a plurality of special winning opening switches 38a, it is possible to quickly detect a game ball that has flowed into the special winning opening.

Also, below the center case 40, a first start winning opening 36 (start winning opening, start winning area) and a second special view for giving a start condition for the first special figure fluctuation display game (special figure 1 fluctuation display game). A winning device 90 having a second start winning opening 97 (start winning opening, starting winning area) for providing a start condition for the variable display game (special figure 2 variable display game) is provided.
The winning device 90 includes a distribution member 92 that alternately distributes the game balls flowing into the upper inflow port 90a to the first starting winning port 36 and the second starting winning port 97 (see FIG. 3). A game ball won in the first start winning opening 36 is detected by the start opening 1 switch 36a (see FIG. 6), and a game ball won in the second start winning opening 97 is in the start opening 3 switch 97a (see FIG. 6). Detected by.
Further, below the winning device 90, there is provided an out port 30a for collecting game balls that have not won the winning port or the like.

FIGS. 3A to 3C are front views of the winning device 90 of the present embodiment, and show a state where the front cover member is removed.
As shown in FIG. 3A, the winning device 90 includes a distribution member 92 at a position directly below the inflow port 90a. A first start winning opening 36 is arranged at the lower left of the sorting member 92, and a second starting winning opening 97 is arranged at the lower right of the distributing member 92.
Further, a front cover member is provided so as to cover the front of the sorting member 92, the first start winning opening 36, and the second starting winning opening 97. The front cover member is transparent or translucent so that the behavior of the game ball in the winning device 90 can be visually recognized.

The distributing member 92 is rotatable about a shaft pin 92a along the front-rear direction, and an upper arm portion 92b extending upward from a position where the shaft pin 92a is disposed and a left arm portion 92c extending leftward. And a right arm portion 92d extending rightward. A left holding portion 92e that temporarily holds a game ball is formed by the upper arm portion 92b and the left arm portion 92c on the left side of the upper arm portion 92b among the three arm portions, and on the right side of the upper arm portion 92b. The upper arm portion 92b and the right arm portion 92d form a right holding portion 92f that temporarily holds a game ball.
As shown in FIG. 3 (b), the sorting member 92 has a position where the left holding portion 92e can receive the game ball that has flowed into the inflow port 90a, with the upper arm portion 92b facing upward, as shown in FIG. As shown in c), the right holding portion 92f can rotate between a position where the game ball that has flowed into the inflow port 90a can be received.

As shown in FIG. 3B, when the left holding portion 92e is in a position where it can receive the game ball that has flowed into the inflow port 90a, the right holding portion 92f moves the game ball toward the second start winning opening 97. It will be in a state where it has flowed down.
In addition, as shown in FIG. 3C, when the right holding portion 92f is in a position where it can accept the game ball that has flowed into the inflow port 90a, the left holding portion 92e plays a game toward the first start winning opening 36. The sphere is made to flow down.

  Moreover, as shown to Fig.3 (a), the distribution member side magnet 96a is attached to the back of the upper arm part 92b among the distribution members 92. FIG. Of the base member 93 to which the sorting member 92 is mounted from the front, the base member side magnet 96b is attached at a position facing the sorting member side magnet 96a when the upper arm portion 92b is vertical. Yes. The distribution member side magnet 96a and the base member side magnet 96b are attached so that the opposite poles are the same, and the upper arm portion 92b of the distribution member 92 is vertical due to the repulsive force of the magnets 96a and 96b. It is urged to rotate to either the left or right without staying in the state. As a result, in a state where the rotation of the sorting member 92 is stopped, either the left holding portion 92e or the right holding portion 92f is in a state where the game ball that has flowed into the inflow port 90a can be received.

  As shown in FIGS. 3B and 3C, the game ball that has flowed into the inflow port 90a is in an acceptable state toward the inflow port 90a of the left holding part 92e and the right holding part 92f. It is held by one holding unit. When the game ball is held by one holding part, the sorting member 92 is rotated in the direction of the one holding part by the weight of the game ball, and the sorting member 92 is rotated by the held game ball. It flows down toward the first start winning opening 36 or the second start winning opening 97 in the direction.

  That is, as shown in FIG. 3B, when the game ball that has flowed in by the left holding portion 92e is received, the sorting member 92 is rotated to the left by the weight of the game ball, and the game ball is moved to the first start winning opening 36. After the guidance, as shown in FIG. 3C, the right holding portion 92f stops in a state where it can accept the next game ball. Then, as shown in FIG. 3C, when the game ball that has flowed in by the right holding portion 92f is received, the sorting member 92 is rotated to the right by the weight of the game ball, and the game ball is moved to the second start winning opening 97. After the guidance, as shown in FIG. 3B, the left holding portion 92e stops in a state where the next game ball can be received.

  The game balls that have flowed down from the holding portions 92e and 92f are likely to flow into the first start winning port 36 or the second starting winning port 97, but may not flow. leak. In particular, if the momentum when flowing into the holding portions 92e and 92f is strong, there is a high possibility that the first starting winning port 36 or the second starting winning port 97 will not flow. In addition, you may comprise so that it may always win in any start winning opening.

  Further, when the sorting member 92 is rotated, the other holding portion that is not the holding portion that holds the game ball is in an acceptable state toward the inflow port 90a. Then, the game ball accepted next time is guided to the winning opening on the other holding unit side. Thereby, the game balls that sequentially flow into the inflow port 90a are alternately distributed to the first start winning port 36 and the second starting winning port 97.

  In the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, of the game areas 32 where the game balls flow down, the left area of the center case 40 is the left game area, and the right area of the center case 40 is the right game area. ing. Then, the player can aim to win the winning device 90 by adjusting the firing force and launching the game ball to the left game area (so-called left-handed), and launch the game ball to the right game area (so-called right By hitting), it is possible to aim to win the normal figure starting gate 34, the normal variation winning device 37, and the special variable winning device 38.

  In addition, on the outside of the game area 32 (here, in the lower right part of the game board 30), the first special figure fluctuation display game, the second special figure fluctuation display game, and the general figure start gate 34 which form the special figure fluctuation display game are displayed. There is provided a collective display device 50 for displaying a game of variable display with a win as a trigger and displaying various information.

  As shown in FIG. 4A, the collective display device 50 is a special figure 1 display (first special figure) for a first special figure variable display game composed of a 7-segment type display (LED lamp) or the like. Fluctuation display unit) 51a (D1) and a special figure 2 display (second special figure fluctuation display unit) 51b (D2) for the second special figure fluctuation display game, and a general figure fluctuation display game composed of LED lamps And display display units 53, 54 and 55 (D11 to D16) for informing the start memory number of each variable display game, which is also composed of LED lamps. Is provided.

  In addition, the collective display device 50 includes a first game state display unit (first game state display unit, right-handed notification unit) 56 (D8) for notifying that a right-handed game state is more advantageous than a left-handed game. ), A second game state display unit (second game state indicator, time-short state notification unit) 57 (D9) that lights up when the time-short state occurs and notifies the occurrence of the time-short state, the probability of jackpot when the gaming machine 10 is powered on A third game state display unit (third game state display, probability state display unit) 58 (D17) for displaying that the state is in a high probability state, the number of rounds at the big hit (opening and closing of the special variable winning device 38) Round display section 59 (D3 to D7) for displaying the number of times) is provided. The collective display device 50 may be further provided with a display unit (display) that lights up when a big hit occurs and notifies the occurrence of the big hit.

  The special figure fluctuation display game in the special figure 1 display 51a and the special figure 2 display 51b is, for example, during the execution of the fluctuation display game, that is, while the decoration special figure fluctuation display game is being performed on the display device 41, The segment is blinked to indicate that it is changing. In the case of the present embodiment, in the special figure fluctuation display game in the special figure 1 display 51a, in addition to the center segment, the eighth segment provided on the lower right side of the 7-segment is also blinked to change. It is configured to display that it is in the middle so that the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 can be distinguished. When the result of the game is “out of”, as a result mode of out of game, for example, the central segment (in the case of Special Figure 1, the eighth segment on the lower right side) is turned on, and the result of the game is In the case of “winning”, the game results are displayed with the result modes (for example, numbers and symbols) other than the off-result mode as the winning result mode (special result mode) are lit.

  The normal display 52 displays the game result as a lighting mode and a lighting color according to the game result after a predetermined time by blinking the lamp during the change and displaying the change. In the case of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 4 (d), when the symbol number for variation is “0” among the lamps D10 and D18 constituting the universal display 52, that is, the result of the game is off. Only the lamp D10 is lit, and when the symbol number for change is “1” (that is, when the game result is hit and the stop symbol number is “1”), only the lamp D18 is lit. When the symbol number for change is “2” (that is, when the game result is a hit and the symbol number for stoppage is “2”), both the lamp D10 and the lamp D18 are turned on.

  Further, the general figure hold display 55 displays the start memory number (= holding number) of the general figure start gate 34 which is the variation start condition of the general figure display 52 by turning off, blinking, and turning on a plurality of LEDs. In the case of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 4C, when the number of holdings is “0” among the lamps D15 and D16 constituting the general-purpose holding indicator 55, both the lamps D15 and D16 are turned on. When the hold number is “1”, only the lamp D15 is turned on. When the hold number is “2”, both the lamp D15 and the lamp D16 are turned on, and when the hold number is “3”. Is configured such that the lamp D15 is blinked and the lamp D16 is lit, and both the lamp D15 and the lamp D16 are blinked when the holding number is “4”.

  The special figure 1 hold indicator 53 indicates the number of first start memories (special figure 1 hold) that is the right to execute the first special figure variable display game displayed on the special figure 1 display 51a, and turns off the plurality of LEDs. Displayed by blinking and lighting. In the case of this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 4B, when the special figure 1 start memory number is “0” among the lamps D11 and D12 constituting the special figure 1 hold indicator 53, the lamp D11 and Both lamps D12 are turned off. When the special figure 1 start memory number is "1", only the lamp D11 is turned on, and when the special figure 1 start memory number is "2", both the lamp D11 and the lamp D12 are turned on. Is turned on, and when the special figure 1 start memory number is "3", the lamp D11 is blinked and the lamp D12 is turned on, and when the special figure 1 start memory number is "4", the lamp D11 and the lamp D12 are turned on. Both are configured to blink.

  The special figure 2 hold indicator 54 indicates the number of the second start memory (special figure 2 hold) that is the right to execute the second special figure variable display game displayed on the special figure 2 display 51b, and turns off the plurality of LEDs. Display by blinking and lighting. In the case of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 4B, when the special figure 2 start memory number is “0” among the lamps D13 and D14 constituting the special figure 2 holding display 54, the lamp D13 and Both lamps D14 are turned off. When the special figure 2 start memory number is "1", only the lamp D13 is turned on. When the special figure 2 start memory number is "2", both the lamp D13 and the lamp D14 are set. When the special figure 2 start memory number is "3", the lamp D13 is blinked and the lamp D14 is turned on. When the special figure 2 start memory number is "4", the lamp D13 and the lamp D14 are turned on. Both are configured to blink.

  The first game state display unit (right-handed notification unit) 56 is configured by an LED lamp or the like. For example, as shown in FIG. ), The lamp is turned off, and in the gaming state (right-handed state) where it is more advantageous to make a right-hand strike than left-handed, the lamp is turned on.

  The second gaming state display unit (time-short state notifying unit) 57 is configured by an LED lamp or the like, and for example, as shown in FIG. ), The lamp is turned off, and when a short-time condition occurs (when the operation is short-time), the lamp is lit.

  The third game state display unit (probability state display unit) 58 is configured by an LED lamp or the like. For example, as shown in FIG. In the case of a probability state), the lamp is turned off, and when the jackpot probability state is a high probability state (probability variation state) when the gaming machine 10 is turned on, the lamp is turned on.

  The round display unit 59 is configured by an LED lamp or the like, for example, when the special game state based on the big hit is not in effect, the lamp is turned off, and during the special game state, it corresponds to the number of rounds selected according to the special result Set the lamp to light up. In the case of this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 4E, among the lamps D3 to D7 constituting the round display unit 59, when the selected number of rounds is “16”, the lamps D3, D5, and D7 are turned on. When the number of rounds selected is “2”, the lamps D4 and D6 are turned on. Note that the round display unit may be a seven-segment display.

FIG. 5 shows details of the effect operation unit 550.
FIG. 5A is a plan view of the effect operation unit 550. As shown in FIG. 5A, the effect operation unit 550 of the present embodiment includes an effect button (push button) 25 and a touch panel 29 provided on the upper surface of the effect button (push button) 25. Has been. That is, the rendering operation unit 550 has a touch sensor function (touch panel function) in addition to a physical push button function.

  Sensitivity setting data, LED luminance data, and the like are transmitted from the production control board (production control device) 300 to the production operation unit 550, and a production button is provided from the production operation unit 550 to the production control board (production control device) 300. A push button signal (press detection signal) from the effect button switch (push sensor) 25a provided in the (push button) 25 and a touch ON / OFF signal (contact / non-contact detection signal) from the touch sensor 29a provided in the touch panel 29 are output. It is configured to be.

  In the case of the present embodiment, a push operation on the top surface of the production operation unit 550 (an operation to push down the production operation unit 550 and depress the production operation unit 550 with the production button switch (push sensor) 25a included in the production button (push button) 25. ) Is detected. In addition, a plurality of points are provided on the top surface of the rendering operation unit 550, and a touch operation with respect to the points provided on the top surface of the rendering operation unit 550 is detected by a touch sensor included in the touch panel 29.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 5B, nine points of “TSW1” to “TSW8” and “Pa” points are provided as a plurality of points. More specifically, the “TSW4” point provided at the center of the top surface of the production operation unit 550, the “TSW1” point provided on the left side of the “TSW4” point, and the back side from the “TSW4” point (game “TSW3” point provided on the board 30 side), “TSW6” point provided on the right side of the “TSW4” point, and “TSW8” provided on the near side (player side) from the “TSW4” point Point, “TSW2” point provided between “TSW1” point and “TSW3” point, “TSW5” point provided between “TSW3” point and “TSW6” point, and “TSW6” Between the “TSW7” point provided between the points and the “TSW8” point, and between the “TSW8” point and the “TSW1” point And "Pa" point, which is provided, is provided. The number of points is not limited to nine and can be arbitrarily changed as appropriate. Further, in FIG. 5B, for convenience, the points “TSW1” to “TSW8” are indicated as “TSW1” to “TSW8”, respectively. However, in the effect operation unit 550 of the present embodiment, FIG. As shown in (a), there is no such notation.

  There are eight points from “TSW1” to “TSW8” that can be detected by the touch sensor of the touch panel 29, and no contact operation is detected at the “Pa” point. Of course, the contact operation may be detected also at the “Pa” point. In addition, each of nine points of the “TSW1” to “TSW8” points and the “Pa” points has LEDs of independent systems (full color LEDs in the case of the present embodiment).

  The “Pa” point is, for example, that the LED of the “Pa” point is used as a notification lamp for one-shot notification, or that the LED of each point on the top surface of the production operation unit 550 is turned on sequentially like a roulette. Can be used for deterministic effects, such as using the LED at the “accurate (or probability change confirmation)” point, or using the LED at the “Pa” point for a certain effect of prefetching.

  Here, the lighting brightness of the LEDs for illuminating the upper surface of the effect operation unit 550 (specifically, the LEDs arranged at the “TSW1” to “TSW8” points, the “Pa” points, etc.) is adjusted by brightness adjustment (hole setting). , And player adjustments) are excluded. That is, the lighting brightness of the LED is constant without being affected by the brightness adjustment. In addition, the touch sensor forcibly turns off the touch when the touch-on state (contact state) continues for a predetermined time (for example, about 35 seconds (basic setting)) (stops the output of the touch-on signal and turns off the touch. Signal output function). That is, the touch sensor (touch detection IC) is configured not to detect a continuous contact operation for a predetermined time or longer.

  As the player's operation detected by such an effect operation unit 550, for example, the operation shown in FIG. “Single stroke” is an operation in which the production operation unit 550 is pressed once, and “continuous stroke” is an operation in which the production operation unit 550 is pressed several times at intervals within a predetermined time. “Long press” is an operation in which the effect operation unit 550 is kept pressed for a predetermined time or more, and “touch” is an operation to touch the touch panel 29. “Pa” operation (TSW1or8) + long press ”is long in a state in which one (or both) of the“ Pa ”point or two adjacent points“ TSW1 ”and“ TSW8 ”is touched. “Flick” is an operation of sliding to touch the touch panel 29 and play it. Of course, the operation to detect is not limited to these operations.

  In the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, a game is played by launching a game ball (pachinko ball) from a launcher (not shown) toward the game area 32. The launched game balls flow down the game area 32 while changing the rolling direction by means of direction change members such as obstacle nails and windmills arranged at various locations in the game area 32, and the normal start gate 34 and the general winning opening 35 The first start winning port 36, the second start winning port 97, the normal variation winning device 37 or the special variable winning device 38 are won, or the game region 32 flows into the out port 30a provided at the bottom of the gaming region 32. Discharged from. Then, when a game ball wins the general winning opening 35, the first starting winning opening 36, the second starting winning opening 97, the normal variable winning apparatus 37 or the special variable winning apparatus 38, the number corresponding to the type of the winning opening that has been won The prize balls are discharged to the upper plate 21 or the lower plate 23 of the glass frame 15 from the payout unit controlled by the payout control device 200 (see FIG. 6).

  On the other hand, a gate switch 34a (see FIG. 6) including a non-contact type switch for detecting a game ball that has passed through the general diagram start gate 34 is provided in the general diagram start gate 34. When a game ball that has been driven into the area 32 passes through the usual figure start gate 34, it is detected by the gate switch 34a and a usual figure change display game is played. In addition, the normal variation display game cannot be started, for example, the normal variation display game has already been played and the normal variation display game has not been completed, If 37 is converted to the open state and the game ball passes through the general figure start gate 34, the general figure start memory number is added if the number is less than the upper limit number (for example, four) of the normal figure start memory number (for example, 4). +1), and one ordinary start memory is stored. The number of memorized universal start prizes is displayed on the universal figure hold display 55 of the collective display device 50. In addition, a random number value for hit determination (win random number value) for determining the result of the normal map fluctuation display game is stored in the normal chart start memory, and this random number value for hit determination is determined as a determination value. To determine the result of the normal map display game. When the hit determination random number value matches the determination value, the normal variation display game is won and a specific result mode (normal map specific result) is derived.

  The usual map variation display game is provided in the collective display device 50 and is displayed on a variation display unit (general map display) 52 constituted by LEDs. Makes identification information (general, normal). The general map display 52 is constituted by a display device, and for example, numbers, symbols, character designs, etc. are used as normal identification information. After this is displayed in a variable manner for a predetermined time, the result is displayed in a stopped state. You may do it. If the stop display of the usual figure change display game is a usual figure specifying result, it becomes a hit of the ordinary figure, and the movable member 37b of the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is opened for a predetermined time. This makes it easier for the game ball to win the second start winning opening inside the normal fluctuation winning device 37, and the number of times the second special figure changing display game is executed increases.

  The winning ball to the first starting winning port 36, the winning ball to the second starting winning port 97, and the winning ball to the normal variation winning device 37 are respectively a start port 1 switch 36a and a start port 3 provided therein. It is detected by the switch 97a and the start port 2 switch 37a. The game ball that has won the first start winning opening 36 is detected as a start winning ball of the first special figure variation display game, and is stored as a first start memory up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, four), A game ball won in the second start winning opening 97 or the normal variation winning device 37 is detected as a start winning ball in the second special figure variable display game, and a predetermined upper limit number (for example, four) is limited as the second start memory. Is remembered. Further, when detecting the starting winning ball, a big hit random number value, a big hit symbol random number value, and each variation pattern random number value are extracted as starting storage information, and the extracted random number value is stored in the game control device 100 (see FIG. 6). Are stored in the special figure storage area (a part of the RAM) as a special figure start memory for a predetermined number of times (for example, a maximum of four times). The number stored in the special chart start memory is displayed on the memory display section for notifying the start winning number of the collective display device 50 (the special figure 1 hold display 53, the special figure 2 hold display 54), and the center. Also on the display device 41 of the case 40, it is displayed as a decorative special figure start memory display.

  The game control device 100 is based on the winning to the first starting winning port 36, the second starting winning port 97, or the normal variable winning device 37, or the starting memory thereof, and the special figure 1 display 51a (variable display device). Or the 1st or 2nd special figure fluctuation display game is played with the special figure 2 indicator 51b (variation display device). The first special figure fluctuation display game and the second special figure fluctuation display game are performed by variably displaying a plurality of special symbols (special figures, identification information) and then stopping and displaying a predetermined result form. In addition, a decorative special figure variation display game is displayed in which a display device (image display device) 41 displays a plurality of types of identification information (for example, numbers, symbols, character designs, etc.) in a variable manner. As a result of the special figure variation display game, when the display form of the special figure 1 display 51a or the special figure 2 display 51b becomes a special result form (special result), a special game state ( So-called big hit state). Correspondingly, the result mode of the decorative special figure variation display game displayed on the display device 41 is also a special result mode.

  For example, in the decorative special symbol variation display game on the display device 41, the decorative special symbol (identification information) composed of the numbers and the like described above on the display device 41 is changed to the left variation display region (first special symbol), the right variation display region ( In each of the second special symbol) and the middle fluctuation display area (third special symbol), each symbol is displayed in a variable manner (high-speed fluctuation) at a speed that is difficult to identify. Then, the symbols that have changed after a predetermined time are sequentially stopped in the order of the left variation display region, the right variation display region, and the middle variation display region, and stopped in each of the left variation display region, the right variation display region, and the middle variation display region. This is done by displaying the result of the special figure variation display game according to the result form constituted by the displayed identification information. In addition, the display device 41 performs a variable display game with a decorative special symbol corresponding to the number of special figure starting memories, and various effect displays such as the appearance of a character are performed to improve interest.

  Note that the special figure 1 display 51a and the special figure 2 display 51b may be separate displays or the same display, but each special figure change display is not performed independently or simultaneously. The game is displayed. In addition, the display device 41 may use different display devices and different display areas in the first special map variable display game and the second special map variable display game, or use the same display device and display area. However, the decoration special figure variation display game is displayed so as not to be executed independently or simultaneously. The game machine 10 may not be provided with the special figure 1 display 51a and the special figure 2 display 51b, and the special figure variation display game may be executed only by the display device 41.

  In addition, the first start winning opening 36 (or the second start winning opening) in a state where the first special figure variation display game (second special figure variation display game) can be started and the start memory number is 0. 97 or the normal variable winning device 37), the start memory is stored as the start right is generated, the start memory number is incremented by 1, and the first characteristic is immediately based on the start memory. A figure change display game (second special figure change display game) is started, and at this time, the start memory number is decremented by one. On the other hand, a state in which the first special figure fluctuation display game (second special figure fluctuation display game) cannot be started immediately, for example, the first or second special figure fluctuation display game has already been performed, and the special figure fluctuation display game has ended. If the game ball is won in the first start winning port 36 (or the second start winning port 97 or the normal variable winning device 37) in a state that is not in a special state or in a special game state, the start memory number is the upper limit number. If it is less, the start memory number is incremented by 1, and one start memory is stored. Then, in a state where the starting memory number becomes 1 or more, a state in which the first special figure fluctuation display game (second special figure fluctuation display game) can be started (the end of the previous special figure fluctuation display game or the special game state) (End), the start memory number is decremented by 1, and the first special figure fluctuation display game (second special figure fluctuation display game) is started based on the stored start memory. In the following description, when the first special figure fluctuation display game and the second special figure fluctuation display game are not distinguished, they are simply referred to as a special figure fluctuation display game.

  Although not particularly limited, the start port 1 switch 36a in the first start winning port 36, the start port 3 switch 97a in the second start winning port 97, and the start port 2 switch in the normal variation winning device 37 are not limited. The contact switch 37a, the gate switch 34a, the winning opening switch 35a, and the large winning opening switch 38a are provided with a magnetic detection coil, and a non-contact type that detects a game ball using a phenomenon in which a magnetic field changes when a metal comes close to the coil. Magnetic proximity sensors (hereinafter referred to as proximity switches) are used. In addition, the glass frame open detection switch 63 provided on the glass frame 15 and the like of the gaming machine 10 and the body frame open detection switch 64 provided on the front frame (main body frame) 12 and the like include a micro switch having a mechanical contact. Can be used.

FIG. 6 is a block diagram of a control system of the pachinko gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment.
The gaming machine 10 includes a game control device 100. The game control device 100 is a main control device (main board) for comprehensively controlling games, and a gaming microcomputer (hereinafter referred to as a gaming microcomputer) 111 is provided. CPU section 110, input section 120 having an input port, output section 130 having an output port, a driver, etc., CPU section 110, data bus 140 connecting between input section 120 and output section 130, etc. .

  The CPU section 110 includes a game microcomputer (CPU) 111 called an amusement chip (IC) and an oscillator such as a crystal oscillator, and receives a clock that serves as a reference for the CPU operation clock, timer interrupt, and random number generation circuit. An oscillation circuit (crystal oscillator) 113 to be generated is included. The game control device 100 and electronic components such as a solenoid and a motor driven by the game control device 100 are supplied with a predetermined level of DC voltage such as DC32V, DC12V, and DC5V generated by the power supply device 400 so as to be operable. Is done.

  The power supply apparatus 400 includes a normal power supply including an AC-DC converter that generates the DC 32V DC voltage from a 24V AC power source, a DC-DC converter that generates a lower level DC voltage such as DC 12V and DC 5V from the DC 32V voltage, and the like. Unit 410, a backup power supply unit 420 for supplying power supply voltage to the RAM inside the gaming microcomputer 111 in the event of a power failure, and a power failure monitoring circuit, and a power failure monitoring signal for notifying the game control device 100 of the occurrence and recovery of a power failure And a control signal generation unit 430 that generates and outputs a control signal such as a reset signal.

  In this embodiment, the power supply device 400 is configured separately from the game control device 100, but the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 are integrated on a separate board or the game control device 100, that is, the main control device 100. You may comprise so that it may provide on a board | substrate. Since the game board 30 and the game control device 100 are to be replaced when the model is changed, the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 are provided on a board different from the power supply apparatus 400 or the main board as in the present embodiment. By providing this, it is possible to reduce the cost by removing it from the object of replacement.

  The backup power supply unit 420 can be composed of one large-capacity capacitor such as an electrolytic capacitor. The backup power is supplied to the game microcomputer 111 (particularly, the built-in RAM) of the game control device 100, and the data stored in the RAM is held even during a power failure or after the power is shut off. The control signal generation unit 430 monitors the voltage of 32V generated by the normal power supply unit 410, for example, detects the occurrence of a power failure when the voltage drops below 17V, for example, changes the power failure monitoring signal, and resets the signal after a predetermined time. Is output. In addition, a reset signal is output after a predetermined time has elapsed from the time when the power is turned on or the power is restored.

  Further, the game control device 100 is provided with a RAM initialization switch 112. When this RAM initialization switch 112 is operated, an initialization switch signal is generated, and based on this, information stored in the RAM 111C in the gaming microcomputer 111 and the RAM in the payout control device 200 is forcibly initialized. Processing is performed. Although not particularly limited, the initialization switch signal is read when the power is turned on, and the power failure monitoring signal is repeatedly read in the main loop of the main program executed by the gaming microcomputer 111. The reset signal is a kind of forced interrupt signal and resets the entire control system.

  The gaming microcomputer 111 includes a CPU (central processing unit: microprocessor) 111A, a read-only ROM (read-only memory) 111B, and a RAM (random access memory) 111C that can be read and written as needed.

  The ROM 111B stores invariant information (programs, fixed data, various random number judgment values, etc.) for game control in a nonvolatile manner, and the RAM 111C stores a work area for the CPU 111A and various signals and random number values during game control. Used as As the ROM 111B or the RAM 111C, an electrically rewritable nonvolatile memory such as an EEPROM may be used.

  In addition, the ROM 111B stores a variation pattern table for determining a variation pattern (variation mode) that defines, for example, the execution time of the special figure variation display game, the production contents, and the presence or absence of the reach state. The variation pattern table is a table for the CPU 111A to determine the variation pattern by referring to the variation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 stored as the start memory. The variation pattern table includes a loss variation pattern table selected when the result is lost, a jackpot variation pattern table selected when the result is a big hit, and the like.

  Here, the reach (reach state) has a display device whose display state can be changed, the display device derives and displays a plurality of display results at different times, and the plurality of display results are predetermined. In the gaming machine 10 in which the gaming state becomes a gaming state advantageous to the player (special gaming state) when the special result mode is entered, the game is already derived at the stage where some of the plurality of display results are not yet derived and displayed. This means a display state in which the displayed display result satisfies the condition for the special result mode. In other words, the reach state is deviated from the display condition that is the special result mode even when the display device's variable display control progresses and reaches the stage before the display result is derived and displayed. There is no display mode. For example, a state where so-called full-rotation reach is performed in a variable display region while maintaining a state in which special result modes are aligned (so-called full rotation reach) is also included in the reach state. The reach state is a display state at the time when the display control of the display device has progressed to reach a stage before the display result is derived and displayed, and is determined before the display result is derived and displayed. The display state in the case where at least a part of the display results of the plurality of variable display areas satisfies the condition for the special result mode.

  Thus, for example, a decorative special figure fluctuation display game displayed on a display device corresponding to a special figure fluctuation display game fluctuates a plurality of identification information for a predetermined time in each of the left, middle, and right fluctuation display areas on the display device. After displaying, when the display of the result mode is stopped in the order of left, right, and middle, the condition that becomes the special result mode is satisfied in the left and right variable display areas (for example, The state in which the variable display is stopped with the same identification information) is the reach state. In addition to this, when the variable display of all the variable display areas is temporarily stopped, the condition that the special result mode is satisfied in any two of the left, middle, and right variable display areas (for example, the same The state in which the identification information is obtained (except for the special result mode) may be set as the reach state, and the remaining one variable display area may be variably displayed from the reach state.

  This reach state includes a plurality of reach effects, and the possibility of deriving a special result mode is different (expectation value is different). As a reach effect, normal reach (N reach), special 1 reach (SP1 reach), Special 2 reach (SP2 reach) and special 3 reach (SP3 reach) are set. The expected value increases in the order of no reach <normal reach <special 1 reach <special 2 reach <special 3 reach. In addition, this reach state is included in a variable display mode at least in a case where a special result mode is derived in a special figure variable display game (when a big hit is achieved). That is, it may be included in the variable display mode in the case where it is determined that the special result mode is not derived in the special figure variable display game (when it is out of date). Therefore, the state in which the reach state has occurred is a state that is more likely to be a big hit than the case in which the reach state does not occur.

  The CPU 111A executes a game control program in the ROM 111B, generates control signals (commands) for the payout control device 200 and the effect control device 300, and generates and outputs drive signals for the solenoid and the display device, thereby playing the gaming machine. 10 overall control is performed. Although not shown, the gaming microcomputer 111 is a jackpot random number for determining the hit of the special figure variation display game, a big hit symbol random number for determining the big hit symbol, a variation pattern in the special figure fluctuation display game (various patterns Random number generation circuit for generating fluctuation pattern random numbers for determining the fluctuation pattern game execution time in the variable display of reach and non-reach fluctuation display, and hit random numbers for determining the hit of the usual variable display game And a clock generator for generating a clock that gives a timer interrupt signal with a predetermined period (for example, 4 milliseconds) to the CPU 111A and an update timing of the random number generation circuit based on an oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113. Yes.

  Further, the CPU 111A acquires any one variation pattern table from among a plurality of variation pattern tables stored in the ROM 111B in the process related to the special figure variation display game. Specifically, the CPU 111A determines the game result (big hit or miss) of the special figure fluctuation display game, the probability state (normal probability state or high probability state) of the special figure fluctuation display game as the current game state, and the current game. Based on the operating state (short-time operating state (normal power support state)) of the normal variation winning device 37 as a state, the starting memory number, etc., one of the variation pattern tables is selected from a plurality of variation pattern tables. Get. Here, when executing the special figure variation display game, the CPU 111A serves as variation distribution information acquisition means for acquiring any one variation pattern table among the plurality of variation pattern tables stored in the ROM 111B.

  The payout control device 200 includes a CPU, a ROM, a RAM, an input interface, an output interface, and the like, and drives a payout motor of the payout unit in accordance with a prize ball payout command (command or data) from the game control device 100, thereby Control to make it pay out. In addition, the payout control device 200 drives the payout motor of the payout unit based on the ball rental request signal from the card unit, and performs control for paying out the ball.

  The input unit 120 of the gaming microcomputer 111 includes a panel radio wave sensor 62 that detects the emission of radio waves to the gaming machine, a starting port 1 switch 36 a in the first starting winning award port 36, and a starting port 2 switch in the normal variation winning device 37. 37a, a start port 3 switch 97a in the second start winning port 97, a gate switch 34a in the usual start gate 34, a winning port switch 35a, and a large winning port switch 38a of the special variable winning device 38, these switches Is provided with an interface chip (proximity I / F) 121 that receives a negative logic signal such as a high level of 11V and a low level of 7V supplied from the terminal and converts it to a positive logic signal of 0V-5V. The proximity I / F 121 has an input range of 7V-11V, so that the lead wire of the sensor or proximity switch is improperly shorted, the sensor or switch is disconnected from the connector, or the lead wire is disconnected to float. It is possible to detect an abnormal state such as, and output an abnormality detection signal.

  The output of the proximity I / F 121 is supplied to the second input port 123 or the third input port 124 and read into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. Of the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the detection signal of the start port 1 switch 36a, the start port 2 switch 37a, the start port 3 switch 97a, the gate switch 34a, the winning port switch 35a and the big winning port switch 38a is the second input. Input to port 123. Of the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the detection signal of the panel radio wave sensor 62 and the abnormality detection signal output when the abnormality of the sensor or the switch is detected are input to the third input port 124. Further, the third input port 124 has a detection signal from the fraud detection magnetic sensor 61 provided on the front frame 12 of the gaming machine 10 or a glass frame open detection provided on the glass frame 15 of the gaming machine 10. The detection signal of the switch 63 and the detection signal of the main body frame opening detection switch 64 provided on the front frame (main body frame) 12 of the gaming machine 10 are also input. Note that a vibration sensor switch for detecting vibration may be provided in the gaming machine, and the detection signal may be input to the third input port 124.

  Of the outputs from the proximity I / F 121, the output to the second input port 123 is also supplied from the main board 100 to the test test apparatus (not shown) via the relay board 70. Further, the detection signals of the start port 1 switch 36a, the start port 2 switch 37a, and the start port 3 switch 97a among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121 are input to the gaming microcomputer 111 in addition to the second input port 123. It is configured.

  As described above, the proximity I / F 121 has a signal level conversion function. In order to enable such a level conversion function, the proximity I / F 121 is supplied with a voltage of 12 V from the power supply device 400 in addition to a voltage such as 5 V required for normal IC operation. It has become.

  The data held in the second input port 123 is read out by asserting the enable signal CE2 (changing to an effective level) by the gaming microcomputer 111 decoding the address assigned to the second input port 123. be able to. The same applies to the third input port 124 and the first input port 122 described later.

  The input unit 120 also includes a fraud radio signal from the payout control device 200 (a signal output when the frame radio wave sensor provided on the front frame 12 detects radio waves), a payout busy signal (payout control device). 200 is a signal indicating whether or not a command can be received), a payout abnormality status signal (status signal indicating a payout abnormality), a shot ball cut switch signal (a signal indicating a lack of game balls before payout), an overflow switch signal (A signal output when it is detected that a predetermined amount or more of game balls are stored in the lower plate 23 (full), a touch switch signal (input to a touch switch provided on the operation unit 24) A first input port 122 is provided which takes in a signal based on the data bus 140 and supplies it to the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140.

  Further, the input unit 120 is provided with a Schmitt buffer 125 for inputting a signal such as a power failure monitoring signal or a reset signal from the power supply device 400 to the gaming microcomputer 111 or the like. The Schmitt buffer 125 receives these input signals. It has a function to remove noise from. The power failure monitoring signal from the power supply device 400 and the initialization switch signal from the RAM initialization switch 112 are once input to the first input port 122 and taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. That is, it is treated as a signal equivalent to the signal from the various switches described above. This is because the number of terminals receiving external signals provided in the gaming microcomputer 111 is limited.

  On the other hand, the reset signal RESET from which noise has been removed by the Schmitt buffer 125 is directly input to a reset terminal provided in the gaming microcomputer 111 and also supplied to each port of the output unit 130. Further, the reset signal RESET is directly output to the relay board 70 without going through the output unit 130, thereby turning off the test test signal held in the port (not shown) of the relay board 70 for output to the test board. It is configured as follows. Further, the reset signal RESET may be configured to be output to the test firing test apparatus via the relay board 70. The reset signal RESET is not supplied to each port 122, 123, 124 of the input unit 120. Data set in each port of the output unit 130 by the gaming microcomputer 111 immediately before the reset signal RESET is input needs to be reset in order to prevent malfunction of the system. This is because the data read by the gaming microcomputer 111 from the port is discarded when the gaming microcomputer 111 is reset.

  The output unit 130 is provided with a Schmitt buffer 132 disposed on a communication path from the gaming microcomputer 111 to the effect control apparatus 300 and a communication path from the gaming microcomputer 111 to the payout control apparatus 200. Data is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 by serial communication. The one-way communication is such that no signal can be input to the game control device 100 from the side of the effect control device 300.

  In addition, the output unit 130 is connected to the data bus 140 via a relay board 70 for data indicating special symbol information of the variable display game to a test firing test apparatus of an accredited organization (not shown) and a signal indicating the probability status of jackpot. The output buffer 133 is configured to be mountable. The buffer 133 is a component that is not mounted on a game control device (main board) of a pachinko gaming machine as an actual machine (a mass-produced product) installed in the game shop. A detection signal output from the proximity I / F 121, such as a start port switch, that is not required to be processed is supplied to the test test apparatus via the relay board 70 without passing through the buffer 133.

  On the other hand, detection signals that cannot be supplied to the test firing test apparatus as they are, such as the magnetic sensor 61 and the panel radio wave sensor 62, are once taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 and processed into other signals or information, for example, the gaming machine controls the game. An error signal indicating that the state is not possible is supplied from the data bus 140 to the trial test apparatus via the buffer 133 and the relay board 70. The relay board 70 is provided with a port that takes in the signal output from the buffer 133 and supplies it to the test test apparatus, a connector that relays and transmits the signal line of the detection signal of the switch that does not pass through the buffer, and the like. ing. A chip enable signal CE output from the gaming microcomputer 111 is also supplied to the port on the relay board 70, and the signal of the port selected and controlled by the signal CE is supplied to the test firing test apparatus.

  Further, the output unit 130 includes a solenoid (large winning port solenoid) 38b connected to the data bus 140 for opening the special variable winning device 38 and a solenoid (general power solenoid) 37c for opening the movable member 37b of the normal variable winning device 37. A second output port 134 is provided for outputting the opening / closing data. In addition, the output unit 130 includes a third output port 135 for outputting ON / OFF data of the segment line to which the anode terminal of the LED is connected according to the contents displayed on the collective display device 50, and the collective display device 50. A fourth output port 136 is provided for outputting on / off data of the digit line to which the cathode terminal of the LED is connected.

  The output unit 130 is provided with a fifth output port 137 for outputting information related to the gaming machine 10 such as jackpot information to the external information terminal board 71. The external information terminal board 71 is provided with a photo relay, which can be connected to, for example, an external device (such as an information collection terminal or a game hall internal management device (hall computer)) installed in a game store, and stores information about the gaming machine 10. It can be supplied to an external device. Further, a launch permission signal is also output from the fifth output port 137 to the payout control device 200 via the Schmitt buffer 132.

  Further, the output unit 130 receives a switching data signal of the special prize opening solenoid 38b and the general power solenoid 37c output from the second output port 134, and generates and outputs a solenoid driving signal 138a. The second driver 138b for outputting the ON / OFF drive signal of the segment line on the current supply side of the collective display device 50 output from the third output port 135, and the current of the collective display device 50 output from the fourth output port 136 A third driver 138c that outputs an on / off drive signal for the lead-in digit line, and a fourth driver 138d that outputs an external information signal supplied from the fifth output port 137 to an external device such as a management device to the external information terminal board 71 Is provided.

  The first driver 138a is supplied with DC32V from the power supply device 400 as a power supply voltage so that a solenoid operating at 32V can be driven. Also, DC12V is supplied to the second driver 138b that drives the segment lines of the collective display device 50. Since the third driver 138c for driving the digit line is for drawing out the digit line corresponding to the display data with a current, the power supply voltage may be either 12V or 5V.

  A dynamic drive method is achieved by flowing a current to the anode terminal of the LED through the segment line by the second driver 138b that outputs 12V, and drawing the current through the segment line from the cathode terminal by the third driver 138c that outputs the ground potential. The power supply voltage flows through the LEDs sequentially selected in step 1 so that the LEDs are lit. The fourth driver 138d that outputs the external information signal to the external information terminal board 71 is supplied with DC12V in order to give the external information signal a level of 12V. Note that the buffer 133, the second output port 134, the first driver 138a, and the like may be provided on the output board 130 of the game control apparatus 100, that is, on the relay board 70 side instead of the main board.

  Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a photocoupler 139 for transmitting information such as an identification code and a program of each gaming machine to the external inspection device 500. The photocoupler 139 is configured to be capable of two-way communication so that the gaming microcomputer 111 can transmit and receive data to and from the inspection device 500 through serial communication. Since such data transmission / reception is performed using a serial communication terminal of the gaming microcomputer 111 as in the case of a general-purpose microprocessor, ports such as the input ports 122, 123, and 124 are not provided.

Next, the configuration of the effect control device 300 will be described with reference to FIG.
The effect control device 300 is for displaying video on the display device 41 in accordance with commands and data from the main control microcomputer 311 and the main control microcomputer 311, similarly to the game microcomputer 111. A VDP (Video Display Processor) 312 as a graphic processor for performing the image processing, and a sound source LSI 314 for controlling output of sound for reproducing various melody and sound effects from the speakers 19a and 19b.

  The main control microcomputer 311 stores a program ROM 321 composed of a PROM (programmable read only memory) storing a program executed by the CPU and various data, a RAM 322 providing a work area, and stored contents even when power is not supplied in the event of a power failure. An FeRAM 323 that can be held is connected to an RTC (real-time clock) 338 that serves as a clock means for generating information indicating the current date and time (year, month, day of the week, time, etc.). A RAM for providing a work area is also provided inside the main control microcomputer 311. A WDT (watchdog timer) circuit 324 is connected to the main control microcomputer 311. The main control microcomputer 311 analyzes the command from the game microcomputer 111, decides the contents of the presentation and instructs the contents of the output video to the VDP 312, instructs the sound source LSI 314 to reproduce the sound, lights the decoration lamp, motors And control of solenoid drive control and production time management.

  The VDP 312 is provided with a RAM 312a for providing a work area and a scaler 312b for enlarging and reducing images. The VDP 312 has an image ROM 325 in which character images and video data are stored, and an ultra-high-speed VRAM (video RAM) used to develop and process image data such as characters read from the image ROM 325. ) 326 is connected.

  Although not particularly limited, the main control microcomputer 311 and the VDP 312 are configured to transmit and receive data in a parallel manner. By transmitting and receiving data in parallel, commands and data can be transmitted in a shorter time than in the case of serial.

  From the VDP 312 to the main control microcomputer 311, a vertical synchronization signal VSYNC for synchronizing the video of the display device 41 and lighting of the decoration lamps provided on the glass frame 15 and the game board 30, and a synchronization signal for giving data transmission timing STS is input. The VDP 312 informs the main control microcomputer 311 that it is waiting to receive commands and data from the interrupt control signals INT0 to n and the main control microcomputer 311 in order to notify the processing status such as the end of drawing in the VRAM. A wait signal WAIT and the like are also input.

  The effect control device 300 is provided with a signal conversion circuit 313 that generates a video signal to be transmitted to the display device 41 by the LVDS (small amplitude signal transmission) method. Video data, a horizontal synchronization signal HSYNC, and a vertical synchronization signal VSYNC are input from the VDP 312 to the signal conversion circuit 313, and the video generated by the VDP 312 is input to the display device 41 via the signal conversion circuit 313. Is displayed.

  A sound ROM 327 storing sound data is connected to the sound source LSI 314. The main control microcomputer 311 and the tone generator LSI 314 are connected via an address / data bus 340. An interrupt signal INT is input from the tone generator LSI 314 to the main control microcomputer 311. The effect control device 300 is provided with an amplifier circuit 337 including an audio power amplifier that drives an upper speaker 19 a provided on the glass frame 15 and a lower speaker 19 b provided on the front frame 12. The generated sound is output from the upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b via the amplifier circuit 337.

  In addition, the effect control device 300 is provided with an interface chip (command I / F) 331 that receives a command transmitted from the game control device 100. An ornamental special figure holding number command, a decorative special figure command, a variation command, a stop information command, etc. transmitted from the game control device 100 to the production control device 300 via this command I / F 331 are produced as a production control command signal (production command ). Since the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100 operates at DC 5V and the main control microcomputer 311 of the effect control device 300 operates at DC 3.3V, the command I / F 331 is provided with a signal level conversion function. Yes.

  The effect control device 300 includes a board decoration LED control circuit 332 for driving and controlling a board decoration device 46 having LEDs (light emitting diodes) provided on the game board 30 (including the center case 40), and a glass frame 15. A board provided in a frame decoration LED control circuit 333 for driving and controlling a frame decoration device (for example, the frame decoration device 18 etc.) having an LED (light emitting diode) provided, and a game board 30 (including the center case 40). A board effect movable body control circuit 334 that drives and controls the effect device 44 (for example, a movable accessory that enhances the effect of the effect in cooperation with the effect display on the display device 41) is provided. These control circuits 332 to 334 that drive and control lamps, motors, solenoids, and the like are connected to the main control microcomputer 311 via an address / data bus 340. The glass frame 15 is provided with a frame effect device provided with a drive source such as a motor (for example, a motor for operating a device for effect), and a frame effect movable body control circuit for driving and controlling the frame effect device is provided. Also good.

  Further, the effect control device 300 includes an effect button switch 25 a built in the effect button 25 provided on the glass frame 15, a touch panel 29 provided on the glass frame 15, an initial position of a motor in the board effect device 44, and the like. The function of detecting the on / off state of the effect actor switch 47 (effect motor switch) for detecting the sound and inputting a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311 and the state of the volume control switch 335 provided in the effect control device 300 And a switch input circuit 336 for inputting a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311 is provided.

  The normal power supply unit 410 of the power supply apparatus 400 drives a motor or a solenoid to supply a desired level of DC voltage to the effect control apparatus 300 having the above-described configuration and electronic components controlled thereby. In addition to DC32V, display device 41 consisting of a liquid crystal panel, DC12V for driving motors and LEDs, and DC5V as the power supply voltage for command I / F 331, a voltage of DC15V for driving motors, LEDs, and speakers is generated. Is configured to do. Further, when an LSI operating at a low voltage such as 3.3 V or 1.2 V is used as the main control microcomputer 311, a DC − for generating DC 3.3 V or DC 1.2 V based on DC 5 V is used. A DC converter is provided in the effect control device 300. The DC-DC converter may be provided in the normal power supply unit 410.

  The reset signal generated by the control signal generation unit 430 of the power supply apparatus 400 is supplied to the main control microcomputer 311 to put the device into a reset state. In addition, VDP 312 (VDRESET signal), sound source LSI 314, amplifier circuit 337 (SNDRESET signal) for driving speakers, and control circuits 332 to 334 (IORESET) for driving and controlling lamps and motors, etc., are output from main control microcomputer 311. Signal) to reset them. In addition, a cooling FAN 45 that cools various parts of the gaming machine 10 is connected to the effect control device 300, and the cooling FAN 45 is driven in a state in which the power of the effect control device 300 is turned on.

Next, game control performed in these control circuits will be described.
The CPU 111A of the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100 extracts a random number value for hit determination of the normal figure based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the gate switch 34a provided to the normal figure start gate 34, and the ROM 111B. Is compared with the determination value stored in the table, and a process of determining a missed hit of the normal game display game is performed. Then, after the identification symbol (identification information) is variably displayed for a predetermined time on the common symbol display 52, a process for displaying a common symbol variation display game to be stopped is performed. When the result of this normal map change display game is a win, a special result mode corresponding to each of the first stop symbol to the third stop symbol is displayed on the general symbol display 52, and the general electric solenoid 37c is displayed. Control is performed to open the movable member 37b of the normal variation winning device 37 as described above for a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds or 1.7 seconds). That is, the game control device 100 serves as conversion control execution means for performing conversion control of the conversion member (movable member 37b). In addition, when the result of the normal map change display game is out of order, control is performed to display the result form of the shift on the general map display 52.

  Further, based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the start port 1 switch 36a provided in the first start winning port 36, the start winning (starting memory) is stored, and based on this starting memory, the first special figure fluctuation display is stored. A game jackpot determination random number value is extracted and compared with a determination value stored in the ROM 111B, and a process of determining a miss of the first special figure variation display game is performed. Further, the start memory is stored based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the start port 2 switch 37a provided in the normal variation winning device 37 and the start port 3 switch 97a provided in the second start winning port 97. Based on the starting memory, the random number value for determining the big hit of the second special figure variation display game is extracted and compared with the determination value stored in the ROM 111B, and the process of determining the hit difference of the second special figure fluctuation display game is performed. .

  Then, the CPU 111 </ b> A of the game control device 100 outputs a control signal (effect control command) including the determination results of the first special figure variation display game and the second special figure variation display game to the effect control device 300. Then, after the identification symbol (identification information) is variably displayed on the special figure 1 display 51a and the special figure 2 display 51b for a predetermined time, a special figure variation display game to be stopped is displayed. In other words, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the variable display game is based on winning in the starting winning area (the first starting winning port 36, the second starting winning port 97, the normal variable winning device 37) of the game balls flowing down the game area 32. It constitutes a game control means for controlling the progress.

  In addition, in the production control device 300, based on the control signal from the game control device 100, the display device 41 performs a process of displaying the decoration special figure change display game corresponding to the special figure change display game. Furthermore, in the production control device 300, based on the control signal from the game control device 100, the production state setting, the sound output from the speakers 19a and 19b, the process of controlling the light emission of various LEDs, and the like are performed. That is, the production control device 300 serves as production control means for controlling production related to a game (such as a variable display game).

  Then, when the result of the special figure variation display game is a big hit, the CPU 111A of the game control device 100 displays the special result mode on the special figure 1 display 51a and the special figure 2 display 51b and generates a special gaming state. To perform the process. In the process of generating the special game state, the CPU 111A performs control for allowing the game ball to flow into the special winning opening by, for example, opening the open / close door 38c of the special variable winning apparatus 38 by the special winning opening solenoid 38b. . Then, until the condition that either a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls wins the grand prize opening or a predetermined openable time elapses from the opening of the big prize opening is achieved. A control (cycle game) is performed in which the release is set as one round, and this is continued (repeated) a predetermined number of rounds. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a special winning opening / closing control means for performing control for opening / closing the special winning opening when the stop result mode becomes the special result mode. Further, when the result of the special figure fluctuation display game is out of order, the special figure 1 display 51a and the special figure 2 display 51b are controlled to display the result form of the deviation.

  In addition, the game control device 100 can generate a high probability state as a gaming state after the special gaming state ends based on the result mode of the special figure variation display game. This high probability state is a state in which the probability of a hit result in the special figure variation display game is higher than the normal probability state (low probability state). Moreover, even if it becomes a high probability state based on the result aspect of any of the first special figure fluctuation display game and the second special figure fluctuation display game, the first special figure fluctuation display game and the second special figure Both of the variable display games are in a high probability state.

  In addition, the game control device 100 sets a short time state (also referred to as a specific game state, a general figure high probability state, or a general electric power support state) as a gaming state after the special gaming state ends based on the result mode of the special figure variation display game. It is possible to generate. At this time, in the short state, the probability (probability per ordinary figure) that is the hit result of the ordinary map change display game is set to a high probability (ordinary figure high probability state) higher than 0 that is the normal probability (ordinary figure low probability state). It is possible. As a result, control is performed so that the opening time of the normal variation winning device 37 per unit time is longer than when the normal variation winning device 37 is in the normal low probability state.

  In addition, the execution time of the general map variable display game, the general map stop time, the number of general power releases, and the general power open time are appropriately set so as to control the normal map variable display game and the normal variable winning device 37 to be in the short-time operation state. For example, in the short-time state, it is possible to control the execution time of the above-described normal variation display game (ordinary variation time) to be the second variation display time shorter than the first variation display time. (For example, 10,000 milliseconds is 1000 milliseconds). Further, in the short time state, it is possible to control the normal map stop time for displaying the result of the normal map change display game to be the second stop time shorter than the first stop time (for example, 1604 milliseconds). 704 ms). Also, in the short-time state, when the normal variation winning game 37 is released as a result of the normal-variation display game being won, the opening time (general power open time) is set to the normal state (low-probability state) It is possible to control so that the second opening time is longer than one opening time (for example, 100 milliseconds is 1352 milliseconds). In the short-time state, the number of times of opening of the normal variation winning device 37 (the number of times of normal power release) is greater than the number of times of opening the first time (for example, 2 times) with respect to the result of one hit of the normal fluctuation display game. It is possible to set the number of times of opening (for example, 4 times) to the second opening number. Further, in the short-time state, the probability that the hit result of the normal map variation display game (probability per normal map) is higher than the normal probability (normal low probability state, for example, 0/251) in the normal operation state. High probability (usually high probability state, eg 250/251) is possible.

  In the short-time state, the normal variation winning device 37 is set to the open state by changing any one or more of the normal time fluctuation time, the normal time stop time, the number of normal power releases, the normal power release time, and the probability per normal time. Extend the time to change state more than usual. It is also possible to set a plurality of types of time-short states that are different from each other. Moreover, when it is a hit, either the first opening mode or the second opening mode may be selected. In this case, the selection probabilities of the first release mode and the second release mode may be different. Further, the high probability state and the short time state can be generated independently, and both can be generated simultaneously or only one can be generated.

  Hereinafter, control of the gaming machine that performs such a game will be described. First, the control executed by the game microcomputer (game microcomputer) 111 of the game control device 100 will be described. Control processing by the gaming microcomputer 111 mainly includes main processing shown in FIGS. 8 and 9 and timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 12 performed at a predetermined time period (for example, 4 milliseconds).

[Main processing]
First, the main process will be described. The main process is started when the power is turned on. In this main process, as shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, first, the process of prohibiting the interrupt (step S1) is performed, and then the start address of the area in which the value of the register or the like is saved when the interrupt occurs. A stack pointer setting process (step S2) for setting a stack pointer is performed. Next, register bank 0 is designated (step S3), and the upper address of the RAM top address is set in a predetermined register (for example, D register) (step S4). In the case of the present embodiment, the RAM address range is 0000h to 01FFh, the upper order is 00h or 01h, and the top 00h is set in step S4. Next, a firing stop signal is output to set the firing permission signal to a prohibited state (step S5). The launch permission signal is set to a prohibited state when at least one of the game control device 100 and the payout control device 200 outputs a firing stop signal, and the launch of the game ball is prohibited.

  Thereafter, the state of the input port 1 (first input port 122) is read (step S6), and processing for setting a power-on delay timer is performed (step S7). In this process, by setting a predetermined initial value, a program of slave control means (for example, payout control apparatus 200 or effect control apparatus 300) that performs various controls in accordance with instructions from the game control apparatus 100 serving as the main control means. A waiting time (for example, 3 seconds) for waiting for normal startup is set. As a result, when the power is turned on, the game control device 100 is first started up, and the command is sent to the slave control device before the slave control device (for example, the payout control device 200 or the effect control device 300) is started up. The device can avoid missing commands. That is, the game control device 100 delays the start of the main control means (game control device 100) and waits for the start of the slave control devices (the payout control device 200, the effect control device 300, etc.) when the power is turned on. A standby means for setting the standby time is provided.

  In addition, the power-on delay timer is counted using a storage area (a RAM area or a register that is not subject to validity determination) that is not subject to RAM validity determination (checksum calculation). Thereby, when calculating check data such as the checksum of the RAM area, it is not necessary to exclude a part of the RAM area, so that it is possible to prevent the control at power-on from becoming complicated.

  Note that an initialization switch signal is input to the first input port 122, and the operation of the initialization switch 112 is reliably performed by reading the state of the first input port 122 before the start of the standby time. It can be detected. In other words, if the state of the initialization switch 112 is read after the standby time has elapsed, the initialization switch 112 is operated after waiting for the standby time to elapse, or the initialization switch 112 is operated from when the power is turned on until the standby time elapses. It is necessary to continue doing. However, by reading the status before the start of the standby time, it can be detected by operating immediately after turning on the power without performing such troublesome operations. Can be prevented from being accepted.

  After performing the process of setting the power-on delay timer (step S7), the process of measuring the standby time and monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during the standby time (steps S8 to S12) is performed. First, the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply device 400 is read via the port and the data bus and the number of times (for example, twice) to check is set (step S8), and it is determined whether the power failure monitoring signal is on. Is performed (step S9).

  If the power failure monitoring signal is on (step S9; Y), it is determined whether the power failure monitoring signal is on for the number of checks set in step S8 (step S10). If the power failure monitoring signal is not on for the number of checks (step S10; N), the process returns to the determination of whether the power failure monitoring signal is on (step S9). If the power failure monitoring signal is kept on for the number of checks (step S10; Y), that is, if it is determined that a power failure has occurred, the power supply of the gaming machine is waited to be cut off. In this way, it is possible to prevent a power outage from being erroneously detected due to noise, etc. by determining that a power outage has occurred when the power outage monitoring signal is continuously received for a predetermined period of time, and appropriately deal with problems at power-on. can do.

  That is, the game control device 100 serves as a power failure monitoring means for monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during a predetermined standby time. As a result, it is possible to cope with a power failure that occurs during the period in which the activation of the game control device 100 that constitutes the main control means is delayed, and it is possible to appropriately deal with a problem at the time of power-on. Note that access to the RAM is not permitted until the end of the standby time, and the stored contents at the time of the previous power shut-off are retained, so backup processing is performed when a power failure occurs here There is no need. For this reason, even if a power failure occurs during the standby time, it is not necessary to back up the RAM, and the control burden can be reduced.

  On the other hand, when the power failure monitoring signal is not on (step S9; N), that is, when a power failure has not occurred, the power-on delay timer is updated by -1 (step S11), and the timer value is 0? Is determined (step S12). If the value of the timer is not 0 (step S12; N), that is, if the standby time has not ended, the process returns to the process of setting the number of checks of the power failure monitoring signal (step S8). If the value of the timer is 0 (step S12; Y), that is, if the standby time has expired, access to a readable / writable RWM (read / write memory) such as RAM or EEPROM is permitted (step S13). ), Off-data is output to all output ports (set to a state in which there is no output) (step S14).

  Next, a serial port (a port pre-installed in the gaming microcomputer 111 and used in this embodiment for communication with the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200) is set (step S15) and read first. It is determined from the state of the input port 1 (first input port 122) whether the initialization switch has been turned on (step S16).

  When the initialization switch is OFF (step S16; N), it is determined whether the value of the power failure inspection area 1 in the RWM is normal power interruption inspection area check data 1 (for example, 5 Ah) (step S17). If it is normal (step S17; Y), it is determined whether the value of the power failure inspection area 2 in the RWM is normal power interruption inspection area check data 2 (for example, A5h) (step S18). If the value of the power failure inspection area 2 is normal (step S18; Y), a checksum calculation process for calculating a checksum of a predetermined area in the RWM is performed (step S19). It is determined whether the checksums match (step S20). If the checksums match (step S20; Y), the process proceeds to step S21 in FIG.

  Further, when it is determined that the initialization switch is on (step S16; Y), or when it is determined that the power failure inspection area value is not normal power failure inspection area check data (step S17; N or step S18). N), when it is determined that the checksums do not match (step S20; N), the process proceeds to step S26 in FIG. 9 to perform initialization processing. That is, the initialization switch forms an initialization operation unit that can be operated from the outside, and the game control device 100 initializes data stored in the RAM based on the operation of the initialization operation unit. Make.

  In step S21 of FIG. 9, the initial value at the time of power failure recovery is saved in the area to be initialized (step S21). The areas to be initialized here are a power failure inspection area, a checksum area, and an area related to error fraud monitoring. The busy signal status area for storing the state of the payout busy signal, which is a signal indicating whether or not the payout control device 200 can accept the command, is also cleared, indicating that the state of the payout busy signal has not been determined. Undefined state. Similarly, the touch switch signal state monitoring area for storing the state of the touch switch signal is also cleared, and an undefined state indicating that the state of the touch switch signal has not been determined. Thereafter, an area for storing the game state in the RWM is examined to determine whether or not the probability state of the special figure variation display game is a high probability state (step S22). Here, when the special figure is not in high probability (step S22; N), steps S23 and S24 are skipped and the process proceeds to step S25. Further, when the special figure is in a high probability (step S22; Y), the on-information is saved in the high probability notification flag area (step S23), and the high probability notification LED (error indicator) provided in the game board 30 is saved. ON (lighting) data is saved in the segment area (step S24). And the command at the time of the power failure restoration corresponding to the process number prepared in order to perform the special figure game process mentioned later reasonably is transmitted to an effect control board (effect control apparatus 300) (step S25), and step S31 Proceed to In the case of the present embodiment, in step S25, a model designation command, a special figure 1 hold number command, a special figure 2 hold number command, a probability information command, a screen designation command (a customer waiting demonstration screen command if waiting for a customer, otherwise) If so, send multiple commands such as recovery screen commands).

  On the other hand, when jumping from step S16, S17, S18, S20 to step S26, the RAM access prohibition area is set to access permission (step S26), and all the areas including the busy signal status area and the touch switch signal state monitoring area are set. The RAM area is cleared to 0 (step S27), and the RAM access prohibition area is set to access prohibition (step S28). Then, the initial value at the time of RAM initialization is saved in the area to be initialized (step S29). The region to be initialized here is a region relating to the setting of the customer waiting demonstration region and the production mode. And the command at the time of RAM initialization is transmitted to an effect control board (effect control apparatus 300) (step S30), and it progresses to step S31. In this embodiment, in step S30, a model designation command, a special figure 1 hold number command, a special figure 2 hold number command, a probability information command, a RAM initialization command (a customer waiting demonstration screen is displayed and a predetermined time ( For example, a plurality of commands such as a command for informing the RAM initialization with light and sound for 30 seconds) are transmitted.

  In step S31, a process of starting a CTC (Counter / Timer Circuit) circuit that generates a timer interrupt signal and a random number update trigger signal (CTC) in the gaming microcomputer 111 (clock generator) is performed. The CTC circuit is provided in a clock generator in the gaming microcomputer 111. The clock generator divides the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113, and a timer interrupt signal having a predetermined period (for example, 4 milliseconds) to the CPU 111A based on the divided signal. And a CTC circuit for generating a signal CTC that gives a trigger for updating a random number to be supplied to the random number generation circuit.

  After the CTC activation process in step S31, a process for activating and setting the random number generation circuit is performed (step S32). Specifically, the CPU 111A performs setting of a code (specified value) for starting the random number generation circuit in a predetermined register (CTC update permission register) in the random number generation circuit. Also, a bit transposition pattern of a hard random number (here, a big hit random number) generated by the hardware of the random number generation circuit is set. Bit transposition pattern is a method of permutation when the extracted random bit arrangement (the arrangement before the upper bit transposition) is replaced in a predetermined order and stored as a different bit arrangement (the arrangement after the lower bit transposition). It is a pattern that defines By replacing the bits of the random number according to this bit transposition pattern, the regularity of the random number can be broken and the confidentiality of the random number can be improved. The bit transposition pattern may be a fixed single pattern or may be selected from a plurality of patterns prepared in advance. Further, the user may arbitrarily set it.

  Thereafter, the value of a predetermined register (soft random number registers 1 to n) in the random number generation circuit at the time of power-on is extracted, and various corresponding initial value random numbers (in the case of this embodiment, random numbers that determine the hit pattern of the special figure) Save in the specified area of the RWM as the initial value (start value) of (big hit symbol random number), random number to determine the hit of the normal figure (per random number), random number to determine the hit symbol of the normal figure (per hit random number) From (step S33), the interruption is permitted (step S34). The random number generation circuit in the CPU 111A used in this embodiment is configured so that the initial value of the soft random number register changes every time the power is turned on. Therefore, this value is used as the initial value (start value) of various initial value random numbers. By doing so, it is possible to break the regularity of random numbers generated by software, making it difficult for a player to obtain illegal random numbers.

  Subsequently, an initial value random number update process (step S35) is performed for updating the values of various initial value random numbers and breaking the regularity of the random numbers. Although not particularly limited, in this embodiment, the big hit random number, the big hit symbol random number, the hit random number, and the hit symbol random number are configured to be generated using random numbers generated in the random number generation circuit. Yes. However, the big hit random number is a so-called “high-speed counter” that is updated based on a clock with a speed equal to or higher than the CPU operating clock. The big hit symbol random number, the hit random number, and the hit symbol random number are timer interrupts that are processing units of the program. This is a “low-speed counter” that is updated based on the CTC output (CTC (CTC2) different from CTC (CTC0) of the timer interrupt process) that has the same cycle as the processing. In addition, the big hit symbol random number, the hit random number, and the hit symbol random number adopt a so-called “initial value change method” in which the start value is changed by using each initial value random number (generated by software) every time the random number makes a round. Yes. Each random number may be a counter update by +1 or −1, or may be a random update in which all values within the range appear without overlapping until one round is reached. That is, the big hit random number is a random number that is updated only by hardware, and the big hit symbol random number, the hit random number, and the hit symbol random number are random numbers that are updated by hardware and software.

  After the initial value random number update process in step S35, the number of times (for example, twice) of reading and checking the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply device 400 via the port and the data bus is set (step S36). It is determined whether the power failure monitoring signal is on (step S37). If the power failure monitoring signal is not on (step S37; N), the process returns to the initial value random number update process (step S35). That is, when no power failure has occurred, the initial value random number update processing and the power failure monitoring signal check (loop processing) are repeated. By permitting an interrupt before the initial value random number update process (step S35) (step S34), if a timer interrupt occurs during the initial value random number update process, the interrupt process is executed preferentially. Can be prevented from being interrupted by waiting for the initial value random number update process.

  The initial value random number update process in step S35 includes a method of performing the initial value random number update process in the timer interrupt process in addition to the main process. In order to avoid execution of the value random number update process, when performing the initial value random number update process in the main process, it is necessary to disable the interrupt and then update to cancel the interrupt. If the initial value random number update process in the timer interrupt process is not performed in the main process and only the main process is performed, there is no problem even if the interrupt is canceled before the initial value random number update process. There is an advantage that it is simplified.

  If the power failure monitoring signal is on (step S37; Y), it is determined whether the power failure monitoring signal is on for the number of checks set in step S36 (step S38). If the power failure monitoring signal is not on for the number of checks (step S38; N), the process returns to the determination of whether the power failure monitoring signal is on (step S37). Further, when the power failure monitoring signal is kept on for the number of checks (step S38; Y), that is, when it is determined that a power failure has occurred, processing for temporarily prohibiting interruption (step S39), all A process of outputting off data to the output port (step S40) is performed.

  Thereafter, the power failure inspection region check data 1 is saved in the power failure inspection region 1 (step S41), and the power failure inspection region check data 2 is saved in the power failure inspection region 2 (step S42). Further, after performing a checksum calculation process (step S43) for calculating a checksum when the RWM is powered off, and a process for saving the calculated checksum (step S44), a process for prohibiting access to the RWM (step S45). ) And wait for the gaming machine to be turned off. In this way, the check data is saved in the power failure inspection area and the checksum at the time of power shutoff is calculated to determine whether the information stored in the RWM before the power shut down is properly backed up. It can be judged at the time of re-input.

  From the above, the main control means (game control apparatus 100) for overall control of the game, and the slave control means (payout control apparatus 200, effect control apparatus 300, etc.) for performing various controls in accordance with instructions from the main control means. ), The main control means is a standby means (game control apparatus) for setting a predetermined standby time for delaying the start of the main control means and waiting for the start of the slave control device when the power is turned on. 100) and a power failure monitoring means (game control device 100) for monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during the predetermined waiting time.

The power supply device 400 includes a power supply device 400 that supplies power to various devices. The power supply device 400 is configured to output a power failure monitoring signal when the occurrence of a power failure is detected, and the power failure monitoring means (game control device 100) When a power failure monitoring signal is continuously received over a predetermined period, it is determined that a power failure has occurred.
Further, the main control means (game control device 100) is based on the RAM 111C capable of storing data, the initialization operation unit (initialization switch) capable of being operated from the outside, and the operation of the initialization operation unit. An initialization means (game control device 100) for initializing data stored in the RAM 111C, and the operation state of the initialization means is read before the start of the waiting time.
Further, the main control means (game control apparatus 100) permits access to the RAM 111C after the standby time has elapsed.

[Checksum calculation processing]
FIG. 10 shows the checksum calculation process (steps S19 and S43) in the main process described above. In this checksum calculation process, first, the head address of the RWM is set as the start value of the calculated address (step S51), the number of repetitions is set (step S52), and “0” is set as the calculated value (step S53). . The number of bytes in the RAM used is set as the number of repetitions.

  Thereafter, a value obtained by adding the calculated value to the content of the calculated address is set as a new calculated value (step S54), the calculated address is updated by +1 (step S55), the number of repetitions is updated by -1 (step S56), and a checksum is obtained. It is determined whether the calculation of has been completed (step S57). If the calculation has not been completed (step S57; N), the process returns to step S54 and the above processing is repeated. If the calculation is completed (step S57; Y), the checksum calculation process ends.

[Initial value random number update processing]
FIG. 11 shows the initial value random number update process (step S35) in the main process described above. In this initial value random number update process, first, the big hit symbol initial value random number is updated by +1 (step S61). Then, the winning initial value random number is updated by +1 (step S62), the winning symbol initial value random number is updated by +1 (step S63), and the initial value random number updating process is terminated.
Here, the “big hit symbol initial value random number” is a random number that becomes an initial value of a random number that determines the big hit stop symbol of the special figure variation display game. Also, the “hit initial value random number” is a random number that is the initial value of the random number that determines the hit of the normal variation display game, and the “hit symbol initial value random number” is a random number that determines the hit stop symbol of the normal variation display game It is a random number that becomes the initial value of. In this way, the randomness of the random number can be improved by continuing to increment the initial value random number as long as time permits in the main process.

[Timer interrupt processing]
Next, timer interrupt processing will be described. As shown in FIG. 12, the timer interrupt process is started when a periodic timer interrupt signal generated by the CTC circuit in the clock generator is input to the CPU 111A. When a timer interrupt occurs in the gaming microcomputer 111, the interrupt is automatically disabled and the timer interrupt process of FIG. 12 is started.

When timer interrupt processing is started, first, register bank 1 is designated (step S101). Switching to the register bank 1 is equivalent to performing a register saving process in which a value held in a predetermined register (for example, a register used in the main process) is transferred to the RWM. Next, the upper address of the RAM head address is set in a predetermined register (for example, D register) (step S102). In step S102, the same processing as step S4 in the main processing is performed, but the register bank is different. Next, input processing (step S103) is performed to input from various sensors and switches and to acquire signals, that is, to read the state of each input port. Then, based on the output data set in various processes, an output process (step S104) for performing drive control of an actuator such as a solenoid (large winning opening solenoid 38b, general electric solenoid 37c) or the like is performed.
Note that when a signal for stopping the firing is output in step S5 in the main process, a signal for permitting the firing is output by performing this output process, and the launch permitting signal can be set to the permitted state. This launch permission signal is output to the launch control device via the payout control device. At that time, no signal processing or the like is performed. In addition, the launch permission signal is a first signal indicating a launch permission state viewed from the game control device, and a second signal (launch permission signal) indicating the launch permission state viewed from the payout control device is also a payout control. Generated in the device and output to the launch controller. That is, when two launch permission signals are output to the launch control device and both are permitted to launch, the game ball can be launched.

  Next, a payout command transmission process (step S105), a random number update process 1 (step S106), and a random number update process 2 (step S107) for outputting commands set in the transmission buffer in various processes to the payout control apparatus 200 are performed. Thereafter, it is monitored whether a normal signal is input from the start port 1 switch 36a, the start port 2 switch 37a, the start port 3 switch 97a, the usual gate switch 34a, the winning port switch 35a, and the big winning port switch 38a. Or, a prize opening switch / status monitoring process (step S108) for monitoring errors (whether the front frame or the glass frame is not opened) is performed. Also, a special figure game process (step S109) for performing a process related to the special figure variation display game and a general figure game process (step S110) for performing a process related to the common figure variation display game are performed.

Next, a segment LED editing process (step S111), which is provided in the gaming machine 10 and drives a segment LED that displays special information variation display game and various information related to the game to display desired contents, magnetic sensor 61 Magnet fraud monitoring process (step S112) that performs a process of checking the detection signal from the panel to determine whether there is an abnormality, and a panel radio wave fraud that performs a process of checking the detection signal from the panel radio wave sensor 62 to determine whether there is an abnormality A monitoring process (step S113) is performed. Then, external information editing processing (step S114) for setting signals to be output to various external devices in the output buffer is performed, and the timer interrupt processing is terminated.
Here, in the present embodiment, the process for restoring the interrupt disabled state (that is, the process for allowing the interrupt) and the process for restoring the designation of the register bank (that is, the process for designating the register bank 0) Automatically at the time of the timer interrupt processing. Depending on the CPU used, there is a gaming machine that needs to instruct execution of processing for restoring the interrupt disabled state and processing for restoring the designation of the register bank.

[Input processing]
Next, details of the input process (step S103) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 13, in the input processing, first, the state of the switch detection signal taken into the input port 1, that is, the first input port 122 is read (step S121). If there is an unused bit in the 8-bit port (input port 1), the state of the bit is cleared (step S122), and the state of the read input port 1 is saved in the switch control area 1 in the RWM ( (Step S123).

Here, the switches monitored by the input port 1 (first input port 122) are as follows.
<1> Glass frame open detection switch 63 (bit 0)
<2> Body frame open detection switch 64 (bit 1)
<3> RAM initialization switch 112 (bit 2) (not used in this process)
<4> Power failure monitoring signal (bit 3) (Not used in this process)
<5> Dispensing abnormality status signal (bit 4)
<6> Shoot ball break switch signal (bit 5)
<7> Overflow switch signal (bit 6)
<8> Touch switch signal (bit 7)

  Next, the address of the input port 2, that is, the second input port 123 is prepared (step S124), and the address of the switch control area 2 in the RWM is prepared (step S125). Thereafter, if there is an unused bit in the 8-bit port (input port 2), the bit data is prepared (step S126), and if there is a bit to be inverted in the 8-bit port (input port 2), the bit data is prepared. Is prepared (step S127), and a switch reading process (step S128) is performed. Here, “preparation” in this embodiment means setting a value in a register, but is not limited thereto, and a value may be set in an RWM or other memory.

Here, the switches monitored by the input port 2 (second input port 123) are as follows. Note that the switch monitored at the input port 2 has no bit to be inverted.
<1> Start port 2 switch 37a (bit 0) (Also output as "start port 2 winning signal" and "ordinary electric accessory 1 winning signal 1" by pattern branching)
<2> Start port 1 switch 36a (bit 1) ("Start port 1 winning signal")
<3> Left winning entry switch (bit 2) ("Normal winning entry 1 winning signal")
<4> Right prize opening switch (bit 3) ("Normal prize opening 2 prize signal")
The “left winning port switch” is a winning port switch 35 a provided on the left side of the winning device 90, and the “right winning port switch” is a winning port switch 35 a provided on the right side of the winning device 90.
<5> Gate switch 34a (bit 4) ("gate passing signal 1 according to normal symbol 1")
<6> Grand prize opening switch 38a (bit 5) ("Special electric accessory 1 winning signal 1")
<7> Start port 3 switch 97a (bit 6) ("Start port 3 winning signal")
<8> Not used (bit 7) (Circuit connected to a relay board (not shown) as a spare gate switch, and GND connection (Low: 0) is fixed on the relay board so as to be always off.)

  Next, the address of the input port 3, that is, the third input port 124 is prepared (step S129), and the address of the switch control area 3 in the RWM is prepared (step S130). Thereafter, if there is an unused bit in the 8-bit port (input port 3), the bit data is prepared (step S131), and if there is a bit to be inverted in the 8-bit port (input port 3), the bit data is prepared. Is prepared (step S132), a switch reading process (step S133) is performed, and the input process is terminated.

Here, the switches monitored by the input port 3 (third input port 124) are as follows.
<1> Panel radio wave sensor 62 (bit 0) (inverted bit)
<2> Switch abnormality detection signal (bit 1)
<3> Magnetic sensor 61 (bit 2)
<4> Frame radio wave error signal (bit 3)
<5> Payout busy signal (bit 4)
<6> Not used (bits 5 to 7)

Note that unused bit data and bit data to be inverted are prepared for each input port.
Therefore, the unused bit data of the input port 2 prepared in step S126 and the unused bit data of the input port 3 prepared in step S131 are different data. As a result, there is a possibility that the data has the same value. is there.
Further, the bit data to be inverted of the input port 2 prepared in step S127 and the bit data to be inverted of the input port 3 prepared in step S132 are different data, but there is a possibility that the data has the same value as a result. is there.

[Switch read processing]
Next, details of the switch reading process (steps S128 and S133) in the above-described input process will be described. As shown in FIG. 14, in the switch reading process, first, the state of the signal taken into the target input port is read (step S141). If there is an unused bit in the 8-bit port, the state of the bit is cleared (step S142), the bit that needs to be inverted is inverted (step S143), and then the port input state of the target switch control area is set. Save (store) (step S144). Thereafter, it waits for a delay time (for example, about 100 μsec) until the second reading to elapse (step S145).

  When the delay time elapses, a second reading of the state of the signal taken into the target input port is performed (step S146). If there is an unused bit in the 8-bit port, the state of the bit is cleared (step S147), the bit that needs to be inverted is inverted (step S148), and then the port input state ( The first data) is loaded, and the inverted data (second data) is saved (stored) (step S149). Thereafter, a definite bit pattern is created in which the same bit is 1 in the first and second reads, and a different bit is 0 (step S150). The logic between the definite bit pattern and the port input state (second data) The product is taken and this time as a definite bit (step S151).

  Next, an undetermined bit pattern is created in which the bit having the same state in the first and second readings is set to 0, and a different bit is set to 1 (step S152). The product is taken and used as the previous held bit (step S153). As a result, it is possible to obtain a signal state from which noise due to chattering of the switch or the like is removed. Then, the current fixed bit and the previous held bit are combined and saved as the current finalized state (step S154), the exclusive OR of the previous and current finalized state is taken and saved as the rising edge (step S155). The switch reading process ends.

  When the timer interrupt cycle is short (for example, 2 ms), the switch reading is performed by reading the switch once for each interrupt process and comparing it with the result of the previous reading. There is a method of determining whether or not the change has occurred. However, if the switch state read by the previous interrupt is lost before the next interrupt processing, correct determination may not be performed. On the other hand, it is possible to avoid the above-described problem by performing the switch reading process twice in one interrupt process with a predetermined time difference as in the present embodiment.

[Output processing]
Next, details of the output process (step S104) in the above-described timer interrupt process will be described. As shown in FIG. 15, in the output process, first, off data is output (reset) to the output port 135 that outputs the segment data of the batch display device (LED) 50 (step S161). Next, the data to be output to the output port 134 for outputting the data of the ordinary electric solenoid 37c and the special winning opening solenoid 38b is synthesized and output (step S162).

  Then, the value of the digit counter for sequentially scanning the digit lines of the collective display device (LED) 50 is updated (step S163), and the output data of the digit line of the LED corresponding to the value of the digit counter is acquired (step S163). S164). In the present embodiment, the value of the digit counter is updated by +1 in the range of 0 to 3. Next, the acquired data and external information data are combined (step S165), and the combined data (for example, “door / frame open” data, “security signal” data) is output to the digit / external information output port. It outputs to 136 (step S166).

  Thereafter, the segment line output data is loaded from the segment area in the RWM corresponding to the digit counter value (step S167), and the loaded data is output to the segment output output port 135 (step S168). In this embodiment, when the value of the digit counter is 0, the digit line and the segment line of the special figure 1 display 51a are selected, and when the value of the digit counter is 1, the digit line of the special figure 2 display 51b And a segment line is selected. When the digit counter value is 2, the digit line and segment line of the general-purpose display 52 are selected, and when the digit counter value is 3, the special figure 1 hold display 53 and the special figure 2 hold display are displayed. The digit line and segment line of the display unit 54, the general map hold display unit 55, the right-handed notification unit 56, the short-time state notification unit 57, the probability state display unit 58, and the round display unit 59 are selected. As a result, the plurality of light emitting display units provided in the collective display device 50 are controlled by dynamic control.

  Subsequently, various output data of external information is synthesized (step S169), and the synthesized data (for example, “big hit signal 1” data, “big hit signal 2” data, “big hit signal 3” data, “big hit signal” 4 ”,“ design determination frequency signal ”data,“ start port signal ”data,“ main prize ball signal ”data) and firing permission output data are synthesized (step S170). The information is output to the output port 137 for outputting external information / firing permission signal (step S171). Next, the data output to the test terminal output port 1 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 1 on the relay board 70. (Step S172). Thereafter, the data output to the test terminal output port 2 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 2 on the relay board 70. (Step S173).

  Next, the data output to the test terminal output port 3 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 3 on the relay board 70. (Step S174). Further, the data to be output to the test terminal output port 4 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 4 on the relay board 70. (Step S175). Then, the data output to the test terminal output port 5 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 5 on the relay board 70. (Step S176), and the output process is terminated.

The output data of the segment line corresponding to each digit line is set in the segment area for each display provided in the RAM 111C (RWM) in the processing described later. Specifically, it is set in the special symbol game process shown in FIG. 25, the symbol variation control process (see FIG. 51) in the general game process shown in FIG. 53, or the segment LED editing process shown in FIG.
Since all of these processes are performed in one timer interrupt process, output data corresponding to all segment lines are set in the segment area in the RAM 111C regardless of the value of the digit counter. Of the segment line output data set as described above, the segment line output data corresponding to the current digit counter value is selected and used.
In addition, as described above, the RAM 111C can hold stored data even when the supply of power to the gaming machine is stopped. The segment area for storing the output data of the segment line and the area for storing the value of the digit counter in the RAM 111C are subject to checksum calculation in the checksum calculation process executed when power supply to the gaming machine is stopped. Is included in the area. Therefore, it is an object of the validity determination performed when the supply of power to the gaming machine is resumed. Thereby, when the gaming machine is normally restored from the power failure, the display of the collective display device 50 can be resumed from the state at the time of the power failure.

From the above, in the gaming machine that executes the variable display game based on the establishment of the start condition, the game control means (game control device 100) that controls the game in an integrated manner and the display related to the game controlled by the game control means Display device (collective display device 50), and the display device includes a plurality of light emitting display units (special figure 1 display 51a, special figure 2 display 51b, general figure display 52, special figure 1 hold display). Device 53, special figure 2 hold indicator 54, universal figure hold indicator 55, right-handed notification unit 56, time-short state notification unit 57, probability state display unit 58, and round display unit 59), and the game control means includes: Storage means (RAM 111C) capable of holding data even when power supply to the gaming machine is stopped, and validity of predetermined data stored in the storage means when power supply to the gaming machine is started Justification for judging gender And when the validity is confirmed by the validity determination means, the game is resumed based on the data stored in the storage means and executed at predetermined intervals. Dynamic control that updates the digit counter, which is information for selecting the common line (digit line) of multiple light emitting display units, and outputs segment data to the display device according to the value of the digit counter In the timer interrupt process, all the segment data corresponding to each common line is generated and stored in the storage means regardless of the value of the digit counter, and the storage segment data is stored. It is configured to use only segment data according to the value of the digit counter, and the validity judgment means is correct. The predetermined data to sex determination target, and thus contained all the segment data corresponding to each common line stored in at least the storage means.
Therefore, the predetermined data that is determined by the correctness determination means includes at least all of the segment data corresponding to each common line stored in the storage means. When started, the game can be started from the state where the supply of power to the gaming machine is stopped, and the display of the variable display game without any sense of incongruity becomes possible.

In addition, the game control means can execute a plurality of types of variable display games (first special figure variable display game, second special figure variable display game, universal map variable display game) having different start conditions, and the display device Corresponding to each of a plurality of types of variable display games, a plurality of light emitting display units each including a plurality of light emitting units are provided, and the plurality of light emitting display units correspond to different common lines.
Therefore, in any of a plurality of types of variation display games, when the supply of power to the gaming machine is started, the game can be started from the state where the supply of power to the gaming machine is stopped, and the variation display without any sense of incongruity The game can be displayed.

[Payout command transmission processing]
Next, details of the payout command transmission process (step S105) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 16, in the payout command transmission process, first, it is checked whether there is a count in the winning number counter area 2 (step S181).

The winning number counter area is provided in the RAM 111C of the game control device 100, and a winning number counter area 1 and a winning number counter area 2 are provided. The winning number counter area 1 is an area used to transmit a payout command (prize ball command) for instructing the payout control device 200 to pay out a prize ball, and a prize for which a payout command has not yet been transmitted. The winning data corresponding to the ball is stored. That is, the winning number counter area 1 serves as a prize ball command counter capable of storing information relating to the prize ball command.
The winning number counter area 2 is for transmitting a main winning ball signal to be output to an external device every time the number of winning balls (scheduled number of payouts) generated by winning a winning opening reaches a predetermined number (here, 10). The winning data corresponding to the winning ball which is the area to be used and for which the main winning ball signal generation processing is not performed is stored. That is, the winning number counter area 2 serves as a main winning ball signal counter capable of storing information related to the main winning ball signal. In addition to the main prize ball signal, a payout prize ball signal is output to the external device every time the number of prize balls actually paid out from the payout control apparatus 200 reaches a predetermined number (here, 10). By checking these two signals, it is possible to monitor unauthorized payout.

Each of these winning number counter areas has a winning number counter area for each number of winning balls set for each winning opening (in this embodiment, three winning balls, ten winning balls, and 14 winning balls). Is provided, and the count number in the corresponding winning number counter area is incremented by 1 based on winning in the winning opening. That is, information on the winning can be stored in units of one winning in the winning area. The win counter area 1 is assigned a larger area than the win counter area 2 so that more win data can be stored. This is because the main award ball signal can be transmitted regardless of the state of the transmission destination, whereas the payout command may be suspended depending on the state of the payout control device 200 that is the transmission destination. This is because data may be accumulated.
Specifically, in the case of the present embodiment, up to 65535 winnings can be stored in the 3 prize ball counter area, 10 prize ball counter area, and 14 prize ball counter area of the winning number counter area 1, respectively. The 3 prize ball counter area, the 10 prize ball counter area, and the 14 prize ball counter area of the winning number counter area 2 are configured to be able to store up to 255 prizes respectively.

  In the process of checking whether there is a count in the winning number counter area 2 (step S181), among the plurality of winning number counter areas provided for each number of winning balls, “0” is displayed in the winning number counter area to be checked. Determine whether there is a non-count number. If there is no count number (step S181; N), the address of the winning number counter area 2 to be checked is updated (step S182), and it is checked whether the counting numbers of all the winning number counter areas have been checked. Determination is made (step S183). If it is determined that all checks have been completed (step S183; Y), the process proceeds to step S192. On the other hand, if it is determined that all checks have not been completed (step S183; N), the process returns to step S181 and the above processing is repeated. In the case of the present embodiment, the address of the winning number counter area 2 to be checked is updated in the order of 3 prize ball counter areas → 10 prize ball counter areas → 14 prize ball counter areas.

  If it is determined in step S181 that there is a count number (step S181; Y), the count number in the target winning number counter area is updated by -1 (step S184), and the target winning number counter area 2 is updated. The number of payouts corresponding to the address is acquired (step S185). Then, the value of the winning ball remaining area and the acquired payout number are added (step S186), and the addition result is saved in the winning ball remaining area (step S187). As the value of the remaining prize ball area before this processing, a fraction that does not satisfy a predetermined number that is a reference for output of the main prize ball signal is stored.

Thereafter, 10 is subtracted from the addition result (step S188), and it is determined whether or not the subtraction result is 0 or more (step S189). If it is 0 or more (step S189; Y), the value of the main prize ball signal output count area is updated by +1 (step S190). That is, every time the remaining number of prize balls reaches 10, the number of outputs of the main prize ball signal is updated by +1.
Then, the subtraction result is saved in the award ball remaining number area (step S191), and the process returns to step S188. As a result, the main winning ball signal is output to an external device such as a hall computer. That is, the game control device 100 serves as an external information output means for outputting a main prize ball signal including information on the number of prize balls determined to be paid out as a result of winning a game ball to a predetermined prize area to the outside of the gaming machine. . In addition, by outputting the main prize ball signal, when game balls are paid out during a big hit, the output of the prize ball signal is delayed with the payout of game balls. It is possible to prevent a problem that the number of prize balls cannot be counted.
Here, the process of steps S181 to S191 is a process of updating (increasing) the number of outputs of the main prize ball signal, and the process of steps S192 to S201 is a process of transmitting a payout command.

In step S192, if the payout command transmission timer is not "0", -1 is updated (step S192), and it is determined whether the payout command transmission timer has become "0" (step S193). If the payout command transmission timer is not “0” (step S193; N), the payout command transmission process is terminated. If the payout command transmission timer is “0” (step S193; Y), the payout busy signal flag is checked to determine whether the payout busy signal is busy (step S194).
The payout busy signal is a signal indicating whether or not the payout control device 200 can immediately start payout control. If the payout control cannot be started immediately, the payout busy signal is turned on (busy state). Is done. That is, the payout busy signal can be said to be a signal indicating whether or not a payout command (prize ball command) can be received. That is, the payout busy signal is a status signal indicating whether or not the payout control means (payout control device 200) can start payout control.

If the payout busy signal is busy (step S194; Y), the payout command transmission process is terminated. That is, in this embodiment, instead of transmitting a payout command for each timer interruption, a predetermined time has elapsed (the value of the payout command transmission timer becomes 0), and the payout control device 200 side can pay out a prize ball. In the state, the payout command is transmitted. In this way, when the payout control device 200 cannot immediately start payout control and does not transmit a payout command, it is possible to perform useless processing by not performing subsequent processing relating to the transmission of the payout command. To prevent and reduce the burden of control.
Conditions for the payout busy signal to be in the on state (busy state) include, for example, during a payout operation, a ball lending operation, a shot ball outage error, an overflow error, a frame radio fraud occurrence, a payout ball detection switch (paid out The number of award balls to be paid out in the memory of the payout control device 200 during an abnormal state of a switch for monitoring a ball, an underpayment error, an excessive payout error, or the number of unpaid award balls = the number of game balls remaining ), Etc. (when not = 0).

  If the payout busy signal is not busy (step S194; N), it is checked whether there is a count in the winning number counter area 1 (step S195). In the process of checking whether there is a count in the winning number counter area 1 (step S195), among the plurality of winning number counter areas provided for each number of winning balls, “0” is displayed in the winning number counter area to be checked. Judge whether there is any count number.

  If there is no count number (step S195; N), the address of the winning number counter area 1 to be checked is updated (step S196), and it is checked whether the counting numbers of all the winning number counter areas have been checked. Determination is made (step S197). If it is determined that all checks have been completed (step S197; Y), the payout command transmission process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that all checks have not been completed (step S197; N), the process returns to step S195 and the above process is repeated. In the case of this embodiment, the address of the winning number counter area 1 to be checked is updated in the order of 3 prize ball counter areas → 10 prize ball counter areas → 14 prize ball counter areas.

  If it is determined in step S195 that there is a count number (step S195; Y), the count number in the target winning number counter area is updated by -1 (step S198), and the target winning number counter area 1 is updated. The payout number command corresponding to the address is acquired (step S199). Then, the acquired payout number command is written in the payout serial transmission buffer (step S200), the initial value is saved in the payout command transmission timer area (step S201), and the payout command transmission process is terminated. The payout command transmission timer is for managing the transmission interval, and for example, 200 msec is set as an initial value.

As a result, a payout command (prize ball command) in units of one win in the winning area is generated and transmitted to the payout control device 200. The payout control device 200 performs control for paying out a predetermined number of prize balls based on the payout command. That is, the game control device 100 indicates that the state signal indicating whether or not the payout control means output from the payout control means (payout control device 200) can start payout control can start payout control. A prize ball command transmitting means for transmitting a prize ball command to the payout control means.
As described above, the game control device 100 performs control to transmit the award ball command based on the state signal output from the payout control device 200, so that the award is given only when the payout control device 200 can immediately execute payout control. A ball command will be sent. As a result, data corresponding to a winning that has not yet been paid out is held on the game control device 100 side, so that it is backed up by the game control device 100 when a power failure occurs, and is backed up to the payout control device 200. Even if it does not have the function to do, accurate payout control can be realized.

In a conventional gaming machine (for example, a gaming machine disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2000-312759), when a power-off state occurs for some reason, the payout control device 200 backs up data in its storage means and immediately before power-off. The payout control state based on the data is maintained. However, the conventional gaming machine requires a function for backing up, resulting in a problem of increasing costs. According to the present invention, accurate payout control can be realized without providing the payout control apparatus 200 with a function for backing up.
Also, since the main prize ball signal transmitted to the external device is output regardless of the state of the payout busy signal, the main prize ball signal can be output without delay. The time can be accurately grasped, for example, the base value can be grasped accurately. Also, since the prize ball command counter capable of storing information relating to the prize ball command and the main prize ball signal counter capable of storing information relating to the main prize ball signal are separately provided, the prize ball command and the main prize ball having different transmission timings are provided. Signal information can be managed separately, and information can be managed reliably.

  From the above, the game control is performed in an integrated manner, and the winning areas provided in the gaming area 32 (the first starting winning port 36, the second starting winning port 97, the normal variable winning device 37, the general winning port 35, the special winning port 35, Game control means (game control apparatus 100) for transmitting a prize ball command based on winning of a game ball to the variable prize winning device 38), and game ball payout control based on the prize ball command transmitted from the game control means A payout control means (payout control apparatus 200) for performing the game, and the game control means outputs a status signal (busy signal) indicating whether or not the payout control means output from the payout control means can start payout control. The payout control means transmits a prize ball command to the payout control means, and when a power failure occurs and the power supply recovers from the power failure, the payout control means outputs a status signal indicating that the payout control can be started. Toshi However, the award ball command is not immediately transmitted to the payout control means, and the award ball corresponding to the fact that the state signal indicating that the payout control can be started from the payout control means is continuously output for a predetermined period. The command is transmitted to the payout control means.

  In addition, a plurality of winning areas (first start winning opening 36, second starting winning opening 97, ordinary variable winning apparatus 37, general winning opening 35, special variable winning apparatus 38) having a different number of winning balls are provided in the game area 32. The control means (game control device 100) includes a prize ball command counter (game control device 100) capable of specifying whether or not a prize ball command for instructing game ball payout control is not transmitted for each prize ball number. When the signal indicates that the payout control can be started and there is an unsent prize ball command in each prize ball command counter, the prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control means (payout control device 200). The status signal specifies whether or not the payout control means can start payout control before specifying whether or not there is an unsent prize ball command in each prize ball command counter. Will be.

  In addition to performing overall game control, a game to a predetermined winning area (first start winning port 36, second starting winning port 97, ordinary variable winning device 37, general winning port 35, special variable winning device 38). Game control means (game control device 100) for transmitting a prize ball command based on winning a ball, and payout control means (payout control) for paying out a game ball based on a prize ball command transmitted from the game control means Device 200), and the game control means indicates that the payout control means outputted from the payout control means can start the payout control. A prize ball command transmission means (game control device 100) for sending a prize ball command to the payout control means when there is a game, and information on the number of prize balls determined to be paid out when a game ball is won in a predetermined prize area Prize ball signal An external information output means (game control device 100) for outputting the game signal to the outside of the gaming machine, and the external information output means outputs a status signal output from the payout control means, and the payout control means pays out. The prize ball signal is output regardless of whether the control can be started or not.

  In addition, the prize ball command transmission means (game control device 100) immediately receives a prize ball command even when a power failure occurs and the status signal indicates that the payout control can be started when the power failure is restored. Is not transmitted to the payout control means (payout control device 200), and a prize ball command is issued in response to a state in which the state signal indicates that the payout control can be started for a predetermined period of time. This means that it is transmitted to the payout control means.

  Further, the game control means (game control device 100) has a prize ball command counter (game control device 100) capable of storing information relating to a prize ball command and a prize capable of storing information relating to a prize ball signal (main prize ball signal). A ball signal counter (game control device 100), and a prize ball command transmission means (game control device 100) is a predetermined winning area (first start winning port 36, second start winning port 97, normal variation winning device). 37, a single winning ball command is generated in units of a single winning to the general winning opening 35, the special variable winning device 38), and the status signal indicates that the payout control can be started. Is sent to the payout control means (payout control device 200), and the winning ball command counter (game control device 100) can store information on the winning in units of one winning in a predetermined winning area. Yes, given The game ball is updated at the time of winning a game ball in the prize area, and the update is performed in response to the transmission of the prize ball command to the payout control means, so that the number of prize ball commands not transmitted can be stored. The information output means accumulates the number of winning balls determined to be paid out in accordance with the winning of game balls to a predetermined winning area, and outputs a winning ball signal to the outside of the gaming machine every time the accumulated value reaches a predetermined number. The winning ball signal counter is capable of storing information on the winning in units of one winning in a predetermined winning area, and is updated when a game ball is won in the predetermined winning area, and external information By updating in accordance with the accumulation process of the number of prize balls by the output means, the number of prize balls that have not yet been accumulated can be stored.

[Random number update process 1]
FIG. 17 shows the random number update process 1 (step S106) in the timer interrupt process. The random number update process 1 is a process for updating the jackpot symbol random number, the hit random number, and the initial value (start value) of the symbol random number that are the targets of the initial value random number update process. In this random number update process 1, it is first determined whether or not the big hit symbol random number is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step S211).
If the big hit symbol random number is not waiting for the initial value setting (step S211; N), it is determined whether the normal hit random number is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step S214). If the jackpot symbol random number is waiting for the initial value setting (step S211; Y), the jackpot symbol initial value random number is loaded as the next initial value (step S212), and the next initial value of the loaded jackpot symbol random number is handled. Set to the register (start value setting register) that holds the start value of the random number counter (random number area) to be executed (step S213), and determine whether the normal random number is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (Step S214).

  If the normal random number is not waiting for the initial value setting (step S214; N), it is determined whether the normal random number is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step S217). Further, when the normal hit random number is waiting for initial value setting (step S214; Y), the hit initial value random number is loaded as the next initial value (step S215), and the next initial value of the loaded normal random hit random number is loaded. The value is set in the register (start value setting register) that holds the start value of the corresponding random number counter (random number area) (step S216), and the normal symbol random number is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting. It is determined whether or not there is (step S217).

  If the normal symbol random number is not waiting for the initial value setting (step S217; N), the random number update process 1 ends. If the normal symbol random number is waiting for the initial value setting (step S217; Y), the hit initial symbol random number is loaded as the next initial value (step S218), and the loaded normal symbol random number is loaded. The next initial value is set in the register (start value setting register) that holds the start value of the corresponding random number counter (random number area) (step S219), and the random number update process 1 is terminated.

[Random number update process 2]
FIG. 18 shows the random number update process 2 (step S107) in the timer interrupt process. The random number update process 2 is a process for updating the fluctuation pattern random number for determining the fluctuation pattern in the fluctuation display game of the special figures 1 and 2. In the gaming machine of this embodiment, there are 1-byte random numbers (variation pattern random numbers 2 and 3) and 2-byte random numbers (variation pattern random number 1) as the variation pattern random numbers. Each time an interrupt occurs, the update target is switched and processed. In addition, when the random number to be updated is 2 bytes, the update process is performed for different interrupts for the upper byte and the lower byte. That is, the update of the 2-byte fluctuation pattern random number 1 (the reach fluctuation mode determining random number) by the random number update process 2 executed in one interrupt process for the main process is executed for either the upper 1 byte or the lower 1 byte. It is comprised so that.

In this random number update process 2, first, a random number update scan counter for sequentially specifying which of the plurality of random numbers to be updated is to be subjected to the current update process is updated (step S231). In the present embodiment, the value of the random number update scan counter is updated in the range of 0 to 3. When the value of the random number update scan counter is “0”, the fluctuation pattern random number 1 (upper) is updated, when it is “1”, the fluctuation pattern random number 1 (lower) is updated, and when it is “2”, the fluctuation The pattern random number 2 is updated, and when it is “3”, the fluctuation pattern random number 3 is updated. Next, the address of the effect random number update table corresponding to the value of the random number update scan counter is calculated (step S232).
Next, a random number upper limit determination value is acquired from the table referred to based on the calculated address (step S234). The table to be referred to at this time stores an upper limit determination value for each type of random number, that is, a value for determining whether or not the random number has made a round.

  Subsequently, for example, a CPU used as a gaming microcomputer in the present embodiment is not provided with a refresh register (hereinafter referred to as “R register”) used for DRAM refresh or the like. In addition, a counter called “M1 counter” that operates in the same manner as the R register is built in, but the value of the M1 counter is loaded (step S234). By using the value of the M1 counter, randomness can be given to the random number. Next, a mask value for masking the value of the M1 counter is acquired, and the value of the M1 counter is masked (step S235). Note that the mask value is a bit number that varies depending on the random number to be updated. For example, when the lower 1 byte of the fluctuation pattern random number 1 is updated, the lower 1 bit of the M1 counter and the upper 1 byte of the fluctuation pattern random number 1 Is updated to the lower 4 bits of the M1 counter. This is because the upper limit varies depending on the type of random number. As a mask value, when the lower 1 byte of the variation pattern random number 1 is updated, the lower 3 bits of the M1 counter are updated. When the upper 1 byte of the variation pattern random number 1 is updated, the lower 1 byte of the variation pattern random number 1 is updated. Although 4 bits have been exemplified, the numerical value is an example and the present invention is not limited to this.

  Next, it is determined whether the random number area (random number counter) to be updated is the upper 1 byte of the 2-byte random number (step S236). If the random number area is the upper 1 byte of the 2-byte random number (step S236; Y), the remaining value by masking the value of the M1 counter with the upper 1 byte as a mask value as an addition value (hereinafter referred to as this) Is set to a mask update value obtained by adding “1” to “masked value”, the lower 1 byte is set to “0” (step S237), and the process proceeds to step S239. If the random number area is not the upper 1 byte of the 2-byte random number (step S236; N), the upper 1 byte is set to “0” and the lower 1 byte is set to the mask update value as an addition value ( Step S238), the process proceeds to step S239. Note that “1” is added to the masked value because the masked value may be “0”, and if “0” is added later, it does not change from the value before the addition, so this is avoided. is there.

  Then, it is determined whether the random number area to be updated is a 2-byte random number (step S239). If it is a 2-byte random number (step S239; Y), the value (2 bytes) of the random number area to be updated is set (step S240). ), The process proceeds to step S242. If the random number area to be updated is not a 2-byte random number (step S239; N), “0” is set as the upper 1 byte of the random value, and the value (1 of the random area to be updated is set as the lower 1 byte of the random value. Byte) is set (step S241), and the process proceeds to step S242.

  In step S242, a value obtained by adding the addition value determined in step S237 or S238 to the random value is set as a new random value, and it is determined whether the new random value is larger than the upper limit determination value acquired in step S233 (step S242). S243). If the new random number value is not larger than the upper limit determination value (step S243; N), the new random value is saved in the random number area below the 1-byte random number or 2-byte random number (step S245). When the new random value is larger than the upper limit determination value (step S243; Y), a value obtained by subtracting the upper limit determination value from the new random value is set as a new new random value (step S244). Save in the random number area below the byte random number or the 2-byte random number (step S245).

Next, it is determined whether the updated random number area is a 2-byte random number (step S246). If the updated random number area is not a 2-byte random number (step S246; N), the random number update process 2 is terminated. If it is a 2-byte random number (step S246; Y), a new random value (or a value when a new random number is calculated again) is saved in the random number area above the 2-byte random number (step S247). ), The random number update process 2 is terminated.
In the case of this embodiment, on the effect random number update table, the upper limit judgment value, the mask value of the M1 counter, the type information of the random number area to be updated (1 byte random number, 2 byte random number (upper), 2 byte random number (lower)) The address of the update area is defined for the number of random numbers to be updated (4 blocks).

  In this way, the CPU 111A updates the variation pattern random number for determining the variation pattern in the variation display game of FIG. 1 and FIG. Therefore, the CPU 111 </ b> A has a special figure variation display game out of various random numbers extracted based on the inflow of game balls to the start area of the first start prize opening 36, the second start prize opening 97, and the normal variation prize winning device 37. Random number updating means for updating a fluctuation pattern random number for determining a fluctuation mode (fluctuation pattern) is provided.

[Prize mouth switch / status monitoring process]
FIG. 19 shows a winning mouth switch / status monitoring process (step S108) in the timer interrupt process. In this winning a prize opening switch / status monitoring process, first, a winning prize monitoring table 1 corresponding to one of the big winning prize opening switches 38a in the special winning prize opening (special variable prize winning device 38) is prepared (step S301), and the big winning prize opening is obtained. In spite of not being opened, an illegal & winning monitoring process (step S302) for monitoring whether or not there is an illegal winning in the big winning opening and detecting a normal winning is executed.
Thereafter, a winning opening monitoring table 2 corresponding to the other large winning opening switch 38a in the large winning opening (special variable winning apparatus 38) is prepared (step S303), and it is monitored whether there is an illegal winning and a normal winning is made. The detected fraud & prize winning monitoring process (step S304) is executed.

  In the winning opening monitoring table, the monitoring switch bit indicating the position of data for determining whether or not there is an input to the target switch, the lower address of fraud monitoring information, the lower address of the illegal winning number area, the illegal winning error notification command, the illegal winning prize Number upper limit value (number of fraud occurrence determination), address of winning prize switch table, information of notification timer update information (permit / update) are defined. The winning table of the winning mouth monitoring table includes a monitoring switch bit, a lower address of the winning number counter area 1, a winning number counter area 2 for each switch, in addition to the number of monitoring repetitions (the number of switches). The lower address information is defined. The winning opening monitoring table is prepared according to each switch to be monitored.

  Next, a winning opening monitoring table for the winning opening switch (starting opening 2 switch 37a) in the ordinary electric power system is prepared (step S305), and an illegal & winning monitoring process for monitoring whether there is an illegal winning and detecting a normal winning. (Step S306) is executed. And a winning opening switch (for example, a starting opening 1 switch 36a, a starting opening 3 switch 97a, a winning opening switch 35a of a general winning opening 35, a left winning opening switch, a right winning opening switch, which can always win a prize (no fraud monitoring process is required). )) Is prepared (step S307), a winning number counter updating process (step S308) for updating the winning number is performed, and a start port error monitoring process (step S309) is performed.

Next, a state scan counter for sequentially specifying which switch or signal among the plurality of switches and signals to be monitored is to be monitored this time is updated (step S310). In the present embodiment, the state scan counter is updated in the range of 0 to 3. Thereafter, the gaming machine state monitoring table 1 for setting the state to be monitored is prepared according to the value of the state scan counter (step S311). Then, a gaming machine state check process (step S312) for determining a state such as whether an error has occurred is performed.
In the case of this embodiment, referring to the value of the state scan counter in the gaming machine state monitoring table 1, when the value of the state scan counter is “0”, the switch abnormality output due to the occurrence of disconnection of the switch connector or the like The state monitoring based on the 1 signal is set, and when the value of the state scan counter is “1”, the state monitoring based on the shot ball break switch signal from the payout control device 200 is set. When the value of the state scan counter is “2”, state monitoring based on the overflow switch signal is set, and when the value of the state scan counter is “3”, state monitoring based on the payout abnormality status signal is set. The

Next, the gaming machine state monitoring table 2 for setting the state to be monitored is prepared according to the value of the state scan counter (step S313). Then, a gaming machine state check process (step S314) for determining a state such as whether an error has occurred is performed.
In the case of the present embodiment, the value of the state scan counter is referred to the gaming machine state monitoring table 2, and when the value of the state scan counter is “0”, it is based on the signal output from the glass frame open detection switch 63. The state monitoring is set, and when the value of the state scan counter is “1”, the state monitoring based on the signal output from the main body frame open detection switch 64 is set. When the value of the state scan counter is “2”, state monitoring based on the fraud signal is set, and when the value of the state scan counter is “3”, state monitoring based on the touch switch signal is set. Is set.

Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the status scan counter is “0” (step S315). finish. In this case, there is no state monitoring target in the gaming machine state monitoring table 3 referred to next. When the value of the error scan counter is “0” (step S315; Y), the gaming machine state monitoring table 3 is prepared (step S316), and a gaming machine for judging a state such as whether an error has occurred or not. A state check process (step S317) is performed.
In the case of this embodiment, referring to the value of the state scan counter in the gaming machine state monitoring table 3, when the value of the state scan counter is “0”, the switch abnormality output due to the occurrence of disconnection of the switch connector or the like A state monitoring based on two signals is set. The gaming machine state monitoring table 3 is not defined when the state scan counter is “1” to “3”.

  Thereafter, a payout busy signal check process (step S318) for checking a payout busy signal indicating whether or not the payout control device 200 can start payout control is performed, and the winning opening switch / state monitoring process is ended. Note that the processing of steps S316 to S318 is executed only when the value of the state scan counter updated for each timer interrupt is “0”, so that it is executed at a rate of once every four timer interrupts. Become. That is, when the timer interrupt is performed every 4 milliseconds, the processing from step S316 to S318 is performed every 16 milliseconds.

[Unauthorized & winning monitoring process]
FIG. 20 shows the fraud & prize winning monitoring process (steps S302, S304, S306) in the above-described prize opening switch / state monitoring process. This fraud & prize winning monitoring process is a process performed on each of the two large prize opening switches 38a of the special variable prize winning device 38 and the start opening 2 switch 37a of the normal variation winning prize device 37. With regard to the big prize opening (special variable prize winning device 38) and the ordinary electric power (ordinary variable prize winning device 37), since it is easy to perform fraud in which the open / close member is forcibly opened and a game ball is inserted and the prize ball is paid out, detection of the winning is performed. In addition to monitoring fraud.

  In this fraud & prize winning monitoring process, first, the fraud monitoring period flag of the winning prize switch subject to error monitoring is checked (step S321), and it is determined whether it is during the fraud monitoring period (step S322). The fraud monitoring period is a period other than during the special game state in which the special variable prize device 38 is opened when the prize monitor switch for error monitoring is the large prize prize switch 38a. In the case of the mouth 2 switch 37a, it is a period other than the state in which the opening control of the normal variation winning device 37 is executed based on the hit of the usual figure.

  If it is the fraud monitoring period (step S322; Y), it is determined whether or not there is an input to the target prize opening switch (step S323). When there is no input to the target prize opening switch (step S323; N), the target notification timer update information is loaded (step S332). Further, when there is an input to the target winning opening switch (step S323; Y), the target illegal winning number is updated by +1 (step S324), and the updated illegal winning number is equal to or larger than the number of fraud determinations to be monitored. It is determined whether or not there is (step S325).

In the present embodiment, the number of fraud occurrence determinations is set to 5 regardless of the type of winning prize switch to be monitored for error, but the number of fraud occurrences defines a different number for each kind of winning prize switch. You can also.
The number of judgments is set to five. For example, when a large winning opening in an open state is converted to a closed state, a game ball is sandwiched between door members of the large winning opening, and the gaming ball is valid for the large winning opening switch This is to prevent the player from judging that the player has won a prize or the noise has been added to the signal, and not to judge it as an error easily.

If the number of fraudulent winnings is not equal to or greater than the number of fraud determinations to be monitored (step S325; N), a winning mouth monitoring table for the target winning mouth switch is prepared (step S330). In the winning mouth monitoring table (illegal monitoring table) prepared in the winning mouth switch / status monitoring process, the monitoring switch bit indicating the position of data for determining whether or not there is an input to the target switch, the lower address of the fraud monitoring information , The lower address of the illegal winning number area, the illegal winning error notification command, the illegal winning number upper limit value (number of fraud occurrence determination), the winning mouth switch table address, and information on notification timer update information (permission / update) are defined. .
If the number of fraudulent winnings is equal to or greater than the number of fraud determinations to be monitored (step S325; Y), the number of fraudulent winnings is limited to the number of fraud determinations (step S326) and the initial value is stored in the target fraud winning notification timer area. (For example, 60000 milliseconds) is saved (step S327). Next, a target fraud occurrence command is prepared (step S328), a fraud winning flag is prepared as a fraud flag (step S329), and the prepared fraud flag is compared with the value of the target fraud flag area (step S340). ).

  On the other hand, if it is not during the fraud monitoring period (step S322; N), a winning opening monitoring table for the target winning opening switch is prepared (step S330), and a winning number counter updating process (step S331) for setting a winning ball is performed. Do. Then, the target notification timer update information is loaded (step S332), and whether or not the notification timer is permitted to be updated is determined (step S333). If the notification timer update is not permitted (step S333; N), the fraud & prize winning monitoring process is terminated. If the notification timer is allowed to be updated (step S333; Y), if the target notification timer is not 0, -1 is updated (step S334). Note that the minimum value of the notification timer is set to zero.

  The update of the notification timer is permitted when the winning port switch subject to error monitoring is one large winning port switch 38a, and is not permitted when the winning port switch subject to error monitoring is the other large winning port switch 38a. As a result, it is possible to prevent the notification timer from being updated twice as often as the unauthorized notification about the special variable prize-winning device 38, and to be up in half of the specified time (for example, 60000 milliseconds). . Note that when the winning port switch subject to error monitoring is the start port 2 switch 37a, the update of the notification timer is always permitted.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether the value of the notification timer is 0 (step S335). If the value is not 0 (step S335; N), that is, if the time has not expired, the fraud & prize winning monitoring process is terminated. If the value is 0 (step S335; Y), that is, if the time is up or has already been up, a target fraud cancel command is prepared (step S336), and the fraudulent winning cancel flag is set as the fraud flag. Preparation is made (step S337). And it is determined whether it is the moment when the value of the notification timer becomes 0 (step S338).

  When it is the moment when the value of the notification timer becomes 0 (step S338; Y), that is, when the value of the notification timer becomes 0 in the present fraud & winning monitoring process, the target number of illegal winnings is cleared ( In step S339, the prepared illegal flag is compared with the value of the target illegal flag area (step S340). Further, when it is not the moment when the value of the notification timer becomes 0 (step S338; N), that is, when the value of the notification timer becomes 0 in the previous fraud & winning monitoring process, the prepared fraud flag is targeted. The value is compared with the value of the illegal flag area (step S340).

  Then, if the prepared fraud flag matches the value of the target fraud flag area (step S340; Y), the fraud & prize winning monitoring process is terminated. If the prepared illegal flag does not match the value of the target illegal flag area (step S340; N), the prepared illegal flag is saved in the target illegal flag area (step S341), and an effect command setting process is performed. (Step S342), the fraud & prize winning monitoring process is terminated. Through the above processing, an error notification command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 when an error occurs, and an illegal winning error cancel command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 when the error is canceled, so that the start and end of error notification are set. Will be.

[Winner counter update process]
FIG. 21 shows the winning number counter updating process (steps S308 and S331) in the winning opening switch / state monitoring process and the fraud & winning monitoring process described above. In this winning number counter updating process, first, the number of winning port switches to be monitored is acquired from the winning port monitoring table (step S351), and whether or not there is an input to the target winning port switch (more precisely, an input change). Determination is made (step S352). In the winning table of the winning port monitoring table (illegal monitoring table) prepared in the winning port switch / status monitoring process, the monitoring switch bit, Information on the lower address of the winning number counter area 1 and the lower address of the winning number counter area 2 is defined.

  If there is no input to the target winning opening switch (step S352; N), the table address is updated to the address of the next record (step S361), and it is determined whether monitoring of all the switches has been completed (step S362). If there is an input to the target winning opening switch (step S352; Y), the value of the target winning number counter area 1 is loaded (step S353), and the loaded value is updated by +1 (step S354). It is determined whether an overflow occurs (step S355). If no overflow has occurred (step S355; N), the updated value is saved in the winning number counter area 1 (step S356), and the value of the target winning number counter area 2 is loaded (step S357). ). If an overflow occurs (step S355; Y), the value of the target winning number counter area 2 is loaded (step S357). In this embodiment, in step S354, the counter for prize balls (payout command transmission) is updated. The counter size is 2 bytes (range 0-65535).

  After the value of the target winning number counter area 2 is loaded (step S357), the loaded value is updated by +1 (step S358), and it is determined whether it overflows (step S359). If no overflow has occurred (step S359; N), the updated value is saved in the winning number counter area 2 (step S360), and the table address is updated to the address of the next record (step S361). Then, it is determined whether monitoring of all the switches has been completed (step S362). If an overflow occurs (step S359; Y), the table address is updated to the address of the next record (step S361), and it is determined whether monitoring of all switches has been completed (step S362). In the present embodiment, in step S358, the counter for the main prize ball signal is updated. The counter size is 1 byte (range 0-255).

  When monitoring of all the switches has not been completed (step S362; N), the process returns to the process of determining whether there is an input to the target winning opening switch (step S352). If all the switches have been monitored (step S362; Y), the winning number counter updating process is terminated. As a result of the above processing, the winning number counter areas 1 and 2 are updated based on winning in the winning area and the winning information is stored.

[Start port error monitoring process]
FIG. 22 shows the start port error monitoring process (step S309) in the above-described winning opening switch / state monitoring process. In this starting port error monitoring process, first, it is determined whether or not there is an input to the starting port 1 switch 36a (step S371). When it is determined that there is no input to the start port 1 switch 36a (step S371; N), it is determined whether there is an input to the start port 3 switch 97a (step S375), and there is an input to the start port 1 switch 36a. Is determined (step S371; Y), it is determined whether the previous winning is also a winning to the first starting opening (first starting winning opening 36) (step S372).

In step S372, when it is determined that the previous winning is also a winning at the first starting opening (first starting winning opening 36) (step S372; Y), that is, the game ball is placed in the first starting prize in the winning device 90. If it is not distributed alternately between the mouth 36 and the second start winning prize port 97, the value of the consecutive winning number area is updated by +1 (step S373), and the value of the consecutive winning number area is the upper limit value (this embodiment). In the case of (4), it is determined whether the number is equal to or greater (step S374). When it is determined that the value of the continuous winning number area is equal to or greater than the upper limit value (step S374; Y), the process proceeds to step S379, and it is determined that the value of the continuous winning number area is not equal to or greater than the upper limit value. In (Step S374; N), it is determined whether or not there is an input to the start port 3 switch 97a (Step S375).
On the other hand, if it is determined in step S372 that the previous prize was not a prize at the first start opening (first start prize opening 36) (step S372; N), 1 is saved in the continuous winning number area ( In step S384), the start port 1 winning information is saved in the start port determination data area (step S385), and it is determined whether there is an input to the start port 3 switch 97a (step S375).

If it is determined in step S375 that there is no input to the start port 3 switch 97a (step S375; N), it is determined whether the start port error notification timer is 0 (step S388).
On the other hand, if it is determined in step S375 that there is an input to the starting port 3 switch 97a (step S375; Y), it is determined whether the previous winning is also a winning to the third starting port (second starting winning port 97). (Step S376).

  In step S376, when it is determined that the previous winning is also a winning at the third starting opening (second starting winning opening 97) (step S376; Y), that is, the game ball is placed in the first starting prize in the winning device 90. If it is not distributed alternately between the mouth 36 and the second start winning prize port 97, the value of the continuous winning number area is updated by +1 (step S377), and the value of the continuous winning number area is the upper limit (this embodiment). In the case of (4), it is determined whether or not (step S378). If it is determined that the value of the continuous winning number area is not equal to or greater than the upper limit value (step S378; N), it is determined whether the start port error notification timer is 0 (step S388), and the value of the continuous winning number area is When it is determined that the upper limit value is exceeded (step S378; Y), the process proceeds to step S379.

In step S379, the value of the continuous winning number area is kept at the upper limit (step 379).
Next, an initial value (for example, 60 seconds) is saved in the start port error notification timer region (step S380), an error occurrence flag is saved in the start port error flag region (step S381), and a start port error generation command is prepared. (Step S382), an effect command setting process (Step S383) is performed, and the start port error monitoring process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S376 that the previous winning was not the third starting opening (second starting winning opening 97) (step S376; N), 1 is saved in the continuous winning number area ( In step S386), the start port 3 winning information is saved in the start port determination data area (step S387), and it is determined whether the start port error notification timer is 0 (step S388).
If it is determined in step S388 that the start port error notification timer is 0 (step S388; Y), the start port error monitoring process is terminated.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step S388 that the start port error notification timer is not 0 (step S388; N), the start port error notification timer is updated by -1 (step S389), and the start port error notification timer is 0. (Step S390).

If it is determined in step S390 that the start port error notification timer is not 0 (step S390; N), the start port error monitoring process is terminated.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step S390 that the start port error notification timer is 0 (step S390; Y), a normal flag is saved in the start port error flag area (step S391), and the start port error cancel command is saved. Is prepared (step S392), an effect command setting process (step S393) is performed, and the start port error monitoring process is terminated.
The winning device 90 is configured so that the game balls are alternately distributed to the first starting port (first starting winning port 36) and the third starting port (second starting winning port 97). When winning continuously at the starting port, there is a possibility of failure of the winning device 90 or an illegal winning due to a thread fishing ball or the like, so this is checked in the starting port error monitoring process. In the present embodiment, an error is handled when winning the same starting port four times in succession.

[Game machine status check processing]
FIG. 23 shows the gaming machine state check process (steps S312, S314, S317) in the above-described winning opening switch / state monitoring process. In this gaming machine state check process, first, a state monitoring table corresponding to the state scan counter is acquired (step S401), and it is determined whether the signal to be monitored is on (step S402).
Information corresponding to the state scan counter is defined in the state monitoring table (the gaming machine state monitoring table prepared in the prize opening switch / state monitoring process). This information includes, for example, the lower address of the start address of the status monitoring area, the lower address of the port input status area of the switch control area where the target signal information is stored, mask data for extracting only the bits of the target signal, and the signal ON judgment data, status off command (in case of error system, error notification end command), status on command (in case of error system, error notification start command), status off monitoring timer comparison value, status on monitoring timer A comparison value is included.

  If the target signal is not on (step S402; N), a state off flag is prepared as a state flag (step S403), and a target state off command is acquired and prepared (step S404). Thereafter, a target state off monitoring timer comparison value is acquired (step S405), and the value of the target signal control region is compared with the current signal state (step S409). The case where the target signal is not ON (step S402; N) is a state indicating that the error signal is not an error (normal), and is a state indicating that the signal from the touch switch is not touched. is there.

  On the other hand, when the target signal is on (step S402; Y), a state on flag is prepared as a state flag (step S406), and a target state on command is acquired and prepared (step S407). Thereafter, the target state on-monitoring timer comparison value is acquired (step S408), and the value of the target signal control region is compared with the current signal state (step S409). The case where the target signal is ON (step S402; Y) is a state indicating that an error signal is an error (abnormal or illegal), and that the signal from the touch switch is touched. It is the state which shows.

  If the value of the target signal control area matches the current signal state (step S409; Y), that is, if the signal state has not changed, the target state monitoring timer is updated by +1 (step S412). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the target state monitoring timer is equal to or greater than the monitoring timer comparison value (step S413). If the value of the target signal control area does not match the current signal state (step S409; N), that is, if the signal state changes, the current signal state is saved in the target signal control area ( Step S410). Then, the target state monitoring timer is cleared (step S411), the target state monitoring timer is updated by one (step S412), and it is determined whether or not the value of the target state monitoring timer is equal to or greater than the monitoring timer comparison value ( Step S413).

  If the value of the target state monitoring timer is not equal to or greater than the monitoring timer comparison value (step S413; N), the gaming machine state check process is terminated. If the value of the target state monitoring timer is equal to or greater than the monitoring timer comparison value (step S413; Y), the state monitoring timer is updated by -1 and is kept at the comparison value -1 (step S414). The state flag thus compared is compared with the value of the target state flag region (step S415).

  If the prepared state flag matches the value of the target state flag area (step S415; Y), the gaming machine state check process ends. If the prepared state flag and the value of the target state flag area do not match (step S415; N), the prepared state flag is saved in the target state flag area (step S416), and the production command setting process is performed. (Step S417), and the gaming machine state check process is terminated. Accordingly, the state off command prepared in step S404 or the state on command prepared in S407 is transmitted to the effect control device 300.

[Payout busy signal check processing]
FIG. 24 shows the payout busy signal check process (step S318) in the above-described winning opening switch / state monitoring process. In this payout busy signal check process, first, it is determined whether or not the payout busy signal input from the payout control device 200 is on (step S421). The payout busy signal is turned on when the payout control device 200 cannot start payout control.

  When the payout busy signal is on (step S421; Y), a busy state flag is prepared as a state flag (step S422), and an on-determined monitoring timer comparison value (for example, 32 milliseconds) is set (step S423). Then, it is determined whether the value of the busy signal state area matches the state of the current signal (step S426). If the payout busy signal is not on (step S421; N), an idle state flag is prepared as a state flag (step S424), and an off confirmation monitoring timer comparison value (for example, 32 milliseconds) is set (step S425). ), It is determined whether the value of the busy signal state area matches the state of the current signal (step S426). This makes it possible to check whether the same state continues for a plurality of timer interruptions.

  If the value of the busy signal state area does not match the state of the current signal (step S426; N), the current signal state is saved in the busy signal state area (step S427), and the busy signal monitoring timer is cleared to 0. (Step S428), the busy signal monitoring timer is updated by one (Step S429). When the value of the busy signal state area matches the state of the current signal (step S426; Y), the busy signal monitoring timer is updated by +1 (step S429).

  Next, it is determined whether the value of the busy signal monitoring timer is equal to or greater than the monitoring timer comparison value set in step S423 or step S425 (step S430). The payout busy signal check process is terminated. If it is equal to or greater than the monitoring timer comparison value (step S430; Y), the busy signal monitoring timer is updated by -1 and kept at the comparison value -1 (step S431), and prepared in step S422 or step S424. The status flag is saved in the payout busy signal flag area (step S432), and the payout busy signal check process is terminated.

By this processing, the busy signal status is set based on the payout busy signal. At this time, even if the state of the payout busy signal changes, the busy signal status is not changed immediately. It is hard to be affected by such as.
Further, since the busy signal status is cleared when the power is turned on, the busy signal status is not set and is in an indefinite state until one of the signal states continues for the signal determination time. Thus, when a power failure occurs and the power supply recovers from the power failure, even if a status signal indicating that the payout control can be started is output from the payout control device 200, the prize ball command is immediately issued. In response to the fact that a state signal indicating that the payout control can be started from the payout control device 200 is continuously output for a predetermined period of time, a prize ball command is sent to the payout control device 200. Will be sent. As a result, the payout control device 200 receives the prize ball command and knows that the payout process can be performed immediately, and then transmits the prize ball command, and the payout control corresponding to the prize ball command is performed. It can be prevented from being broken.

[Special Figure Game Processing]
Next, the details of the special game process (step S109) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described. In the special figure game process, the input of the start port 1 switch 36a, the start port 2 switch 37a, and the start port 3 switch 97a are monitored, the entire process related to the special figure variation display game is controlled, and the special figure display is set.

As shown in FIG. 25, in the special figure game process, first, a start port switch monitoring process (step A1) for monitoring a winning of the start port 1 switch 36a, the start port 2 switch 37a, and the start port 3 switch 97a is performed. In the start port switch monitoring process, when a game ball wins in the first start winning port 36, the second start winning port 97, and the normal variation winning device 37, various random numbers (such as a big hit random number) are extracted, A game result preliminary determination is performed in advance to determine a game result based on a prize in a stage before the start of the special figure variation display game based on the game.
Next, a special winning opening switch monitoring process (step A2) is performed. In this special winning opening switch monitoring process, a process for monitoring the detection of a game ball at the special winning prize switch 38a provided in the special variable winning apparatus 38 is performed.

  Next, if the special figure game processing timer is not "0", -1 is updated (step A3). The minimum value of the special figure game processing timer is set to “0”. Then, it is determined whether the value of the special figure game process timer is “0” (step A4). When the value of the special figure game process timer is “0” (step A4; Y), that is, when the time is up or has already expired, the process is referred to branch to the process corresponding to the special figure game process number. The special figure game sequence branch table to be set is set in the register (step A5), and the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the special figure game process number is acquired using the table (step A6). Then, a subroutine call is made according to the special figure game process number (step A7).

In step A7, when the special figure game process number is “0”, the fluctuation start of the special figure fluctuation display game is monitored, the fluctuation start setting of the special figure fluctuation display game, the setting of the production, A special figure routine process (step A8) for setting information necessary for the process is performed.
In step A7, when the special figure game process number is “1”, special figure changing process for setting a special figure stop display time, setting information necessary for performing the special figure display process, etc. (Step A9) is performed.

In step A7, if the special figure game process number is “2”, if the game result of the special figure fluctuation display game is a big hit, the fanfare command is set according to the type of the big hit, and the big winning opening for each big hit A special chart display process (step A10) is performed for setting the fanfare time according to the release pattern and setting information necessary for performing the fanfare / interval process.
In step A7, when the special figure game process number is “3”, setting of the opening time of the big prize opening, updating of the number of times of opening, setting of information necessary for performing the process during opening of the big prize opening, etc. are performed. Processing during fanfare / interval (step A11) is performed.

In step A7, when the special figure game process number is “4”, if the big hit round is not the final round, the interval command is set, while if it is the final round, the ending command is set, A special winning opening opening process (step A12) for setting information necessary for performing the ball process is performed.
In step A7, when the special figure game process number is “5”, if the big hit round is the final round, a process for setting a time for discharging the remaining balls in the big winning opening and a big hit end process are performed. A big winning opening remaining ball process (step A13) for setting information necessary for the execution is performed.
In step A7, when the special figure game process number is “6”, a big hit end process (step A14) for setting information necessary for performing the special figure ordinary process is performed.

  Then, after preparing the table for controlling the fluctuation | variation of the special figure 1 indicator 51a (step A15), the symbol fluctuation | variation control process (step A16) which concerns on the special figure 1 indicator 51a is performed. And after preparing the table for controlling the fluctuation | variation of the special figure 2 indicator 51b (step A17), the symbol fluctuation control process (step A18) which concerns on the special figure 2 indicator 51b is performed, and a special figure game process is complete | finished. To do. On the other hand, if the value of the special figure game process timer is not “0” in step A4 (step A4; N), that is, if the time is not up, the process proceeds to step A15 and the subsequent processes are performed. Do.

  The jackpot is a special result that accompanies the operation of the condition device. The condition device is activated when a big hit occurs in the special figure fluctuation display game (stop display of the big hit symbol). It means that a specific flag for continuously operating the variable winning device 38 is set (actual accessory continuous operation device is operated). The “condition device” may be software means such as a flag that is turned on / off in software as described above, or may be hardware means such as a switch that is electrically turned on / off. In addition, the “condition device” is a term generally used in the field of pachinko gaming machines as a device whose operation is a necessary condition for continuous operation of the electric accessory, and the same applies to this specification. It is used as a term having a meaning.

[Starter switch monitoring process]
Next, details of the start port switch monitoring process (step A1) in the above-described special figure game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 26, in the start port switch monitoring process, first, a first start port (first start winning port 36) winning monitor table is prepared (step A101), and a hard random number acquisition process (step A102) is performed. In this hard random number acquisition process, when there is an input to the target start port switch (start port 1 switch 36a in this case), the big hit random number extracted to the latch register is loaded and prepared, and the target start port is sent. The information indicating that there has been a winning is set. Thereafter, it is determined whether or not there is a prize at the first start port which is the start port of FIG. 1 (step A103).
If it is determined in step A103 that there is no winning at the first start opening (step A103; N), the process proceeds to step A109 and the subsequent processes are performed.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step A103 that there is a winning at the first start opening (step A103; Y), it is determined whether or not the special figure is running shortly (under normal power support) (step A104). ).

If it is determined in step A104 that the special drawing time is not short (step A104; N), the process proceeds to step A107, and the subsequent processes are performed.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step A104 that the special drawing time is short (step A104; Y), a right-handed instruction notification command is prepared (step A105), and an effect command setting process (step A106) is performed. . That is, if the time is short, the right-handed instruction notification command is prepared (step A105) and the effect command setting process (step A106) is performed regardless of the probability state of the special figure variation display game. In the case of the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the first starting port (first starting winning port 36) is not left unless it is left-handed, and the normal variation winning device 37 is not winning unless it is right-handed. Therefore, in the short-time state, a right-handed game is more advantageous than left-handed, but when there is a winning at the first starting port during the short-time state (that is, when left-handed during the short-time state). Is configured such that a right-handed instruction notification command is transmitted to the effect control device 300, and a notification (warning) for instructing to right-hand is performed by the effect control device 300.
Next, after preparing a table for setting information on hold by the first start opening (first start winning opening 36) (step A107), special figure start opening switch common processing (step A108) is performed.

Next, a second start opening (ordinary variable winning device 37) winning monitoring table is prepared (step A109), and a hard random number acquisition process (step A110) is performed. In this hard random number acquisition process, when there is an input to the target start port switch (here, the start port 2 switch 37a), the jackpot random number extracted to the latch register is loaded and prepared, and the target start port is sent. The information indicating that there has been a prize is set. Thereafter, it is determined whether or not there is a prize at the second start port, which is the start port of FIG. 2 (step A111).
If it is determined in step A111 that there is no winning at the second start opening (step A111; N), the process proceeds to step A116 and the subsequent processes are performed.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step A111 that there is a winning at the second starting port (step A111; Y), the ordinary electric accessory (ordinary variable winning device 37) is operating, that is, normal variation. If the winning device 37 is activated to determine whether or not the game ball is open (step A112), and if it is determined that the ordinary electric accessory is operating (step A112; Y), the step The process proceeds to A114, and the subsequent processes are performed. On the other hand, if it is determined in step A112 that the ordinary electric accessory is not in operation (step A112; N), it is determined whether or not a normal electric power fraud has occurred (step A113).

  In step A113, it is determined that fraud is occurring when the number of fraudulent winnings to the normal variation winning device 37 is equal to or greater than the fraud determination number (for example, 5). The normal variation winning device 37 cannot win a game ball in the closed state, and can win a game ball only in the open state. Therefore, when the game ball wins in the closed state, it is a case where some abnormality or fraud has occurred. When there is a game ball won in such a closed state, the number is counted as the number of illegal wins. Then, when the number of illegal winnings counted in this way is equal to or larger than a predetermined fraud occurrence determination number (upper limit value), it is determined that fraud has occurred.

  If it is determined in step A113 that the power transmission fraud has not occurred (step A113; N), a table for setting information on hold by the second start opening (ordinary variable winning device 37) is prepared (step A114). After performing the special figure starting port switch common process (step A115), the process proceeds to the process of step A116, and the subsequent processes are performed. Further, when it is determined in step A113 that the power transmission fraud is occurring (step A113; Y), the process proceeds to step A116 and the subsequent processes are performed.

Next, a winning start monitoring table for the third starting opening (second starting winning opening 97) is prepared (step A116), and a hard random number acquisition process (step A117) is performed. In this hard random number acquisition processing, when there is an input to the target start port switch (start port 3 switch 97a in this case), the big hit random number extracted to the latch register is loaded and prepared, and the target start port is sent. The information indicating that there has been a winning is set. Thereafter, it is determined whether or not there is a winning at the third starting port which is the starting port of FIG. 2 (step A118).
If it is determined in step A118 that there is no winning at the third starting port (step A118; N), the starting port switch monitoring process is terminated.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step A118 that there is a winning at the third starting port (step A118; Y), it is determined whether or not the special drawing is being shortened (medium power support is in progress) (step A119). ).

If it is determined in step A119 that the special drawing time is not short (step A119; N), the process proceeds to step A122 and the subsequent processes are performed.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step A119 that the special drawing time is short (step A119; Y), a right-handed instruction notification command is prepared (step A120), and an effect command setting process (step A121) is performed. . That is, if the time is short, regardless of the probability state of the special figure variation display game, a right-handed instruction notification command is prepared (step A120), and an effect command setting process (step A121) is performed. In the case of the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the third starting port (second starting winning port 97) will not win unless it is left-handed, and the normal variable winning device 37 will not win if it is not right-handed. Therefore, in the short-time state, a right-handed game is more advantageous than the left-handed state, but when the third starting port is won during the short-time state (that is, when left-handed during the short-time state). Is configured such that a right-handed instruction notification command is transmitted to the effect control device 300, and a notification (warning) for instructing to right-hand is performed by the effect control device 300.
Next, after preparing a table for setting information on hold by the third start port (second start winning port 97) (step A122), the special start port switch common processing (step A123) is performed to monitor the start port switch. The process ends.

[Hard random number acquisition processing]
Next, the details of the hard random number acquisition process (steps A102, A110, A117) in the above-described start port switch monitoring process will be described. As shown in FIG. 27, in the hard random number acquisition process, first, the first starting port (first starting winning port 36), the second starting port (ordinary variable winning device 37), and the third starting port (second starting winning port). No winning information of the monitoring target starting port is set (step A131), and the monitoring target starting port among the starting port 1 switch 36a, the starting port 2 switch 37a, and the starting port 3 switch 97a is set. It is determined whether or not there is an input to the switch (step A132).
When there is no input to the monitoring target start port switch (step A132; N), the hard random number acquisition process is terminated.
On the other hand, when there is an input to the monitored start port switch (step A132; Y), the random number latch register status is read (step A133), and it is determined whether there is latch data in the target random number latch register (step A134). .

If there is no latch data in the target random number latch register (step A134; N), that is, if no random number has been extracted, the hard random number acquisition process is terminated.
When there is latch data in the target random number latch register (step A134; Y), the big hit random number extracted in the monitored hard random number latch register is loaded and prepared (step A135). Of the first starting port (first starting winning port 36), the second starting port (ordinary variable winning device 37), and the third starting port (second starting winning port 97), the monitoring target starting port is selected. Existence information is set (step A136), and the hard random number acquisition process is terminated.

[Special figure start port switch common processing]
Next, details of the special figure start port switch common process (steps A108, A115, A123) in the above-described start port switch monitoring process will be described. The special figure start port switch common process is a process performed in common for each input when there is an input from the start port 1 switch 36a, the start port 2 switch 37a, or the start port 3 switch 97a.

As shown in FIG. 28, in the special figure start port switch common process, first, among the start port 1 switch 36a, the start port 2 switch 37a, and the start port 3 switch 97a, the number of winnings to the monitored start port switch The start port signal output count, which is the number of times information related to the management device external to the gaming machine 10, is output (step A141), the loaded value is updated by 1 (step A142), and the output count overflows. Is determined (step A143).
If the number of outputs does not overflow (step A143; N), the updated value is saved in the starter signal output number area of the RWM (step A144), and the process proceeds to step A145.
On the other hand, if the number of outputs overflows (step A143; Y), the process proceeds to step A145. In the present embodiment, values from “0” to “255” can be stored in the start port signal output frequency area. When the loaded value is “255”, the updated value becomes “0” by +1 update, and it is determined that the output count overflows, so that it is not saved.

Next, of the start port 1 switch 36a, the start port 2 switch 37a, and the start port 3 switch 97a, it is determined whether the number of special figure reservations (starting memory) to be updated corresponding to the monitored start port switch is less than the upper limit value. Determine (step A145).
When the number of special figure hold to be updated is not less than the upper limit value (step A145; N), the special figure start port switch common process is terminated.
If the number of special figure reservations to be updated is less than the upper limit (step A145; Y), update the number of special figure reservations to be updated (number of special figure 1 or number 2) (+1) ( Step A146), a decoration special figure hold number command corresponding to the monitoring target start opening switch and the special figure hold number is prepared (step A147), and a production command setting process (step A148) is performed, and the target start opening winning flag is set. Is saved (step A149). Subsequently, the address of the random number storage area corresponding to the start port switch to be monitored and the number of reserved special figures is calculated (step A150), and the big hit random number prepared in the hard random number acquisition process of steps A102, A110, A117 is calculated as RWM. Is saved in the big hit random number storage area (step A151). Next, the jackpot symbol random number of the starter switch to be monitored is extracted, prepared (step A152), and saved in the jackpot symbol random number storage area of the RWM (step A153). This jackpot symbol random number is used in the special figure hold information determination process (step A157).

Next, the fluctuation pattern random numbers (in the present embodiment, fluctuation pattern random numbers 1 to 2) are saved in the fluctuation pattern random number storage area of the corresponding RWM (step A154).
Next, the address of the change order flag storage area corresponding to the total number of the special figure 1 hold and the special figure 2 hold (any place from the hold 1 to 8) is calculated (step A155), and the calculated area is the target. The change order flag (see Fig. 1 or Fig. 2) is saved (step A156), the special figure hold information determination process (step A157) is performed, and the special figure start port switch common process is terminated.

  Here, the game control device 100 (RAM 111C) extracts a predetermined random number based on the inflow of game balls into the start winning area of the first start winning port 36, the second start winning port 97, and the normal variable winning device 37. A start storage means for storing a predetermined number as an upper limit as start storage that is the right to execute the variable display game is provided. In addition, the start storage means (game control device 100) is a first random number value extracted based on the winning of a game ball to the first start winning opening 36 which is the starting opening of FIG. 2nd start with a predetermined number as the upper limit of various random numbers extracted based on the winning of game balls to the second start winning opening 97 which is the starting opening of FIG. Memorize as memory.

[Special figure hold information judgment processing]
Next, the details of the special figure hold information determination process (step A157) in the above special figure start port switch common process will be described. The special figure hold information determination process is a prefetching process for determining the result related information corresponding to the start memory before the start timing of the special figure variation display game based on the corresponding start memory.

As shown in FIG. 29, first, a low-probability determination flag is prepared (step A161), and pre-reading for determining whether or not the jackpot random number value matches with the jackpot determination value (big hit low-probability determination value). A jackpot determination process (step A162) is performed, and it is determined whether a jackpot is set as a determination result (step A163).
If it is determined in step A163 that the jackpot is set as the determination result (step A163; Y), a jackpot symbol random number check table corresponding to the target start-up switch is set (step A164), and prepared in step A152. Stop symbol information corresponding to the jackpot symbol random number is acquired (step A165), and the process proceeds to step A167.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step A163 that the big hit is not set as the determination result (step A163; N), that is, when the deviation is set as the determination result, the stop symbol information of the deviation is set (step A166). ), The process proceeds to step A167.

In step A167, the stop symbol information acquired in step A165 or the stop symbol information set in step A166 is saved in the symbol information area (step A167).
Next, a look-ahead stop symbol command (low probability) corresponding to the target start port switch and stop symbol information is prepared (step A168), and an effect command setting process (step A169) is performed.
Next, a high-probability determination flag is prepared (step A170), and a read-ahead jackpot determination process (step A171) for determining whether or not the jackpot random number value matches the jackpot determination value (big hit high probability determination value). And determine whether or not the big hit is set as the determination result (step A172).
If it is determined in step A172 that the jackpot is set as the determination result (step A172; Y), the jackpot symbol random number check table corresponding to the target starter switch is set (step A173), and preparation is performed in step A152. The stop symbol information corresponding to the jackpot symbol random number obtained is acquired (step A174), and the process proceeds to step A176.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step A172 that the big hit is not set as the determination result (step A172; N), that is, when the deviation is set as the determination result, the stop symbol information of the deviation is set (step A175), the process proceeds to step A176.

In step A176, it is determined whether or not the special figure has a high probability (step A176).
If it is determined in step A176 that the special figure is not in high probability (step A176; N), the process proceeds to step A178.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step A176 that the special symbol has a high probability (step A176; Y), the stop symbol acquired in step A174 is stored in the symbol information area where the stop symbol information is saved in step A167. The information or the stopped symbol information set in step A175 is overwritten and saved (step A177), and the process proceeds to step A178. The stop symbol information saved in the symbol information area is used for prefetching the variation pattern.

In step A178, a pre-read stop symbol command (high probability) corresponding to the target start opening switch and stop symbol information is prepared (step A178), and an effect command setting process (step A179) is performed. Thus, in this embodiment, every time the special figure hold information determination process is executed, the effect control device 300 transmits the result determined with the jackpot low probability determination value and the result determined with the jackpot high probability determination value. Is done.
Next, special figure information setting processing (step A180) for setting special figure information, which is a parameter for setting a fluctuation pattern, is performed, and fluctuation pattern setting processing for setting the fluctuation mode of the special figure fluctuation display game is performed (step S180). A181).

  Thereafter, a pre-reading variation pattern command corresponding to the variation pattern number indicating the variation pattern in the variation mode of the special figure variation display game is prepared (step A182), an effect command setting process is performed (step A183), and the special figure hold information determination is performed. The process ends. The special figure information setting process in step A180 and the variation pattern setting process in step A181 are the same as the processes executed at the start of the special figure fluctuation display game in the special figure ordinary process.

With the above processing, the prefetch stop symbol command including the result of the special figure variation display game based on the start memory to be prefetched and the prefetch variation pattern command including the information of the variation pattern in the special figure variation display game based on the start memory are obtained. It is prepared and transmitted to the production control device 300. As a result, the determination result (prefetch result) of the result related information corresponding to the start memory (whether it is a big hit or the type of the fluctuation pattern) is controlled before the start timing of the special figure change display game based on the corresponding start memory. The device 300 can be notified, and in particular, by changing the decoration special figure start memory display displayed on the display device 41, the result related information is given to the player before the start timing of the special figure variable display game. It is possible to notify.
That is, the game control device 100 determines a random number stored as the start memory in the start winning storage means (game control device 100) before the execution of the variable display game based on the start memory (for example, whether a special result is obtained). (Determining whether or not, etc.) Pre-determining means. Note that the time when the random number value stored in correspondence with the start memory is determined in advance is not only at the start winning time when the start memory is generated, but any time before the variable display game based on the start memory is performed. Good.

[Look-ahead jackpot judgment processing]
Next, the details of the prefetching jackpot determination process (steps A162 and A171) in the above special figure hold information determination process will be described.
As shown in FIG. 30, in the look-ahead jackpot determination process, first, a lower limit determination value of the jackpot determination value is set (step A191), and it is determined whether the value of the target jackpot random number is less than the lower limit determination value (step A192).

In Step A192, when it is determined that the value of the big hit random number is less than the lower limit determination value (Step A192; Y), the determination result is set to a deviation (Step A197), and the prefetch big hit determination processing is terminated.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step A192 that the value of the big hit random number is not less than the lower limit determination value (step A192; N), it is determined whether the determination flag prepared immediately before the prefetch big hit determination process is a high probability determination flag. (Step A193).

If it is determined in step A193 that the flag is a high probability determination flag (step A193; Y), that is, if the prefetch jackpot determination process is the process of step A171, an upper limit determination value with a high probability is set ( Step A194), it is determined whether the value of the target big hit random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (Step A196).
On the other hand, when it is determined in step A193 that the flag is not a high probability determination flag (step A193; N), that is, when the prefetch jackpot determination process is the process of step A162, an upper limit determination value with a low probability is set. (Step A195), it is determined whether the value of the target big hit random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (Step A196).

In Step A196, when it is determined that the value of the target big hit random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (Step A196; Y), the judgment result is set as a deviation (Step A197), and the prefetch big hit determination processing is ended.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step A196 that the value of the target big hit random number is not larger than the upper limit determination value (step A196; N), that is, if it is a big hit, the big hit is set as the determination result (step A198). Then, the look-ahead jackpot determination process ends.

[Big prize opening switch monitoring process]
Next, the details of the special winning opening switch monitoring process (step A2) in the special figure game process described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 31, in the special prize opening switch monitoring process, first, it is determined whether the value of the special figure game process number is “4”, that is, whether the special prize opening process is in progress (step A201). . When the big winning opening is being opened (step A201; Y), it is determined whether there is an input to the big winning opening switch 38a (step A203). If the special winning opening is not being opened (step A201; N), it is determined whether the value of the special figure game process number is “5”, that is, whether the special winning opening remaining ball is being processed (step S201). A202).
If the winning ball remaining ball processing is in progress (step A202; Y), it is determined whether or not there is an input to the winning port switch 38a (step A203). If the winning prize remaining ball processing is not in progress (step A202; N), the winning prize switch monitoring process is terminated.
Since the special figure game process number does not shift to the next until the special figure game process timer becomes “0”, the progress of the game can be checked by the special figure game process number.

If it is determined in step A203 that there is no input to the big prize opening switch 38a (step A203; N), the big prize opening switch monitoring process is terminated.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step A203 that there is an input to the big prize opening switch 38a (step A203; Y), a big prize mouth count command is prepared (step A204), and an effect command setting process (step A205). I do.
Next, it is determined whether the value of the special figure game process number is “4”, that is, whether the special winning opening is being opened (step A206).

If it is determined in step A206 that the process for opening the big prize opening is not in progress (step A206; N), the big prize opening switch monitoring process is terminated.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step A206 that the special winning opening is being released (step A206; Y), the special winning count is updated by +1 (step A207), and the special winning count is limited to the upper limit. It is determined whether or not the value (the number of game balls that can be won in one round. For example, 9) has been reached (step A208).

When the number of the big prize winning count is not equal to or greater than the upper limit (step A208; N), the special winning prize mouth switch monitoring process is terminated.
On the other hand, when the number of the big winning mouth count becomes equal to or greater than the upper limit (step A208; Y), the special game processing timer area is cleared to 0 (step A209), and the big winning mouth switch monitoring process is terminated. This closes the grand prize opening and ends one round.

[Special figure routine processing]
Next, the details of the special figure routine process (step A8) in the special figure game process described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 32, in the special figure normal processing, first, it is determined whether both the special figure 1 hold number and the special figure 2 hold number are “0” (step A301).
In step A301, if it is determined that both the special figure 1 hold number and the special figure 2 hold number are not "0" (step A301; N), the flag is loaded from the variable order flag storage area (for the hold number total 1). Then (step A302), it is determined whether or not the current variation is that of FIG. 1 (step A303).
When it is determined in step A303 that the current variation is the variation of the special figure 1 (step A303; Y), a decorative special figure hold number command corresponding to the special figure 1 hold number is prepared (step A304). An effect command setting process (step A305) is performed, a special figure 1 fluctuation start process (step A306) is performed, and the special figure normal process is terminated. At this time, the special figure 1 hold number is not updated by -1, but in step A304, a command (decoration special figure hold number command) corresponding to the updated value of -1 is prepared.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step A303 that the current fluctuation is not the fluctuation of special figure 1 (step A303; N), that is, if the current fluctuation is a fluctuation of special figure 2, it corresponds to the special figure 2 holding number. A decoration special figure hold number command to be prepared is prepared (step A307), an effect command setting process (step A308) is performed, a special figure 2 variation start process (step A309) is performed, and the special figure ordinary process is terminated. At this time, the special figure 2 hold number is not updated by -1, but in step A307, a command (decoration special figure hold number command) corresponding to the updated value of -1 is prepared.

In step A301, if it is determined that both the special figure 1 hold number and the special figure 2 hold number are “0” (step A301; Y), it is determined whether the customer waiting demonstration has been started ( In step A310), if the customer waiting demo has not been started (step A310; N), the customer waiting demo flag is set in the customer waiting demo flag area (step A311).
Subsequently, a customer waiting demonstration command is prepared (step A312), and an effect command setting process (step A313) is performed.
Next, “0” for the special figure normal process is set as the process number (step A314), the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (step A315), and the variable symbol discrimination flag area is cleared (step A315). Step A316). Then, the fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the special prize opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step A317), and the special figure routine processing is terminated.

[Special Figure 1 Change Start Processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 variation start process (step A306) in the above-described special figure ordinary process will be described. The special figure 1 fluctuation start process is a process performed at the start of the first special figure fluctuation display game. As shown in FIG. 33 (a), first, a special figure 1 variation flag indicating the type of special figure variation display game to be executed (here, special figure 1) is saved in the variation symbol discrimination flag area (step A321). A jackpot flag 1 setting process (step A322) is performed for setting the shift information and jackpot information to the jackpot flag 1 for determining whether or not the special figure variation display game is a jackpot.

Next, after performing the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (step A323) relating to the setting of the special figure 1 stop symbol (symbol information), the special figure which sets the special symbol information which is a parameter for setting the variation pattern An information setting process (step A324) is performed to prepare a special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting information table which is a table in which information for referring to various information related to the setting of the fluctuation pattern of the first special figure fluctuation display game is set. (Step A325). Thereafter, a variation pattern setting process (step A326) for setting a variation pattern which is a variation mode in the first special figure variation display game is performed, and a variation start information setting process for setting information of variation start of the first special figure variation display game. (Step A327) is performed.
Next, “1” relating to the special figure changing process is set as the process number (step A328), and the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (step A329).

  Next, the customer waiting demo flag area is cleared (step A330), and a signal related to the start of fluctuation in FIG. 1 (for example, the special symbol 1 fluctuation signal is ON) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A331). Thereafter, the changing flag is saved in the special figure 1 fluctuation control flag area (step A332), and the initial value of the blinking control timer (timer of the blinking period of the special figure 1 display 51a) is saved in the special figure 1 blink control timer area. For example, 100 ms) is saved (step A333), an initial value (for example, 0) is saved in the special figure 1 variation symbol number area (step A334), and the special figure 1 fluctuation start process is terminated.

[Special Figure 2 Variation Start Processing]
Next, details of the special figure 2 variation start process (step A309) in the above-described special figure ordinary process will be described. The special figure 2 fluctuation start process is a process performed at the start of the second special figure fluctuation display game, and the same process as the special figure 1 fluctuation start process shown in FIG. This is for memory.

  As shown in FIG. 33 (b), first, the special figure 2 fluctuation flag indicating the type of special figure fluctuation display game to be executed (here, special figure 2) is saved in the fluctuation symbol discrimination flag area (step A341). 2. A big hit flag 2 setting process (step A342) for setting shift information and big hit information to the big hit flag 2 for determining whether or not the special figure variation display game is a big hit.

Next, after performing the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process (step A343) relating to the setting of the special figure 2 stop symbol (symbol information), the special symbol for setting the special symbol information which is a parameter for setting the variation pattern An information setting process (step A344) is performed to prepare a special figure 2 fluctuation pattern setting information table, which is a table in which information for referring to various information related to the setting of the fluctuation pattern of the second special figure fluctuation display game is set. (Step A345). Thereafter, a variation pattern setting process (step A346) for setting a variation pattern which is a variation mode in the second special figure variation display game is performed, and a variation start information setting process for setting variation start information of the second special figure variation display game. (Step A347) is performed.
Next, “1” relating to the special figure changing process is set as the process number (step A348), and the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (step A349).

  Next, the customer waiting demo flag area is cleared (step A350), and a signal related to the start of fluctuation in the special figure 2 (for example, the special symbol 2 fluctuation signal is ON) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A351). After that, the changing flag is saved in the special figure 2 fluctuation control flag area (step A352), and the initial value of the blinking control timer (timer of the blinking period of the special figure 2 display 51b) is saved in the special figure 2 blink control timer area. For example, 100 ms) is saved (step A353), an initial value (for example, 0) is saved in the special figure 2 fluctuation symbol number area (step A354), and the special figure 2 fluctuation start process is terminated.

[Big hit flag 1 setting process]
FIG. 34A shows the big hit flag 1 setting process (step A322) in the above-described special figure 1 fluctuation start process. In the big hit flag 1 setting process, first, shift information is saved in the big hit flag 1 area (step A361). Next, a big hit random number is loaded from the RWM special figure 1 big hit random number storage area (for holding number 1), prepared (step A362), and the special figure big hit random number storage area (for holding number 1) is cleared to 0 (Step A363). Note that for the number of holdings 1 is an area for storing information (random numbers or the like) about the special figure starting storage whose digestion order is the earliest (here, the earliest in the special figure 1). Thereafter, a jackpot determination process (step A364) is performed to determine whether the prepared jackpot random number value matches the jackpot determination value or not.

  If the determination result of the big hit determination process (step A364) is a big hit (step A365; Y), the big hit information is overwritten and saved in the big hit flag 1 area where the loss information is saved in step A361 (step A366). ), The big hit flag 1 setting process is terminated. On the other hand, when the determination result of the big hit determination process (step A364) is not a big hit (step A365; N), the big hit flag 1 setting process is terminated while saving the deviation information in the big hit flag 1 area.

[Big hit flag 2 setting process]
FIG. 34B shows the big hit flag 2 setting process (step A342) in the above-described special figure 2 fluctuation start process. In the big hit flag 2 setting process, first, shift information is saved in the big hit flag 2 area (step A371). Next, a big hit random number is loaded from the RWM special figure 2 big hit random number storage area (for hold number 1), prepared (step A372), and the special figure 2 big hit random number storage area (for hold number 1) is cleared to 0 (Step A372). Note that for the number of reservations 1 is an area for storing information (random number or the like) about the special figure starting storage whose digestion order is the earliest (here, the earliest in the special figure 2). Thereafter, a jackpot determination process (step A374) is performed to determine whether the prepared jackpot random number value matches the jackpot determination value or not.

  If the determination result of the big hit determination process (step A374) is a big hit (step A375; Y), the big hit information is overwritten and saved in the big hit flag 2 area where the loss information is saved in step A371 (step A376). ), The big hit flag 2 setting process is terminated. On the other hand, if the determination result of the big hit determination process (step A374) is not a big hit (step A375; N), the big hit flag 2 setting process is terminated while saving the deviation information in the big hit flag 2 area.

[Big hit judgment processing]
FIG. 35 shows the big hit determination process (steps A364 and A374) in the big hit flag 1 setting process and the big hit flag 2 setting process described above. In this jackpot determination process, first, a lower limit determination value of the jackpot determination value is set (step A381), and it is determined whether the value of the target jackpot random number is less than the lower limit determination value (step A382). The big hit means that the big hit random number matches the big hit determination value. The big hit judgment value is a plurality of consecutive values, and the big hit random number is greater than or equal to the lower limit judgment value that is the lower limit value of the big hit judgment value and less than or equal to the upper limit judgment value that is the upper limit value of the big hit judgment value It is determined that it is a big hit.
When the value of the big hit random number is less than the lower limit determination value (step A382; Y), the difference is set as the determination result (step A387), and the big hit determination process ends.

On the other hand, when the value of the big hit random number is not less than the lower limit determination value (step A382; N), it is determined whether or not the state is a high probability state (step A383).
If it is in a high probability state (step A383; Y), an upper limit determination value with a high probability is set (step A384), and it is determined whether the value of the target big hit random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (step A386). ). If not in the high probability state (step A383; N), an upper limit determination value with a low probability is set (step A385), and it is determined whether the value of the target big hit random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (step A386). .
When the value of the big hit random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (step A386; Y), the difference is set as the determination result (step A387), and the big hit determination process is terminated.
If the value of the big hit random number is not larger than the upper limit determination value (step A386; N), that is, if the big hit is a big hit, the big hit is set as the determination result (step A388), and the big hit determination process is terminated.

[Special figure 1 stop symbol setting process]
FIG. 36 shows the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (step A323) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process described above. In the special symbol 1 stop symbol setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the big hit flag 1 is a big hit (step A391). ) Is loaded with the jackpot symbol random number (step A392). Next, the special symbol 1 big hit symbol table is set (step A393), the stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded big hit symbol random number is acquired and saved in the special symbol 1 stop symbol number area (step A394). By this process, the type of special result is selected.

  Thereafter, the special symbol 1 big hit stop symbol information table is set (step A395), a stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired, and saved in the stop symbol pattern area (step A396). The stop symbol pattern is for setting a stop symbol on the special symbol display (here, the special symbol 1 indicator 51a) or a stop symbol on the display device 41. Next, round number upper limit information (in the case of this embodiment, information indicating 16R or 6R) corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the round number upper limit information area (step A397). The probability variation determination data corresponding to is acquired and saved in the probability variation determination data area (step A398), and a special decoration command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step A401). Here, the probability variation determination data is information indicating which mode to shift to after the big hit, and in the present embodiment, in Step A398, “low probability data (normal (no power transmission support))”, “high probability”. Data 1 (probability change (with normal power support)) "or" high probability data 2 (latency probability change (without general power support)) "is acquired and saved in the probability variation determination data area.

  On the other hand, when the big hit flag 1 is not big hit (step A391; N), the stop symbol number at the time of loss is saved in the special symbol 1 stop symbol number region (step A399), and the loss stop symbol pattern is saved in the stop symbol pattern region. (Step A400), a decorative special figure command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (Step A401). Through the above processing, a stop symbol corresponding to the result of the special figure variation display game is set.

  Thereafter, the decoration special figure command is saved in the decoration special figure command area (step A402), and an effect command setting process (step A403) is performed. This decoration special drawing command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 later. Then, the symbol data corresponding to the stop symbol number is saved in the test signal output data area (step A404), and the special figure 1 big hit symbol random number storage area (for holding number 1) is cleared to 0 (step A405). 1 Stops the symbol setting process.

[Special figure 2 stop symbol setting process]
FIG. 37 shows the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process (step A343) in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process described above. In the special symbol 2 stop symbol setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the big hit flag 2 is a big hit (step A411). The jackpot symbol random number is loaded from (for step A412). Next, the special figure 2 big hit symbol table is set (step A413), the stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded big hit symbol random number is acquired, and saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol number area (step A414). By this process, the type of special result is selected.

  Thereafter, the special symbol 2 big hit stop symbol information table is set (step A415), a stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired, and saved in the stop symbol pattern area (step A416). The stop symbol pattern is for setting a stop symbol on a special symbol display (here, special symbol 2 indicator 51b) or a stop symbol on the display device 41. Next, round number upper limit information (in the case of this embodiment, information indicating 16R or 6R) corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the round number upper limit information area (step A417). Is obtained and saved in the probability variation determination data area (step A418), and a special decoration command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step A421).

  On the other hand, when the big hit flag 2 is not big hit (step A411; N), the stop symbol number at the time of loss is saved in the special symbol 2 stop symbol number area (step A419), and the loss stop symbol pattern is saved in the stop symbol pattern area. (Step A420), a decorative special figure command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (Step A421). Through the above processing, a stop symbol corresponding to the result of the special figure variation display game is set.

  Thereafter, the decoration special figure command is saved in the decoration special figure command area (step A422), and an effect command setting process (step A423) is performed. This decoration special drawing command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 later. Then, the symbol data corresponding to the stop symbol number is saved in the test signal output data area (step A424), and the special figure 2 big hit symbol random number storage area (for holding number 1) is cleared to 0 (step A425). 2. The stop symbol setting process is terminated.

  That is, the game control device 100 executes the first variation display game as the variation display game based on the detection of the game ball at the first start winning award port 36, and Fluctuation display game execution means for executing the second variation display game as the variation display game based on the detection of the game ball is provided. In addition, the game control device 100 serves as a variable display game execution control unit that controls the execution of the variable display game based on the determination result by the determination unit (game control device 100).

[Special figure information setting process]
Next, details of the special figure information setting process (steps A180, A324, A344) in the special figure hold information determination process, the special figure 1 fluctuation start process, and the special figure 2 fluctuation start process described above will be described.
As shown in FIG. 38, in the special figure information setting process, first, the fluctuation group selection pointer table is set (step A431), and the fluctuation group selection pointer corresponding to the current probability state and the stop symbol pattern number is acquired (step S431). A432). Here, in the present embodiment, as the stop symbol pattern number, “0: Outlier symbol”, “1: 16R probability variation symbol”, “2: 6R probability variation symbol A”, “3: 6R probability variation symbol B”, “4: “6R probability variation symbol C” or “5: 6R normal symbol” is set. In addition, as the current probability state, “1: Normal (no power transmission support)”, “2: Probability change (with power transmission support)”, or “3: Latency probability change (without power transmission support)” is set. .

Next, it is determined whether the stop symbol pattern number is “0”, that is, whether the stop symbol pattern is an off symbol pattern (step A433).
If it is determined in step A433 that the stopped symbol pattern is not an outlier symbol pattern (step A433; N), the variation group selection pointer acquired in step A432 is saved in the variation group selection pointer area (step A435). The special figure information setting process is terminated.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step A433 that the stop symbol pattern is a disjoint symbol pattern (step A433; Y), the variation group is selected to a value corresponding to the total value of the special figure 1 hold number and the special figure 2 hold number. The pointer is updated (step A434), the updated variation group selection pointer is saved in the variation group selection pointer area (step A435), and the special figure information setting process is terminated.

Thus, in this embodiment, when the stop symbol pattern is a jackpot symbol pattern, the distribution of the variation pattern does not affect the number of holds, but when the stop symbol pattern is an outlier symbol pattern, the variation pattern Sorting affects the number of holds.
Specifically, for example, when the stop symbol pattern is a disjoint symbol pattern and the current gaming state is normal (no support for ordinary power) or latent probability change (no ordinary power support), Special figure 2 When the total number of holds is “1”, “2”, “3”, “4”, “5”, “6”, “7”, “ 8 ”, the distribution of the variation pattern is different.
In addition, when the stop symbol pattern is an off symbol pattern and the current gaming state is probabilistic (with ordinary power support), the total value of the special figure 1 hold number and the special figure 2 hold number is “1”. The distribution of the variation pattern differs depending on whether it is “2”, “3”, or “4”, “5”, “6”, “7”, “8”.

[Variation pattern setting process]
Next, the details of the above-described special figure hold information determination process, the special figure 1 fluctuation start process, and the fluctuation pattern setting process (steps A181, A326, A346) in the special figure 2 fluctuation start will be described.
As shown in FIG. 39, in the variation pattern setting process, first, a variation group address table is set (step A441), the address of the variation group table corresponding to the variation group selection pointer is acquired and prepared (step A442), The fluctuation pattern random number 1 is loaded from the fluctuation pattern random number 1 storage area (for the holding number 1) of the target (Special Figure 1 or Special Figure 2) and prepared (Step A443).

Next, a 2-byte sorting process (step A444) is performed to acquire and prepare the address of the variation pattern selection table obtained as a result of the sorting (step A445), and the target (Special Figure 1 or Special Figure 2) The fluctuation pattern random number 2 is loaded from the fluctuation pattern random number 2 storage area (for the holding number 1) and prepared (step A446).
Next, a distribution process (step A447) is performed, the fluctuation pattern number obtained as a result of the distribution is acquired, saved in the fluctuation pattern number area (step A448), and the fluctuation pattern setting process ends. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a variation pattern setting means for setting a variation pattern that is a game execution mode from among a plurality of variations.

[Variation start information setting process]
Next, details of the change start information setting process (steps A327 and A347) in the above-described special figure 1 fluctuation start process and special figure 2 fluctuation start process will be described. As shown in FIG. 40, in the change start information setting process, first, the random number storage area of the target change pattern random numbers 1 to 2 is cleared (step A451). Next, a variation time value table is set (step A452), a variation time value corresponding to the variation pattern number is acquired, and saved in the special figure game process timer area (step A453).

  Then, a variation command (MODE, ACTION) corresponding to the variation pattern number is prepared (step A454), and an effect command setting process is performed (step A455). Next, the special figure holding number corresponding to the variation symbol discrimination flag is updated by -1 (step A456), and the address of the random number storage area corresponding to the variation symbol discrimination flag is set (step A457). Next, the random number storage area is shifted (step A458), and the free area after the shift is cleared (step A459). Next, the change order flag storage area is shifted (step A460), the empty area after the shift is cleared (step A461), and the change start information setting process is terminated.

Through the above processing, information related to the start of the special figure variation display game is set. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a determination unit that determines various random values stored in the start storage unit (game control device 100). Further, the game control device 100 serves as a variation pattern determining means capable of determining a variation pattern of identification information executed in the variation display game based on the determination information of the start memory.
Information regarding the start of the special figure variation display game is transmitted to the effect control device 300 later, and the effect control device 300 responds to the determined variation pattern based on the reception of the information regarding the start of the special figure variation display game. To set the detailed contents of the decoration special map change display game. The information related to the start of the special figure variation display game includes a decoration special figure hold number command including information related to the start memory number (holding number), a decoration special figure command including information related to the stop symbol, and a fluctuation of the special figure variation display game. A variation command including information related to the pattern and a stop information command including information related to extension of the stop time are listed, and the commands are transmitted to the effect control device 300 in this order. In particular, by transmitting the decoration special figure command before the variation command, the processing in the effect control device 300 can be efficiently advanced.

[Special figure changing process]
Next, the details of the special figure changing process (step A9) in the special figure game process described above will be described.
As shown in FIG. 41, in the special figure changing process, first, a symbol stop command corresponding to the changing symbol discrimination flag is prepared (step A501), and an effect command setting process (step A502) is performed.
Next, a display time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern number is set (step A503), and the set display time is saved in the special figure game process timer area (step A504). In the case of this embodiment, when the stop symbol pattern is an outlier symbol pattern, 800 ms is set as the display time, and when the stop symbol pattern is a big hit symbol pattern, the display time is set as 2000 ms.
Next, “2” relating to the special figure display process is set as the process number (step A505), and the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (step A506).

  Next, a signal related to the end of change in Special Figure 1 (for example, special signal 1 changing signal OFF) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A507), and a signal related to the end of change in Special Figure 2 (for example, special design 2) (In-change signal OFF) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A508), and the control timer initial value is stored in the symbol determination number signal control timer area related to the number of times of execution of the special figure variable display game for output to the external information terminal. (For example, 256 milliseconds) is saved (step A509). After that, as information for control of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game in the special figure 1 display 51a, a stop flag related to the fluctuation stop in the special figure 1 display 51a is saved in the special figure 1 fluctuation control flag area (step A510). ) As the information for controlling the special figure 2 fluctuation display game in the special figure 2 display 51b, the stop flag related to the fluctuation stop in the special figure 2 display 51b is saved in the special figure 2 fluctuation control flag area (step). A511), the special figure changing process is terminated.

[Special figure display processing]
Next, details of the special figure display process (step A10) in the special figure game process described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 42, in the special figure display process, first, the big hit flag 1 set in the big hit flag 1 setting process in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process and the big hit flag 2 setting process in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process The big hit flag 2 set in step 1 is loaded (step A601), and the RWM big hit flag 1 area and the big hit flag 2 area are cleared (step A602). Then, it is determined whether or not the loaded big hit flag 2 is a big hit (step A603). (For example, the condition device operating signal ON, the accessory continuous operating device operating signal ON, and the special symbol 2 signal ON) are saved in the RWM test signal output data area (step A606). A round number upper limit value table is set (step A607).

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step A603 that the big hit flag 2 is not a big hit (step A603; N) as a result of the check of the big hit flag 2, it is determined whether the loaded big hit flag 1 is a big hit (step A604) and the big hit (step A603). When A604; Y) is determined, a test signal related to the start of the big hit (special figure 1 big hit) of the first special figure variation display game (for example, the condition device operating signal ON, the accessory continuous operating device active signal ON, The signal per special symbol is ON) is saved in the test signal output data area of the RWM (step A605), and the round number upper limit value table is set (step A607).

  After performing the process of setting the round number upper limit table (step A607), the round number upper limit value (16R or 6R in this embodiment) corresponding to the round number upper limit information is acquired, and the round number upper limit of the RWM is obtained. Save in the value area (step A608). Subsequently, a round LED pointer corresponding to the round number upper limit value information is acquired and saved in the round LED pointer area of the RWM (step A609).

  Next, a decoration special figure command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is loaded from the decoration special figure command area of the RWM, prepared (step A610), and an effect command setting process (step A613) is performed. Thereafter, a probability information command related to information for setting the probability of the winning result in the normal map variation display game and the special map variation display game to be a normal probability state (low probability state) is prepared (step A612), and an effect command setting process is performed. (Step A613) is performed. Subsequently, a fanfare command corresponding to the symbol information (stop symbol number or stop symbol pattern) set in the special symbol 1 or special symbol 2 stop symbol setting process is prepared (step A614), and an effect command setting process (step A615) is performed.

  After that, the big hit fanfare time (for example, 10000 milliseconds) is saved in the special game processing timer area (step A616), and the big winning mouth illegal prize winning of the big winning mouth (special variable prize winning device 38) corresponding to the big winning mouth opening information is saved. Several areas are cleared (step A617), and a fraud monitoring non-period monitoring period flag is saved in the big prize opening fraud monitoring period flag area corresponding to the big prize opening information (step A618). Thereafter, fanfare / interval process transition setting process 1 (step A619) is performed, and the special figure display process is terminated.

On the other hand, if the big hit flag 1 is not big hit at step A604 (step A604; N), “0” is set as the process number for the special figure normal process (step A620), and the process number is set as the special figure game. Save in the process number area (step A621).
Next, the variable symbol discrimination flag area is cleared (step A622), the fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the special winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step A623), and the special figure display processing is terminated.

[Fanfare / interval process transition setting process 1]
Next, the details of the fanfare / interval process transition setting process 1 (step A619) in the above special figure display process will be described. As shown in FIG. 43, in the fanfare / interval process transition setting process 1, first, “3” related to the fanfare / interval process is set as the process number (step A631), and the process number is designated as the special game process number. Save in the area (step A632).

  Next, a signal related to the start of big hit (special gaming state) (for example, big hit 1 signal ON, big hit 2 signal ON, big hit 3 signal ON, big hit 4 signal ON) is saved in the external information output data area ( Step A633), signals relating to the end of the high probability state and the short time state (for example, special symbol 1 high probability state signal is OFF, special symbol 2 high probability state signal is OFF, special symbol 1 variable time shortening state signal is OFF, special symbol (2) Fluctuation time shortening state signal is OFF and normal symbol 1 high probability state signal is OFF) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A634). In addition, even during the special figure high probability, since only the probability state changes, the normal symbol 1 variation time shortening state signal and the normal electric accessory 1 open extension state signal are always OFF. Thereafter, the number of rounds area for managing the number of rounds executed in the special game state is cleared (step A635), the number without time is saved in the game state display number area (step A636), and the normal game mode flag Save the ordinary low probability flag in the area (step A637).

  Then, the variable symbol determination flag area is cleared (step A638), and the high probability notification flag is used to turn off the gaming state display LED (third gaming state display unit 58) provided on the gaming board 30 related to the high probability state display. The area is cleared (step A639), and the special figure low probability & short time none flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag area (step A640). Next, a probability information command (low probability) is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery that saves a command output to the effect control device 300 at the time of power failure recovery (step A641), and a signal related to a right-handed instruction (for example, launch position) The specified signal 1 is turned ON) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A642), and the right-handed display LED (for example, the first gaming state display unit 56) is turned on. The number in the hit state is saved (step A643), and the fanfare / interval process transition setting process 1 ends. As a result, the information on the effect mode is once cleared with the occurrence of the special game state.

[Fanfare / In-interval processing]
Next, the details of the fanfare / interval process (step A11) in the above-described special figure game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 44, in the fanfare / interval processing, first, the number of rounds in the special gaming state is updated by +1 (step A701), and a round command corresponding to the number of rounds in the special gaming state is prepared (step A702). Then, an effect command setting process (step A703) is performed.

Next, the special winning opening opening time (for example, 29 seconds) is saved in the special game processing timer area (step A704), and the processing number is set to “4” related to the special winning opening open process (step A705). The process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (step A706).
Next, a signal relating to the start of opening of the special winning opening (for example, the special electric accessory 1 in-operation signal is ON) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A707), and the number of winnings in the special winning opening is stored. The information in the winning mouth count area is cleared (step A708). Then, in order to open the open / close door 38c of the special variable winning device 38, on-data is saved in the large winning opening solenoid output data area (step A709), and the fanfare / interval processing is ended.

[Processing during the grand prize opening]
Next, details of the special winning opening opening process (step A12) in the above-described special figure game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 45, in the special winning opening opening process, first, the current round is determined by comparing the current round number in the special gaming state being executed with the round number upper limit value in the round number upper limit area of the RWM. It is determined whether it is the final round (step A801).
If it is not the final round (step A801; N), an interval command related to the interval between rounds is prepared (step A802), an effect command setting process (step A804) is performed, and the process proceeds to step A805.
On the other hand, if it is the final round (step A801; Y), an ending command related to the display control of the ending display screen at the end of the special game state is prepared (step A803), and an effect command setting process (step A804). ) And the process proceeds to step A805.

In step A805, the process number is set to “5” related to the winning ball remaining ball process (step A805). Then, the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area (step A806).
Next, the remaining ball processing time (for example, 1.9 seconds) is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A807), and in order to close the open / close door 38c of the special variable winning device 38, the big prize opening solenoid 38b is set. The off data for turning off is saved in the large winning opening solenoid output data area (step A808), and the large winning opening opening process is terminated.

[Large winning ball remaining ball processing]
Next, details of the big winning opening remaining ball process (step A13) in the above-described special figure game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 46, in the winning ball remaining ball processing, first, the current round is determined by comparing the current round number in the special game state being executed with the round number upper limit value in the round number upper limit area of the RWM. It is determined whether it is the final round (step A901).

If the current round in the special gaming state is not the final round (step A901; N), “3” is set as the processing number for the fanfare / interval processing (step A902), and the processing number is set as the special game. Save in the process number area (step A903).
Next, the interval time (for example, 0.1 second) is saved in the special game processing timer area (step A904), and a signal (for example, the special electric accessory 1) relating to the end of opening of the big prize opening (special variable winning device 38). The operating signal is OFF) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A905), and the winning prize remaining ball processing is terminated.

On the other hand, when the current round in the special gaming state is the final round (step A901; Y), “6” relating to the jackpot end process is set as the process number (step A906), and the process number is designated as the special game process. Save in the number area (step A907).
Next, the ending time (for example, 5.1 seconds) is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A908), and a signal (for example, a special electric accessory) relating to the end of opening of the big prize opening (special variable winning device 38). (1 in-operation signal is OFF) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A909).
Next, the information on the number-of-winner count area for storing the number of wins to the prize-winning mouth is cleared (step A910), and the information on the number-of-rounds area for storing the number of rounds in the special gaming state is cleared (step A911). The information of the round number upper limit area storing the upper limit value of the round number in the special game state is cleared (step A912), and the big winning opening remaining ball process is ended.

[Big hits end processing]
Next, the details of the jackpot end process (step A14) in the above-described special figure game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 47, in the jackpot ending process, first, a subroutine call based on the probability variation determination data is performed (step A1001).
When the probability variation determination data is “low probability data (normal (no ordinary power support))” in step A1001, jackpot end setting processing 1 (step A1002) is performed, and the processing proceeds to step A1005.
If the probability variation determination data is “high probability data 1 (probability variation (with ordinary power support))” in step A1001, a big hit end setting process 2 (step A1003) is performed and the process proceeds to step A1005. To do.
If the probability variation determination data is “high probability data 2 (latency probability change (no power transmission support))” in step A1001, jackpot end setting processing 3 (step A1004) is performed, and processing in step A1005 is performed. Transition.

In step A1005, a probability information command is loaded from the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery and prepared (step A1005). Then, an effect command setting process (step A1006) is performed.
Next, “0” for the special figure normal process is set as the process number (step A1007), and the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (step A1008).
Next, a signal related to the end of the big hit (for example, 1 signal for the big hit is OFF, 3 signals for the big hit is OFF, and 4 signals for the big hit is OFF) is saved in the external information output data area (step A1009). The condition device operating signal is OFF, the accessory continuous operating device operating signal is OFF, the special symbol 1 signal is OFF, and the special symbol 2 signal is OFF) in the test signal output data area (step A1010).
Next, the information in the probability determination flag area is cleared (step A1011), the information in the pointer area of the round LED indicating the number of rounds of the big hit is cleared (step A1012), and the fraud monitoring period flag area is in the fraud monitoring period. The flag is saved (step A1013), and the big hit ending process is ended.

[Big jackpot end setting 1]
FIG. 48A shows the jackpot end setting process 1 (step A1002) in the above jackpot end process. In the jackpot end setting process 1, first, a signal related to the absence of a time-short state (for example, 2 signals of jackpot is OFF) is saved in the external information output data area (step A1021), and a signal related to the start of the low-probability state and the absence of a time-short state. (For example, the special symbol 1 high probability state signal is OFF, the special symbol 2 high probability state signal is OFF, the special symbol 1 variation time shortening state signal is OFF, the special symbol 2 variation time shortening state signal is OFF, and the normal symbol 1 high probability state signal is OFF The status signal is OFF) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A1022).

Next, the game state display number area is saved with a number without a short time state (step A1023), the ordinary figure game mode flag area is saved with a usual figure low probability flag (step A1024), and the special figure game mode flag area is designated. The low probability & short time flag is saved (step A1025).
Next, a signal related to the left-handed instruction (for example, the firing position designation signal 1 is turned OFF) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A1026), and the right-handed display LED (first gaming state display unit 56) is turned off. Therefore, the number in the left-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step A1027).
Next, a probability information command (low probability) is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (step A1028), and the jackpot end setting process 1 is ended.

[Big hit end setting process 2]
FIG. 48B shows the jackpot end setting process 2 (step A1003) in the jackpot end process described above. In the jackpot end setting process 2, first, a signal related to the start of the time-saving state (for example, the jackpot 2 signal is turned ON) is saved in the external information output data area (step A1031). Since the signal related to the start of the short-time state is output from the big hit, it is saved in the external information output data area in a continuous manner.
Next, a signal related to the start of the high probability state and the short time state (for example, the special symbol 1 high probability state signal is ON, the special symbol 2 high probability state signal is ON, the special symbol 1 variable time shortening state signal is ON, the special symbol 2 The fluctuation time shortening state signal is turned on and the normal symbol 1 high probability state signal is turned on) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A1032).

Next, the number with the short time state is saved in the game state display number area (step A1033), the common figure high probability flag is saved in the usual figure game mode flag area (step A1034), and the special figure game mode flag area is saved. The special figure high probability & short time flag is saved (step A1035).
Next, a probability information command (high probability) is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (step A1036), and the jackpot end setting process 2 is ended. In the present embodiment, the right-handed mode is set during the short-time state, but since the right-handed mode is set from the big hit, the setting for the right-handed end setting process 2 is not performed.

[Big jackpot end setting 3]
FIG. 49 shows the jackpot end setting process 3 (step A1004) in the above jackpot end process. In the jackpot end setting process 3, first, a signal related to the absence of the time reduction state (for example, 2 signals of the big hit is OFF) is saved in the external information output data area (step A1041), and a signal related to the start of the high probability state and the absence of the time reduction state. (For example, the special symbol 1 high probability state signal is ON, the special symbol 2 high probability state signal is ON, the special symbol 1 variation time reduction state signal is OFF, the special symbol 2 variation time reduction state signal is OFF, and the normal symbol 1 high probability state signal is OFF. The status signal is OFF) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A1042).

Next, the game state display number area saves the number without the time-saving state (step A1043), the ordinary figure game mode flag area saves the ordinary figure low probability flag (step A1044), and the special figure game mode flag area specially saves. The high probability & short time flag is saved (step A1045).
Next, a signal related to the left-handed instruction (for example, the firing position designation signal 1 is turned OFF) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A1046), and the right-handed display LED (first gaming state display unit 56) is turned off. Therefore, the number in the left-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step A1047).
Next, the probability information command (latency) is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (step A1048), and the jackpot end setting process 3 is ended.

[Direction command setting processing]
Next, details of the effect command setting process in each process executed during the timer interrupt process will be described. As shown in FIG. 50, in the effect command setting process, first, the status of the effect serial transmission buffer is read (step A2001), and it is determined whether the effect serial transmission buffer is full (step A2002).
If the effect serial transmission buffer is full (step A2002; Y), the process returns to the process of reading the effect serial transmission buffer status (step A2001).
If the effect serial transmission buffer is not full (step A2002; N), command data (MODE) is written to the effect serial transmission buffer (step A2003).

Next, the status serial transmission buffer status is read (step A2004), and it is determined whether the production serial transmission buffer is full (step A2005).
When the effect serial transmission buffer is full (step A2005; Y), the process returns to the process of reading the effect serial transmission buffer status (step A2004).
If the effect serial transmission buffer is not full (step A2005; N), command data (ACTION) is written in the effect serial transmission buffer (step A2006), and the effect command setting process is terminated.

[Design variation control processing]
FIG. 51 shows a symbol variation control process (steps A16 and A18) in the above-described special-figure game process, and a symbol variation control process (step B15) in a later-described general game process. The symbol variation control process is a process for controlling the variation of a special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol, etc.) or a normal symbol (ordinary symbol) and setting display data of the special symbol or the normal symbol.

  In this symbol variation control process, first, it is checked whether or not the variation control flag relating to the symbol to be controlled (for example, any of the first special diagram, the second special diagram, and the ordinary diagram) is changing (step A2101). . In the case of this embodiment, on the variation control table prepared in step A15, step A17, and step B14, the lower address of the variation control flag area, the address of display table 2 (for stoppage), and the display table 1 (for variation). An address is defined.

When the variation control flag relating to the control target symbol is changing (step A2102; Y), a symbol display table (for variation) corresponding to the control target symbol is acquired (step A2103). In the case of the present embodiment, the address of the symbol display table (for variation) is defined on the variation control table prepared in step A15, step A17, and step B14.
Next, the flashing control timer to be controlled is updated by −1 (step A2104), and it is determined whether the updated flashing control timer is “0” (step A2105).

When the flashing control timer after the update is not “0” (step A2105; N), display data corresponding to the value of the variable symbol number area to be controlled is acquired (step A2108). Then, the acquired display data is saved in the target segment area provided in the RAM 111C (step A2111), and the symbol variation control process is terminated.
If the updated flashing control timer is “0” (step A2105; Y), the initial value of the flashing control timer (for example, 100 milliseconds) is saved in the target flashing timer area (step A2106), and the control target Is updated by +1 (step A2107), and display data corresponding to the value of the variable symbol number area to be controlled is acquired (step A2108). Then, the acquired display data is saved in the target segment area provided in the RAM 111C (step A2111), and the symbol variation control process is terminated.

On the other hand, when the fluctuation control flag concerning the control target symbol is not changing (step A2102; N), a symbol display table (for stopping) corresponding to the control target symbol is acquired (step A2109). In the case of the present embodiment, the address of the symbol display table (for stopping) is defined on the variation control table prepared in step A15, step A17, and step B14.
Next, display data corresponding to the value of the stop symbol number area to be controlled is acquired (step A2110), the acquired display data is saved in the target segment area (step A2111), and the symbol variation control process is terminated.

[Distribution processing]
FIG. 52A shows the distribution process (step A447) in the above-described variation pattern setting process.
In this distribution process, first, it is checked whether or not the leading data in the selection table (the variation pattern selection table prepared in step A445) is a code without distribution (ie, “0”) (step A2201).
If the top data of the selection table (variation pattern selection table) is a code without distribution (step A2202; Y), the data is updated to the address of the data corresponding to the distribution result (step A2207), and the distribution process is performed. Exit.
On the other hand, if the top data of the selection table (variation pattern selection table) is not a code without distribution (step A2202; N), the first distribution value specified in the selection table (variation pattern selection table) is acquired. (Step A2203).

Subsequently, a new random value is calculated by subtracting the distribution value acquired in Step A2203 from the random value prepared in Step A446 (the value of the fluctuation pattern random number 2) (Step A2204), and the calculated new random value is calculated. It is determined whether the numerical value is smaller than “0” (step A2205). If the new random value is not smaller than “0” (step A2205; N), after updating to the address of the next distribution value (step A2206), the process proceeds to step A2203, and thereafter Process.
That is, the distribution value specified next in the selection table (variation pattern selection table) is acquired (step A2203), and then a new value is obtained by subtracting the distribution value from the random value determined in the previous step A2205. A random value is calculated (step A2204), and it is determined whether or not the calculated new random value is smaller than “0” (step A2205).

The above processing is executed until it is determined in step A2205 that the new random value is smaller than “0” (step A2205; Y). As a result, any one variation pattern number is selected from at least one variation pattern number defined in the selection table (variation pattern selection table).
If it is determined in step A2205 that the new random value is smaller than “0” (step A2205; Y), the address is updated to the data address corresponding to the result of the distribution (step A2207), and the distribution process ends. To do.

[2-byte sort processing]
FIG. 52B shows a 2-byte distribution process (step A444) in the above-described variation pattern setting process. The 2-byte sorting process is a process for selecting a variation pattern selection table of the special figure variation display game from the variation group table based on the variation pattern random number 1.

In this 2-byte distribution process, first, it is checked whether the top data of the selection table (the fluctuation group table prepared in step A442) is a code without distribution (ie, “0”) (step A2301).
If the top data of the selection table (variation group table) is a code without distribution (step A2302; Y), the data is updated to the address of the data corresponding to the distribution result (step A2307), and 2 bytes are distributed. The process ends.
On the other hand, when the first data of the selection table (variation group table) is not a code without distribution (step A2302; N), one distribution value first defined in the selection table (variation group table) is acquired ( Step A2303).

Subsequently, a new random value is calculated by subtracting the distribution value acquired in Step A2303 from the random value prepared in Step A443 (the value of the fluctuation pattern random number 1) (Step A2304), and the calculated new random value is calculated. It is determined whether the numerical value is smaller than “0” (step A2305). If the new random value is not smaller than “0” (step A2305; N), after updating to the address of the next distribution value (step A2306), the process proceeds to step A2303, and thereafter Process.
That is, the distribution value specified next in the selection table (variation group table) is obtained (step A2303), and then the new random value is subtracted from the random value determined in the previous step A2305. A numerical value is calculated (step A2304), and it is determined whether or not the calculated new random value is smaller than “0” (step A2305).

The above processing is executed until it is determined in step A2305 that the new random value is smaller than “0” (step A2305; Y). Thus, any one variation pattern selection table is selected from at least one variation pattern selection table defined in the selection table (variation group table).
If it is determined in step A2305 that the new random value is smaller than “0” (step A2305; Y), the address is updated to the data address corresponding to the result of the distribution (step A2307), and a 2-byte distribution process is performed. Exit.

  The configuration of the distribution process shown in FIG. 52A and the configuration of the 2-byte distribution process shown in FIG. 52B are basically the same, but is the size of the random number used for distribution being 1 byte? Since it is different in whether it is 2 bytes, program instructions for calculation are different.

[Normal game processing]
Next, details of the usual game process (step S110) in the above-described timer interrupt process will be described. In the usual game process, the input of the gate switch 34a is monitored, the whole process related to the usual figure change display game is controlled, and the display of the usual figure is set.

  As shown in FIG. 53, in the usual game process, first, a gate switch monitoring process (step B1) for monitoring the input from the gate switch 34a and the input from the start port 2 switch 37a is monitored. A monitoring process (step B2) is performed. Next, if the usual game process timer is not "0", -1 is updated (step B3). The minimum value of the usual game processing timer is set to “0”. Then, it is determined whether the value of the usual game process timer is “0” (step B4).

  When the value of the usual game process timer is “0” (step B4; Y), that is, when it is determined that the time has expired or has already expired, the process is referred to branch to the process corresponding to the ordinary game process number. A process of setting the usual game sequence branch table in the register (step B5) is performed, and a process (step B6) of acquiring the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the usual game process number is performed using the table. Then, a subroutine call is made according to the usual game process number (step B7).

In step B7, if the usual game processing number is “0”, the fluctuation start of the usual figure fluctuation display game is monitored, the fluctuation start setting of the usual figure fluctuation display game, the setting of the production, A usual-day process (step B8) for setting information necessary for the process is performed.
If the usual game process number is “1” in step B7, a usual figure changing process (step B9) for setting information necessary for performing the usual figure display process is performed.

If the normal game processing number is “2” in step B7, if the result of the normal map change display game is a win, the setting of the open time of the normal power according to whether or not the time is short is set. Or, a process for displaying a normal diagram (step B10) for setting information necessary for performing the process for normal maps is performed.
Also, if the usual game process number is “3” in step B7, the usual process for setting the information necessary to continue the usual process or to perform the ordinary electric ball remaining ball process is performed. Processing (step B11) is performed.

If the normal game process number is “4” in step B7, the general electric power remaining ball process (step B12) for setting information necessary for performing the normal game end process is performed.
If the usual game process number is “5” in step B7, the usual figure end process (step B13) for setting information necessary for performing the usual figure process is performed.

Then, after preparing a general pattern fluctuation control table for controlling the fluctuation of the normal symbol by the general symbol display 52 (step B14), the symbol fluctuation control process related to the control of the fluctuation of the normal symbol by the general symbol display 52 ( Step B15) is performed and the usual game process is terminated.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step B4 that the value of the usual game process timer is not “0” (step B4; N), that is, the time is not up, the process proceeds to step B14 and the subsequent processes are performed. Do.

[Gate switch monitoring processing]
Next, details of the gate switch monitoring process (step B1) in the above-described ordinary game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 54, in the gate switch monitoring process, first, it is determined whether or not there is an input to the gate switch 34a (step B101). If there is an input to the gate switch 34a (step B101; Y), it is determined whether the game state is a right-handed game (for example, during a big hit, during special drawing time shortage (during normal power support)) (step B102). .
When the game state is a right-handed game (step B102; Y), the number of common chart holds is acquired and it is determined whether the number of common chart holds is less than an upper limit (for example, 4) (step B105).
If the game state is not right-handed (step B102; N), a left-handed instruction command is prepared (step B103), and after performing the effect command setting process (step B104), the number of ordinary drawings held is acquired. It is determined whether or not the number of reserved maps is less than an upper limit (for example, 4) (step B105).

If the number of reserved common charts is less than the upper limit (step B105; Y), the number of reserved general charts is updated by 1 (step B106), and the address of the random number storage area corresponding to the updated number of reserved general charts is calculated. (Step B107). The winning random number is extracted and saved in the RWM hit random number storage area (step B108), the winning symbol random number is extracted and saved in the RWM hit symbol random number storage area (step B109), and gate switch monitoring processing is performed. Exit.
Further, when it is determined in step B101 that there is no input to the gate switch 34a (step B101; N), or when it is determined in step B105 that the number of pending maps is not less than the upper limit value (step B105; N), The gate switch monitoring process is terminated.

[Penden winning switch monitoring process]
Next, the details of the general power winning switch monitoring process (step B2) in the above-described general game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 55, in the ordinary power prize winning switch monitoring process, first, it is during the ordinary figure, that is, the ordinary figure changing display game is in the winning state, and the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is executing the predetermined number of releasing operations. It is determined whether or not there is (step B201). If it is normal (step B201; Y), it is determined whether there is an input to the start port 2 switch 37a (step B202), and it is determined that there is an input to the start port 2 switch 37a (step B202). B202; Y) updates the count number of the utility counter by +1 (step B203).

Next, it is determined whether the count number of the updated ordinary power counter is equal to or greater than an upper limit value (for example, 6) (step B204), and when it is determined that the count number is equal to or greater than the upper limit value (step B204; Y ) Loads a hit end pointer value (in the present embodiment, “4” or “7”) from the normal pointer end pointer area, and saves it in the normal pointer pointer area (step B205). The process of step B205 is a process for closing the normal variation winning device 37 based on the fact that there has been a general electric winning that is equal to or greater than the upper limit value in the normal state.
Next, the ordinary game processing timer area is cleared to 0 (step B206), and the ordinary power prize winning switch monitoring process is terminated. In other words, if there is a public power prize that exceeds the upper limit during the normal hit state, the normal hit state is terminated at that point.

  Further, when it is determined in step B201 that the normal map is not being reached (step B201; N), when it is determined in step B202 that there is no input to the start port 2 switch 37a (step B202; N), or in step B204. If it is determined that the ordinary power count is not greater than or equal to the upper limit (step B204; N), the ordinary power prize winning switch monitoring process is terminated.

[Usually normal processing]
Next, the details of the usual figure routine process (step B8) in the above-mentioned usual figure game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 56, in the usual figure normal processing, first, it is determined whether the number of usual figure holds is “0” (step B301). If the number of usual figure holds is “0” (step B301; Y) ) Sets “0” for the normal processing as the processing number (step B322), saves the processing number in the general game processing number area (step B323), and sets the processing error in the general power fraud monitoring period flag area. The flag during the monitoring period is saved (step B324), and the normal processing is terminated.

  On the other hand, if the number of reserved symbols is not “0” (step B301; N), a random number is loaded from the RWM hit random number storage area (for hold number 1) and hit symbol random number storage area (for hold number 1), The loaded area (that is, the hit random number storage area (for holding number 1), the hit symbol random number storage area (for holding number 1)) is cleared to 0 (step B302), and the hit result is obtained in the usual figure variation display game. It is determined whether the probability of the normal figure is higher than the normal probability (that is, the normal figure low probability), that is, whether the probability is in the short time state (step B303).

If the ordinary figure is not in high probability (step B303; N), a lower limit judgment value (low probability lower limit judgment value) at the time of ordinary figure low probability is set (step B304), and if the ordinary figure is in high probability (step B303). ; Y) sets a lower limit determination value (high probability lower limit determination value) at a normal probability of high probability (step B305).
Thereafter, it is determined whether the value of the hit random number is greater than or equal to the upper limit determination value (step B306). It is determined whether it is less than the set lower limit determination value (step B307).

When the value of the hit random number is greater than or equal to the upper limit determination value (step B306; Y), or when the value of the hit random number is less than the lower limit determination value set in step B304 or B305 (step B307; Y), The slip information is saved in the area (step B308), the slipping stop symbol number is set (step B309), the slipping symbol information is saved in the normal stop symbol information area (step B310), and the stop symbol number is normally stopped. Save in the symbol area (step B314).
On the other hand, if the value of the hit random number is not less than the lower limit judgment value set in step B304 or B305 (step B307; N), the hit information is saved in the hit flag area (step B311) and the hit loaded in step B302 A hit stop symbol number corresponding to the symbol random number is set (step B312), the stop symbol information corresponding to the stop symbol number is saved in the general symbol stop symbol information area (step B313), and the stop symbol number is set to the normal symbol stop symbol. Save in the area (step B314). In the present embodiment, two types of symbols (“hit symbol 1” and “hit symbol 2”) are prepared as the hit symbols of the ordinary symbols.

In the case of this embodiment, the hit probability at the time of the normal figure low probability is 0/251, the hit probability at the time of the normal figure high probability is 250/251, the upper limit determination value is “251”, and the low probability lower limit determination value is “251”, and the high probability lower limit determination value is “1”.
Therefore, when the normal probability is low, the hit random numbers are all in the range of “0” to “250”.
Further, when the normal probability is high, the hit random number value is “1” to “250”, and the hit random number value is “0”.

After the stop symbol number is saved in the normal symbol stop symbol area (step B314), the stop symbol number is saved in the test signal output data area (step B315).
Thereafter, the winning random number storage area is shifted (step B316), the free area after the shift is cleared to 0 (step B317), and the usual figure holding number is updated by -1 (step B318). That is, in accordance with the execution of the usual map change display game relating to the oldest number of reserved maps 1, the process of moving up the ranks of the numbers 2 to 4 of the reserved maps after the number of held maps 1 by one. I do. As a result of this processing, the value for the number of reserved maps in the random number storage area from 2 to 4 is shifted from the value for the number of reserved maps in the random number storage area to 1 for the number of reserved maps in the random number storage area. Will be. Then, the value for the usual figure reservation number 4 in the random number storage area per ordinary figure is cleared, and the usual figure reservation number is decremented by one.

Next, the variation pattern random number 3 is extracted (step B319), a variation time corresponding to the variation pattern random number 3 is set, and saved in the usual game process timer area (step B320). In this embodiment, “500 msec” is set with a probability of 200/256, “1500 msec” is set with a probability of 40/256, and a probability of 16/256 is set as the change time corresponding to the change pattern random number 3. To set “3000 msec”.
Then, the normal chart process transition setting process (step B321) is performed, and the normal chart routine process is terminated.

[Process transition setting process during normal map change]
FIG. 57 shows the process transition setting process (step B321) during the normal map change in the above normal map normal process. In the process for setting the process for changing the normal map, first, “1” relating to the process for changing the normal map is set as the process number (step B331), and the process number is saved in the normal game process number area (step B332). ).
After that, a signal related to the start of the normal map change display game (for example, the normal symbol 1 changing signal is turned ON) is saved in the test signal output data area (step B333) to indicate that the normal map change display game is changing. The change-in-progress flag shown is saved in the usual change control flag area (step B334).
Then, the flashing control timer initial value (for example, 100 milliseconds), which is the initial value of the flashing cycle timer of the general-purpose display 52, is saved in the general-purpose flashing control timer area (step B335), and is stored in the general-purpose variable symbol number area. The initial value (for example, 0) is saved (step B336), and the process for setting the process for changing the normal map is terminated.

[Processing during normal map changes]
Next, the details of the process of changing the normal map (step B9) in the above-described normal game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 58, in the process of changing the normal figure, first, the process number is set to “2” related to the process of displaying the normal figure (step B401), and the process number is saved in the normal game process number area. (Step B402). After that, the normal time display time (for example, 600 milliseconds) which is the display time of the result of the normal time variable display game on the normal time display 52 is saved in the normal time game processing timer area (step B403), and the change of the normal time figure ends. (For example, the normal symbol 1 fluctuation signal OFF) is saved in the test signal output data area (step B404), and a stop flag indicating that the usual figure change display game is stopped is indicated in the usual figure fluctuation control flag area. (Step B405), and the process of changing the normal map is terminated.

[Processing during normal map display]
Next, the details of the normal map display process (step B10) in the above-described normal game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 59, in the process for displaying a normal map, first, the hit flag (hit information or miss information) set in the normal process is loaded (step B501), and the RWM hit flag area is cleared. (Step B502), it is determined whether the loaded hit flag is hit information (step B503).
If the winning flag is not winning information (step B503; N), the processing number is set to “0” for normal processing (step B515), and the processing number is saved in the normal game processing number area (step B515). B516), the fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the ordinary power fraud monitoring period flag area (step B517), and the normal chart displaying process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if the hit flag is hit information (step B503; Y), a hit processing setting table is set (step B504), and the value of the hit start pointer corresponding to the normal symbol stop symbol information (for example, “0”). ”Or“ 5 ”) is saved in the control pointer area during the normal drawing (step B505), and the value of the hit end pointer (for example,“ 4 ”,“ 7 ") is acquired and saved in the end pointer area per ordinary map (step B506). Next, a normal power release time (for example, 1700 msec or 2600 msec) corresponding to the normal map stop symbol information is acquired and saved in the normal game processing timer area (step B507).

Next, “3” is set as the process number for the normal game per process (step B508), and the process number is saved in the normal game process number area (step B509).
Next, a test signal is output for a signal related to the start of a normal-variation display game (for example, the normal signal per normal symbol is ON) and a signal for the start of normal electric operation (for example, the normal electric accessory 1 is active). The data is saved in the data area (step B510), and the on-data is saved in the general electric solenoid output data area to output a signal for driving (turning on) the normal electric solenoid (step B511).

Next, the information in the area of the general power count number for storing the number of winnings in the normal variation winning device 37 is cleared (step B512), and the number of winnings in the ordinary variable winning device 37 during the general power fraud monitoring period is stored. The information on the illegal winning number area is cleared (step B513).
Next, a flag defining the outside of the fraud monitoring period of the normal variation winning device 37 (the fraud monitoring out-of-period flag) is saved in the normal power fraud monitoring period flag area (step B514), and the normal display processing is terminated.

[Usual processing per map]
Next, the details of the process for hitting the usual figure (step B11) in the above-mentioned usual figure game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 60, in the process for the normal map, first, the control pointer for the normal map is loaded and prepared (step B601), and the value of the loaded control pointer for the normal map is greater than or equal to the upper limit value. Is determined (step B602).

If the value of the control pointer during normal maps is not equal to or greater than the upper limit value (step B602; N), the control pointer during normal maps is updated by +1 (step B603), and the power transmission operation transition setting process (step B604) is performed. Go and finish the process during the normal map.
If the value of the control pointer during normal maps is greater than or equal to the upper limit value (step B602; Y), the process for setting the transition to normal operation is not performed without performing the process of updating the control pointer during normal maps by +1 in step B603. (Step B604) is performed, and the process during the normal drawing is terminated.

[Normal electric operation transition setting process]
FIG. 61 shows the normal operation transition setting process (step B604) in the above-described normal process. The general electric operation transition setting process is a process for performing drive control of the general electric solenoid 37c for opening and closing the normal variation winning device 37, and the process branches according to the value of the control pointer (medium control pointer per normal figure). I am doing so. In this ordinary power operation transition setting process, first, a branching process corresponding to the value of the control pointer is performed (step B611). In addition, when the process of step B603 (the process of updating the normal control pointer by +1 in the normal map) is performed, a branch process according to the value before the +1 update is performed.

  If the value of the control pointer is “0”, “2”, or “5”, the process proceeds to step B612 to control the block of the normal variation winning device 37, and therefore the normal variation winning corresponding to the control pointer is controlled. The waiting time after the device 37 is closed (for example, 300 milliseconds) is saved in the normal game processing timer area (step B612), and the off data is saved in the general electric solenoid output data area to turn off the general electric solenoid 37c. (Step B613), the normal power operation transition setting process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if the value of the control pointer is “1” or “3”, the process proceeds to step B614 to control the release of the normal variation winning device 37, so that the normal variation winning device 37 corresponding to the control pointer is controlled. A normal power release time (for example, 1700 milliseconds), which is an open time, is saved in the normal game processing timer area (step B614), and on data is saved in the general power solenoid output data area to turn on the general power solenoid 37c. (Step B615), the normal power operation transition setting process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if the value of the control pointer is “6”, the process proceeds to step B616 to control the release of the normal variation winning device 37, so that it is the release time of the normal variation winning device 37 corresponding to the control pointer. The open time (for example, 2600 msec) of the general electric power is saved in the general game processing timer area (step B616), and the on data is saved in the general electric solenoid output data area to turn on the general electric solenoid 37c (step B617). ), The normal operation transition setting process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if the value of the control pointer is “4” or “7”, the process proceeds to step B618 to complete the open control of the normal variation winning device 37 and perform the ordinary electric ball remaining ball process. Is set to “4” (step B618). Then, the processing number is saved in the ordinary game processing number area (step B619), and the ordinary electric ball remaining time (for example, 600 milliseconds) is saved in the ordinary game processing timer area (step B620). Thereafter, in order to turn off the general electric solenoid 37c, the off data is saved in the general electric solenoid output data area (step B621), and the general electric operation transition setting process is terminated.

  Here, in this embodiment, when the normal figure stop symbol is “winning symbol 1” during the normal probability, “0” is acquired as the value of the hit start pointer in step B505 of the normal symbol display processing. In step B506 of the normal map display process, “4” is acquired as the value of the hit end pointer, and in step B507 of the normal map display process, “1700 milliseconds” is acquired as the normal power release time. Therefore, after the elapse time of 600 msec, the ordinary power release time is “1700 msec”, so the ordinary power (ordinary variable winning device 37) is opened for 1700 msec. Since it is “0”, a wait time of 300 msec is set, and then the control pointer is updated to “1” during the normal map, so that the general electric power is released for 1700 msec, and then the control pointer during the normal map is “2”. Is updated to "3", a wait time of 300 msec is set, and then the control pointer during normal map is updated to "3", so that the electric power is released for 1700 msec. Since it is updated to “4”, a 600-millisecond ordinary electric ball remaining time is set.

  Also, when the normal figure stop symbol is “winning symbol 2” during the normal figure high probability, “5” is acquired as the value of the hit start pointer in step B505 of the normal drawing display process, and the normal drawing is being displayed. In step B506 of the process, “7” is acquired as the value of the hit end pointer, and in step B507 of the normal map display process, “2600 msec” is acquired as the normal power release time. Therefore, after the elapse time of 600 msec, the normal power release time is “2600 msec”, so that the normal power is released for 2600 msec, and then the middle control pointer is “5”, so that 300 msec. Wait time is set, then the control pointer is updated to “6” during the normal map, so the public power is released for 2600 msec, and then the control pointer is updated to “7” during the normal map is 600 m. Second electric power remaining ball processing time is set.

[Penden residual ball processing]
Next, details of the ordinary electric ball remaining ball process (step B12) in the above-described ordinary game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 62, in the ordinary power remaining ball process, first, “5” is set as the process number for the end process per ordinary figure (step B701), and the process number is saved in the ordinary game process number area. (Step B702).

  Thereafter, the normal ending time (for example, 100 milliseconds) is saved in the normal game processing timer area (step B703), and a signal related to the operation end of the normal variation winning device 37 (for example, the normal electric accessory 1 operating signal is turned OFF). ) Is saved in the test signal output data area (step B704), and the ordinary power count number area for counting the number of winnings to the normal variation winning device 37 is cleared (step B705). Then, the control pointer area during the normal map is cleared (step B706), the end pointer area per normal map is cleared (step B707), and the baseball remaining ball processing is ended.

[End processing per regular map]
Next, the details of the normal game end process (step B13) in the above-described normal game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 63, in the normal figure end process, first, “0” for the normal figure normal process is set as the process number (step B801), and the process number is saved in the normal figure game process number area. (Step B802).

  Thereafter, a signal related to the end of the normal variation display game (for example, the normal signal per ordinary symbol is OFF) is saved in the test signal output data area (step B803), and the fraud monitoring period of the normal variation winning device 37 is defined. The flag (in the fraud monitoring period flag) is saved in the ordinary power fraud monitoring period flag area (step B804), and the normal figure end processing is terminated.

[Segment LED editing processing]
Next, the details of the segment LED editing process (step S111) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described. In the segment LED editing process, the special figure 1 hold indicator 53, the special figure 2 hold indicator 54, the universal figure hold indicator 55, the first game state display unit 56, and the second game state display provided in the collective display device 50. Settings relating to driving of the segment LEDs constituting the unit 57, the third gaming state display unit 58, and the round display unit 59 are performed.

As shown in FIG. 64, in the segment LED editing process, first, the blinking control timer is updated by +1 (step S501), and it is determined whether it is the output on timing based on whether the specific bit of the blinking control timer is 1 or not. (Step S502). In this embodiment, when bit 5 of the blinking control timer is 1, it is determined that the output is on, and a blinking cycle of 128 milliseconds is created.
If it is the output on timing (step S502; Y), the general figure hold number display table 1 is set out of the general figure hold number display tables 1 and 2 in which the display mode on the general figure hold display 55 is defined. If it is not the output on timing (step S502; N), the general-purpose hold number display table 2 is set (step S504).
Then, display data corresponding to the number of reserved general maps is acquired from the set number of reserved general map display table, and is saved in the segment area for the general map reserved display 55 provided in the RAM 111C (step S505). In this embodiment, as long as the number of reserved drawings is any one of “0” to “2”, the display data is the same regardless of which of the reserved drawings display table is set.

Next, it is determined whether it is the output on timing (step S506), and if it is the output on timing (step S506; Y), the special figure 1 hold in which the display mode on the special figure 1 hold indicator 53 is defined. Of the number display tables 1 and 2, the special figure 1 hold number display table 1 is set (step S507). When the output on timing is not reached (step S506; N), the special figure 1 hold number display table 2 is set. (Step S508).
Then, display data corresponding to the special figure 1 holding number display table is acquired from the set special figure 1 holding number display table, and saved in the segment area for the special figure 1 holding display 53 provided in the RAM 111C (step S509). .

Thereafter, it is determined whether it is the output on timing (step S510). If it is the output on timing (step S510; Y), the special figure 2 hold number in which the display mode on the special figure 2 hold indicator 54 is defined. Of the display tables 1 and 2, the special figure 2 hold number display table 1 is set (step S511), and when it is not the output on timing (step S510; N), the special figure 2 hold number display table 2 is set ( Step S512).
Then, display data corresponding to the special figure 2 hold number display table is acquired from the set special figure 2 hold number display table, and is saved in the segment area for the special figure 2 hold indicator 54 provided in the RAM 111C (step S513). .
Furthermore, a round display table in which the display mode of the round display unit 59 is defined is set (step S514), display data corresponding to the round display LED pointer is acquired from the set round display table, and provided in the RAM 111C. The data is saved in the segment area for the round display section 59 (step S515).

Next, the game state display table 1 in which the display mode on the second game state display unit 57 that lights up when the short state occurs and notifies the occurrence of the short state is set (step S516), and the set game state Display data corresponding to the game state display number is acquired from the display table 1 and saved in the segment area for the second game state display unit 57 provided in the RAM 111C (step S517). In the present embodiment, the second gaming state display unit 57 composed of a single LED is configured to be turned off during normal times and turned on during special drawing hours (during normal power support).
After that, the game state display table 2 in which the display mode in the first game state display unit 56 for notifying that the right-handed game state is more advantageous than the left-handed game is set (step S518). Display data corresponding to the game state display number 2 is acquired from the set game state display table 2 and saved in the segment area for the first game state display unit 56 provided in the RAM 111C (step S519). In the present embodiment, the first gaming state display unit 57 composed of one LED is turned off during normal hitting (left-handed), and right-handed (in the case of this embodiment, during big hits and during normal power support). It is configured to light up.

Next, it is determined whether the on-information is saved in the high probability notification flag area (step S520).
If it is determined in step S520 that the ON information is saved in the high probability notification flag area (step S520; Y), the segment LED editing process is terminated.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step S520 that the ON information is not saved in the high probability notification flag area (step S520; N), the high probability notification LED (third gaming state display unit 58) is turned off. The off data of the high-probability notification LED is saved in the segment area for the third gaming state display unit 58 (step S521), and the segment LED editing process is terminated.

[Magnetic fraud monitoring processing]
Next, details of the magnet fraud monitoring process (step S112) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described. In the magnet fraud monitoring process, the presence / absence of an abnormality is determined based on a detection signal from the magnetic sensor 61, and fraud notification is started or ended.

  As shown in FIG. 65, in the magnet fraud monitoring process, first, the magnetic sensor 61 is turned on, that is, abnormal from the state of the detection signal output from the magnetic sensor 61 and taken into the third input port 124 (input port 3). It is determined whether the magnetism is detected (step S601). When the magnetic sensor 61 is on (step S601; Y), that is, when abnormal magnetism is detected, the magnet fraud monitoring timer for measuring the abnormal magnetism detection period is updated by one (step S602), and the timer It is determined whether the time is up (step S603). In the case of this embodiment, it is determined that the time has expired when the magnet fraud monitoring timer is 32 milliseconds or longer.

  When the magnet fraud monitoring timer expires (step S603; Y), that is, when abnormal magnetism is continuously detected for a certain period, the magnet fraud monitoring timer is cleared (step S604), and the magnet fraud notification timer initial value ( For example, 60 seconds) is saved in the magnet fraud notification timer area (step S605). Then, a magnet fraud notification command is prepared (step S606), a magnet fraud occurrence flag is prepared as a magnet fraud flag (step S607), and it is determined whether the prepared magnet fraud flag matches the value of the magnet fraud flag area. (Step S613). That is, when the magnetic sensor 61 is continuously turned on for a certain period (for example, 8 interruptions), it is determined that an abnormality has occurred.

  On the other hand, when the magnetic sensor 61 is not on (step S601; N), that is, when no abnormal magnetism is detected, the magnet fraud monitoring timer is cleared (step S608), and the magnet fraud that defines the magnet fraud notification time is defined. If the notification timer is not "0", -1 is updated (step S609). Note that the minimum value of the magnet fraud notification timer is set to “0”. Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the magnet fraud notification timer is “0” (step S610). In addition, also when the magnet fraud monitoring timer has not timed out (step S603; N), it transfers to the process of step S609.

  If the value of the magnet fraud notification timer is not “0” (step S610; N), that is, if the time is not up, the magnet fraud monitoring process is terminated. Further, when the value of the magnet fraud notification timer is “0” (step S610; Y), that is, when the time is up or has already expired, and when the time of the fraud notification ends or is illegal from the beginning. If the notification is not performed, a command for terminating the magnet fraud notification is prepared (step S611). Further, a magnet fraud release flag is prepared as a magnet fraud flag (step S612), and it is determined whether the prepared magnet fraud flag matches the value of the magnet fraud flag region (step S613).

And when the prepared magnet fraud flag corresponds with the value of a magnet fraud flag area (step S613; Y), a magnet fraud monitoring process is complete | finished. If the prepared magnet fraud flag does not match the value of the magnet fraud flag area (step S613; N), the prepared magnet fraud flag is saved in the magnet fraud flag area (step S614), and an effect command setting process is performed. (Step S615), the magnet fraud monitoring process is terminated.
Here, “Step S601; N” → “Step S608” → “Step S609” → “Step S610; Y” → “Step S611” → “Step S612” → “Step S613; Y” is the normal route.

[Board radio fraud monitoring processing]
Next, details of the board radio wave fraud monitoring process (step S113) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described. In the panel radio wave fraud monitoring process, the presence / absence of an abnormality is determined based on a detection signal from the panel radio wave sensor 62, and fraud notification is started or stopped.

  As shown in FIG. 66, in the board radio wave fraud monitoring process, first, from the state of the detection signal output from the board radio wave sensor 62 and taken into the third input port 124 (input port 3) via the proximity I / F 121. Then, it is determined whether the panel radio wave sensor 62 is on, that is, an abnormal radio wave is detected (step S701). When the radio wave sensor is on (step S701; Y), that is, when an abnormal radio wave is detected, the radio wave fraud notification timer initial value (for example, 60 seconds) is saved in the radio wave fraud notification timer area (step S702).

  Then, a board radio fraud notification command is prepared (step S703), a board radio fraud occurrence flag is prepared as a board radio fraud flag (step S704), and the prepared board radio fraud flag is set to the value of the board radio fraud flag area. It is determined whether they match (step S709). That is, in the present embodiment, when the magnetic fraud is detected, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred when the magnetic sensor 61 is turned on a predetermined number of times. It is determined that an abnormality has occurred at the time when is detected once.

  On the other hand, if the panel radio wave sensor 62 is not on (step S701; N), that is, if an abnormal radio wave is not detected, −1 unless the radio wave fraud notification timer that defines the radio wave fraud notification time is “0”. Update (step S705). The minimum value of the radio wave unauthorized notification timer is set to “0”. Then, it is determined whether the value of the radio wave unauthorized notification timer is “0” (step S706).

  If the value of the radio wave fraud notification timer is not “0” (step S706; N), that is, if the time is not up, the board radio wave fraud monitoring process is terminated. In addition, when the value of the radio wave unauthorized notification timer is “0” (step S706; Y), that is, when the time has expired or has already expired, and when the unauthorized notification period has ended, If the notification is not made, a command for terminating the board radio wave fraud notification is prepared (step S707), and a board radio wave fraud release flag is prepared as a board radio wave fraud flag (step S708). It is determined whether it matches the value of the panel radio wave fraud flag area (step S709).

When the prepared board radio wave fraud flag matches the value of the board radio wave fraud flag area (step S709; Y), the board radio wave fraud monitoring process is terminated. If the prepared board radio fraud flag does not match the value of the board radio fraud flag area (step S709; N), the prepared board radio fraud flag is saved in the board radio fraud flag area (step S710), and the production command A setting process is performed (step S711), and the panel radio wave fraud monitoring process is terminated.
Here, “Step S701; N” → “Step S705” → “Step S706; Y” → “Step S707” → “Step S708” → “Step S709; Y” is the normal route.

[External information editing process]
Next, details of the external information editing process (step S114) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described. In the external information editing process, the monitoring results in the payout command transmission process (step S105), the winning opening switch / status monitoring process (step S108), the magnet fraud monitoring process (step S112), and the panel radio wave fraud monitoring process (step S113) are displayed. Based on this, processing to create information to be output to an external device such as an information collecting terminal or a game hall internal management device or a test firing test device and set the information in an output buffer is performed.

As shown in FIGS. 67 and 68, in the external information editing process, first, it is determined whether a switch abnormality is occurring (step S801).
If it is determined in step S801 that no switch abnormality is occurring (step S801; N), off data of the gaming machine error state signal is saved in the test signal output data area (step S802), and the process of step S804 is performed. Migrate to
On the other hand, if it is determined in step S801 that a switch abnormality is occurring (step S801; Y), the ON data of the gaming machine error state signal is saved in the test signal output data area (step S803), and step S801 is performed. The process proceeds to S804.

Next, when the glass frame opening error has not occurred (step S804; N), and when the main body frame opening error has not occurred (step S805; N), the off data of the door / frame opening signal is stored in the external information output data area. Save (step S806), save the off-data of the security signal in the external information output data area (step S807), and proceed to the processing of step S810.
On the other hand, when a glass frame opening error is occurring (step S804; Y) or when a main body frame opening error is occurring (step S805; Y), the on-data of the door / frame opening signal is externally transmitted. The data is saved in the information output data area (step S808), the ON data of the gaming machine error state signal is saved in the test signal output data area (step S809), and the process proceeds to step S810.

If the security signal control timer that counts a predetermined time (for example, 256 milliseconds) from the time when the data stored in the RAM is initialized by operating the initialization switch or the like is updated by −1. (Step S810). Note that the initial value of the security signal control timer is set when the RAM initial value is set when the main process is started by clearing the RAM, and the minimum value of the security signal control timer is set to “0”. Then, it is determined whether the value of the security signal control timer is “0” (step S811).
When the value of the security signal control timer is not “0” (step S811; N), that is, when the time is not up, the security signal ON data is saved in the external information output data area (step S812), and step S813. Move on to processing. If the value of the security signal control timer is “0” (step S811; Y), that is, if the time is up or has already been up, the process of step S813 is not performed without performing the process of step S812. Transition.

  If a magnet fraud is occurring (step S813; Y), a board radio wave fraud is occurring (step S814; Y), a big prize opening fraud is occurring (step S815; Y), When a power transmission fraud is occurring (step S816; Y), or when a start-up port error is occurring (step S817; Y), the ON data of the gaming machine error status signal is stored in the test signal output data area. Save (step S819), save the ON data of the security signal in the external information output data area (step S820), and proceed to the processing of step S821. If the frame radio wave fraud is occurring (step S818; Y), the security signal on-data is saved in the external information output data area without performing the process of step S819 (step S820), and step S821. Move on to processing.

  On the other hand, no magnet fraud has occurred (step S813; N), no board radio wave fraud has occurred (step S814; N), no big prize opening fraud has occurred (step S815; N), and no electric power fraud has occurred. No (step S816; N), no start port error occurs (step S817; N), and no frame radio wave fraud occurs (step S818; N), the processing of step S819 and step S820 is not performed. The process proceeds to step S821.

Then, a main prize ball signal editing process (step S821) for setting information related to the number of prize balls to be paid out is performed, and a start opening signal editing process (step S822) for editing a winning signal at the start opening is performed.
Next, if the symbol determination number control timer for controlling the output time of the information related to the number of times of execution of the special figure variation display game is not “0”, −1 is updated (step S823). Note that the minimum value of the symbol determination frequency control timer is set to “0”. Then, it is determined whether the value of the symbol determination frequency control timer is “0” (step S824).

When the value of the symbol determination count control timer is “0” (step S824; Y), that is, when the time is up or has already expired, the off data of the symbol determination count signal is saved in the external information output data area. In step S825, the external information editing process ends.
On the other hand, if the value of the symbol determination count control timer is not “0” (step S824; N), that is, if the time has not expired, the on-data of the symbol determination count signal is saved in the external information output data area (step S826), the external information editing process is terminated.

[Main prize ball signal editing process]
Next, details of the main prize ball signal editing process (step S821) in the external information editing process described above will be described. In the main prize ball signal editing process, a main prize ball signal generated every time the number of prize balls (scheduled number to be paid out) generated by winning a prize opening reaches a predetermined number (10 in this embodiment) Processing to output to the device.

  As shown in FIG. 69, in the main prize ball signal editing process, if the main prize ball signal output control timer is not "0", -1 is updated (step S831). The minimum value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is set to “0”. Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is “0” (step S832). When the value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is “0” (step S832; Y), it is determined whether the number of main prize ball signal outputs is “0” (step S833).

If the main prize ball signal output count is not “0” (step S833; N), the main prize ball signal output count is updated by −1 (step S834), and the main prize ball signal output control timer area has a main prize ball. The signal output control timer initial value is saved (step S835). The initial value of the main prize ball signal output control timer includes an on state (eg, high level) time (eg, 128 ms) and an off state (eg, low level) time (eg, 64 ms) of the main prize ball signal. Of these, the on-state time (for example, 128 milliseconds) is reached. Thereafter, on data for turning on the main prize ball signal for the external device is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step S837), and the main prize ball signal editing process is terminated.
If the main prize ball signal output count is “0” (step S833; Y), off data for turning off the main prize ball signal for the external device is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM. (Step S838), the main prize ball signal editing process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when the value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is not “0” (step S832; N), it is determined whether the main prize ball signal output control timer is in the output on period (step S836). The fact that the main prize ball signal output control timer is in the output on period means that the value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is not “0”. When the main prize ball signal output control timer is in the output on period (step S836; Y), the on data for turning on the main prize ball signal for the external device is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM. (Step S837), the main prize ball signal editing process is terminated. If the main prize ball signal output control timer is not in the output on period (step S836; N), off data for turning off the main prize ball signal for the external device is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM. (Step S838), the main prize ball signal editing process is terminated.

In the present embodiment, the game control device 100 outputs a main prize ball signal every time the number of game balls to be paid out reaches 10, and the payout control device 200 outputs 10 game balls. A main prize ball signal is output every time.
Specifically, the game control device 100 updates the main prize ball signal output count by one (subroutine in the payout command transmission process) and updates (sets) every 10 payout schedules (each time a payout command is transmitted). ) The main prize ball signal is output for the number of times the output has been performed.
For the main award ball signal output for each schedule, the award ball signal is transmitted from the payout control device 200 every time 10 payouts are actually performed, so that the schedule and the result can be matched, It is possible to deal with illegal payments. In addition, even if a prize is won during the big hit period, the payout is delayed due to the ball running out, etc. Even if the payout is made after the big hit, the Hallcon (Hall Computer) is accurately determined by the main prize ball signal output at the time of winning. Information can be collected (judged).

[Start signal editing process]
Next, details of the start port signal editing process (step S822) in the above-described external information editing process will be described. The start port signal editing process is a process that is commonly performed for each input when there is an input from the start port 1 switch 36a, the start port 2 switch 37a, or the start port 3 switch 97a.

  As shown in FIG. 70, in the start port signal editing process, first, if the start port signal output control timer is not "0", -1 is updated (step S841). The minimum value of the start port signal output control timer is set to “0”. Then, it is determined whether the value of the start port signal output control timer is “0” (step S842). When the value of the start port signal output control timer is “0” (step S842; Y), it is determined whether the start port signal output count is “0” (step S843).

If the start port signal output count is not “0” (step S843; N), the start port signal output count is updated by −1 (step S844), and the start port signal output control timer is set in the start port signal output control timer area. The initial value is saved (step S845). The initial value of the start port signal output control timer is selected from the time (for example, 128 ms) of the start state (for example, high level) of the start port signal and the time (for example, 64 ms) of the off state (for example, low level). The on-state time (for example, 128 milliseconds). Thereafter, ON data for turning on the start port signal for the external device is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step S847), and the start port signal editing process is terminated.
If the start port signal output count is “0” (step S843; Y), the off data for turning off the start port signal for the external device is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step S843; Y). In step S848, the start port signal editing process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when the value of the start port signal output control timer is not “0” (step S842; N), it is determined whether the start port signal output control timer is in the output on period (step S846). Here, the fact that the start port signal output control timer is in the output on period means that the value of the start port signal output control timer is not “0”. If the start port signal output control timer is in the output on period (step S846; Y), the on data for turning on the start port signal for the external device is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step S846). S847), the start port signal editing process is terminated. If the start port signal output control timer is not in the output on period (step S846; N), the off data for turning off the start port signal for the external device is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM ( Step S848), the start port signal editing process is terminated.

Next, control of the effect control device 300 will be described.
The special drawing controlled by the production control device 300 is a special drawing for production displayed on the display device 41, and the special drawing in the description of the control process of the production control device 300 below is the special drawing for this production. (Decoration that is not this special figure).

Further, in general, a “character” means a character or an animal having a property or character, or a property or character, and a computer term may mean a character. However, in the following description of the effect control device 300, particularly in the description of the image display control using the VDP 312, a series of movies, background images, images of special designs (decorative designs and fourth designs), characters of characters, etc. A grouped still image or moving image such as an image may be referred to as a character, and such image data (still image or moving image data) may be referred to as character data (or character data).
Further, in the following description of the effect control device 300, an object means a display control target that is coherent in the case of display control, and includes display elements (background image, special design decorative image, notice character image). , A grouped image such as a hold display image). For example, in the case of this example, there is a distinction in the decorative design of the special design by the difference in the variable display area (reel) of the left design, the right design, and the middle design, and each of these distinctions has the current design, the next design, There is a distinction that the display position in the scroll direction is different from the previous symbol. That is, for example, for the left symbol, there are the current symbol of the left symbol, the next symbol of the left symbol, and the symbol of the previous symbol of the left symbol. However, in the control process, for example, the entire left symbol including the current symbol, the next symbol, and the previous symbol may be classified as one display element.

[Power-on reset processing]
First, the power-on reset process of the effect control device 300 will be described with reference to FIG. This power-on reset process starts when power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 10 is started.
When the supply of power to the pachinko gaming machine 10 is started, the interrupt is first prohibited (step D1), the CPU 311 is initialized (step D2), the VDP 312 is initialized (step D3), and the interrupt is permitted. (Step D4), and the main process (Step D5) is started. When the main process is started, the main process is executed until the power is turned off (including a power failure).

[Main processing]
Next, the main process (step D5) in the above-described power-on reset process will be described with reference to FIG.
When the main process is started, first, a wireless module initialization process (step D11) for initializing a wireless module (not shown) provided in the effect control device 300 is executed. This example is an example in which communication between sub-boards in different pachinko gaming machines (that is, between presentation control devices, hereinafter, simply referred to as “sub-sub”) is performed by wireless communication, but is limited to wireless communication. In this case, wired communication may be used.

Next, the base address of the register of the VDP 312 is set (step D12). This is because the address space differs depending on the type of the CPU 311 and its setting, so that the base address is set and various designations are made based on the difference from the address.
Next, display data generation is permitted (step D13). This is a process for permitting the display circuit of the VDP 312 to access the VRAM 326 and generate display data.
Next, the size of the image development area of the VDP 312 is set (step D14).
Next, a random number seed is set (step D15). This is processing for setting a generation sequence of pseudo-random numbers using, for example, a srand function. Here, as an argument given to the srand function, a fixed value such as 0 (zero) may be used, or a value created based on an ID value of a CPU or the like so as to be different for each gaming machine is used. Also good.

Next, the storage area for motion management (including the motion management area and the address area of the motion management area) in the RAM in the CPU 311 is initialized (step D16), and the storage area for scenario management in the RAM in the CPU 311 (scenario management) (Including the address area of the area and the scenario management area) (step D17).
Here, “motion” means a production operation that has been made into blocks (parts) (in this example, specifically, a display production on the display device 41 is made into a block), and “scenario” is , Meaning the flow of the production (which determines which motion is executed when, etc.). The “motion management area address area” means a storage area for storing the start address of the motion management area, and the “scenario management area address area” stores the start address of the scenario management area. Storage area.

  Next, a terminal ID is set (step D18). This is, for example, processing for setting an ID for each machine (that is, for each gaming machine) based on the setting of a setting switch (not shown) provided in the effect control device 300. As the terminal ID to be set, the individual ID of the wireless module may be used. However, it is easier to specify the location information of the gaming machine in the island by manually setting with a setting switch or the like. It is easy to assign to the machine number. In other words, with the wireless module ID, it is difficult to specify the position information from the magnitude of the numerical value unless it is arranged in ascending order when installing the gaming machine. For example, if the values of the terminal IDs are set in the order of the installed positions, it is easy to specify the installed position information from the terminal ID values. However, the method of setting the terminal ID from the ID of the wireless module has an advantage that it can be set automatically without bothering human hands. On the other hand, setting of the terminal ID by the setting switch needs to set a different number for each table by a human operation, and thus may not be possible when busy such as when installing a gaming machine. In addition, when the wireless module ID is used, there is an advantage that the setting switch is unnecessary and the cost is not increased. Since there are advantages and disadvantages as described above, it is necessary to select the terminal ID setting method according to the effect desired to be performed in the inter-sub-board communication. In this example, the notice character is made to appear on the display device 41 of each gaming machine sequentially from the leftmost gaming machine in the island (that is, the arrangement of gaming machines in the island (ID1, ID2, ID3,... ID10 from the left). In order to realize a production that needs to be specified), a setting method using a setting switch that makes it easy to specify the position information of the stand is given as an example. This terminal ID is provided for identifying a transmission destination and a transmission source in inter-sub-board communication.

Next, the initial value upon power-on is saved in an area to be initialized (for example, an effect flag area (a storage area used as various flags described later)) (step D19), and WDT (watchdog timer) is cleared. (Step D20).
Next, an effect button input process (step D21) is executed. This is a process of performing editing when the effect operation unit 550 (push button (effect button 25) or select button (touch panel 29)) is operated when it is valid. Since the effect operation unit 550 does not turn on and off at high speed, the process of sensing the input of the effect operation unit 550 may be performed within this process, or may be performed within a short-cycle timer interrupt (not shown).

Next, random number update processing (step D22) is executed. This is a process of updating the pseudo random number at least once every control cycle of the main process by using, for example, a rand function. Since the rand function generates a random number based on a specified generation sequence every time recalculation is performed, it is only necessary to execute the function. A random number that is updated by +1 may be used as in the main board (game control apparatus 100).
Next, a received command check process (step D23) is executed.

Next, inter-sub transmission start processing (step D24) is executed. This is a process of permitting an inter-sub-transmission interrupt when there is a request for inter-sub-command transmission. Depending on the performance, it may not be necessary to send a command immediately, so time adjustment is also performed.
Next, inter-sub-reception task processing (step D25) is executed. This is a process that mainly analyzes the received inter-subcommand.
Next, inter-sub ack response task processing (step D26) is executed. This is a process of performing monitoring when an ack (reply) is requested to another unit.
Next, an inter-sub effect setting process (step D27) is executed. This is a process of controlling the effect corresponding to the received inter-sub command.

Next, scenario setting processing (step D28) is executed. This is a process for analyzing a scenario based on the received command from the game control device 100.
Next, the drawing area is filled with black (step D29). This is a process for completely erasing the past display of the frame buffer. For example, an image having a black square as a whole is arranged in the frame buffer so that dust or the like is not displayed.
Next, a motion control process (step D30) is executed. This is a process for executing the scenario analyzed in step D28.

Here, the character data is stored in the image ROM 325, but the motion data representing the character movement information and the scenario data defining the connection of the motion data are stored in the PROM 321.
In this example, the concept of scenario data (scenario layer) is used in the drawing control of the display screen 41a displayed on the display device 41. Scenarios are defined in advance as a table divided into multiple scenario layers, such as a background scenario, a left symbol scenario, a right symbol scenario, and so on. This is a method of generating a picture on one screen by combining all scenarios.
Specifically, in the variation effect of the symbol on the display device 41, for example, for each variation, such as the motion of starting to fluctuate, the motion until slowing down and temporarily stopping (number of frames to be sent, sliding, etc.), the type of notice effect, etc. Since there are various combinations depending on the effect distribution that is performed, if scenario data is created for each screen for every combination, a huge amount of data is required.
Therefore, in this example, in the rendering control in the display effect such as the variable effect in the effect control device 300, the background, the left symbol, the right symbol,... Are individually categorized for each display element, and each is independently performed. A plurality of pieces of motion information are set as an operation scenario table for effect display by switching simultaneously or continuously and stored in advance in, for example, a PROM (control ROM) 321. Next, in accordance with the effect command from the game control device 100, the effect control device 300 selects a scenario table and combines them to synthesize the drawing contents (one frame) for one screen. By doing so, it is only necessary to define a minimum operation pattern (parts of operation), saving data capacity and improving development efficiency.

Next, an effect display editing process (step D31) is executed. This is a process of setting various commands and their parameters for instructing the VDP 312 on the drawing contents on the display device 41 (set in steps D28 to D30). In this effect display editing process, commands are set in a table form, and the commands set in this way are sequentially transmitted to the VDP 312 in step D34 (instructed to draw a screen) described later.
Next, the drawing command preparation end is set (step D32), and the process proceeds to step D33. This is processing for setting that the preparation of all commands to the VDP 312 set in step D31 is completed.

  In step D33, it is determined whether it is the frame switching timing. If it is the frame switching timing (step D33; Y), the process proceeds to step D34, and if it is not the frame switching timing (step D33; N), this step D33 is changed. repeat. Here, the frame switching timing is a time corresponding to a processing cycle (for example, 1/30 seconds≈33.333 ms) created based on a cycle (for example, 1/60 seconds) of a V blank interrupt (also referred to as a V sink interrupt). It is the timing that arrives at a target interval. Subsequent processes (steps D34 to D37 and subsequent steps D20 to D32) are executed for each processing cycle at this frame switching timing by the process of step D33. The time management that needs to be synchronized with the contents of the effect is performed in units of frames (that is, in units of the processing cycles). When the processing cycle is 1/30 seconds, for example, 3 frames is 100 ms. This is similar to the case where the main board (game control device) manages time values in units of 4 ms of the timer interrupt period.

  In step D34, the VDP 312 is instructed to draw a screen (step D34), sound control processing (step D35), decoration control processing (step D36) for controlling various LEDs, various motors and SOL (solenoid). A motor / SOL control process (step D37) for controlling the motor is executed. After executing Step D37, the process returns to Step D20, and the same process as when the process proceeds to Step D20 is repeated.

  Note that the control processing in steps D35 to D37 is performed in these steps in which the operation is switched in units of processing cycles in order to match the screen effect, but the signals generated or set in these control processing The process of actually outputting data (especially signals for controlling driving of various LEDs and motors) to the port is performed within a short-cycle timer interrupt (not shown). However, when an IC specialized for controlling various devices is used, there is a case where a signal is not output by a timer interrupt only by instructing by serial communication or the like.

[Command reception interrupt processing]
Next, command reception interrupt processing will be described with reference to FIG. This command reception interrupt process is a process for receiving the command transmitted from the game control apparatus 100 (main board) by the effect control apparatus 300 (sub board), and the data constituting the command falls within the normal range. The content to check whether it is included is also included.
The communication between the main board and the sub board may be performed by parallel communication using a strobe signal (STB signal), but in this example, it is performed by serial communication. In other words, both boards communicate using, for example, the function of a serial communication circuit mounted on the CPUs 111A and 311.

  In serial communication in this case, since transmission / reception is automatically performed in hardware, unlike in parallel communication, there is an advantage that processing time is not exclusively used for communication in both substrates. In the case of parallel communication, the production control device must perform reception processing with the highest priority in accordance with the timing at which the game control device transmits, making it difficult to create a program. Furthermore, it is necessary that both substrates execute communication processing during communication. However, in serial communication, an interrupt (command reception interrupt) is generated and notified when a command is received, and all that remains is to retrieve it from the serial reception buffer. In serial communication, it is not necessary to perform interrupt processing with the highest priority, and interrupts can be prohibited if interrupted. Further, in serial communication, the processing on the transmission side is simple as it is only necessary to put a command in the serial transmission buffer. Also, in serial communication, both the boards are efficient because other processing can be executed while the hardware is transmitting / receiving data. Also, physically, in the case of parallel communication, eight or more wires are required, but in serial communication, even at least one wiring can be realized. Even when serial communication is used, communication between the game control device 100 (main board) and the production control device 300 (sub board) is not bidirectional communication, but only unidirectional communication (main board → sub board). (Only direction). This prevents fraud using communication from the sub board to the main board.

This command reception interruption process is started when the above-described command reception interruption occurs in the production control device 300 (sub-board). That is, when the sub-board CPU 311 completes receiving the command transmitted by the CPU 111A of the main board through serial communication, a command reception interrupt is generated, and this command reception interrupt processing is started. Here, this command reception interrupt has a higher interrupt priority than the above-described V blank interrupt. The command reception interrupt occurs irregularly as described above. However, when the main board transmits commands continuously, the command reception interrupt at the sub board corresponds to the transmission interval (for example, 4 milliseconds). The generation interval is also the same interval (for example, 4 milliseconds).
The command from the main board includes MODE data (1 byte) and ACTION data (1 byte), which are sequentially transmitted. Hereinafter, such data constituting a command is referred to as command data or command data.

When the command reception interrupt process is started, first, the reception monitoring timer is stopped (step D41), the command is loaded from the serial reception buffer (step D42), and the process proceeds to step D44.
In step D44, whether the command data loaded in step D42 is in the MODE range is determined based on the value of the data. If it is in the MODE range (step D44; Y), the process proceeds to step D45. If it is not within the MODE range (step D44; N), the process proceeds to step D48 because it is within the ACTION range. The MODE range is a range of values within 1 byte that can be set as MODE data, and the ACTION range is a range of values within 1 byte that can be set as ACTION data. Yes.
In step D45, the command data loaded in step D42 is stored as a reception MODE (step D45), and “OK” is set in the MODE reception flag (step D46).
Next, the value of the reception monitoring timer is reset to 0 (zero), the timing operation of the reception monitoring timer is started (step D47), and then the command reception interrupt process is terminated. As used in step D45 above, simply “storing” means storing in a predetermined storage area so that it can be read for use in later control processing (the same applies hereinafter). .

In step D48, it is determined whether the value of the MODE reception flag is “OK”. If it is “OK” (step D48; Y), the process proceeds to step D49, where it is determined whether the reception monitoring timer has timed out. If not (step D49; N), the process proceeds to step D50. On the other hand, when the value of the MODE reception flag is not “OK” (step D48; N), or when the reception monitoring timer has timed out (step D49; Y), the command has not been received normally. “NG” is set in the reception flag (step D59), and the command reception interrupt process is terminated.
If the value of the MODE reception flag is not “OK” (step D48; N), for example, command data in the ACTION range is received, but it is abnormal because command data in the MODE range has not been received prior to that. If the reception monitoring timer has timed out (step D49; Y), the command data in the ACTION range is within the specified reception monitoring time counted by the reception monitoring timer from the time when the command data in the MODE range is received. Is not received.

In step D50, the command data loaded in step D42 is stored as reception ACTION (step D50), the value of the MODE reception flag is set to “NG” (step D51), and the process proceeds to step D52.
In step D52, it is determined whether the value of the command reception counter is larger than 31. If the value is larger (step D52; Y), the command reception interrupt processing is terminated because the command buffer capacity described later is exceeded, and the value is not larger. (Step D52; N), that is, if the command reception counter ≦ 31, the process proceeds to Step D53. The command reception counter value is 0 to 31 and the process proceeds to step D53. The value 0 to 31 is a value corresponding to the capacity of a command buffer, which will be described later, and is a system control cycle (the processing cycle described above; for example, It is sufficient that the number of commands that can be transmitted from the main board in 1/30 seconds) is exceeded.

In step D53, a presentation operation corresponding to reception MODE and reception ACTION is prepared (step D53), reception command range check processing (step D54) is executed, and then the process proceeds to step D55.
In step D55, it is determined whether or not the range check is OK. If not OK (step D55; N), the command reception interrupt process is terminated to discard the command (reception MODE and reception ACTION). Step D55; Y), the process proceeds to Step D56. Here, the determination result of the range check at step D55 is OK if the command range normal flag is set in the received command range check process (step D54) (step D55 is Yes), and the received command range. If the command range abnormality flag is set in the check process (step D54), the range check is not OK (step D55 is No).

In step D56, the reception MODE and the reception ACTION are stored in the command buffer (step D56). In this example, the command buffer is a so-called ring buffer, and has a specified capacity (the number of commands that can be stored). The command buffer is configured by a storage area in the RAM of the CPU 311, for example.
Next, the value of the command reception counter is updated by +1 (step D57), and the data is stored (that is, written) in the command buffer. Therefore, the value of the command write index is updated by +1 in the range of 0 to 31 ( Step D58), the command reception interrupt process is terminated. The command write index is a command buffer write pointer, and the value of this command write index is in the range of 0 to 31 in this example, but this range is the capacity of the command buffer (in this case, 32), as described above, the number of commands that can be transmitted from the main board during one cycle of the system control cycle (the aforementioned processing cycle; for example, 1/30 second) is greater than or equal to the number of commands. It only has to be.

[Received command range check processing]
Next, details of the received command range check process (step D54) in the above-described command reception interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG.
When the reception command range check process is started, first, in step D61, it is determined whether the value of the reception MODE stored in step D45 is a normal range. If it is not a normal range (step D61; N), a command range abnormality flag is set. After setting (Step D67), the received command range check process is terminated. The MODE values are not all of the values in the MODE range in which the command contents are defined, and there are values that are not defined and are not used. In the determination of D61, it is determined that it is not in the normal range.
In step D61 or step D92 described later (or both steps D61 and D92), the MODE data is also checked for missing teeth. Good. The missing tooth check of MODE data means that it is determined whether or not the MODE data to be checked corresponds to an invalid value in a portion where the values that MODE can take are not continuous. If there is no discontinuous portion in the MODE value, this missing tooth check is unnecessary.

In step D62, the minimum value (ACTION_min) among the possible values of ACTION corresponding to the value of the reception MODE stored in step D45 is acquired (step D62). In the present application, “acquiring” data in the control process in this manner means that data is extracted from the ROM (PROM 321 in the production control device 300 of this example).
Next, the maximum value (ACTION_max) among possible values of ACTION corresponding to the value of the reception MODE stored in step D45 is acquired (step D63), and the process proceeds to step D64.

  Note that an ACTION check table is registered in the PROM 321. In steps D62 and D63, a corresponding value is acquired from the ACTION check table. The ACTION check table corresponds to each MODE value, ACTION lower limit data corresponding to the minimum value (ACTION_min), ACTION upper limit data corresponding to the maximum value (ACTION_max), and a match check table (described later). ) Specifying data (for example, the head address of the match check table) is defined respectively. Note that the data of the ACTION check table and the like, that is, various information used in the control processing of the effect control device 300 (for example, data of various tables) are stored in advance in the PROM 321 together with the operation program.

Proceeding to step D64, it is determined whether the value of the reception ACTION stored in step D50 is smaller than the minimum value acquired in step D62. If it is smaller (step D64; Y), it is abnormal and step D67 is abnormal. If not smaller (step D64; N), the process proceeds to step D65.
Proceeding to step D65, it is determined whether the value of the reception ACTION stored in step D50 is larger than the maximum value acquired in step D63. If it is larger (step D65; Y), it is abnormal, so step D67. If not (step D65; N), the process proceeds to step D66.
When the process proceeds to step D66, it is normal, so the command range normal flag is set (step D66), and the received command range check process is terminated. If the process proceeds to step D67, it is abnormal, so the command range abnormality flag is set (step D67), and the received command range check process is terminated.

[Received command check processing]
Next, details of the received command check process (step D23) in the above-described main process will be described with reference to FIG.
When the reception command check process is started, first, the value of the command reception counter is loaded as the number of received commands (step D71), and the process proceeds to step D72.
In step D72, it is determined whether the command reception number is not 0 (zero). If it is not zero (step D72; Y), the process proceeds to step D73. If it is zero (step D72; N), the received command check process is performed. finish. In the present application, as in step D71, “loading” data in the control process means that data is extracted from the RAM (RAM in the CPU 311 in the effect control apparatus 300 of this example).

  In step D73, the content of the command reception counter area (that is, the value of the command reception counter) is subtracted by the number of received commands (step D73). Assuming that A is the value of the command reception counter and B is the number of received commands, “A = B” immediately after execution of step D71. Then, “A = A−B = 0” is a normal movement immediately after execution of step D73. However, in the aspect of this example, the effect control device interrupts a command reception interrupt from the game control device (main board). Since the highest priority is given without prohibition, there is a possibility that the value of A increases during the processing from step D71 to the processing of step D73. Therefore, if the process of step D73 is set to “A ← 0” (that is, the process of setting the value of the command reception counter to zero), the command count is shifted. Is going. However, when serial communication is used for transmission / reception of commands from the main board as in this example, interrupts are disabled so that the value of A does not increase between the processing of step D71 and the processing of step D73. Accordingly, the processing content of step D73 may be set to “A ← 0”.

Next, the contents of the received command buffer (corresponding to the command buffer in step D56, hereinafter simply referred to as “command buffer”) (that is, command data stored at the address corresponding to the read pointer) are stored in the command area (in some cases, “ To the command storage area "(step D74). The command area is a storage area in the RAM of the CPU 311 that constitutes a buffer in a so-called FIFO format (first-in first-out format), for example.
Next, since the data in the command buffer is read, the value of the command read index, which is the command buffer read pointer, is updated by +1 in the range of 0 to 31 (step D75), and the process proceeds to step D76. The range of 0 to 31 here may be the same range as the command write index updated in step D58.

  Proceeding to step D76, it is determined whether or not copying of commands for the number of received commands has been completed (that is, whether or not steps D74 and D75 have been repeatedly executed for the number of received commands). D76; N), the process returns to step D74, and the process is repeated from step D74. If completed (step D76; Y), the process proceeds to step D77.

When the process proceeds to step D77, the contents of the command area (the data stored first in the data not yet read in the command area, that is, the data to be read next) are loaded (step D77). A received command analysis process (step D78) is executed for the data of the loaded command (hereinafter referred to as “current command”).
Next, the address of the command area (address of data to be read next) is updated (step D79), and the process proceeds to step D80.
When the process proceeds to step D80, it is determined whether or not the analysis of the command for the number of received commands has been completed (that is, whether or not the steps D77 to D79 have been repeatedly executed for the number of received commands). D80; N), the process returns to step D77 to repeat the process from step D77. If the process is completed (step D80; Y), the received command check process is terminated.

[Received command analysis processing]
Next, details of the received command analysis process (step D78) in the received command check process described above will be described with reference to FIG.
When the received command analysis process is started, first, the upper byte of the data of the current command loaded in step D77 is stored in MODE and the lower byte is stored separately in ACT (step D91). Proceed to D92. In the case of a fluctuation-type command for instructing a special pattern fluctuation pattern, the upper byte data stored as MODE commands the first half fluctuation pattern, and the lower byte data stored as ACT commands the second half fluctuation pattern. Is.

In the present application, “first half fluctuation” means a fluctuation before reach, that is, a special figure fluctuation display game (a fluctuation display before the start of reach action) executed before reaching the reach state.
The “second half fluctuation” is a fluctuation during reach, that is, a special figure fluctuation display game (so-called reach action (for example, a plurality of special figures) executed after reaching the reach state (while being in the reach state). (Variable display in a state where the variable display is stopped in a special result mode (special symbol combination) where the display area excluding the specific area out of the display area of the column is a big hit) Means.

In step D92, it is determined whether the MODE value separated in step D91 is in the normal range. If the MODE value is not in the normal range (step D92; N), the received command analysis process is terminated, and if it is in the normal range (step D92). ; Y), go to Step D93. As described above, there is a MODE value that is not defined and is not used. When the MODE value is not used, it is determined in step D92 that the value is not in the normal range (described above). Same as step D61).
In step D93, it is determined whether the ACT value separated in step D91 is in the normal range. If the value is not in the normal range (step D93; N), the received command analysis process is terminated, and if it is in the normal range (step D93). ; Y), go to Step D94. The determination in step D93 is performed in the same manner as steps D62 to D65 described above. That is, the effective ACT value is different for each MODE, and the upper and lower limits of the effective value of this ACT are defined in the ACTION check table described above. In step D93, the ACT values separated within the upper and lower limits are defined. It is checked whether the value is within the range, and if it is within the range, it is determined that it is within the normal range (the missing tooth check has not been performed at this point).

In step D94, the head address of the match check table corresponding to the separated MODE value is acquired from the above-described ACTION check table (step D94), and then the process proceeds to step D95.
Here, the coincidence check table is a table in which all ACT values (ACTION values) that are valid for the corresponding MODE value are registered in order from the top address, and are provided for each MODE value. .
Note that in the case of a MODE in which valid ACTION values are fixed in a continuous range, the match check table is unnecessary, and therefore the data of the start address of the match check table in the ACTION check table is NULL. In addition, for the MODE line in which the match check table is defined, the effective action is missing, so after checking the upper limit / lower limit, further comparison judgment can be made using the corresponding match check table. Is performed (steps D96 to D99 described later).

  In step D95, it is determined whether the head address of the match check table acquired in step D94 is NULL. If it is NULL (step D95; Y), the process proceeds to step D100. The process proceeds to step D96. The fact that the head address of the match check table is NULL means that the valid ACT values for MODE are continuous, and only the range check in step D93 is OK. Jump to step D100 without executing D99.

  When the process proceeds to step D96, loop processing (repetition processing) with steps D96 and D99 as loop ends is executed. That is, when the process proceeds to step D96, the process branches at step D99, and the operation of sequentially executing steps D97 and D98 described later is repeated until an end condition described later is satisfied. In the loop processing, data (corresponding row data in the match check table) corresponding to the address of the match check table (hereinafter referred to as “match check table address”) acquired in step D94 and updated in step D98 described later is stored. The end condition is to match the ACT value separated in step D91, and the process is repeatedly executed until this end condition is satisfied. However, when the determination result of Step D97 described later becomes Yes, the loop processing is exited (the loop processing is ended even if the end condition is not satisfied).

That is, when proceeding to step D96, first, at step D97, it is determined whether the data corresponding to the match check table address is a check end code. If it is a check end code (step D97; Y), the loop processing is exited. The received command analysis process is terminated, and if it is not the check end code (step D97; N), the match check table address is updated to the next record (step D98), and the process proceeds to step D99. When the match check table address is updated to the next record, the row in the match check table corresponding to the match check table address is switched to the next row.
In step D99, it is determined whether the data corresponding to the updated match check table address matches the ACT value separated in step D91. If the data match, the end condition is satisfied, and the loop process ends. The process proceeds to step D100, and if they do not match, the process returns to step D96 to repeat the loop process.

  In the loop processing of steps D96 to D99 described above, a check (including a missing tooth check) is performed as to whether or not the ACT combination is normal for MODE. There are a plurality of valid ACTs for one MODE, but these values are not always continuous, so whether or not the command is a valid value is compared. Since only valid values are defined in the coincidence check table, it is compared and confirmed one by one to see if it matches any of them. For example, when the MODE value separated in step D91 is 89h, the ACT value is 31h, and the data in the fifth row of the match check table is 31h, the above loop processing is repeated four times. Sometimes the above end condition is satisfied, and the process proceeds from step D99 to step D100. Further, the MODE value separated in step D91 is 89h and the ACT value is 13h, etc., and there is no 13h etc. in the match check table (13h etc. does not have a discontinuous part in the match check table). In this case, the end condition is not satisfied even if the loop process is repeated until the last line, and the data becomes the check end code when the last line is reached. The determination result in step D97 is Yes, and the process returns from the loop process. If the determination result in step D97 is Yes as described above, the ACT value is abnormal. Therefore, as in the case where the determination result in steps D92 and D93 is No, the command is determined to be abnormal. The received command analysis process ends without executing D100 and subsequent steps.

As described above, when it is not determined that the command value (MODE and ACT data separated in step D91) is abnormal in the processing up to step D99, step D100 is executed through step D95 or D99. .
In step D100, it is determined whether the MODE data is within the variable command range. If it is within this range (step D100; Y), the variable command processing (step D101) is executed and the received command analysis process is terminated. If it is out of this range (step D100; N), the process proceeds to step D102. Here, the MODE data is the MODE data separated and stored in step D91 (the same applies to step D102 described later). The fluctuation command (sometimes referred to as “fluctuation command” or “fluctuation pattern command”) is a command for instructing a fluctuation pattern of a special figure, and the range that the data of the fluctuation command can take is the fluctuation command range. In step D100, the MODE tooth missing check may not be performed or may be performed.

In step D102, it is determined whether the MODE data is within the jackpot command range. If the MODE data is within this range (step D102; Y), the jackpot command processing (step D103) is executed to execute the received command analysis process. If it is out of this range (step D102; N), the process proceeds to step D104. The jackpot command is a command for instructing an operation related to a big hit effect (display of a fanfare screen, a round screen, etc.), and the range that the data of the jackpot command can take is the jackpot command range.
In step D104, it is determined whether or not the MODE data is within the design command range. If it is within this range (step D104; Y), the design command processing (step D105) is executed to perform the received command analysis processing. If it is out of this range (step D104; N), the process proceeds to step D106. The symbol system command (sometimes referred to as “symbol command” or “decoration special symbol command”) is a command for instructing information related to the symbol of the special symbol (for example, what to stop symbol of the special symbol, etc.) The range that this symbol command data can take is the symbol command range.

In step D106, it is determined whether the MODE data is within the single-shot command range. If the MODE data is within this range (step D106; Y), the single-shot command processing (step D107) is executed to perform the received command analysis processing. If it is out of this range (step D106; N), the process proceeds to step D108. Unlike a command that makes sense by a combination such as a symbol command and a variable command, a command that is established independently is called a single command. Single-shot commands (sometimes referred to as “single-shot commands”) include customer waiting demo commands, hold count commands, symbol stop commands, probability information commands, error / illegal commands, model designation commands, and the like. The range that this single command data can take is the single command range.
Proceeding to step D108, it is determined whether the MODE data is a prefetch command, and if it is a prefetch command (step D108; Y), a prefetch command processing (step D109) is executed to receive command analysis processing. If the command is not a prefetch command (step D108; N), the received command analysis process is terminated without executing step D109. Here, the prefetch command is a command for instructing the presence / absence of a prefetch effect (for example, a special jackpot notice) and the determination of the content of the effect at the time of occurrence.

In this example, the order of command reception at the start of fluctuation is different from the conventional configuration. Conventionally, the order is the variation pattern command → stop symbol command → holding number command, but in this example, the order is suspension number command → stop symbol command → variation pattern command. Here, the pending number command is independent and has no direct relation to the fluctuating production, so changing the transmission order is not so important, but the order of the symbol command (stop symbol command) and the variation command (fluctuation pattern command) has been changed. Has the following background and effects.
That is, it is possible to say that the content of the variation effect is determined by the variation pattern command, and the stop symbol is only one parameter in the effect content, and nothing can be done only by receiving the symbol command. The change pattern command has been treated as a “screen display change command” and the design command as an “internal parameter change command”. However, in the conventional configuration, even if a screen display change command is received, Because the design parameters were not received, it was not possible to prepare for production immediately. Furthermore, it is necessary to monitor whether the symbol command is sent within a specified time, which increases the burden on the production control device.
However, in this example, since the order is reversed, when the variation pattern command is received, if the received symbol information matches, it is possible to immediately prepare for production. . Even if a symbol command is received first, only the symbol is not changed first because it is not a command for changing the screen display. This is because the symbol information is only stored in the RAM. Further, even if a symbol command is missed, there is an advantage that the symbol command can be changed if the symbol information stored in the previous RAM matches. On the other hand, in the conventional configuration, if it is missed, the symbol information is lost and cannot be changed. That is, in this example, it can be said that the possibility that the player misses the command miss is extremely low (remarkably lower than before). In addition, the symbol command and the variation command are a pair of commands, but since the relationship between them is reduced and the commands can be handled as independent commands, there is an effect that the program development efficiency is improved.

[Variable command processing]
Next, details of the variable command processing (step D101) in the received command analysis processing described above will be described with reference to FIG.
When the variable command processing is started, it is first determined whether or not the special figure type is unconfirmed in step D111. In the case (step D111; N), that is, when the special figure type is set, the variation pattern corresponding symbol determination process (step D112) is executed, and the process proceeds to step D113. The special figure type is information indicating whether the special figure type is special figure 1 or special figure 2, and is information set in step D171 (to be described later) of the symbol system command processing.

In step D113, based on the information (valid command information or invalid command information) returned in the variation pattern corresponding symbol determination process (step D112), it is determined whether or not the variation command and the symbol type are inconsistent. If it is consistent (step D113; Y), that is, if invalid command information is returned, the variable command processing is terminated. If not consistent (step D113; N), that is, valid command information is returned. If yes, go to Step D114.
The symbol type means a symbol category, and examples of the symbol type include an outlier symbol and a 16R probability variation big hit symbol. Also, the inconsistency in step D113 is contradictory when performing an effect, such as when a symbol command of 16R probability variation big hit symbol is received after receiving a deviation variation command (variation pattern command). It means a combination (a combination of a variation command and a symbol type).

  When the process proceeds to step D114, in order to perform an effect in accordance with the change command, a change effect setting process (step D114) is executed, and the changing state is set as the P machine state (pachinko machine state) (step D115). ), The variable command processing is terminated. Here, “changing” means that the special figure is changing (not during a customer waiting demonstration, during a big hit, or during a fanfare, etc.).

[Fluctuation pattern compatible symbol judgment processing]
Next, details of the variation pattern corresponding symbol determination processing (step D112) of the above-described variation command processing will be described with reference to FIG.
When the variation pattern corresponding symbol determination process is started, first, the symbol type information saved in step D173 (to be described later) of the symbol command processing is loaded (step D121), and the process proceeds to step D122.
The symbol type information here is information indicating the symbol type of the stop symbol of the special display (decorative symbol) variable display game. In the case of this example, the symbol types can be classified into five types: “offset symbol”, “2R probability variation big hit symbol”, “16R probability variation big hit symbol”, “11R probability variation big hit symbol”, and “11R normal big hit symbol”. In detail, for example, “16R probability variation big hit symbol” is further divided into five types A to E, and “11R probability variation big hit symbol” is further divided into three types A to C, so there are 11 types in total. There are stop symbol patterns. However, the present invention is not limited to this mode. For example, a type such as a big hit symbol or a small hit symbol of another number of rounds may be set, and the setting of the symbol type varies depending on the specifications of the model. Here, 2R and 16R indicate the number of rounds of the big hit, and the probable big hit symbol is a big hit symbol that becomes a probable change state (a state in which the probability of being a big hit is higher than the normal state) after the big hit, It is a big hit symbol that becomes a normal state (a state that is not a probability variation state) after the big hit. Also, the missing symbol is a symbol (a symbol that is not a big hit) in which the result of the variable display game is lost.

  In step D122, it is determined whether the MODE data (upper byte data separated in step D91 described above) is within the variable command range. If it is within this range (step D122; Y), the process proceeds to step D123. If it is outside this range (step D122; N), it is determined that the command is abnormal, and the process proceeds to step D133. In step D122, for example, the same determination as in step D100 described above is performed again. In this step D122, the configuration may be such that the MODE tooth missing check is not performed or may be performed. Further, the determination contents of step D122 and step D100 described above may be different. For example, the MODE tooth missing check may be performed only in one of the above-described step D100 and step D122.

  In step D123, it is determined whether the symbol type information loaded in step D121 is an out-of-sequence symbol. D124), the process proceeds to step D141, and if it is not an outlier symbol (step D123; N), the process proceeds to step D125. Here, the off-time ACT matching check table is a table including all data that can be used as ACT (lower byte data of the command) in the case of the off-line symbol.

The PROM 321 is registered with a failure ACT consistency check address table. In step D124, the address of the corresponding failure ACT consistency check table is acquired and set from the failure ACT consistency check address table. The ACT matching check address table at the time of detachment defines an address (in this case, the start address of the ACT matching check table at the time of losing) corresponding to each MODE value in the variable command range. It is a thing. The ACT match check table at the time of loss is a table in which all ACT values (ACTION values) that are valid for the corresponding MODE value are registered in order from the start address in the case of a loss symbol. It is provided for each value.
In addition, such an ACT matching check address table and an ACT matching check table include symbol types other than the outlier symbols (“2R probability variation big hit symbol”, “16R probability variation big hit symbol”, “11R probability variation big hit symbol”, and “11R normal big hit symbol”. Symbol “) is also provided in the same manner, and is used in the same manner as step D124 in steps D126, D128, D130, and D132 described later.

  When the process proceeds to step D125, it is determined whether the symbol type information loaded in step D121 is a 2R probability variation big hit symbol. Is set (step D126), the process proceeds to step D141, and if it is not the 2R probability variation big hit symbol (step D125; N), the process proceeds to step D127. Here, the 2R probability variable big hit ACT matching check table is a table including all data that can be ACT (lower byte data of the command) in the case of the 2R probability variable big hit symbol.

  In step D127, it is determined whether or not the symbol type information loaded in step D121 is a 16R probability variable big hit symbol. Is set (step D128), the process proceeds to step D141, and if it is not the 16R probability variable big hit symbol (step D127; N), the process proceeds to step D129. Here, the 16R probability variation big hit ACT matching check table is a table including all data that can be ACT (lower byte data of the command) in the case of the 16R probability variation big hit symbol.

  In step D129, it is determined whether or not the symbol type information loaded in step D121 is an 11R probability variation big hit symbol. (Step D130), the process proceeds to step D141, and if it is not the 11R probability variable big hit symbol (step D129; N), the process proceeds to step D131. Here, the 11R probability variation big hit ACT matching check table is a table including all data that can be ACT (lower byte data of the command) in the case of the 11R probability variation big hit symbol.

In step D131, it is determined whether or not the symbol type information loaded in step D121 is an 11R normal big hit symbol. Is set (step D132), the process proceeds to step D141, and if it is not the 11R normal big hit symbol (step D131; N), it is determined that the command is abnormal and the process proceeds to step D133. Here, the 11R normal jackpot ACT matching check table is a table including all data that can be ACT (lower byte data of the command) in the case of the 11R normal jackpot symbol.
When the process proceeds to step D133, invalid command information is returned (step D133), and the variation pattern corresponding symbol determination process is terminated.

  When the processing proceeds to step D141, loop processing (repetition processing) with steps D141 and D144 as loop ends is executed. In other words, when the process proceeds to step D141, the operation that sequentially executes step D142 and step D143 is performed by branching at step D144, so that the ACT consistency check table (any one of the previous steps D124, D126, D128, D130, D132) is executed. Repeat until the end of (set in step 1).

That is, when the process proceeds to step D141, first, in step D142, the address of the ACT consistency check table acquired in any of steps D124, D126, D128, D130, and D132 and updated in step D143 described later (hereinafter referred to as “ACT consistency check table”). Address ”) (corresponding row data in the ACT matching check table) matches the ACT value separated in step D91, and if they match (step D142; Y), the loop The process exits and proceeds to step D146. If they do not match (step D142; N), the ACT consistency check table address is updated to the next record (step D143), and the process proceeds to step D144.
In step D144, it is determined whether step D142 has been repeatedly executed up to the last data of the ACT matching check table. If step D142 has been repeated up to the last data, the process proceeds to step D145. Return to D141 and repeat the process. Specifically, in step D144, it is determined whether the data corresponding to the ACT consistency check table address updated in step D143 is a check end code (-1). Proceeding to step D145, if it is not a check end code, the process returns to step D141 to repeat the processing.

If any of the data in the ACT matching check table matches the data of the ACT separated in the above step D91 by the processing of the repeated loop of steps D141 to D144, the process proceeds to step D146. If there is no matching data in the ACT consistency check table, the process proceeds to step D145.
Then, when the process proceeds to step D145, invalid command information is returned as being abnormal (step D145), and the variation pattern corresponding symbol determination process is terminated. In step D146, the value of valid command information is returned as normal (step D146), and the variation pattern corresponding symbol determination process is terminated.

In step D113 described above, the consistency between the variation command and the symbol type is determined based on the information returned in any one of steps D133, D145, and D146.
For example, the symbol type information loaded in step D121 is a symbol that has been received in advance, and the MODE value of the variable command separated in step D91 is CBh, and the value of ACT is If it is 06h and the data in the fifth row of the ACT consistency check table is 06h, the determination result in Step D142 becomes Yes when Step D142 is repeated five times, and the process proceeds to Step D146. The command information is returned, and the determination result in step D113 is No (matched). In the same case, if the MODE value separated in step D91 is CBh and the ACT value is 01h, for example, and 01h does not exist in the ACT consistency check table, the loop processing is repeated. Even if it is repeated, the determination result in step D142 is No. Since the data becomes the check end code when the last line is reached, the loop process is ended and the process proceeds to step D145, and invalid command information is returned. The determination result of step D113 is Yes (inconsistency). Further, when the MODE value separated at step D91 is not the variable command range (when Step D122 is No), the MODE value separated at Step D91 is the variable command range (Yes at Step D122). Nevertheless, if the symbol type information loaded in step D121 is not any symbol type (when steps D123, D125, D127, D129, and D131 are all No), invalid command information is returned in step D133. The determination result at step D113 is Yes (mismatch).
As described above, according to the variation pattern corresponding symbol determination process, the consistency check is performed to determine whether the variation pattern command matches the stop symbol. Since the variation performed depends on the type of stop symbol (the symbol type such as the above-mentioned loss symbol, 16R probability variation big hit symbol, etc.), it must be checked in advance whether the variation pattern command matches the symbol, and consistency must be maintained. For example, the above-described steps D114 and D115 are not executed, and an abnormal variation display effect is not performed. Note that the variation patterns are not necessarily perfectly separated for each symbol. For example, there are variation patterns shared by the 16R probability variation big hit symbol and the 2R probability variation big hit symbol.

[Big hit command processing]
Next, details of the jackpot command process (step D103) in the received command analysis process described above will be described with reference to FIG.
When the jackpot command processing is started, first, in step D151, the MODE data (upper byte data separated in step D91 described above, the same applies to steps D154, D157, and D160 described later) is a fanfare effect (big hit). When the fanfare effect is commanded (step D151; Y), the process proceeds to step D152, and when the fanfare effect is not commanded (step D151; N), go to step D154.
When proceeding to step D152, a fanfare effect setting process (step D152) for performing a fanfare effect according to the command is executed, the fanfare medium setting is set as the P machine state (step D153), and the big hit command process is terminated. To do.

Proceeding to step D154, it is determined whether or not the MODE data is for commanding a round effect (effect during a big hit round), and if it is for commanding a round effect (step D154; Y), step D155 is determined. If it is determined that the round effect is not instructed (step D154; N), the process proceeds to step D157.
Proceeding to step D155, a round effect setting process (step D155) for performing a round effect according to the command is executed, the machine in the round is set as the P machine state (step D156), and the jackpot command process is terminated. To do.

Proceeding to step D157, it is determined whether or not the MODE data commands an interval effect (effect between the rounds of big hits), and if the interval effect is commanded (step D157; Y). Advances to step D158, and if it does not command an interval effect (step D157; N), advances to step D160.
When the process proceeds to step D158, the interval effect setting process (step D158) for performing the interval effect according to the command is executed, the interval is set as the P machine state (step D159), and the jackpot command process is terminated. To do.

Proceeding to step D160, it is determined whether or not the MODE data is for instructing an ending effect (effect at the end of jackpot). In the case where the ending effect is not commanded (step D160; N), the jackpot command processing is terminated.
When the process proceeds to step D161, an ending effect setting process (step D161) for performing an ending effect according to the command is executed, ending is set as the P machine state (step D162), and the jackpot command is terminated. .
Note that the above is an example of the jackpot command processing, and processing other than the above (for example, processing for effects other than fanfare, rounds, intervals, and endings) may be possible.

[Design command processing]
Next, details of the symbol-based command processing (step D105) in the received command analysis processing described above will be described with reference to FIG.
When the symbol-type command processing is started, first, a special figure type corresponding to MODE data (upper byte data separated in the above-mentioned step D91 and the same in step D172 described later) (see special figure 1 or special figure 2). Is set) (step D171). For example, if the MODE data is 85h, the special figure 1 is set as the special figure type, and if the MODE data is 86h, the special figure 2 is set as the special figure type. In this way, whether the special figure 1 or the special figure 2 can be determined from the MODE data, and in this step D171, the special figure type is determined and set from the MODE data.

  Next, a symbol type setting table corresponding to the MODE data is set (step D172). The symbol type setting table is a table for determining the symbol type corresponding to the symbol command (the category of symbols such as the above-mentioned loss symbol, 16R probability variation big hit symbol, etc.), and the ACTION data (for example, 11h to 1Bh) of the symbol command 11 is a table in which the correspondence between the symbol type and the symbol type is defined. Since the ratio of symbols varies between Special Figure 1 and Special Figure 2 (the probability variation ratio is the same), this symbol type setting table is provided separately for each MODE. Select and set the one corresponding to.

Next, based on the symbol type setting table set in step D172, the symbol type corresponding to the ACT data (lower byte data separated in step D91 described above) is acquired and saved as symbol type information ( Step D173), the symbol command processing is terminated.
The special symbol type and symbol type information set in steps D171 and D173 in response to the symbol command in this way are used in the processing of steps D111 and D112 described above for the variation command received following the symbol command. Even if the special figure type information is used for the determination in step D111, the data previously set in step D171 is stored and held until step D171 is newly executed. Further, the symbol type information is configured to store and hold the data previously set in step D173 until it is newly executed after step D112 is used.

[Single command processing]
Next, details of the single command processing (step D107) in the received command analysis processing will be described with reference to FIGS. 81 and 82. FIG.
When single-shot command processing is started, first, in step D181, the MODE data (upper byte data separated in step D91 described above, the same applies to steps D191, D193, D195, D197, D199, D204, and D207 described later). ) Determines whether a customer waiting demo is instructed. If the customer waiting demo is instructed (step D181; Y), the process proceeds to step D182, and if the customer waiting demo is not instructed (step In D181; N), the process proceeds to Step D191. The customer waiting demo is a customer waiting demonstration effect (also referred to as “customer waiting effect”), and is an effect including a customer waiting demonstration display performed on the display device 41. The customer-waiting demonstration effect is not limited to display on the display device 41, but may be effected by display on another display device, lighting of lamps (including blinking), or sound output.

Proceeding to step D182, it is determined whether the P machine state (pachinko machine state) is in the customer waiting demo. If the customer waiting demo is in progress (step D182; Y), the single command processing is terminated and the customer waiting demo is in progress. If not (step D182; N), the customer waiting scenario data setting process (step D183) is executed to perform the customer waiting effect. In the description of the control processing of the effect control device 300, scenario control data means data set in a scenario management area or an address area of the scenario management area described later in order to control the flow of a specific effect. In this step D183, scenario control data for performing a customer waiting effect is set.
Next, customer waiting A (customer waiting state A) is set as the P machine state (step D184), and the process proceeds to step D185. In this example, the customer waiting effects include a customer waiting state A, a customer waiting state B, a customer waiting movie (no sound), and a customer waiting movie (with sound).

When the process proceeds to step D185, it is determined whether data transmission between subs is being performed (that is, it is determined whether data transmission is being performed to an effect control device of a different pachinko gaming machine), and if it is being transmitted (step D185; Y ), The single command processing is terminated, and if not being transmitted (step D185; N), the process proceeds to step D186.
Proceeding to step D186, an inter-sub command (broadcast transmission setting) for the customer waiting demo synchronization (inter-sub synchronization in the customer waiting demo display) is prepared (step D186), and the inter-sub command is edited to edit the prepared inter-sub command. A transmission data editing process (step D187) is executed.

Next, an initial value is set in an ack waiting timer (a timer used in step D521 described later) (step D188). Whether or not the sub-board (production control device) of the pachinko gaming machine that has received the inter-sub command returns ack to the sub-board of the pachinko gaming machine that has transmitted the inter-sub command varies depending on the type of command (described later). Step D480a). In this example, the inter-sub-command for waiting for a customer demo synchronization includes a content requesting a reply of ack. That is, in this example, the inter-sub-command for the customer waiting demo synchronization is a command that requires an ack response.
Next, an inter-submission production start waiting timer (a timer used in step D532 described later) is set (step D189), an inter-sub transmission request flag is set (step D190), and the single-shot command processing is terminated. The inter-sub-transmission request flag is used for determination in step D461 described later.

Proceeding to step D191, it is determined whether or not the MODE data is for instructing the value of the special figure 1 hold number. If the value of the special figure 1 hold number is instructed (step D191; Y), After executing the special figure 1 hold information setting process (step D192), the single-shot command process is terminated. When the special figure 1 hold number value is not instructed (step D191; N), the process proceeds to step D193.
Proceeding to step D193, it is determined whether or not the MODE data is for instructing the value of the special figure 2 hold number. When the value of the special figure 2 hold number is instructed (step D193; Y), After executing the special figure 2 hold information setting process (step D194), the single-shot command process is terminated. When the special figure 2 hold number value is not commanded (step D193; N), the process proceeds to step D195. The special figure 1 hold information setting process (step D192) will be described in detail later, but the special figure 2 hold information setting process (step D194) is the same as the special figure 1 hold information setting process (see FIG. 1). Since only the difference between the special figure 2) is omitted.

Proceeding to step D195, it is determined whether or not the MODE data is for commanding the production mode switching preparation (data of the production mode switching preparation command), and when the production mode switching preparation is commanded (step D195; Y) When the production mode switching setting process (step D196) is executed, the single-shot command process is terminated, and when the production mode switching preparation is not commanded (step D195; N), the process proceeds to step D197. The effect mode switching setting process (step D196) is a control process for performing an operation in accordance with the effect mode switching preparation command, and includes a scenario data setting process.
Proceeding to Step D197, it is determined whether or not the MODE data is a notification of power failure recovery (command data at the time of power failure recovery), and if it is a notification of power failure recovery (Step D197; Y), the power failure recovery setting After executing the process (step D198), the single-shot command process is terminated, and when the power failure recovery is not notified (step D197; N), the process proceeds to step D199. The power failure recovery setting process (step D198) is for displaying, for example, a message such as “Game resumed” on the display device 41 or flashing lamps in a predetermined manner to notify the player of power failure recovery. Including the scenario data setting process.

Proceeding to step D199, it is determined whether or not the MODE data is information (command data at power-on) that informs power-on (power-on with the initialization switch (RAM clear switch) turned on). If it is a notification of turning on (step D199; Y), the process proceeds to step D200, and if it is not a notification of turning on the power (step D199; N), the process proceeds to step D204. It should be noted that the power-on command is a power-on command that informs the effect control device 300 that the game control device 100 has cleared the RWM. This power-on command is sent to cause the effect control device 300 to clear the effect state and to perform RWM clear notification (an operation to display that the RWM has been cleared, for example, on the display device 41).
In step D200, various initial screen information is set (step D200). The setting contents of various initial screen information include clearing the special figure type / symbol type, setting 0 for the special figure 1 holding number and the special figure 2 holding number, for example, left = 7, middle = 5 for the current symbol and the stopped symbol In this case, the off-set symbol of right = 3 is set.

Next, the index of the suspension motion control table corresponding to the number of suspensions (= 0) at this time is calculated and saved (step D201). Here, the index of the motion control table for holding is an index for designating a row (record) of the motion control table for holding. The on-hold motion control table is a motion control table for displaying on-hold display of a special memory. Further, the processing of this step D201 is executed for the special figure 1 hold number and the special figure 2 hold number, respectively.
Here, the motion control table is a control table for executing each blocked effect (mainly effect display), and is also simply referred to as a motion table. The data of the motion table can be easily produced by a graphical input operation using a mouse or the like with commercially available application software that can be executed on a PC (personal computer). Pre-stored in the PROM 321.
Next, a power-on scenario data setting process (step D202) is executed. This power-on scenario data setting process may include an initialization process for setting the motor operating position of the rendering device to an initial position, and a control process for executing the RWM clear notification. .
Next, customer waiting A (customer waiting state A) is set as the P machine state (step D203), and the one-shot command processing is terminated.

When the process proceeds to step D204, it is determined whether or not the MODE data is for commanding a special symbol stop. If the special symbol stop is not instructed (step D204; N), the process proceeds to step D207.
In step D205, the symbol stop scenario data setting process (step D205) is executed, the normal state is set as the P machine state (step D206), and the single-shot system command is terminated. Here, “normal” indicates that the special figure is not a big hit, is not changing, or is waiting for a customer (waiting for a customer). In addition, after the normal setting is made here, for example, the special figure is changing or the customer is waiting according to the next command from the main board.

Proceeding to step D207, it is determined whether the MODE data is information indicating probability information (data of probability variation information command). If the data is information indicating probability information (step D207; Y), probability information setting processing ( If the single command processing is terminated after executing step D208) and the probability information is not notified (step D207; N), other processing steps not shown (for example, determining MODE data) Step)
Here, the probability information setting process (step D208) is a setting process for switching the screen at the time of the end of probability change (when transitioning from a high probability state to a normal state with a low probability) when probability change occurs after a big hit. In some cases, scenario data setting processing is included.
This single-shot command processing includes steps that are not shown or described. For example, the corresponding processing when receiving other non-variable commands (such as error commands) is omitted. In addition, scenario control data is not set for all commands. For example, when an error command indicating that the frame is open is received, the screen of the display device 41 is not changed, so that the scenario control data is not set.

[Customer waiting scenario data setting process]
Next, details of the customer waiting scenario data setting process (step D183) in the single command processing described above will be described with reference to FIG.
When the customer waiting scenario data setting process is started, scenario layer number 0 is first prepared (step D211). Here, “preparing” means temporarily storing data in a predetermined storage area for subsequent processing (the same applies to other steps described later). The scenario layer is a conceptual scenario layer (layer) for hierarchically controlling the flow of performance. The scenario layer number is a number assigned to each scenario layer, and in this example, it is from 0 to 7. In this example, scenario layer number 0 (hereinafter referred to as “scenario layer 0”) is mainly used for display control of the background image, scenario layer 1 is used for display control of the left design, and scenario layer 2 is Used for display control of symbols, scenario layer 3 is used for display control of middle symbols, scenario layer 4 is used for display control of the first notice character, scenario layer 5 is used for display control of the second notice character, and scenario layer 6 is reserved. A control target is basically assigned to each scenario layer, such that the scenario layer 7 is used for display control of display (that is, the decorative special figure start memory display) and the scenario layer 7 is used for display control of the fourth symbol. However, only the scenario layer 0 is used for the customer waiting effect, and motion information such as symbols for the customer waiting effect is managed in the scenario layer 0.

Next, the address of the customer waiting scenario data table is prepared (step D212). A scenario data table (simply called “scenario table”) is a table in which data for controlling the flow of a specific performance (data specifying which motion table is executed at what timing, etc.) is set. Yes, it is stored in advance in the PROM 321 of the effect control device 300 for each effect. The customer waiting scenario data table is a background scenario table for a customer waiting effect, and has, for example, the configuration shown in FIG. Further, as shown in FIG. 135, the scenario table of this example is one in which opcode and operand data (scenario data) are set in each row (each record).
Next, a scenario data setting process (step D213) is executed based on the data (address and scenario layer number data) prepared in the previous steps D211 and D212.

Next, scenario layer number 1 is prepared (step D214), the address (NULL) of the left symbol scenario data table is prepared (step D215), and scenario data based on the data prepared in the immediately preceding steps D214 and D215. A setting process (step D216) is executed.
Next, scenario layer number 2 is prepared (step D217), the address (NULL) of the right symbol scenario data table is prepared (step D218), and scenario data based on the data prepared in the immediately preceding steps D217 and D218. A setting process (step D219) is executed.

Next, scenario layer number 3 is prepared (step D220), the address (NULL) of the middle symbol scenario data table is prepared (step D221), and scenario data based on the data prepared in the immediately preceding steps D220 and D221. A setting process (step D222) is executed.
Next, scenario layer number 4 is prepared (step D223), the address (NULL) of the notice 1 scenario data table is prepared (step D224), and scenario data based on the data prepared in the immediately preceding steps D223 and D224. A setting process (step D225) is executed.

Next, scenario layer number 5 is prepared (step D226), the address (NULL) of the notice 2 scenario data table is prepared (step D227), and scenario data based on the data prepared in the immediately preceding steps D226 and D227. A setting process (step D228) is executed.
Next, scenario layer number 6 is prepared (step D229), the address (NULL) of the pending scenario data table is prepared (step D230), and scenario data is set based on the data prepared in the immediately preceding steps D229 and D230. Processing (step D231) is executed.

Next, scenario layer number 7 is prepared (step D232), the address (NULL) of the fourth symbol scenario data table is prepared (step D233), and the scenario is based on the data prepared in the immediately preceding steps D232 and D233. The data setting process (step D234) is executed to end the customer waiting scenario data setting process.
Note that scenario layers 1 to 7 for preparing addresses (NULL) in steps D215, D218, D221, D224, D227, D230, and D233 are scenario layers in which no scenario data table is set, that is, scenario layers that are not controlled.

[Scenario data setting processing]
Next, details of the scenario data setting process (steps D213, D216, D219, D222, D225, D228, D231, D234) in the above-described customer waiting scenario data setting process will be described with reference to FIG. Note that this scenario data setting process is common to various effects, and the step in which this scenario data setting process is executed is another process (for example, step D318 of a non-reach fluctuation setting process described later). There are many. The steps described as “scenario data setting process” are all shown in FIG.
When the scenario data setting process is started, first, in step D241, it is determined whether the address of the prepared scenario data table (for example, the one prepared in steps D212, D215, etc.) is NULL, and if it is NULL (step D241; Y) Proceed to step D247, and if not NULL (step D241; N), proceed to step D242.

  In the above-described customer waiting scenario data setting process, when this process is executed in step D213, the address of the customer waiting scenario data table that is not NULL is prepared in the immediately preceding step D212. The result of the determination is No and the process proceeds to step D242. If this process is executed in other steps D216, etc., NULL is prepared in the immediately preceding step D215, etc., so the determination in step D241 is performed. The result is Yes and the process proceeds to step D247.

In step D242, the start address of the scenario management area corresponding to the prepared scenario layer number (for example, the one prepared in step D211, the same applies hereinafter) is set (step D242). In the case of this example, the RAM in the CPU 311 of the effect control device 300 is configured to have storage areas for scenario management called “scenario management area address area” and “scenario management area”.
Of these, as shown on the right side of FIG. 133, the scenario management area includes an area for storing a scenario timer value (scenario timer area) and an area for storing a PB timer (push button timer) value ( PB timer area), an area for storing the value of the PB detection flag (push button detection flag) (PB detection flag area), and an area for storing the address of the scenario data table (scenario data table area). Structure.
Also, there are scenario management areas having the same structure corresponding to each scenario layer. In this example, there are 8 scenario layers, so there are also 8 scenario management areas (scenario management areas 0 to 7). . In step D242, in order to identify one of the plurality of scenario management areas as described above, the top address of the scenario management area corresponding to the prepared scenario layer number (hereinafter referred to as “corresponding scenario management area”) is set. It is set.
Here, in this application, “PB (push button)” does not mean only the push button (effect button 25), but the entire effect operation unit 550 (that is, the push button (effect button 25) and the select button ( Means touch panel 29)). Therefore, for example, “PB detection” means “detection of the operation of the effect button 25 and / or detection of the operation of the touch panel 29”.

The address area of the scenario management area is an area for storing the start address of the scenario management area for each scenario layer. In this example, there are eight scenario layers, so as shown on the left side of FIG. It consists of eight areas for storing the corresponding eight start addresses (scenario layer 0 address to scenario layer 7 address).
Next, the start address of the scenario management area set in the immediately preceding step D242 is stored (that is, written) in the address area of the scenario management area corresponding to the prepared scenario layer number (step D243).

Next, a process of writing 0 (ie, clearing the value) as the value of the scenario timer in the corresponding scenario management area is performed (step D244), and 0 is written as the value of the PB timer in the corresponding scenario management area (ie, value) Is cleared) (step D245). Note that the value of the PB detection flag in the corresponding scenario management area may be cleared, but it may be cleared when necessary (when PB detection is started), so the value of the PB detection flag is set here. Absent.
Next, the address of the prepared scenario data table (for example, prepared in step D212) is written in the scenario data table area of the corresponding scenario management area (step D246), and the scenario data setting process is terminated.
On the other hand, when proceeding to Step D247, NULL is written in the address area of the scenario management area corresponding to the prepared scenario layer number (Step D247), and the scenario data setting process is terminated.

According to the scenario data setting process described above, the scenario management storage area (“scenario management area address area” and “scenario management area”) corresponding to the prepared scenario layer number is to be executed for the future. Scenario control data is set.
For example, in the above-described customer waiting scenario data setting process, the scenario data setting process is executed in steps D213, D216, D219, D222, D225, D228, D231, and D234, whereby the scenario in the address area of the scenario management area is executed. The top address of the scenario management area 0 is set as the layer 0 address, and NULL is set from the remaining scenario layer 1 address to the scenario layer 7 address. The address of the customer waiting scenario data table prepared in step D212 is set in the scenario data table area of the scenario management area 0. As a result, the control of the customer waiting effect is executed only in the scenario layer 0.

[Special Figure 1 Hold Information Setting Processing]
Next, details of the special figure 1 hold information setting process (step D192) in the single-shot command process described above will be described with reference to FIG.
When the special figure 1 hold information setting process is started, first, the data of the special figure 1 hold number at that time is loaded, and the loaded data is stored as the previous hold number (step D251).
Next, the value of the number of holdings commanded by the command (MODE and ACT data separated in step D91) is stored as the special figure 1 holding number (step D252), and then the process proceeds to step D253.

Proceeding to step D253, it is determined whether the number of new reservations (the figure 1 reservation number stored in step D252) and the previous reservation number (value stored in step D251) match, and if they match (step D253; In Y), the special figure 1 hold information setting process is terminated, and if they do not match (step D253; N), the process proceeds to step D254.
When the process proceeds to step D254, the index of the motion control table for hold corresponding to the new hold number is calculated and saved (step D254). The index is data that specifies the number of a plurality of storage areas that form a group. In particular, an index that specifies a motion table is called a motion index. In this step D254, a motion index for specifying the motion control table for holding corresponding to the new number of reservations is calculated and saved in a storage area (holding index area) for storing it.
Next, scenario layer number 6 is prepared (step D255), and the address of the special figure 1 reservation scenario data table (hold X) is prepared (step D256). Here, the special figure 1 holding scenario data table (X holdings) means a scenario table that is different for each holding number for producing an effect corresponding to the new holding number. For example, if the number of new reservations is 2, for example, it is a special figure 1 reservation scenario data table (two reservations).
Next, based on the data prepared in the immediately preceding steps D255 and D256, the above-described scenario data setting process (step D257) is executed, and the process proceeds to step D258.

When the process proceeds to step D258, it is determined whether the number of holdings has increased (that is, whether the number of new holdings is greater than the number of previous holdings). If (step D258; N), the process proceeds to step D262.
When the process proceeds to Step D259, the display pattern of the hold normal lighting is set in the color information area corresponding to the new hold number (Step D259), and the process goes to Step D260.
When the process proceeds to step D260, it is determined whether the state of the P machine is a big hit. If the big hit is being made (step D260; Y), the special figure 1 hold information setting process is terminated, and if not a big hit (step D260; N) Then, the start request winning sound is requested to be output (step D261), and the special figure 1 hold information setting process is terminated. The big hit includes the above-mentioned fanfare, round, interval, and ending.

In step D262, the special figure 1 prefetch information area is shifted (step D262), the color information area is shifted (step D263), and the special figure 1 hold information setting process is terminated.
Since the process proceeds to step D259 when there is a start prize in FIG. 1, in order to perform a hold display (display of a held start memory) and a winning sound output for production by this start prize. Steps D259 and D261 are executed. However, during the big hit, the process branches at step D260 and no winning sound is output. Further, the process proceeds to step D262 when the number of reserved start-ups in FIG. 1 is reduced, so that the display of the number of holds for which pre-reading display (for example, jackpot notice or fluctuation pattern notice) is displayed is shifted. In addition, steps D262 and D263 are executed in order to shift the prefetch information (various information (flags and the like) such as prefetched variation pattern and stop symbol information and prefetch effect information) to an area corresponding to the number of reservations.
In the effect control apparatus 300, in the above-described step D109 (prefetch command processing), the prefetch information is set as the analysis result of the prefetch command for each hold. The storage area for the pre-read information needs to be shifted corresponding to the decrease in the number of reservations in the same manner as the random number storage area is shifted at the start of fluctuation on the main board. Step D262 described above is present. Further, the step D263 similarly shifts the storage area of the information of the reserved display color corresponding to the pre-reading information (that is, the color of the holding display different depending on the presence / absence of the pre-reading effect and the contents for the pre-reading effect). It is processing.

[Variation production setting processing]
Next, details of the changing effect setting process (step D114) in the above-described changing command process will be described with reference to FIGS.
When the variation effect setting process is started, first, a variation pattern classification for selecting a broad pattern according to the received command (a rough classification of the variable display effect of the special figure, which is determined by the large pattern data described later) The process (step D271) is executed to prepare the notice allocation table 1 corresponding to the broad pattern and various effects information returned in the variation pattern classification process of step D271 (step D272). The production information here is information on the stop symbol (especially because the details of the big hit symbol, since the deviation can be understood by a broad pattern), information on the probability state such as a high probability / short time state, the number of holdings, and the production control device 300 (In this example, a game mode command is also sent from the game control device). In this step D272 (or steps D274 and D277 described later), the notice distribution table is set in consideration of various production information. For example, even with the same variation pattern command, the notice distribution ratio ( (Incidence rate) can be changed.
Next, random number lottery processing A (step D273) is executed.
Next, the notice allocation table 2 corresponding to the major pattern returned in step D271 and various effect information is prepared (step D274), the random number lottery process B (step D275) is executed, and the process proceeds to step D276. .

When the process proceeds to step D276, it is determined whether the main pattern returned in step D271 is “normally shifted”. If it is “normally shifted” (step D276; Y), the process proceeds to step D279. If (step D276; N), the process proceeds to step D277.
Proceeding to step D277, the notice distribution table 3 corresponding to the broad pattern returned in step D271 and various effects information is prepared (step D277), and the random number lottery process C (step D278) is executed. Proceed to step D279.
In step D279, a basic BGM number (basic BGM song number) is set (step D279), notice effect setting processing 1 (step D280) is executed, and then the process proceeds to step D281.

When the process proceeds to step D281, it is determined whether or not the first half variation type determined in the process so far is a normal variation. If it is a normal variation (step D281; Y), the process proceeds to step D282, and if it is not a normal variation (step D281; N), the process proceeds to another processing step (not shown in the wavy line in FIG. 86) (various variations when the first half variation type is not a normal variation).
The first-half variation type is a variation notice type distributed on the production control device side in the same MODE (for example, the first half-second normal variation). In addition, “normal” in “normal fluctuation” means that it is not a special fluctuation such as a so-called slip or shortening fluctuation. Also, in order to avoid complications, only the state of the notice distribution when the first half variation type is normal (not slipping or shortening) is shown in the flowchart (FIG. 86). And the process of various fluctuations when the first half fluctuation type is not a normal fluctuation is executed in the steps after the flow in which the determination result in Step D281 is No (omitted by broken lines in FIG. 86). After the subsequent processing is executed, the process proceeds to step D290 in FIG. Further, since the first half fluctuation can be normal in both cases of big hit and loss, each notice scenario data setting process (steps D286 to D289 described later) may be executed in any case of loss of big hit. is there. However, since the first-half fluctuation dedicated to big hits is also conceivable, the setting process is not always limited to both.

When the process proceeds to step D282, it is determined whether the notice type (data in the effect distribution result area described later) determined in the process so far (step D273, etc.) designates a scroll notice, and if it is not a scroll notice (step In step D282; N), the process proceeds to step D283. In the case of scroll notice (step D282; Y), the process proceeds to step D290 after executing the scroll notice scenario data setting process (step D286).
When the process proceeds to step D283, it is determined whether the notice type determined in the process so far is one that designates a scroll character notice, and if it is not a scroll character notice (step D283; N), the process proceeds to step D284. If it is a character notice (step D283; Y), the scroll character notice scenario data setting process (step D287) is executed, and then the process proceeds to step D290.

When the process proceeds to step D284, it is determined whether or not the notice type determined in the process so far designates the PB notice. If the notice type is not the PB notice (step D284; N), the process proceeds to step D285. If yes (step D284; Y), the PB notice scenario data setting process (step D288) is executed, and then the process proceeds to step D290.
When the process proceeds to step D285, it is determined whether the notice type determined in the process so far specifies a flashback notice. If the notice type is not a flashback notice (step D285; N), the process proceeds to step D290. If it is a back notice (step D285; Y), after executing the flashback notice scenario data setting process (step D289), the process proceeds to step D290.

In step D290, it is determined whether or not the special figure type is special figure 2. If the special figure type is special figure 2 (step D290; Y), the process advances to step D291, and if it is not special figure 2 (step D290; N). ), That is, in the case of FIG. 1, the process proceeds to step D293.
When the process proceeds to step D291, a motion index for specifying the suspension motion control table corresponding to the special figure 2 is calculated and saved in a storage area (pending index area) for storing the motion index (step D291). The motion index for specifying the special (figure 2 variation) motion control table is calculated, saved in the storage area (fourth symbol index area) for storing it (step D292), and the process proceeds to step D295.
When the process proceeds to step D293, a motion index for specifying the suspension motion control table corresponding to FIG. 1 is calculated and saved in a storage area (pending index area) for storing the motion index (step D293). The motion index for specifying the motion control table for use (special figure 1 fluctuation) is calculated, saved in the storage area (fourth symbol index area) for storing it (step D294), and the process proceeds to step D295.

The motion list table is a data table of a motion table in which data relating to a large number of motion tables is arranged in each row (each record). The data in each row of the motion list table is data related to one motion table. Each row of the motion list table includes the number of frames, the number of motion commands, the name of the motion table, the number of behaviors, and the behavior table name as data items (data categories). However, this category setting is an example, and other parameters may be set. The contents of each data item are as follows.
The number of frames (display frame number) indicates how many frames of motion data (data constituting the motion table) are defined in the motion table.
・ The number of motion commands indicates the number of commands defined in the motion table.
The motion table name indicates the name (= address) of the motion table.
-The number of behaviors indicates the number (type) of behaviors used in the motion table.
The behavior table name indicates the name (= address) of the behavior table in which the behavior (processing address) at the time of the motion control is defined.
If the number of behaviors is 0, the behavior table is naturally unnecessary.
Here, the behavior is a function for setting the operation of the object (display element). In this example, image data (character data) defined on the motion table is mainly used to change according to the situation.

  When the process proceeds to step D295, the value of the special figure stop symbol area is saved in the current symbol area (step D295), and the process proceeds to step D296. Here, the value of the special figure stop symbol area is data set in step D354 described later. The current symbol area is a storage area for storing the symbol number of the current symbol to be displayed (a storage area containing the symbol number of the current symbol to be displayed on the display screen 41a at that time), and the value of this storage area (The symbol number of the current symbol) is updated one after another with variation during the variation display. Note that the fluctuation display of the special figure starts the next fluctuation display (including the symbol display waiting for the customer) from the stop pattern of the previous fluctuation display, but in order to perform this operation with certainty, the previous fluctuation display is performed in this step D295. The variable display stop symbol is saved and used for the next variable display. This is particularly meaningful when a new variation command is received during variation display. In other words, when a new fluctuation command is received during fluctuation display, the process of step D295 is performed, so that the next fluctuation should not be started from the symbol displayed at the time of reception, but should be stopped at the previous fluctuation. Changed to a symbol and starts to change. In this case, if step D295 is not present, there is a problem that the player does not know which symbol should have stopped, starting from the symbol displayed at that time (variable command reception time). However, in this example, since there is step D295, it will be replaced with the symbol that should have stopped due to the previous fluctuation, and the player will start the fluctuation, so the player knows the previous stopping symbol, so such a The problem is solved.

Proceeding to step D296, it is determined whether or not the MODE data (first half fluctuation pattern data) separated in step D91 is for commanding the first half of 12 seconds normal fluctuation. (Step D296; Y), the process proceeds to Step D297, and if it does not command the normal variation in the first half of 12 seconds (Step D296; N), the process proceeds to Step D299. Here, “normal” in “normal fluctuation in the first half of 12 seconds” means that it is not a special fluctuation such as a shortening fluctuation.
In this example, in the case of a normal fluctuation in the first half of 12 seconds, there can only be a fluctuation pattern without reach action. In this case, since the reach action is not performed, the time value of the second half fluctuation is set as 0, and the fluctuation pattern becomes 12 seconds in total (that is, the normal fluctuation for 12 seconds; “normal” here means the fluctuation that is not reach). ). That is, the latter half fluctuation time value indicated by the ACT data (second half fluctuation pattern) separated in step D91 is a zero second fluctuation.

In step D297, it is determined whether or not the ACT data commands no reach action (0 second fluctuation). If no reach action is given (step D297; Y), a no reach change setting process (step D298) is performed. After the execution, the variation effect setting process is terminated. When there is no reach action (step D297; N), the variation effect setting process is terminated without executing step D298 because it is abnormal.
Proceeding to step D299, it is determined whether or not the MODE data (first half fluctuation pattern) commands a normal fluctuation in the first half of 10.4 seconds ("normal" here is not a shortening fluctuation or the like), If the command is to command a normal variation in the first half of 10.4 seconds (step D299; Y), the process proceeds to step D300, and if the command is not to command a normal variation in the first half of 10.4 seconds (step D299; N), the process proceeds to step D308. move on. In this example, in the case of a normal fluctuation in the first half of 10.4 seconds, there can only be a fluctuation pattern with a reach action. In this case, since the time value of the second half variation changes with the contents of the reach action, the variation pattern is defined as a total of “10.4 + α” seconds. There are a plurality of types of ACT data (second half variation pattern) for the same MODE, and this number varies depending on the specifications of each gaming machine.

Proceeding to step D300, it is determined whether or not the ACT data (second-half fluctuation pattern) is for commanding deviation variation from normal-1, and if normal-1 is to command deviation (step D300; Y), After the normal-1 shift setting process (step D304) is executed, the variation effect setting process is terminated. When normal-1 does not command a shift (step D300; N), the process proceeds to step D301. Note that the deviation from normal-1 is a fluctuation pattern that deviates with normal reach action.
In step D301, it is determined whether or not the ACT data (second-half fluctuation pattern) is for instructing deviation deviation from normal + 1. If normal + 1 is instructing deviation (step D301; Y), normal + 1 After the deviation setting process (step D305) is executed, the variation effect setting process is terminated. If normal + 1 is not a command for a deviation (step D301; N), the process proceeds to step D302. Note that a deviation from normal +1 is a variation pattern that deviates with normal reach action.

  Proceeding to step D302, it is determined whether or not the ACT data (second-half fluctuation pattern) is for instructing a deviation of military commander -1. If military commander-1 is for instructing a deviation (step D302; Y), After performing the shift setting process (step D306) for the military commander-1, the variation effect setting process is terminated. If the commander-1 does not command the shift (step D302; N), the process proceeds to step D303. Note that the warrior -1 slippage is a fluctuation pattern that comes off with the warrior reach action.

  Proceeding to step D303, it is determined whether or not the ACT data (second-half variation pattern) commands a change in military commander development-1 and if a command for a development in military commander-1 is commanded (step D303; Y ), After the execution of the warlord development -1 deviation setting process (step D307), the variation effect setting process is terminated. Proceed to other steps that have been done. In addition, the general deviation of warlord development -1 is a fluctuation pattern that comes off with the warrior development reach action. In addition, after the flow in which the determination result of Step D303 is No (the portion not shown by the wavy line), other reach effects in the case of normal fluctuation in the first half of 10.4 seconds (for example, a fluctuation display effect in the case of a big hit) are also included. ) Is executed in the same manner as steps D303, D307, etc., and if the ACT data does not correspond to any of these, it is abnormal and the variation effect setting process is terminated.

  Proceeding to step D308, it is determined whether or not the MODE data (first half fluctuation pattern) commands 12.8 second pseudo-series 1 fluctuation, and if 12.8 seconds pseudo-series 1 fluctuation is commanded. (Step D308; Y), the process proceeds to Step D309, and if it does not instruct the 12.8-second pseudo-continuous 1 change (Step D308; N), the process proceeds to another step omitted by a broken line in FIG. Note that, after the flow in which the determination result in Step D308 is No (the portion not shown by the wavy line), the same processing as Steps D303, D307, etc. is executed for the variable display effect when the MODE data is other than the above. If the MODE data does not correspond to any of them, it is abnormal and the variation effect setting process is terminated.

  Proceeding to step D309, it is determined whether or not the ACT data (second-half fluctuation pattern) commands a shift of warlord-1 and if it is a command of warlord-1 (step D309; Y), If the normal-1 shift setting process (step D310) is executed, the variation effect setting process is terminated, and if the military commander-1 does not command a shift (step D309; N), other lines omitted in wavy lines in FIG. Proceed to step. In addition, after the flow in which the determination result in Step D309 is No (the portion not shown by the wavy line), other reach effects in the case of 12.8-second pseudo-continuous 1 change (for example, the change display effect in the case of a big hit) The same process as in steps D309, D310, etc. is executed, and if the ACT data does not correspond to any of these, it is abnormal and the variation effect setting process is terminated.

[Change setting process without reach]
Next, details of the reachless variation setting process (step D298) in the variation effect setting process described above will be described with reference to FIG. In this example, MODE = normal variation in the first half of 12 seconds is only out of place. For this reason, a symbol generation flag, which will be described later, set in the non-reach fluctuation setting process only has an instruction for a missing symbol.
When the reachless variation setting process is started, first, in step D311, it is determined whether or not the first half variation type set in the previous processing (steps D271 to D278) is an ultrashort variation. D311; Y), a reach generation symbol design flag of reach +1 is prepared (step D312), and the process proceeds to step D314. (Step D313), the process proceeds to Step D314.
The ultra-shortening variation is an example of variation in such a case where even if the command from the main board is a normal fluctuation in the first half of 12 seconds, the sub board may select to perform reach movement. .
Further, the loose eye means a state in which a plurality of symbols constituting the special symbol are not a symbol that is a reach or a big hit (including a combination such as “776” if it is not a reach type combination).

  In step D314, the stop symbol setting process (step D314) is executed based on the symbol generation flag prepared in step D312 or D313, and the address of the scenario table corresponding to the ACT and the first half variation type (scenario table) Are saved in the symbol variation scenario table area (step D315). The symbol variation scenario table area is a storage area of the RAM in the CPU 311 of the effect control device 300 for temporarily storing the address of the symbol variation scenario table to be used in the future, the left symbol area, the right symbol area , Divided into medium symbol areas, and each symbol area is divided into 1st (early), 2nd (first half), and 3rd (second half) areas, and a total of nine areas for storing the address of one scenario table (= 3 × 3). On the other hand, the PROM 321 of the effect control device 300 has a command (hereinafter referred to as “symbol variation list table”) for selecting a scenario table for symbol variation according to the command received from the game control device and the first variation type. Registered every time (ACT data). In step D315, first, the symbol variation list table corresponding to the ACT is selected, and then the setting pattern corresponding to the first variation type is selected from the plurality of setting patterns in the selected symbol variation list table and selected. Saves the address of the scenario table of the setting pattern in the symbol variation scenario table area.

  In the present application, the period of the movement of the symbols within the first half variation time is “early” (1st), and the remaining period within the first half variation time is “first half” (2nd). Even if the same first half variation time, the movement of the symbol may be scrolled down as it is or hopping up once (a kind of notice), so that the movement does not go all the way "early + first half = first half fluctuation" It is the composition. The second half fluctuation time is “second half” (3rd). In addition, in this example, the contents of the effects are set for each period in which the effects at the time of special figure change are divided into a plurality of times in this way, and the entire effect at the time of special figure changes is combined as the effect contents of each period. It is a combination formula. This has the advantage that the total amount of data that must be stored in the nonvolatile memory for storing control data (PROM 321 in this example) is reduced. In other words, for example, if all tables are prepared for each production content that has a slightly different movement, the amount of data becomes enormous, but such a combination improves the problem.

Next, scenario layer number 0 is prepared (step D316), the address of the background scenario table corresponding to the current game mode and the like is prepared (step D317), and based on the data prepared in the immediately preceding steps D316 and D317. Then, the scenario data setting process (step D318) described above is executed.
Next, scenario layer number 1 is prepared (step D319), and the scenario table stored in the left symbol scenario 1st table address (1st (early) area in the left symbol area described above) from the symbol variation scenario table area described above. Are prepared) (step D320), and the scenario data setting process (step D321) described above is executed based on the data prepared in the immediately preceding steps D319 and D320.

Next, scenario layer number 2 is prepared (step D322), and the scenario table stored in the above-mentioned symbol variation scenario table area is stored in the right symbol scenario 1st table address (1st (early) area in the above-described right symbol area). Is prepared (step D323), and the scenario data setting process (step D324) described above is executed based on the data prepared in the immediately preceding steps D322 and D323.
Next, scenario layer number 3 is prepared (step D325), and from the symbol variation scenario table area described above, the middle symbol scenario 1st table address (the scenario table stored in the area for 1st (early) in the medium symbol area described above) Is prepared (step D326), and the scenario data setting process (step D327) described above is executed based on the data prepared in the immediately preceding steps D325 and D326.

Next, scenario layer number 7 is prepared (step D328), the address of the fourth symbol scenario table (scenario table for the fourth symbol) is prepared (step D329), and prepared in the immediately preceding steps D328 and D329. Based on the data, the above-described scenario data setting process (step D330) is executed, and the reachless fluctuation setting process is terminated.
According to the reachless variation setting process described above, the scenario control data (in this case, scenario layers 0, 1, 2, 3, and 7) that require setting of scenario control data in the case of non-reach variation is performed. Become.

[Stop symbol setting process]
Next, details of the stop symbol setting process (step D314) in the above-described reachless variation setting process will be described with reference to FIG. In this example, special symbols for production are composed of three symbols (left symbol, middle symbol, right symbol) arranged side by side. These symbols are nine types (symbol numbers 0 to 8). ).
When the stop symbol setting process is started, first in step D331, it is determined whether or not the above-mentioned special figure type is special figure 2 fluctuation. If it is special figure 2 (step D331; Y), the process proceeds to step D332. If not in FIG. 2 (step D331; N), that is, in the case of FIG. 1, the process proceeds to step D333.
When proceeding to step D332, the shifted symbol number is saved in the special symbol 2 symbol of the special symbol stop symbol area (step D332), and the procedure proceeds to step D334.
When the process proceeds to step D333, the symbol number is shifted to the special figure 1 and the 4th pattern in the special figure stop symbol area (step D333), and the process proceeds to step D334.

  When the process proceeds to step D334, it is determined whether or not the disparity pattern is set as the symbol generation flag. If it is set (step D334; Y), the process proceeds to step D335, and if not set (step D334; N) Proceed to step D345. It should be noted that the symbol generation flag of the missed break is set (prepared) in the above-described step D313.

Proceeding to step D335, one symbol number selected at random from nine types of symbol numbers 0 to 8 is set as the left symbol lx (step D335), and one of eight symbol numbers 0 to 7 is selected at random. The designated symbol number is set as the right symbol rx (step D336), and the process proceeds to step D337.
Proceeding to step D337, it is determined whether the right symbol rx set in step D336 is equal to or greater than the left symbol lx set in step D335. If right symbol rx ≧ left symbol lx (step D337; Y), the right The symbol number of the symbol rx is incremented by 1 (step D338), and the process proceeds to step D339. Proceed to step D339 without executing step D338.
Through the processing of these steps D335 to D338, the left symbol lx and the right symbol rx are set randomly, and the left symbol lx and the right symbol rx are always set to different symbol numbers. The reason for selecting from the range of symbol number 7 or less in step D336 is to ensure that one can be increased in step D338.

Proceeding to step D339, it is determined whether the left symbol lx and the right symbol rx are combinations that can be an appearance prohibition symbol. If it is not a combination (step D339; N), the process proceeds to step D344. Here, the “prohibited appearance” symbol is a symbol that is prohibited from appearing as a disjointed pattern. For example, in the case of a specification with a combination of 3, 5 and 7 as a chance, such as “357”, “375”, “537”,... When it is necessary to perform control, this chance is a symbol for which appearance is prohibited. Steps D339 to D343 are processes for this prohibition control. In the case of a model that only needs to be separated, this prohibition control is unnecessary, and only the processing in the right column (step D344) is sufficient.
More specifically, for example, if a combination of 3, 5, and 7 is an appearance prohibited symbol, in step D339, the symbol number of the left symbol lx and the right symbol rx is any of 3, 5, and 7 different from each other. If the number is two, the process proceeds to step D340 because it can be an appearance prohibition symbol.

Proceeding to step D340, the cx value at which the combination of “left symbol lx, middle symbol cx, right symbol rx” becomes an appearance prohibited symbol is set (stored) in a storage area called nocx (step D340). For example, if the left symbol lx is 3 and the right symbol rx is 5, then if the middle symbol cx is 7, then the special symbol combination is “3, 7, 5” and the symbol is prohibited from appearing. Therefore, the value 7 of the symbol cx is set to nocx.
Next, one symbol number selected at random from eight symbol numbers 0 to 7 is set as the middle symbol cx (step D341), and then the process proceeds to step D342.

Proceeding to step D342, it is determined whether medium symbol cx ≧ nocx. If medium symbol cx ≧ nocx (step D342; Y), the value of medium symbol cx is incremented by one (step D343), and the process proceeds to step D354. If the middle symbol cx ≧ nocx is not reached (step D342; N), the process proceeds to step D354 without executing step D343.
According to the processing of these steps D341 to D343, the value of the middle symbol cx is always different from nocx, and eventually the combination of “left symbol lx, middle symbol cx, right symbol rx” is not necessarily an appearance prohibited symbol. It becomes.
In step D344, a symbol number selected at random from eight symbol numbers 0 to 7 is set as the middle symbol cx (step D344), and then the procedure proceeds to step D354.

When the process proceeds to step D345, it is determined whether or not reach-1 is set as the symbol generation flag. If it is set (step D345; Y), the process proceeds to step D346, and if not set (step D345; N). ), Go to Step D353. It should be noted that the symbol generation flag for reach-1 is set in steps D304 and D306 described above.
When the process proceeds to Step D346, a value selected at random from the ten types of values 0 to 9 is stored as tmprnd (Step D346), and the process proceeds to Step D347.
When the process proceeds to step D347, it is determined whether the value of tmprnd is 0. If it is 0 (step D347; Y), the process proceeds to step D348, and if not 0 (step D347; N), the process proceeds to step D350.

When the process proceeds to step D348, a value randomly selected from four odd numbers 1, 3, 5, and 7 is stored as the number of the left symbol lx (step D348), and the process proceeds to step D349. Note that the description in the drawing of step D348 is described using a programming language, “rand” indicates a function for generating a random number, “mod” indicates an operation for obtaining a remainder of division, and “ rand () mod 4 ”is a value selected at random from 0, 1, 2, and 3. In step D348, the value of “rand () mod 4” is doubled and added by 1, so that one of the values 1, 3, 5, and 7 is selected at random.
When proceeding to step D350, a value selected at random from five different values 0, 2, 4, 6, and 8 is stored as the number of the left symbol lx (step D350), and the process proceeds to step D351.
When the process proceeds to step D349 or D351, in order to obtain a reach symbol, a process of making the value of the right symbol rx the same as the value of the left symbol lx (that is, making the right symbol the same as the left symbol) is performed. (Step D349 or Step D351), the process proceeds to Step D352.

  Here, according to the processing of steps D346 to D348 and step D350, the odd and even appearance ratios of the reach symbols can be changed. In this case, since the process proceeds from step D347 to step D348 only in the case of tmprnd = 0, the odd-numbered symbol appearance ratio is 1/10, whereas the ratio of proceeding from step D347 to step D350 (that is, even-numbered symbol). The appearance ratio) is 9/10. This is done for the following reason. In other words, since there is a re-lottery effect, the reach symbol for a big hit is apt to be an even number. Therefore, the appearance rate of the odd reach is lowered in order not to reduce the jackpot reliability of the odd reach. Of course, the ratio of the odd and even appearance rates may not be a ratio of 1: 9. Further, in this example, an example in which a symbol is obtained by calculation as in steps D348 and D350 is illustrated, but a symbol may be selected by a random number and a data table.

When the process proceeds to step D352, the result of subtracting 1 from the value of the left symbol lx is set as the value of the middle symbol cx (step D352) so that -1 is deviated (step D352), and then the process proceeds to step D354.
When the process proceeds to step D353, a combination of symbols (including jackpot symbols) corresponding to other symbol generation flags is generated (step D353), and the process proceeds to step D354.
When proceeding to step D354, the values of the left symbol lx, middle symbol cx, and right symbol rx set in the steps so far are stored in the left symbol, middle symbol, and right symbol of the stop symbol region, respectively (step D354). Then, the stop symbol setting process is terminated.
Note that the steps D334 to D352 described above are processing in the case of an unbalanced break and reach-1 in the case of a break. Actually, there are many other types of stop symbols, but in order to avoid complications, these other types of processing are collectively shown in step D353. Illustration and description are omitted.
In the case of generating the big hit symbol, for example, a method of determining only the left symbol and copying it to the middle / right symbol can be considered. In addition, a case where the number is limited to “777” or a combination of stop symbols is defined on a plurality of tables regardless of calculation, and one of them is selected with a random number is conceivable.

  In step D332 and D333 described above, only the 4th symbol outlier is set. However, in the case of winning, in step D353, the 4th symbol hitting symbol corresponding to the symbol generation flag is set. Yes. The symbol generation flag also has various setting contents such as “2R probability variation big hit symbol”, “16R probability variation big hit symbol”,... There are multiple combinations in the 4th symbol so that the middle right symbol (left symbol, middle symbol, and right symbol as a decorative symbol) can be created as “357”, “573”,... Which combination appears is determined by a random number. The combination of the colors of the 4th pattern corresponds to the winning category on a one-to-one basis. For example, the combination of “upper blue, lower blue” is a big hit that does not change and “upper blue, lower yellow” is a positive change big hit. It corresponds. Although different for each model, meanings are defined in advance for the color combinations of the 4th pattern in the specifications of the gaming machine. In this example, there is only one pattern of “upper white, lower white” in the case of a deviation, and the white color itself is used only when it is out of place. In FIG. 89, steps D332, D333, etc. only set the symbol number. For example, in the case of losing, the symbol number = 0 is set for both the special symbols 1 and 2, and the symbol number = 0 is “ It is defined as a combination of “upper white, lower white”. In the winning symbols, for example, the fourth symbol number is from 1 to 36 (for example, from 1 to 18 at random variation, lottery from 19 to 36 at non-probable variation). 1 and 2 may be different. For example, even if “upper blue, lower blue” in the special figure 1 is not a probability change, it may be a combination of the probability change in the special figure 2. For this reason, the symbol number and color combination tables are separate for special figures 1 and 2. In this way, there are many color combinations of the 4th symbol, and the meaning (definition) of the color combinations in the 4th symbol's special graphics 1 and 2 is the change in the shape of the left, middle and right symbols. This is because it is difficult to discriminate even with a combination of the colors of the 4th pattern, in the same way that it is not known.

[Variation pattern classification process]
Next, details of the variation pattern classification process (step D271) in the above-described variation effect setting process will be described with reference to FIG.
When the variation pattern classification process is started, it is first determined in step D361 whether the MODE data is a variation command, and if it is a variation command (step D361; Y), the process proceeds to step D362. If not (Step D361; N), the process proceeds to Step D368.
In step D362, it is determined whether the ACT data is in the valid range. If the data is in the valid range (step D362; Y), the process proceeds to step D363, and if not in the valid range (step D362; N), the process proceeds to step D368.

In step D363, variation pattern check data corresponding to the MODE data is acquired (step D363), and the flow advances to step D364. The fluctuation pattern check data is set for each MODE data of the fluctuation command, and 0 is set as the fluctuation pattern check data for MODE data that is not used in the model.
In step D364, it is determined whether the variation pattern check data acquired in step D363 is 0. If 0 (step D364; Y), the process proceeds to step D368. If not 0 (step D364; N), the process proceeds to step D365. move on.

In step D365, a large pattern table corresponding to the MODE data is set (set) (step D365), and the large pattern corresponding to the ACT data is set based on the large pattern table set in step D365. Data is acquired (step D366).
Next, the broad pattern data acquired in step D366 is returned (step D367), and the variation pattern classification process is terminated.
In step D368, 0 is returned (step D368), and the variation pattern classification process is terminated.

  Here, the general pattern table is provided for each MODE data. The major pattern table is a pattern in which major pattern data is arranged in a matrix corresponding to the upper data and lower data of the ACT, and the rows are determined corresponding to the upper data 0 to 4 of the ACT. Since the columns are determined corresponding to the lower-order data 0 to F, the pattern data is roughly classified, and the size of the table is 5 rows × 16 columns. A breakdown example of the broad pattern data is as follows. That is, 0: invalid data, 1: deviation without reach, 2: deviation from normal reach, 3: deviation from female-type reach, 4: loss from military-type reach, 5: deviation from plane-completed general development, 6: deviation from group-reach, 7: Chance eye reach big hit (2R probability change), 8: Normal reach big hit (2R probability change), ... 16: Normal reach big hit (16R probability change, 11R probability change, 11R normal), 17: Female reach big hit (16R probability change, 11R) Probability change, 11R normal), 18: Warrior system reach jackpot (16R probability change, 11R probability change, 11R normal), 19: Completed military commander system reach jackpot (16R probability change, 11R probability change, 11R normal), 20: Gun male reach jackpot (16R) Probability change, 11R probability change, 11R normal), and so on.

In this example, since the number of second half variation patterns (ACT data) is in the range of 01h to 4Bh, the table is the above size (5 rows × 16 columns), but this is an example. The configuration may be divided more finely, or conversely, for example, may be a configuration in which roughly divided pattern data parts having the same value are roughly divided.
In addition, in order to prepare the notice distribution table corresponding to the MODE and ACT data in the above-described step D272 and the like, the broadly classified pattern data indicates to which classification the variation pattern commanded by the MODE and ACT data belongs. It is the data shown. That is, there is this broad pattern data in order to check the system of the variation pattern from the command value and set the corresponding notice allocation table. This is because the occurrence rate of the notice changes depending on the type of reach.
The broad pattern table is a table for determining the broad pattern data as described above. In this major pattern table, the major pattern data is 0 where there is no combination of MODE and ACT data. Therefore, if there is no combination of MODE and ACT data, step D367 returns 0 as in step D368. In addition, when 0 is returned in this way, for example, it is handled in the same way as normal losing. If it is handled in the same way as normal, there is an advantage that even if there is an abnormality in the confirmed command, the special figure can be changed temporarily, so that the player can be kept uneasy. . However, if 0 is returned, the variation start setting is set so that the variation effect setting process is terminated without executing step D272 and the like after executing step D271 in the variation effect setting process, for example, without losing normally. There may be a mode that is not performed. In this way, the special figure can be prevented from changing in the case of command abnormality.

[Random lottery processing A]
Next, details of the random number lottery process A (step D273) in the above-described variation effect setting process will be described with reference to FIG. This random number lottery process A is a process of selecting the sorting result in the notice sorting table 1 prepared for the sorting group A in step D272 described above by random number for each type.
When the random number lottery process A is started, the notice type number A is incremented from the initial value 1 by an increment 1 until the final value na (for example, na = 9) is reached, and then the steps D371 to D380 are repeatedly executed. The lottery process A ends. That is, in step D371, immediately after the start of the random number lottery process A, the notice type number A is set to 1, and the process proceeds to step D372. In step D380, if the notice type number A is less than na, the process returns to step D371, and if the notice type number A is na, the random number lottery process A is terminated. Then, when returning to step D371, the value of the notice type number A is increased by 1, and the process proceeds to step D372. The closing price na differs depending on the model.

  The notice distribution table prepared in steps D272, D274, and D277 is, for example, a matrix-like data table (matrix). Has been placed. The value of the notice type number A corresponds to one of a plurality of rows in this table. For example, A = 1 is the first row from the top, A = 2 is the second row from the top,.・ ・ And so on. That is, the notice type number is a parameter indicating the vertical arrangement position (number line) of the specific distribution value in the notice distribution table. In addition, a distribution table address is provided as a parameter indicating the horizontal position (number of columns) of a specific distribution value in one row of the notice distribution table. In this example, since there are 1000 types of random values ranging from 0 to 999, the allocation values are numbers within the range of 0 to 999 that are set to be 1000 when all the allocation values in the same row are added. . The same applies to other distribution tables and other notice type numbers B and C.

In step D372, a value selected at random from 0 to 999 is stored as rdm (step D372), and the distribution number is set to 0 (initial value) (step D373).
Next, the value of the sorting table address corresponding to the notice type number A (value indicating the first column of the row corresponding to the value of the notice type number A) is set (step D374), and the process proceeds to step D375. Here, as described above, the distribution table address designates the horizontal position (hereinafter referred to as “current address”) in the same row in the notice distribution table prepared in step D272 described above.

When the process proceeds to step D375, the distribution value of the current address at that time is compared with the value of rdm. If the value of rdm is equal to or greater than the distribution value (step D375; Y), the process proceeds to step D376. When the value of the rdm is less than the distribution value (step D375; N), the process proceeds to step D379.
In step D376, a value obtained by subtracting the distribution value from the rdm value is set as a new rdm value (step D376), and the current address of the distribution table is updated to the address of the next distribution value (distribution). Update is performed in which the current address is shifted by one column in the same row of the table (step D377).
Next, the distribution number is updated by +1 (step D378), and the process returns to step D375 to repeat the process.

  According to the processes in steps D375 to D378, the process of updating the current address by subtracting the distribution value of the current address from the value of rdm is repeated until the value of rdm becomes less than the distribution value of the current address. . Then, when the value of rdm becomes less than the distribution value of the current address (that is, when the determination result of step D375 is No), the number of updates of the current address (that is, the distribution number value) and at that time The value of the notice type number A indicates one specific position in the notice distribution table (that is, one distribution result), and the distribution result is selected based on a random number.

Proceeding to step D379, a distribution number corresponding to the number of times the current address is updated (that is, the number of times the steps D376, D377, etc. are repeatedly executed) is used as a notice data value, and this notice data value corresponds to the effect distribution result area. Save to the area (step D379), and then proceed to step D380.
In step D380, as described above, if the notice type number A is less than na, the process returns to step D371, and if the notice type number A is na, the random number lottery process A ends.
The effect distribution result area is an area in the RAM in the CPU 311 where the effect distribution result such as the notice data value is saved.

[Random number lottery processing B]
Next, the random number lottery process B (step D275) in the above-described variation effect setting process will be described. This random number lottery process B is a process of selecting a sorting result in the notice sorting table 2 prepared for the sorting group B in step D274 described above by random number for each type.
Since the details of the random number lottery process B are the same as the random number lottery process A described above, illustration and detailed description thereof are omitted.

[Random number lottery processing C]
Next, the random number lottery process C (step D278) in the above-described variation effect setting process will be described. This random number lottery process C is a process of selecting a sorting result in the notice sorting table 3 prepared for the sorting group C in step D277 described above by random number for each type.
Since the details of the random number lottery process C are the same as the random number lottery process A described above, illustration and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the step D379 in the random number lottery process A and the steps of the same process contents in the random number lottery processes B and C, the contents of the effect specified by the notice data value (the value of the distribution number determined from the number of updates of the current address) ( Various information (such as the number of SU notices) corresponding to the effect pattern) is stored in a predetermined storage area (eg, SU notice number area, SU1 cut-in area, SU2 cut-in area, SU3 cut-in area described later) in the effect distribution result area, A replacement determination area, a replacement target SU determination area, a serif SU area, a serif SU2 pattern area, a serif SU3 pattern area, and a reach character area).
According to the random number lottery processes A, B, and C described above, a distribution result is selected in advance for all the notice type number values in all the groups A, B, and C, and the contents of the effect corresponding to the distribution result Each piece of information for designating is stored in advance in a predetermined storage area.

  Of the three random number lottery processes, the random number lottery process A (notice distribution table 1) is mainly used in the early stage of the change (the notice that appears immediately after the start of change, the pattern of the movement of the symbol at the start of change, etc.). Sorting is performed. Random number lottery processing B (notice distribution table 2) is used to sort the notice pattern mainly before the start of reach and the operation pattern from symbol slowdown to temporary stop (slip and symbol feed number). is there. In addition, the random number lottery process C (notice distribution table 3) is to select a notice that appears mainly during reach.

[Notification effect setting process 1]
Next, details of the notice effect setting process 1 (step D280) in the above-described variable effect setting process will be described with reference to FIG. As the notice effect setting process 1, the case where the step-up notice is set according to the random number lottery result (results of the random number lottery processes A, B, and C described above) is exemplified. The contents of are different. Note that the step-up notice is a step-by-step notice of jackpot while changing the notice contents and the reliability of the notice. In the drawings and specification of the present application, “SU” means step-up of this step-up notice.
When the notice effect setting process 1 is started, first, the distribution result is loaded from the SU notice frequency area of the effect distribution result area (step D381).
Next, scenario layer number 4 is prepared (step D382), the address of the SU notice scenario table corresponding to the number of SU notices loaded in step D381 is prepared (step D383), and prepared in the immediately preceding steps D382 and D383. Based on the data, the scenario data setting process (step D384) described above is executed.

Next, the distribution result is loaded from the SU1 cut-in area of the effect distribution result area (step D385), the military commander data corresponding to the SU1 cut-in number loaded in step D385 is acquired, and the motion index area (stores the motion index) The data is saved in the SU1 cut-in area of the storage area (step D386).
Next, the distribution result is loaded from the SU2 cut-in area of the effect distribution result area (step D387), the military command data corresponding to the SU2 cut-in number loaded at step D387 is acquired, and the SU2 cut-in area of the motion index area is acquired. Save (step D388).

Next, the distribution result is loaded from the SU3 cut-in area of the effect distribution result area (step D389), the military command data corresponding to the SU3 cut-in number loaded at step D389 is acquired, and the SU3 cut-in area of the motion index area is acquired. Save (step D390) and proceed to step D391.
In the above steps D385 to D390, the data of the motion table for performing the assigned military commander character is temporarily stored. Note that the data stored here is not necessarily used, and then, for example, depending on the result of determination in cut-in character replacement determination processing 1 to 3 (steps D395 to D397) described later, the data is replaced with, for example, female character data. Is done. Here, if the result is that the number of SUs is not sufficient (for example, SU1 is selected), the character data with the lowest reliability is saved in the upper SU area. Control is not broken.

When proceeding to Step D391, it is determined whether the number of SU notices loaded at Step D381 is 0. If it is not 0 (Step D391; N), the process proceeds to Step D392, and if it is 0 (Step D391; Y), The notice effect setting process 1 is terminated.
When proceeding to Step D392, it is determined whether the number of SU notices loaded at Step D381 is 1, and when it is not 1 (Step D392; N), the process proceeds to Step D393, and when it is 1 (Step D392; Y), Proceed to step D395.
When proceeding to Step D393, it is determined whether the number of SU notices loaded at Step D381 is 2, and when it is not 2 (Step D393; N), the process proceeds to Step D394, and when it is 2 (Step D393; Y), Proceed to step D396.
Proceeding to step D394, it is determined whether the number of SU notices loaded at step D381 is 3, and if not (3) (step D394; N), the notice effect setting process 1 is terminated and if 3 (step D394; Y). ) Go to Step D397.
If it progresses to step D395, the cut-in character replacement determination process 1 (step D395) will be performed, and the notice effect setting process 1 will be complete | finished after that.
If it progresses to step D396, the cut-in character replacement determination process 2 (step D396) will be performed, and the notice effect setting process 1 will be complete | finished after that.
If it progresses to step D397, the cut-in character replacement determination process 3 (step D397) will be performed, and the notice effect setting process 1 will be complete | finished after that.

[Cut-in character replacement judgment process 1]
Next, details of the cut-in character replacement determination process 1 (step D395) in the notice effect setting process 1 described above will be described with reference to FIG. This process is executed when the SU notice number is 1. However, when the SU notice number is 1, only the first character appears in the step-up notice. Absent.
When the cut-in character replacement determination process 1 is started, first, the distribution result is loaded from the replacement determination area of the effect distribution result area (step D401), and the process proceeds to step D402.
In step D402, it is determined whether the replacement is complete replacement based on the distribution result loaded in step D401. If the replacement is complete replacement (step D402; Y), the process proceeds to step D403. N), the cut-in character replacement determination process 1 is terminated.
In step D403, the index of the cut-in SU1 motion control table is replaced based on the distribution result loaded in step D401 (step D403), and the cut-in character replacement determination process 1 ends.

[Cut-in character replacement judgment process 2]
Next, details of the cut-in character replacement determination process 2 (step D396) in the notice effect setting process 1 will be described with reference to FIG. This process is executed when the number of SU notices is 2, but when the number of SU notices is 2, the number of characters appearing in the step-up notice is limited to the second person. There are only three patterns: replacement (replacement only for the first person), partial replacement (replacement for the second person only), and full replacement (replacement for both the first and second persons).
When the cut-in character replacement determination process 2 is started, first, the distribution result is loaded from the replacement determination area of the effect distribution result area (step D405), and the process proceeds to step D406.
When the process proceeds to step D406, it is determined whether or not the replacement is not performed based on the distribution result loaded in step D405. Otherwise (step D406; N), the process proceeds to step D407.

Proceeding to step D407, it is determined whether the replacement is a partial replacement based on the distribution result loaded at step D405. The distribution result is loaded (step D408), and the process proceeds to step D409. If not partially replaced (step D407; N), the process proceeds to step D413.
In step D409, it is determined whether the replacement object is SU1 (first character) based on the distribution result loaded in step D408. If SU1 (step D409; Y), the index of the motion control table for cut-in SU1 is set. Based on the distribution result (step D411), the cut-in character replacement determination process 2 is terminated. If it is not SU1 (step D409; N), the process proceeds to step D410.

In step D410, it is determined whether the replacement object is SU2 (second character) based on the distribution result loaded in step D408. If it is SU2 (step D410; Y), the index of the motion control table for cut-in SU2 is set. Based on the distribution result (step D412), the cut-in character replacement determination process 2 is terminated. If it is not SU2 (step D410; N), the cut-in character replacement determination process 2 is terminated without executing step D412. To do.
When the process proceeds to step D413, it is determined whether the replacement is all replacement based on the distribution result loaded at step D405. If all replacement is performed (step D413; Y), the process proceeds to step D414, and not all replacement (step D413). N), the cut-in character replacement determination process 2 is terminated.
When the process proceeds to step D414, the index of the motion control table for cut-in SU1 is replaced based on the distribution result loaded in step D405 (step D414), and the index of the motion control table for cut-in SU2 is replaced in the same manner (step D415). Then, the cut-in character replacement determination process 2 ends.

[Cut-in character replacement judgment process 3]
Next, details of the cut-in character replacement determination process 3 (step D397) in the notice effect setting process 1 described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 95 and 96. FIG. This process is executed when the SU notice count is 3, but when the SU notice count is 3, there are up to a third character appearing in the step-up notice. There are various replacement patterns. In this example, there are two types of replacement: normal total replacement and special total replacement (for story and premium described later).
When the cut-in character replacement determination process 3 is started, first, the distribution result is loaded from the replacement determination area of the effect distribution result area (step D421), and the process proceeds to step D422.
When the process proceeds to step D422, it is determined whether or not the replacement is not performed based on the distribution result loaded in step D421. If there is no replacement (step D422; Y), the cut-in character replacement determination process 3 is terminated and there is no replacement. Otherwise (step D422; N), the process proceeds to step D423.

In step D423, it is determined whether the replacement is a partial replacement based on the distribution result loaded in step D421. If the replacement is a partial replacement (step D423; Y), the replacement target SU determination area in the effect distribution result area is determined. The distribution result is loaded (step D424), and the process proceeds to step D425. If not partially replaced (step D423; N), the process proceeds to step D430.
In step D425, it is determined whether the replacement target is SU1 (first character) based on the distribution result loaded in step D424. If it is SU1 (step D425; Y), the index of the motion control table for cut-in SU1 is set. Based on the distribution result (step D433), the cut-in character replacement determination process 3 is terminated. If it is not SU1 (step D425; N), the process proceeds to step D426.

In step D426, it is determined whether the replacement object is SU2 (second character) based on the distribution result loaded in step D424. If it is SU2 (step D426; Y), the index of the motion control table for cut-in SU2 is set. Based on the distribution result (step D434), the cut-in character replacement determination process 3 is terminated. If it is not SU2 (step D426; N), the process proceeds to step D427.
In step D427, it is determined whether the replacement target is SU3 (third character) based on the distribution result loaded in step D424. If it is SU3 (step D427; Y), the index of the motion control table for cut-in SU3 is set. Based on the distribution result (step D435), the cut-in character replacement determination process 3 is terminated. If it is not SU3 (step D427; N), the process proceeds to step D428.

In step D428, based on the distribution result loaded in step D424, it is determined whether the replacement targets are SU1 and SU2 (first and second characters). If SU1 and SU2 (step D428; Y), cut-in SU1 is performed. The index of the motion control table for the cut-in and cut-in SU2 is replaced based on the distribution result (steps D436 and D437), and the cut-in character replacement determination process 3 is terminated. If not SU1 and SU2 (step D428; N) ), Go to Step D429.
In step D429, it is determined whether the replacement target is SU2 and SU3 (second and third characters) based on the distribution result loaded in step D424. If the replacement target is SU2 and SU3 (step D429; Y), cut-in SU2 The index of the motion control table for the cut-in and cut-in SU3 is replaced based on the distribution result (steps D438 and D439), and the cut-in character replacement determination process 3 is terminated. If not SU2 and SU3 (step D429; N ), The cut-in character replacement determination process 3 ends.

When the process proceeds to step D430, it is determined whether the replacement target is a normal all replacement based on the distribution result loaded in step D421. If the normal replacement is a normal replacement (step D430; Y), the cut-in SU1 and the cut-in SU2 are used. The index of the motion control table for cut-in SU3 is replaced based on the distribution result (steps D440 to D442), and the cut-in character replacement determination process 3 is terminated. The process proceeds to step D431.
In step D431, it is determined whether the replacement target is for a story based on the distribution result loaded in step D421. If it is for a story (step D431; Y), for cut-in SU1, cut-in SU2, and cut-in SU3 The index of the motion control table is replaced on the basis of the distribution result (steps D443 to D445), and the cut-in character replacement determination process 3 is terminated.

  When the process proceeds to step D432, it is determined whether the replacement target is for premium based on the distribution result loaded in step D421. The index of the motion control table is replaced based on the distribution result (steps D446 to D448), and the cut-in character replacement determination process 3 is terminated. If not for premium use (step D432; N), the cut-in character replacement determination is performed. Processing 3 ends.

[PB preview scenario data setting process]
Next, details of the PB notice scenario data setting process (step D288) in the above-described variation effect setting process will be described with reference to FIG.
When the scenario data setting process for PB notice is started, first, the distribution result is loaded from the line SU area of the effect distribution result area (step D451), and the process proceeds to step D452.
When the process proceeds to step D452, it is determined whether or not the line SU is a SU2 system (SU2 system has one character appearing) based on the distribution result loaded in step D451. If it is not the SU2 system (step D452; N), that is, if the appearing characters are two SU3 systems, the process proceeds to step D456.

In step D453, the distribution result is loaded from the line SU2 pattern area of the effect distribution result area (step D453), and the line SU2 scenario address table (list table of the line SU2 scenario table) is set (step D454).
Next, based on the distribution result loaded in step D453, the address of the scenario table corresponding to the line SU2 pattern of the distribution result is obtained from the table set in step D454, prepared (step D455), and the process proceeds to step D459. .

In step D456, the distribution result is loaded from the line SU3 pattern area of the effect distribution result area (step D456), and the line SU3 scenario address table (list table of the line SU3 scenario table) is set (step D457).
Next, based on the distribution result loaded in step D456, the address of the scenario table corresponding to the distribution SU3 pattern of the distribution result is acquired from the table set in step D457, prepared (step D458), and the process proceeds to step D459. .

In step D459, scenario layer number 5 is prepared (step D459), and the above-described scenario data setting process (step D460) is performed based on the immediately preceding step D459 and the data prepared in the immediately preceding step D455 or D458. After that, the PB notice scenario data setting process is terminated.
According to the scenario data setting process for PB notice described above, a PB notice effect such that a special character appears by the operation of the PB (push button), or the character or the character line after the PB is changed is changed. Is possible.

[Inter-submission transmission start processing]
Next, the details of the inter-sub transmission start process (step D24) in the main process described above will be described with reference to FIG. Note that inter-sub transmission refers to transmission in inter-sub communication. Inter-sub-communication is communication (in this example, wireless communication) performed between sub-boards (in this example, an effect control device) of pachinko gaming machines with different game halls.
When the inter-sub transmission start processing is started, first, in step D461, there is an inter-sub transmission request (that is, the inter-sub transmission request flag set in step D190 described above or step D480 described later is set). If there is an inter-sub transmission request (step D461; Y), that is, if the inter-sub transmission request flag is set, the process proceeds to step D462, and if there is no inter-sub transmission request (step D461; N) That is, if the inter-sub transmission request flag is not set, the inter-sub transmission start process is terminated.
In step D462, it is determined whether the value of the inter-sub transmission start wait timer is greater than 0. If it is greater than 0 (step D462; Y), the process proceeds to step D466, and if it is 0 or less (step D462; N). To step D463.

When the process proceeds to step D463, the inter-sub-transmission request flag is cleared (set to an unset state) (step D463), the inter-sub-transmission permission flag is set (step D464), and an inter-sub-transmission interrupt is generated. Permit (step D465), and the inter-sub transmission start processing is terminated. The inter-sub transmission interrupt is permitted in this step D465 if data to be transmitted by inter-sub communication is generated, and is inhibited by a routine (inter-sub-transmission interrupt processing) (not shown) when there is no data to be transmitted.
In step D466, the inter-sub transmission start waiting timer is updated (that is, the timer value is decreased by a fixed value) (step D466), and the inter-sub transmission start process is terminated. The inter-sub transmission start waiting timer is a timer whose initial value is set in step D479, which will be described later, and which is cleared (value is set to 0) in step D491, which will be described later.

[Inter-task reception task processing]
Next, details of the inter-sub-task reception task process (step D25) in the main process described above will be described with reference to FIG.
When the inter-sub receive task processing is started, first, in step D471, there is an inter-sub receive task request (that is, there is inter-sub-communication reception data (inter-sub-command received data), and the inter-sub-reception is omitted). If the inter-sub-task reception task request flag set in the reception interrupt processing is set) and if there is an inter-sub-sub-task reception task request (step D471; Y), that is, the inter-sub-sub-task reception task request flag is set In step D472, if there is no inter-sub receive task request (step D471; N), that is, if the inter-sub receive task request flag is not set, the inter-sub receive task processing is terminated.

Proceeding to step D472, the SB_MODE data of the received inter-subcommand command (the value copied from the sb_mode area of the inter-sub-communication data buffer to the SB_MODE area in the inter-sub-reception interrupt process not shown) is loaded from the SB_MODE area (step S472). D472), the process proceeds to step D473.
In step D473, it is determined whether the SB_MODE data loaded in step D472 indicates terminal ID notification. If the data does not indicate terminal ID notification (step D473; N), the process proceeds to step D474, and terminal ID notification is performed. (Step D473; Y), the process proceeds to step D482.

Proceeding to step D482, the received terminal ID (the value copied from the transmission source ID area of the inter-sub-communication data buffer to the inter-sub-command transmission source ID area in the inter-sub-reception reception interrupt process (not shown)) is used as the inter-sub-command transmission source ID. Load from area (step D482), set terminal presence / absence information in the terminal information area corresponding to the terminal ID loaded in step D482 to “present” (step D483), and correspond to the terminal ID loaded in step D482 An initial value is set in the terminal lifetime timer in the terminal information area (step D484). Note that by providing a terminal lifetime timer, a time limit is provided for the gaming machine with the received terminal ID to recognize “is”. In other words, it is necessary to periodically check the existence of each other between the gaming machines that perform inter-sub-communication, and the process (not shown) based on this terminal lifetime timer (for example, until the terminal lifetime timer expires) If the same terminal ID notification is not received again, this confirmation is periodically performed by a process of updating the terminal presence / absence information corresponding to the terminal ID to “none”. This has the following advantages. In other words, if a certain gaming machine loses power or a wireless module suddenly breaks down, for example, if communication between gaming machines that have established communication with each other is no longer established, the opponent exists. It is useless to keep communicating on the premise that there is a difference, and there is a possibility that the effect of the inter-sub presentation will be reduced. For example, as an inter-submission effect, instructions are sent sequentially from the leftmost gaming machine on the island to the adjacent gaming machine by inter-subcommunication, and images of specific characters (characters) are sequentially sent from the leftmost gaming machine on the island to each gaming machine. In the case of performing a continuous effect (a kind of cooperation effect) such that the display device 41 is displayed so as to flow to the right, there is a possibility that the continuous effect is interrupted and interrupted at a gaming machine in which the communication is not established. is there. However, if the configuration is such that the terminal presence information is updated by periodically performing the above confirmation, it is possible to prevent the inter-submission effect from being requested for a gaming machine whose presence is “none” in the middle. Efficient inter-substage production can be performed reliably, such as by performing the above-mentioned interlocking production by skipping a stand whose power has been turned off.
However, since the inter-submission effect does not affect the game result, even if there is the above-described adverse effect (for example, the adverse effect that the production is not performed as a result of requesting the performance to the other party that no longer exists) The idea that there is no problem also holds. In the case of a specification according to such a concept, the terminal lifetime timer is not necessary.

Next, the game state in the terminal information area corresponding to the terminal ID loaded in step D482 is changed to the received game state data (from the game state area of the inter-sub communication data buffer in the inter-sub receive interrupt processing not shown) The value copied in the status area) is stored (step D485), and the process proceeds to step D481.
When the process proceeds to step D474, it is determined whether the SB_MODE data loaded at step D472 indicates an ack response. If the data does not indicate an ack response (step D474; N), the process proceeds to step D476 and indicates an ack response If (step D474; Y), the ack reception flag is set (step D486), and the process proceeds to step D481.

In step D476, it is determined whether the SB_MODE data loaded in step D472 is an effect command. If it is not an effect command (step D476; N), the process proceeds to step D481, and if it is an effect command (step D476). ; Y), proceed to Step D477.
In step D477, it is determined whether inter-sub data transmission is in progress. If inter-sub data transmission is in progress (step D477; Y), the process proceeds to step D481, and if inter-sub data transmission is not in progress (step D477; N), step Proceed to D478. Note that inter-sub data transmission is data transmission (for example, command transmission) in inter-sub communication. Further, in the present application, a command transmitted / received by inter-sub communication is referred to as an inter-sub command.

The processes of steps D478 to D480 are processes for performing an effect according to the received inter-sub command (particularly an effect-related command).
When the process proceeds to step D478, various inter-sub-commands or parameters for various effects corresponding to the contents of the received inter-sub-commands are set (step D478), and the inter-sub-commands set in step D478 are set to the sub-commands of other gaming machines. In order to transmit to the board, an inter-sub transmission start waiting timer is set (step D479), an inter-sub transmission request flag is set (step D480), and the process proceeds to step D480a.

Depending on the contents of the production, there may be a case where the inter-sub command is not generated. In such a case, the setting of the inter-subcommand is not performed in step D478, and the processing of steps D479 and D480 for transmitting the inter-subcommand is not executed, and the process proceeds to step D480a.
When the process proceeds to step D480a, it is determined whether the SB_MODE data loaded at step D472 is a command that requires an ack response. If it is not a command that requires an ack response (step D480a; N), the process proceeds to step D481, and the ack response is received. If it is a necessary command (step D480a; Y), the process proceeds to step D488.

Steps D488 to D491 are processing for returning an ack response in response to an ack request.
In step D488, the received transmission source ID is prepared as a transmission destination ID command (step D488), and SB_MODE and SB_ACT data of the ack response are prepared (step D489). Note that SB_MODE and SB_ACT are data constituting an inter-subcommand.
Next, the inter-sub-transmission data editing process (step D490) is executed, the inter-sub-transmission start waiting timer is cleared (the timer value is set to 0) (step D491), and the process proceeds to step D481.

When the processing proceeds to step D481, the inter-sub-task reception task request flag is cleared (step D481), and thereafter the inter-sub-task reception task processing is terminated.
Since step D477 is provided, when inter-sub data is being transmitted, the operation requested by the inter-sub command (effect command) is not performed. This is because the inter-sub command does not always need to be handled unlike the command from the main board, and being transmitted means that it is requesting another unit or returning ack. This is because it is not necessary to respond to the request from the table. Moreover, there is a possibility that the contradiction will appear in the production if all the requests are met, but this configuration has the advantage that there is no possibility of such a contradiction. However, this idea is a basic idea, and if there is an effect that is desired to be performed in any state, there may be a mode in which the requested operation is performed even during transmission.

[Inter-submission transmission data editing processing]
Next, details of the inter-sub-transmission data editing process (step D490) in the inter-sub-reception reception task process and the inter-sub-transmission data editing process (step D187) of the single-shot command process described above will be described with reference to FIG.
When the inter-sub-transmission data editing process is started, first, packet start code (STX) data (for example, 02H) is set in the inter-sub-transmission buffer 0 (step D501). Here, the inter-sub transmission buffer 0 is a part of a transmission buffer area (inter-sub transmission buffer area) for inter-sub communication, and the storage area at the address 0 in the inter-sub transmission buffer area is inter-sub transmission. Buffer 0 (hereinafter, the same applies to other addresses 1, 2, 3,... 11).

Next, the inter-sub data transmission number (SIZE) data (for example, data indicating 12 bytes) is set in the inter-sub transmission buffer 1 (step D502), and the terminal ID (SID) is transmitted as the data of the transmission source ID (SID). A terminal ID assigned to the effect control device 300 or the wireless module of the effect control device 300) and a group ID (ID for identifying a group of pachinko machines to which the pachinko gaming machine belongs) are set in the inter-sub transmission buffer 2. Then, the data (terminal ID and group ID) of the transmission destination ID (DID) is set in the intersub transmission buffer 3 (step D504). Note that, in the data of the transmission source ID (SID) and the transmission destination ID (DID), the upper bit of one byte is the group ID and the lower bit is the terminal ID, respectively.
Next, the inter-sub-system manufacturer code (MAKER) data is set in the inter-sub transmission buffer 4 (step D505), and the year code (YEAR) data is set in the inter-sub transmission buffer 5 (step D506).

Next, the inter-sub model code (TYPE) data is set in the inter-sub transmission buffer 6 (step D507), and the inter-sub command MODE (SB_MODE) data (for example, prepared in step D489 described above) Is set in the inter-sub transmission buffer 7 (step D508).
Next, the data of the inter-sub command ACT (SB_ACT) (for example, prepared in the above-described step D489) is set in the inter-sub transmission buffer 8 (step D509), and the game state (STS), Then, the game state data of the pachinko gaming machine (for example, data indicating that the current big hit is the fifth round) is set in the inter-sub transmission buffer 9 (step D510).

Next, the checksum of the setting data (that is, data from STX to STS) from the inter-sub transmission buffer 0 to the inter-sub transmission buffer 9 is calculated (step D511). The checksum calculation method is not particularly limited. For example, simple addition may be performed with a 1-byte size.
Next, the data of the checksum calculation result (SUM) calculated in step D511 is set in the intersub transmission buffer 10 (step D512), and the packet end code (ETX) data (for example, 03H) is transmitted between the sub The buffer 11 is set (step D513).
Next, the address of the inter-sub transmission buffer 0 is set as data of the inter-sub transmission pointer (parameter for designating the address of the inter-sub transmission buffer area) (step D514), and the inter-sub transmission data editing process is terminated. This inter-sub transmission pointer is used in inter-sub transmission interrupt processing (routine for performing processing such as sequentially writing data in the inter-sub transmission buffer area to the CPU serial transmission buffer for inter-sub transmission). .

[Inter-sub ack response task processing]
Next, details of the inter-sub ack response task process (step D26) in the main process described above will be described with reference to FIG.
When the inter-ack ack response task processing is started, first, in step D521, it is determined whether the value of the ack waiting timer is 0. If it is not 0 (step D521; N), the ack waiting timer is updated (the value is reduced by a specified value) (step D522), and the process proceeds to step D523. Note that the initial value of the ack waiting timer is set in step D188 described above.

Proceeding to step D523, it is determined whether or not an ack response has been received (that is, whether or not an ack reception flag is set), and if received (step D523; Y), the process proceeds to step D524, If not received (step D523; N), that is, if the ack reception flag is not set, the inter-sub ack response task processing is terminated. The ack reception flag is set in step D486 described above.
In step D524, the ack reception flag is cleared (step D524), and the ack waiting timer is cleared (step D525).
Next, since the ack response has been received, various parameters for setting the effect waiting for the ack response are set (step D526), and the inter-sub ack response task processing is terminated.

[Inter-submission effect setting processing]
Next, details of the inter-sub-effects setting process (step D27) in the main process described above will be described with reference to FIG.
When the inter-sub-stage effect setting process is started, first, in step D531, it is determined whether or not there is an inter-sub-stage production request (that is, whether or not an inter-sub-stage production request flag is set). In the case (step D531; Y), the process proceeds to step D532, and in the case where there is no inter-sub-effects request (a state where the inter-sub-effects request flag is cleared) (step D531; N), the inter-sub effect setting processing is terminated. To do. The inter-submission effect request flag is set in step D478 described above.

When the process proceeds to step D532, it is determined whether the value of the inter-submission production start waiting timer is 0. If it is 0 (step D532; Y), the process proceeds to step D533, and if it is not 0 (step D532; N), A process for updating the inter-sub-stage production start waiting timer is performed (the value is reduced by a specified value) (step D538), and the inter-sub-stage production setting process is ended. The inter-submission production start wait timer is a timer set in step D189 described above.
In step D533, data of SB_MODE and SB_ACT of the received inter-subcommand commands (hereinafter, inter-subcommand includes SB_MODE and SB_ACT) is loaded (step D533), and the processing advances to step D534.
In step D534, it is determined whether or not the loaded data is an inter-sub interlocking advance notice command, and if it is an inter-sub interlocking advance notice system command (step D534; Y), the process proceeds to step D539 and the inter-sub interlocking advance notice system command is executed. Otherwise (step D534; N), the process proceeds to step D535. It should be noted that the inter-sub-linked notice command is a command for a linked effect that links the notice effect with a plurality of pachinko gaming machines performing inter-sub communication. For example, there is an effect in which images of the same character are sequentially displayed on each gaming machine so that the images of the same character move in the horizontal direction within the island, and there are synchronized effects in which the same effect is performed simultaneously in synchronism.

Proceeding to step D539, the inter-subcommand SB_M loaded at step D533
An effect operation table corresponding to the effect designated by the data of ODE and SB_ACT is set (step D539), and then the process proceeds to step D537. Note that setting the effect operation table in step D539 means setting scenario data for executing the effect specified by the data of the inter-sub command.

  In step D535, it is determined whether the data of the inter-subcommand command loaded in step D533 is a customer waiting timing adjustment command. If it is a customer waiting timing adjustment command (step D535; Y), the process proceeds to step D540 and waiting for a customer. If it is not a timing adjustment command (step D535; N), the process proceeds to step D536. The customer waiting timing adjustment command is a command for performing the effect of matching the timing of the customer waiting demonstration display with a plurality of pachinko machines that are performing inter-sub-communication, and in this case, the customer waiting demonstration is synchronized from the beginning. Command to be executed.

In step D536, if the inter-subcommand data loaded in step D533 is a normal value, parameters of various effects corresponding to this data are set (step D536), and then the process proceeds to step D537.
When the process proceeds to step D540, it is determined whether or not a customer waiting demonstration performance is being performed (that is, whether or not a customer waiting demonstration performance is being performed). Since the customer waiting timing adjustment should not be performed, the process proceeds to step D537. If the customer waiting demonstration effect is being performed (step D540; Y), the process proceeds to step D541 to adjust the customer waiting timing.
Proceeding to step D541, the scenario table for the customer waiting demonstration of the pachinko gaming machine (that is, the own machine) that has received the inter-sub command is reset, and the customer waiting demonstration effect is set from the beginning (Step D541), the P machine state is set to the customer waiting A (Step D542), and the process proceeds to Step D537.

  According to step D541, the customer waiting demonstration effect is started from the beginning of the symbol display (customer waiting A). As a result, a customer waiting demonstration effect is produced between the pachinko gaming machine that has transmitted the customer waiting timing adjustment command determined in step D535, and the own machine and other pachinko gaming machines that have received this customer waiting timing adjustment command. It starts synchronously from the beginning of the symbol display (customer waiting A). The customer waiting demonstration effect started in this way is controlled by the reset customer waiting demonstration scenario table.

When the process proceeds to step D537, the inter-sub-stage production request flag is cleared (step D537), and then the inter-sub-stage production setting process is terminated.
In addition, in this example, the processing of the effect that synchronizes the notice effect with the timing of the customer waiting demonstration effect is given as a specific example of the process for the inter-sub effect. However, the content of the inter-submission effects is not limited to such an aspect, and instead of the aspect of this example or in addition to the aspect of this example, the inter-substance effects may be configured to be performed.
Also, in this example, in order to avoid complications, the setting process of the other types of inter-sub effects is collectively shown in step D536, and the details and illustration thereof are omitted.

[Scenario setting process]
Next, the details of the scenario setting process (step D28) in the main process described above will be described with reference to FIG.
When the scenario setting process is started, first, an address area of the scenario management area corresponding to the scenario management area 0 (scenario layer number 0) is prepared (step D551), and the scenario analysis process (step D551) Step D552) is executed. Here, “preparing an address area” means preparing an address of the address area itself in order to read data set in the address area in a later process.

Next, an address area of the scenario management area corresponding to the scenario management area 1 (scenario layer number 1) is prepared (step D553), and scenario analysis processing (step D554) is executed based on this preparation.
Next, an address area of the scenario management area corresponding to the scenario management area 2 (scenario layer number 2) is prepared (step D555), and scenario analysis processing (step D556) is executed based on this preparation.
Next, an address area of the scenario management area corresponding to the scenario management area 3 (scenario layer number 3) is prepared (step D557), and scenario analysis processing (step D558) is executed based on this preparation.
Next, an address area of the scenario management area corresponding to the scenario management area 4 (scenario layer number 4) is prepared (step D559), and scenario analysis processing (step D560) is executed based on this preparation.
Next, an address area of the scenario management area corresponding to the scenario management area 5 (scenario layer number 5) is prepared (step D561), and scenario analysis processing (step D562) is executed based on this preparation.
Next, an address area of the scenario management area corresponding to the scenario management area 6 (scenario layer number 6) is prepared (step D563), and scenario analysis processing (step D564) is executed based on this preparation.
Next, an address area of the scenario management area corresponding to the scenario management area 7 (scenario layer number 7) is prepared (step D565), and a scenario analysis process (step D566) is executed based on this preparation, and the scenario setting process Exit.

  In this example, there are eight scenario layers as described above, and the scenario layer numbers are 0 to 7. Of these eight scenario layers, scenario layer 0 is basically for background, scenario layer 1 is for left symbol, scenario layer 2 is for right symbol, and scenario layer 3 is for middle symbol. Scenario layer 4 is for notice 1, scenario layer 5 is for notice 2, scenario layer 6 is for holding, and scenario layer 7 is for the 4th symbol.

  However, it is not restricted to this aspect. For example, although this example is a flowchart with eight scenario layers, the number of scenario layers is not limited to this. In particular, the scenario layers used for the background and the notice increase / decrease depending on the model specifications, and this example is limited to as few as possible. Further, the control target of each scenario layer is not limited to the mode of this example, and various allocations are possible. For example, scenario layer 0 is for background, scenario layer 1 is for cut-in notice, scenario layer 2 is for left symbol, scenario layer 3 is for right symbol, scenario layer 4 is for middle symbol Yes, the scenario layer 5 may be reserved, the scenario layer 6 may be for other notices, and the scenario layer 7 may be for the fourth symbol.

  As described above, the address area of the scenario management area is provided for each scenario layer, and when there is something to be controlled, the corresponding scenario management area X (where X = 0 to 7). If the address of the scenario management area is stored in the address area and there is nothing to control, the address area of the corresponding scenario management area X is set to NULL (see steps D243 and D247 described above). . For example, since no hold display is performed in a movie waiting for a customer, an address (address of scenario management area 0) is set in the background area (address area of scenario management area 0). NULL is set in (address area of scenario management area 6).

[Scenario analysis processing]
Next, details of the scenario analysis process (step D552 and the like) in the scenario setting process described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 104 and 105. FIG.
When scenario analysis processing is started, first, the value of brk (data used for repetition of processing to be described later) is set to 0 (step D571) and set to the address area of the prepared scenario management area X The loaded data (scenario management area X address or NULL) is loaded (step D572), and the process proceeds to step D573. Here, the “address area of the prepared scenario management area X” refers to, for example, the address area (scenario) prepared in the immediately preceding step D551 when this processing is executed in the above-described step D552. If this processing is executed in step D554 described above, this is the address area prepared in step D553 immediately before (address area of scenario management area 1), etc. The case is prepared in the previous step as well.

In step D573, it is determined whether the data at the address loaded in step D572 is NULL. If NULL (step D573; Y), the scenario analysis process is terminated because control is not necessary. If not NULL (step D573; N). The process proceeds to Step D574.
Proceeding to step D574, the value of the scenario timer in the scenario management area of the address loaded at step D572 is read to determine whether the value of this scenario timer is less than 0, and if it is less than 0 (step D574; Y). Is abnormal, the scenario analysis process is terminated, and if it is 0 or more (step D574; N), the process proceeds to step D575. The value of the scenario timer is first set to 0 in the above-described step D244 every time scenario control data is set. Since 0 is the lower limit, it is determined as abnormal if it is less than 0.
In step D575, if the scenario timer value is not 0, the scenario timer value is updated by -1 (step D575), and the process advances to step D576.
In step D576, it is determined whether or not the value of the scenario timer is greater than 0. If it is greater than 0 (step D576; Y), the time has not yet been reached and the scenario analysis process is terminated. If there is (step D576; N), the process proceeds to step D577.

  According to these steps D574 to D576, wait timer management is performed. That is, only the time corresponding to the value of the scenario timer set in the scenario timer area in the target scenario management area (the scenario management area of the address loaded in step D572) is the target scenario table (in the target scenario management area). The operation of delaying the control progress of the scenario table at the address set in the scenario data table area is realized. Here, the “operation for delaying the control of the scenario table” means to wait for the progress of the scenario table (it does not proceed to the next line of the scenario table but waits there, and continues to produce at that time). . For example, in FIG. 135, in the 18th line (// wait), the constant wait code is set and the wait time value is “3600”, so the time corresponding to 3600 frames (3600 × (1/30 seconds) = 120 seconds) Stay in this line and proceed to the next line after the lapse of the time, and in the 24th line (// wait), the constant wait code is set and the wait time value is “900”. Corresponding time (900 × (1/30 seconds) = 30 seconds) Stays in this line and proceeds to the next line after the lapse of the time, but these operations correspond to “operations that delay the control progress of the scenario table”. . In the scenario table, between a line in which a code (a constant wait code or the like (including a PB wait code) is included) between a wait time value and a wait time value is set, and a line in which a constant wait code or the like is set next. All the opcodes in the line () are executed at the same time. Then, when the value of the scenario timer becomes 0 or less due to the update of step D575, it is determined that the scenario timer has timed out. It becomes the composition which advances to. However, the target scenario table control process (after step D584) is executed after the timer management process for the PB valid time described later.

That is, when proceeding to step D577, the value of the target PB timer (the value of the PB timer area in the scenario management area at the address loaded in step D572) is read to determine whether the value of this PB timer is greater than zero. If it is greater than 0 (step D577; Y), the time is not up, so the process proceeds to step D578. If it is 0 or less (step D577; N), the time is up, so the process proceeds to step D583.
When the process proceeds to step D578, it is determined whether the PB operation flag is set. If the PB operation flag is set (step D578; Y), the process proceeds to step D579, and if the PB operation flag is not set ( In step D578; N), the value of the target PB timer is updated by -1 (step D582), and the process proceeds to step D583. Here, the PB operation flag is a flag that is set when an operation of a PB (push button) is detected in the effect button input process executed in step D21 in the main process described above.

Proceeding to step D579, the value at this point of the target PB timer (that is, the remaining time of the PB effective time when the PB is operated) is stored as the PB effect addition time (step D579), and The value of the PB timer is set to 0 (step D580).
Next, a process of setting a flag in the PB detection flag area of the target scenario management area (that is, setting data indicating that the PB detection flag is set) is performed (step D581), and the process proceeds to step D583. In these steps D579 to D581, since the PB is operated, the remaining time of the PB timer is stored as the PB effect addition time (for step D696 described later), the PB timer is reset to 0, and the PB is operated. The PB detection flag indicating this is set in the scenario management area for scenario control.
In step D583, it is determined whether the value of the target PB timer is greater than 0. If it is greater than 0 (step D583; Y), the scenario analysis process is performed because the PB operation is not detected and the time is not up. When the process is completed and the value is 0 or less (step D573; N), the process proceeds to step D584 because the PB operation is performed or the time is up.

According to steps D577 to D583, timer management for the PB valid time is performed. That is, when a PB timer value larger than 0 is set in the PB timer area in the target scenario management area (the scenario management area at the address loaded in step D572), this PB timer value is supported. The operation of delaying the control of the target scenario table (the scenario table of the address set in the scenario data table area in the target scenario management area) for the PB valid time is realized for the time to be set. Here, “the operation of delaying the control of the scenario table and providing the PB valid time” means that the value of the target PB timer is 0 (that is, the PB timer is timed up) or the PB is operated. This means that the scenario table will be weighted (waiting there without proceeding to the next line of the scenario table, and continuing the production at that time). For example, if a constant wait code is set in the m-th line of the scenario table and the wait time value is “30”, it remains in this line for a time corresponding to 30 frames, and the next m + 1-th line after this time has elapsed. The operation in the m-th row is the “operation for delaying the progress of the scenario table control” by the scenario timer described above. On the other hand, when the PB waiting code is set in the nth line of the scenario table and the effective time value is “2970”, this effective time value “2970” is set in the PB timer in step D702 described later. If there is no PB pressing operation, the effective time corresponding to a maximum of 2970 frames remains in this line, and if there is a PB pressing operation within this effective time, the process immediately proceeds to the next n + 1 line, and is thus set in the PB timer. The operation of waiting for the operation of the PB for the effective time (PB effective time) is equivalent to “the operation of delaying the control of the scenario table and providing the PB effective time”. Then, without the PB operation, the value of the PB timer becomes 0 or less by updating the step D582 and the PB timer expires or the PB valid time until the PB timer expires is set. If PB is operated in the meantime, the process proceeds to step D583 via step D582 or steps D579 to D581, and in this case, the determination result in step D583 is No (the PB timer is 0), and the process proceeds to step D584.
However, if the value of the PB timer set in the PB timer area is 0 from the beginning, the process proceeds from step D577 to step D583, and further proceeds from step D583 to step D584, and the control proceeds immediately (this In this case, the PB valid time is 0 (none). Since the PB valid time is provided in the case of a notice effect or the like, in other cases, the value of the PB timer area is set to 0 and no PB valid time is provided.

Next, in step D584 and subsequent steps, control processing for the target scenario table is executed. This will be described below.
When the processing proceeds to step D584, the processing from step D584 to step D623 at the loop end is repeatedly executed until a value other than 0 is set as the value of brk. That is, in step D623, which is the rear loop end, the value of brk at that time is read. If the value of brk is 0, the process returns to step D584 and the process is repeated from the next step D585.

That is, when proceeding to step D584, first, the address of the scenario table is loaded from the scenario data table area in the target scenario management area (step D585). For example, in the case of scenario layer number 0 in the customer waiting demonstration, the address of the scenario table shown in FIG. 135 is loaded in step D585.
Next, an operation code of a specific row (specified row) of the scenario table designated by the address loaded in step D585 is acquired (step D586). As described above, in the scenario table, for example, as shown in FIG. 135, the operation code and operand data (scenario data) are set in each line. For example, in the case of FIG. 135, for example, if the designated line is the first line, the “motion 1 deletion code (M1DEL)” (specific data such as “51h”), which is the operation code data of the first line, is stepped. Obtained at D586. Alternatively, in the case of FIG. 135, for example, if the designated line is the 11th line, the “motion 10 registration code (M10SET)” (specific data such as “4Ah”), which is the operation code data of the 11th line, is stepped. Obtained at D586.

Next, the opcode obtained in the immediately preceding step D586 is separated into upper bits and lower bits and prepared (step D587). For example, when the opcode data is “51h” described above, the upper bit “5” and the lower bit “1” are separately prepared. The upper and lower bits of the opcode have meanings (however, the lower bits may have no meaning). For example, among “51h” which is the “motion 1 deletion code”, the upper bit “5” means the motion deletion, and the lower bit “1” is the target (in this case, the motion deletion target) motion. This means that the layer is motion 1.
Next, an operand of a specific row (specified row) of the scenario table specified by the address loaded in step D585 is acquired and prepared (step D588), and the process proceeds to step D589. For example, in the case of FIG. 135, if the designated line is the 11th line (the operation code is “motion 10 registration code”), “−1”, which is the operand data of the 11th line, is acquired and prepared in step D588.

Proceeding to step D589, the prepared opcode high-order data (data prepared by separating in step D587, the same applies hereinafter) is determined, and if it is data (motion registration code) for instructing motion registration (step D589; Y). After executing the motion registration process (step D601), the process proceeds to step D621, and if it is not data for instructing motion registration (step D589; N), the process proceeds to step D590.
Proceeding to step D590, if the prepared operation code high-order data is determined and the data is a command (motion deletion code) for instructing motion deletion (step D590; Y), the step after executing the motion deletion processing (step D602) The process proceeds to D621, and if it is not data for commanding motion deletion (step D590; N), the process proceeds to step D591.

Proceeding to step D591, the prepared opcode high-order data is determined, and in the case of data (motion continuation code) for instructing motion continuation (step D591; Y), after executing the motion continuation processing (step D603) The process proceeds to D621, and if it is not data for instructing the motion to continue (step D591; N), the process proceeds to step D592.
Proceeding to step D592, the prepared opcode high-order data is determined, and if it is data (constant wait code) for instructing a constant wait (step D592; Y), after executing the constant wait process (step D604) The process proceeds to D621, and if it is not data for instructing a constant wait (step D592; N), the process proceeds to step D593.

Proceeding to step D593, if the prepared operation code high-order data is determined and the data is a variable weight command (variable weight code) (step D593; Y), the variable weight process (step D605) is executed and then the step is performed. The process proceeds to D621, and if it is not data for instructing a variable weight (step D593; N), the process proceeds to step D594.
When the process proceeds to step D594, the prepared opcode high-order data is determined, and if it is data (PB wait code) for instructing PB wait (step D594; Y), after executing the PB wait process (step D606) The process proceeds to D621, and if it is not data for instructing to wait for PB (step D594; N), the process proceeds to step D595.

Proceeding to step D595, the prepared opcode high-order data is determined, and if it is data (PB determination branch code) for instructing the PB determination branch (step D595; Y), the PB determination branch process (step D607) is executed. After that, the process proceeds to step D621, and if it is not the data for instructing the PB determination branch (step D595; N), the process proceeds to step D596.
Proceeding to step D596, the prepared opcode high-order data is determined, and if it is data (stop symbol set code) that instructs symbol stop (step D596; Y), after executing symbol stop processing (step D608) Proceeding to step D621, and if not the data for commanding the symbol stop (step D596; N), proceeding to step D597.

When the process proceeds to step D597, the prepared opcode high-order data is determined, and when it is data (symbol reverse calculation replacement code) for instructing symbol reverse replacement (step D597; Y), the symbol reverse calculation replacement process (step D609) ) Is executed, the process proceeds to step D621, and if the data is not data for commanding symbol reverse replacement (step D597; N), the process proceeds to step D598.
When the process proceeds to step D598, the prepared opcode high-order data is determined, and if it is data (fluctuation scenario switching code) for instructing switching of the fluctuation scenario (step D598; Y), the fluctuation scenario switching process (step D610) is executed. After that, the process proceeds to step D621, and if it is not the data for instructing the change scenario switching (step D598; N), the process proceeds to step D599.

When the process proceeds to step D599, the prepared operation code high-order data is determined, and if it is data (repetition code) commanding repetition (step D599; Y), the process proceeds to step D621 after executing the repetition process (step D611). If the data is not data for commanding repetition (step D599; N), the process proceeds to step D600.
When the process proceeds to step D600, the prepared opcode high-order data is determined, and if it is data (end code) for commanding termination (step D600; Y), the termination process (step D612) is executed and then the process proceeds to step D621. If it is not data for instructing termination (step D600; N), the process proceeds to another step (not shown). In addition, other steps (not shown) (steps indicated by wavy lines in FIG. 105) determine the contents of the prepared opcode upper data as in the above-described steps D589 to D612, and the determination result is the other. The process corresponding to the case of the type of data (code) is executed and the process proceeds to step D621. If the prepared opcode upper data does not correspond to any type of data (code), the scenario analysis process is performed. It is the composition which ends.

In step D621, the data set at this time is read into the address area of the scenario management area corresponding to the target scenario layer number, and it is determined whether this data is NULL. If it is NULL (step D621; Y). , Brk is set to 1 (step D622), and the process proceeds to step D623. If not NULL (step D621; N), the process proceeds to step D623 without executing step D622.
When the process proceeds to step D623, the value of brk at that time is read as described above, and if the value of brk is 0, the process returns to step D584 and the processing is repeated from the next step D585, and the value of brk is not 0. Finishes the scenario analysis process and returns.

For this reason, in one of the processes in steps D601 to D612, the value of brk is set to a non-zero value, or NULL is set in the address area of the scenario management area corresponding to the target scenario layer number. Then, the loop processing with steps D584 and D623 as loop ends is completed and the process returns. Until the loop process is completed in this way, the address of the scenario data table area in the scenario management area (the address for designating the scenario table and its row) is appropriately changed, and the loop process is repeated until a series of steps are repeated. The production control is executed.
The above subroutine group (steps D601 to D612) is an example, and changes depending on the specifications of the model.

[Motion registration process]
Next, details of the motion registration process (step D601) in the scenario analysis process described above will be described with reference to FIG.
When the motion registration process is started, first, the table address in the scenario data table area of the target scenario management area is updated to the next record (address specifying the next row of the table) (step D631). This is an update process for advancing the designated line when the above-mentioned step D585 is executed next time to the next line, and the designated line of the target scenario table is changed to the next line by performing this update process. The above loop processing (steps D584 to D623) is repeated.

Next, the address of the motion management area is loaded from the address area of the motion management area corresponding to the lower bit data of the opcode separated in step D587, prepared (step D632), and the process proceeds to step D633. In the case of this example, the RAM in the CPU 311 of the effect control device 300 is configured to have storage areas for motion management called “motion management area address area” and “motion management area”.
Among them, as shown in FIG. 106 (b), the motion management area has a display number (for example, left) that is the number (maximum number) of objects that are display-controlled (not necessarily displayed on the display screen 41a). In the case of a symbol, an area for storing the next symbol, the current symbol, and the previous symbol (an area for the number of displays), and an area for storing a frame number indicating the number of frames processed (frame number area) , An area for storing the command position indicating the number of rows in the motion table (command position area) and address data indicating which table to use among the motion list tables (motion The structure includes an area (corresponding to an index) for storing (motion list table area) and display information areas corresponding to the number of displays.

  In addition, there are motion management areas of the same structure corresponding to the motion layers (in this example, there are motions 0 to 13) corresponding to this motion layer. In this example, there are 14 motion layers. There are also 14 management areas (motion management areas 0 to 13). Further, in this example, as shown on the left side of FIG. 134, there are 14 address areas (motion 0 address to motion 13 address) corresponding to this motion management area. In step D632, in order to specify one of the plurality of motion management areas as described above, the motion management area corresponding to the motion layer number specified by the data of the lower bits of the opcode (hereinafter referred to as “corresponding motion management area”). The head address of “area” is read out from the address area of the corresponding motion management area and prepared. In this application, the motion layer number (0 to 13 in this example) is simply expressed as a motion number, or used as a motion management area X (X is a number corresponding to the motion number). There is a case.

  The number of display information areas in the motion management area is the same as the number of displays (the number of objects). As shown in FIG. 106C, each display information area has a display type, an effect type, an effect parameter, X coordinate of upper left display point, Y coordinate of upper left display point, X coordinate of upper right display point, Y coordinate of upper right display point, X coordinate of lower left display point, Y coordinate of lower left display point, image index, background color, foreground It includes areas for storing data of color, frame count for moving picture only with IPicture, and behavior index.

Here, the display type is the type of the object (including information indicating whether it is a still image or a moving image (movie) and information indicating the type of movie (I picture or not)).
The effect type is information indicating the type of effect (processing such as imparting transparency) to be added to the image.
The effect parameter is a parameter of the effect (for example, transparency in the case of providing transparency).
The X coordinate and the Y coordinate are data for specifying the display position of the image. In this example, for the polygon display function (the function of displaying a solid as a polyhedron), the display upper left point, the display upper right point, and the display lower left point 3 There are point coordinates.
The image index is a number that identifies a still image or a movie.
The frame count in the case of a moving picture of only IPicture is data indicating what frame data is IPicture (that is, I frame).
The behavior index is an index for behavior (design replacement). The behavior (design replacement) is to replace only the character (still image or moving image) at the same size and the same display position, and is different from the cut-in character replacement described in steps D385 to D390 described above. In the above-described cut-in character replacement, the size and display position of the character can be changed by the replacement.

In step D633, it is determined whether the address of the motion management area loaded in step D632 is NULL. If NULL (step D633; Y), the process proceeds to step D635, and if not NULL (step D633; N), motion data. After executing the initialization process 1 (step D634), the process proceeds to step D635.
Proceeding to step D635, the head address of the motion management area corresponding to the lower bit data of the operation code separated at step D587 is set and prepared (step D635), and the motion corresponding to the lower bit data of the operation code is prepared. The head address prepared in step D635 is set in the address area of the management area (step D636), and the process proceeds to step D637.

  In these steps D632 to D636, in any case, finally, in step D636, the head address of the motion management area corresponding to the lower bits of the opcode separated in step D587 is set as the address area of the corresponding motion management area. However, if data at an address other than NULL has already been set in the address area of the corresponding motion management area, the motion data initialization process 1 (for setting the opening of the development area used for moving picture development, etc.) This will be executed in step D634.

In Step D637, it is determined whether or not the operand data prepared in Step D588 is 0 or more. If it is 0 or more (Step D637; Y), the process proceeds to Step D638, and if it is less than 0 (that is, a negative value). (Step D637; N), the process proceeds to Step D641.
In step D638, the operand data (operand data prepared in step D588, the same applies hereinafter) is prepared as a motion index (step D638), and an in-use motion index corresponding to the lower part of the opcode is stored ( The data prepared in step D638 is set in “in-use motion index area” (step D639). The in-use motion index area is an area for storing data of a motion index (in-use motion index) that designates a row to be controlled in the motion list table for each motion number, and is provided for each motion number. Yes. In this step D639, the data prepared in step D638 is set (that is, stored) in the in-use motion index area corresponding to the motion number specified by the lower bits of the operation code separated in step D587.
Next, the motion data initialization process 2 (step D640) for initializing data such as the number of displays is executed, and the motion registration process is terminated.

In step D641, the motion index data corresponding to the lower part of the operation code is loaded from the corresponding motion index area and prepared (step D641). The motion index area includes the storage area (holding index area, fourth pattern index area) described in steps D291 to D294, and the storage area (SU1 cut-in) described in steps D386, D388, and D390. Area, SU2 cut-in area, and SU3 cut-in area). In this step D641, the motion index specified by the lower bit of the opcode separated in step D587 and the current state of the gaming machine (whether or not the probability change is in progress) out of the plurality of motion index areas in the RAM. Prepare motion index data from the area.
Next, the data prepared in step D641 is set in the in-use motion index area corresponding to the lower part of the operation code (step D642), and the motion data initialization process 2 (step D643) for initializing data such as the display number is executed. Then, the motion registration process ends.

  Among the steps D637 to D643 described above, the determination result of step D637 is Yes (operand is 0 or more), the route for executing steps D638 to D640, and the determination result of step D637 is No (operand is less than 0). The route that executes steps D641 to D643 is different as follows. That is, the former route is a route that uses the motion index value (fixed value) set in the scenario table stored in the ROM for control, and the latter route is stored in the motion index area in the RAM. This is a route that uses the value of the motion index (not a fixed value) for control. If you want to change the motion index to be used depending on the state of the gaming machine (whether or not it is in probability change), a negative value (for example, “−1”) is set as the operand value, and the latter route is executed. It becomes the composition which is done. For example, since the hold display (decoration special figure start memory display) is displayed in a mode corresponding to the current special figure hold number (special figure start memory number), the eleventh line (// display ( On hold)), the value of the operand is negative.

[Motion data initialization process 1]
Next, details of the motion data initialization process 1 (step D634) in the above-described motion registration process and the motion data initialization process 1 (step D674 and step D686) in the motion deletion process and the motion continuation process described later are shown in FIG. ). In the description of the control process of the effect control device 300, the motion control data is data such as the number of displays and frame numbers stored in the motion management area.
When the motion data initialization process 1 is started, first, the variable i is incremented from the initial value 0 by an increment 1 until the closing price (closing price = number of displays−1) is reached, and then the steps D651 to D655 are repeatedly executed. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step D656. That is, in step D651, immediately after the start of the motion data initialization process 1, the variable i is set to 0 and the process proceeds to step D652. In step D655, if the variable i is less than the closing price, the process returns to step D651, and if the variable i is the closing price, the process proceeds to step D656. Then, when returning to step D651, the value of variable i is increased by 1, and the process proceeds to step D652. The closing price is a value obtained by subtracting 1 from the display number data set in the motion management area corresponding to the lower bits of the opcode separated in step D587 (hereinafter referred to as “target motion management area”). is there. That is, in the motion data initialization process 1, the loop process of steps D651 to D655 is repeatedly executed for the number of displays, and then the process proceeds to step D656.

In step D652, the display information area address corresponding to the variable i in the target motion management area is set (step D652), and then the process proceeds to step D653. In this step D652, for example, if the variable i = 0, the address of the first display information area among the display information areas corresponding to the display number in the target motion management area is set.
When the process proceeds to step D653, the display type data in the display information area to which the address is set in the immediately preceding step D652 is read to determine whether or not this display type is a moving image. If the display type is a moving image (step D653; Y ) Release setting of the expansion area (area used for expansion of compressed moving image data) is performed (step D654), and the process proceeds to step D655. If it is not a moving image (step D653; N), step D654 is executed. Without execution, the process proceeds to Step D655. When the process proceeds to step D655, as described above, if the variable i is less than the closing price, the process returns to step D651, and if the variable i is the closing price, the process proceeds to step D656.

  When the process proceeds to step D656, the process of initializing the parameters of the target motion management area is performed in steps D656 to D658, and then the motion data initialization process 1 is terminated. That is, the display number is set to 0 in step D656, the frame number is set to -1 in step D657, and the command position is set to 0 in step D658.

[Motion data initialization process 2]
Next, details of the motion data initialization process 2 (steps D640 and D643) in the motion registration process described above and the motion initialization process (motion data initialization process 2 (step D689)) in the motion continuation process described later are shown in FIG. This will be explained by b).
When the motion data initialization process 2 is started, first, the process of initializing the parameters of the target motion management area is performed in steps D661 to D663, and then the process proceeds to step D664. That is, the display number is set to 0 in step D661, the frame number is set to -1 in step D662, and the command position is set to 0 in step D663.
In step D664, in the motion list table area in the target motion management area, an address (an address for specifying the motion list table and its row) corresponding to the in-use motion index (data set in step D642) is entered. After setting (step D664), the motion data initialization process 2 is terminated.

[Motion deletion processing]
Next, details of the motion deletion process (step D602) in the scenario analysis process described above will be described with reference to FIG.
When the motion deletion process is started, first, the table address in the scenario data table area of the target scenario management area is updated to the next record (address for designating the next line of the table) as in step D631. (Step D671) As in Step D632, the address of the motion management area is loaded from the address area of the target motion management area, prepared (Step D672), and the process proceeds to Step D673.

In step D673, it is determined whether the address of the motion management area loaded in step D672 is NULL. If NULL (step D673; Y), the process proceeds to step D675, and if not NULL (step D673; N), the motion After executing the data initialization process 1 (step D674), the process proceeds to step D675.
In step D675, NULL is set in the address area of the target motion management area (step D675), and the in-use motion corresponding to the low-order bit data of the operation code (the operation code separated in step D587, the same applies hereinafter). The index data is cleared (step D676), and then the motion deletion process is terminated.
The motion deletion process described above is executed when the control of the character or the like is finished, and thereby the motion information (data in the address area of the motion management area and data in the motion index area in use) is deleted.

[Motion continuation processing]
Next, details of the motion continuation process (step D603) in the scenario analysis process described above will be described with reference to FIG.
When the motion continuation process is started, the table address in the scenario data table area of the target scenario management area is first updated to the next record (address for designating the next line of the table) as in step D631. (Step D681), the in-use motion index data corresponding to the lower bits of the operation code is loaded (Step D682), and the process proceeds to Step D683.

Proceeding to step D683, it is determined whether the data of the in-use motion index loaded at step D682 matches the operand acquired at step D588. If they match (step D683; Y), the motion continuation process is terminated. If they do not match (step D683; N), the process proceeds to step D684. Here, it is determined whether the currently controlled motion and the motion specified in the scenario table are the same. If they are the same, the currently controlled motion should be continued as it is, so the motion continuation process is performed without any processing. If it is not the same, step D684 and subsequent steps are executed to register a new motion.
In step D684 and subsequent steps, processing similar to the motion registration processing (route using the scenario table value) described above is performed.
That is, when the process proceeds to step D684, as in step D632, the address of the motion management area is loaded from the address area of the target motion management area, prepared (step D684), and the process proceeds to step D685.

In step D685, it is determined whether the address of the motion management area loaded in step D684 is NULL. If it is NULL (step D685; Y), the process proceeds to step D687. If it is not NULL (step D685; N), the motion After executing the data initialization process 1 (step D686), the process proceeds to step D687.
In step D687, the head address of the target motion management area is set and prepared (step D687), and the head address prepared in step D687 is set in the address area of the target motion management area (step D688).
Next, a motion initialization process, that is, the above-described motion data initialization process 2 (step D689) is executed, and the data of the operand is set in the in-use motion index area corresponding to the lower bits of the opcode (step S6). D690), and then the motion continuation process is terminated.
In the motion continuation process described above, if the motion information specified in the scenario table is the same as the content currently controlled, the process is continued as it is, and if it is different, a new registration process is executed. Thus, for example, if the background during normal fluctuation does not change due to reach or the like, the movie continues over a plurality of fluctuations. However, when reach occurs, a new reproduction from the head is started.

[Constant wait processing]
Next, details of the constant weight process (step D604) in the scenario analysis process described above will be described with reference to FIG.
When the constant wait processing is started, first, update processing similar to that in step D631 is executed (step D691), and the operand data is set in the scenario timer area of the target scenario management area (step D692). ).
Next, the value of brk is set to 1 (step D693), and the constant wait process is terminated.
According to the constant wait process, a time value for waiting for a specified fixed time is set. For example, in the case of the 18th line (// wait) in the scenario table shown in FIG. 135, since the operation code is a constant wait code, this processing is executed, and since the operand wait time is “3600”, in step D692 above 3600 (120 seconds = 3600 × 1/30 seconds) is set as the value of the scenario timer area. Then, since the value of brk becomes 1 in step D693, the loop processing (steps D584 to D623) in the scenario analysis processing described above ends.

[Variable weight processing]
Next, details of the variable weight process (step D605) in the scenario analysis process described above will be described with reference to FIG.
When variable wait processing is started, first, update processing similar to that in step D631 is executed (step D695), and PB effect addition time (value set in step D579) is added to the data of the operand. Is set in the scenario timer area of the target scenario management area (step D696).
Next, the value of brk is set to 1 (step D697), and the variable wait process is terminated.

  In the variable weight process, a time value or the like for waiting for a variable time when the effect time changes due to the player's PB operation is set. As a result, the operation that is performed thereafter becomes longer as the operation is performed sooner after the instruction of the PB operation is given, and an operation that the operation is performed only for a short time when the operation is performed at the limit of the effective time is realized. Here, the PB effect addition time becomes larger as the player performs the PB operation sooner after the effect for prompting the player to perform the PB operation is performed (see step D579). For this reason, the earlier the player performs the PB operation, the longer the effect to be performed thereafter.

[PB waiting process]
Next, details of the PB waiting process (step D606) in the scenario analysis process described above will be described with reference to FIG.
When the PB waiting process is started, update processing similar to that in step D631 is executed (step D701), and the operand data is set in the PB timer area of the target scenario management area (step D702). ).
Next, the PB detection flag area flag in the target scenario management area is cleared (step D703), the value of brk is set to 1 (step D704), and the PB waiting process is terminated.

  In the PB waiting process, a setting for starting a PB effect (push button effect) is performed. In step D703, in order to start the PB effect (push button effect), the value of the PB detection flag indicating that the PB (push button) is operated is initially set to OFF (the flag is not set). ing.

[PB decision branch processing]
Next, details of the PB determination branch process (step D607) in the scenario analysis process described above will be described with reference to FIG.
When the PB determination branching process is started, first, in step D711, it is determined whether the flag of the PB detection flag area in the target scenario management area is set (that is, whether the PB detection flag is set). If YES (step D711; Y), the process proceeds to step D713. If not set (step D711; N), that is, if the PB detection flag is OFF, the process proceeds to step D712.
When the process proceeds to Step D712, the same update process as in Step D631 is executed (Step D712), and the PB determination branch process is terminated.
When the process proceeds to Step D713, the same update process as in Step D631 is executed (Step D713), and the process proceeds to Step D714.
Proceeding to step D714, it is determined whether or not the address update process of step D713 has been completed for the operand data prepared in step D588, and if completed (step D714; Y), the PB determination branch process is terminated. If not completed (step D714; N), the process returns to step D713 and is repeated.

  In the PB determination branching process, in the above-described PB effect (push button effect), the PB timer that measures the effective time without operating the PB has timed up, or the PB is operated within the effective time and the timer is forcibly set to 0. This process is executed when If the time is up without operating the PB, the process proceeds to step D712 via step D711, and the designated line of the scenario table advances next by one line and returns. If the PB is operated within the valid time, the process proceeds to step D713 via step D711, and the specified line in the scenario table jumps by the amount specified by the operand.

  For example, this process is executed when the op code in the m-th line of the scenario table is a PB determination branch code. If the operand of the m-th row (that is, the number of table jumps) is “3”, if the PB is operated within the valid time and the process proceeds to step D713, the determination result of step D714 is executed until step D713 is executed three times. No. As a result, the next designated line jumps to the (m + 3) th line in the scenario table. On the other hand, even if this process is executed as described above, if the PB is not pushed within the valid time, the process returns only after step D712 is executed once (this process ends). The designated row in the table is the next m + 1 row.

[Design stop processing]
Next, details of the symbol stop process (step D608) in the scenario analysis process described above will be described with reference to FIG.
When the symbol stop process is started, first, an update process similar to that in step D631 is executed (step D721), and the process proceeds to step D722.
When the process proceeds to step D722, it is determined whether the lower bit data of the opcode designates the left symbol (step D722; Y). N), go to Step D723.
In step D727, the special symbol stop symbol area (left) value (the value set in step D354 described above) is set as the current symbol (left) (step D727), and the symbol stop process is terminated.
In step D723, it is determined whether the lower bit data of the operation code designates the right symbol. If it is the right symbol (step D723; Y), the process proceeds to step D728. N), go to Step D724.
In step D728, the special symbol stop symbol area (right) value (the value set in step D354 described above) is set as the current symbol (right) (step D728), and the symbol stop process is terminated.

When it proceeds to step D724, it is determined whether the lower bit data of the operation code designates a middle symbol. If it is a middle symbol (step D724; Y), it proceeds to step D729, and if it is not a middle symbol (step D724; N), go to Step D725.
In step D729, the value of the special symbol stop symbol area (medium) (the value set in step D354 described above) is set as the current symbol (medium) (step D729), and the symbol stop process is terminated.
Proceeding to step D725, it is determined whether the low-order bit data of the opcode designates FIG. 1 Fig. 4 symbol (4 symbol of Fig. 1), and if it is Special Fig. 1 symbol 4 (step D725; Y), the process proceeds to step D730, and if it is not the 4th symbol in FIG. 1 (step D725; N), the process proceeds to step D726.
When proceeding to step D730, the value of the special symbol stop symbol area (special symbol 1 4 symbol) is set as the current symbol (special symbol 1 4 symbol) (step D730), and the symbol stop processing is terminated.

When the process proceeds to step D726, it is determined whether the lower bit data of the opcode designates the special figure 2 figure 4 (the special figure 2 figure 4), and if it is the special figure 2 figure 4 symbol (step D726). ; Y), the process proceeds to step D731, and if it is not the 4th symbol design in FIG. 2 (step D726; N), the symbol stop process is terminated.
In step D731, the value of the special symbol stop symbol area (special symbol 2 4 symbol) is set as the current symbol (special symbol 2 4 symbol) (step D731), and the symbol stop process is terminated.
The symbol stop process is a process of setting a stop symbol when the variable display of symbols such as decorative special symbols is stopped. For example, when the twelfth line (// stop symbol set) in the scenario table shown in FIG. 135 is a designated row, the operation code is the stop symbol set code (left symbol). The determination result is Yes, step D727 is executed, and the stop symbol of the left symbol of the special diagram is set.

[Design reverse calculation process]
Next, details of the symbol reverse calculation replacement process (step D609) in the scenario analysis process described above will be described with reference to FIG.
When the symbol reverse calculation replacement process is started, first, an update process similar to that in step D631 is executed (step D741), and the process proceeds to step D742.
In step D742, it is determined whether the lower bit data of the operation code designates the left symbol. If it is the left symbol (step D742; Y), the process proceeds to step D743, and if it is not the left symbol (step D742; N), go to Step D748.

Proceeding to step D743, the remainder (operand mod 9) obtained by dividing the operand data by 9 is set as the frame difference (step D743), and the frame difference (set at step D743) from the value of the special figure stop symbol area (left) is set. The result obtained by subtracting the value is set as a symbol number (step D744), and the process proceeds to step D745.
In step D745, it is determined whether the symbol number set in step D744 is less than 0 (negative value). If it is less than 0 (step D745; Y), the process proceeds to step D746, and if not less than 0 (step In D745; N), the process proceeds to Step D747.
In step D746, a value obtained by adding 9 to the symbol number is set as a new symbol number (step D746), and the procedure proceeds to step D747.
Proceeding to step D747, the symbol number value (set in step D744, if negative, the value adjusted in step D746) is set as the current symbol (left) (step D747), and the symbol reverse calculation replacement process Exit.

In step D748, it is determined whether the lower bit data of the operation code designates the right symbol. If it is the right symbol (step D748; Y), the flow proceeds to step D749, and if it is not the right symbol (step D748; N), go to Step D754.
Proceeding to step D749, the remainder (operand mod 9) obtained by dividing the operand data by 9 is set as a frame difference (step D749), and the frame difference (set at step D749) from the value of the special figure stop symbol area (right). The result obtained by subtracting the value is set as a symbol number (step D750), and the process proceeds to step D751.
In step D751, it is determined whether the symbol number set in step D750 is less than 0. If it is less than 0 (step D751; Y), the process proceeds to step D752, and if not less than 0 (step D751; N). Advances to step D753.
In step D752, a value obtained by adding 9 to the symbol number is set as a new symbol number (step D752), and the procedure proceeds to step D753.
Proceeding to step D753, the symbol number value (set in step D750, and if negative, the value adjusted in step D752) is set as the current symbol (right) (step D753), and the symbol reverse replacement process Exit.

When it proceeds to step D754, it is determined whether or not the low-order bit data of the operation code designates a middle symbol. If it is a middle symbol (step D754; Y), the procedure proceeds to step D755, and if it is not a middle symbol (step D754; N), the symbol reverse calculation replacement process is terminated.
Proceeding to step D755, the remainder (operand mod 9) obtained by dividing the operand data by 9 is set as a frame difference (step D755), and the frame difference (set at step D755) is determined from the value in the special figure stop symbol area (medium). The result obtained by subtracting the value is set as a symbol number (step D756), and the process proceeds to step D757.
In step D757, it is determined whether the symbol number set in step D756 is less than 0. If it is less than 0 (step D757; Y), the process proceeds to step D758, and if it is not less than 0 (step D757; N). Advances to step D759.
In step D758, a value obtained by adding 9 to the symbol number is set as a new symbol number (step D758), and the procedure proceeds to step D759.
Proceeding to step D759, the symbol number value (set at step D756, and if negative, the value corrected at step D758) is set as the current symbol (medium) (step D759), and the symbol reverse calculation replacement process Exit.

The symbol reverse calculation replacement process described above is a process of replacing the symbol with a symbol several symbols before the scheduled stop (the symbol that is the previous symbol by the number of symbol feeds) such as the moment of slowdown after the end of high-speed fluctuation.
For example, when the op code in the m-th line of the scenario table is the left symbol reverse replacement code, this process is executed and the determination result in Step D742 becomes Yes, and Steps D743 to D747 are executed to execute the current symbol ( Left) is set. In this case, the operand is data indicating the number of symbols to be sent, and when the operand (that is, the number of frames to be sent) in the m-th row is “2”, in the above step D743, the remainder of the division is 2 ÷ 9. A certain 2 is set as a frame difference, and a symbol number is set in step D744 using the value of the frame difference. For example, if the value of the special figure stop symbol area (left) is 1, -1 (= 1-2) is set as the symbol number, and if the value of the special figure stop symbol area (left) is 7, 5 (= 7-2) is set as the symbol number. If the symbol number set in step D744 is a negative value (for example, -1), step D746 is executed and the symbol number is changed to a rounded value (for example, if -1, 8 = -1 + 9). After that, in step D747, the symbol number is registered as the current symbol (left).

  The above operation is the same for the right symbol (steps D748 to D753) and the middle symbol (steps D754 to D759). Further, “9” in step D743 and the like represents the number of symbols in each reel (left symbol, middle symbol, right symbol). This may not be 9 depending on the model, and may have a different value for each reel. “9” in step D335 of the stop symbol setting process described above also represents the number of symbols.

[Change scenario switching process]
Next, details of the fluctuation scenario switching process (step 610) in the scenario analysis process described above will be described with reference to FIG.
When the variation scenario switching process is started, it is first determined in step D761 whether the data of the operand is the left symbol scenario 2nd (command to switch the left symbol variation display to 2nd (first half)). If it is the symbol scenario 2nd (step D761; Y), the process proceeds to step D762, and if it is not the left symbol scenario 2nd (step D761; N), the process proceeds to step D767.

Proceeding to step D762, scenario layer number 1 is prepared because it is a left symbol (step D762), and the address of the left symbol scenario 2nd table (scenario table for 2nd (first half) for the left symbol) is prepared from the symbol variation scenario table area. Load and prepare (step D763). In the symbol variation scenario table area, as described in the above step D315, various symbol variation scenario tables (for 1st (early), 2nd (first half), 3rd (second half) scenario tables, In this step D763, 2nd (first half) scenario table addresses are prepared for the left symbol.
Next, based on the data prepared in the previous steps D762 and D763, the scenario data setting process (step D764) described above is executed to prepare the address area of the prepared scenario management area (for example, prepared in step D553 etc.). The address of the scenario management area 1 is set in the address area of the scenario management area (step D765), and the variation scenario switching process is terminated. As a result, the scenario management area 1 is newly set as the target scenario management area.

Proceeding to step D767, it is determined whether the data of the operand is the right symbol scenario 2nd (instructing switching of the right symbol variation display to 2nd), and if it is the right symbol scenario 2nd (step D767; Y). In step D768, if it is not the right symbol scenario 2nd (step D767; N), the process proceeds to step D772.
Proceeding to step D768, scenario layer number 2 is prepared because it is a right symbol (step D767), and the address of the right symbol scenario 2nd table (scenario table for 2nd for right symbol) is loaded from the symbol variation scenario table area, Preparation is made (step D769).
Next, based on the data prepared in the previous steps D768 and D769, the scenario data setting process (step D770) described above is executed to set the address of the scenario management area 2 in the address area of the prepared scenario management area. (Step D771), and the fluctuation scenario switching process is terminated. As a result, the scenario management area 2 is newly set as the target scenario management area.

Proceeding to step D772, it is determined whether the data of the operand is the middle symbol scenario 2nd (instructing switching of the middle symbol variation display to 2nd), and if it is the middle symbol scenario 2nd (step D772; Y) The process proceeds to step D773, and if it is not the middle symbol scenario 2nd (step D772; N), the process proceeds to step D777.
Proceeding to step D773, since it is a middle symbol, prepare scenario layer number 3 (step D773), load the address of the middle symbol scenario 2nd table (the scenario table for 2nd for the middle symbol) from the symbol variation scenario table area, Prepare (step D774).
Next, based on the data prepared in the previous steps D773 and D774, the scenario data setting process (step D775) described above is executed to set the address of the scenario management area 3 in the address area of the prepared scenario management area. (Step D776), the fluctuation scenario switching process is terminated. As a result, the scenario management area 3 is newly set as the target scenario management area.

Proceeding to step D777, it is determined whether the data of the operand is the left symbol scenario 3rd (instructing switching to 3rd (second half) of the left symbol variation display), and if it is the left symbol scenario 3rd (step D777). ; Y), proceed to step D778, and if not the left symbol scenario 3rd (step D777; N), proceed to step D782.
Proceeding to step D778, scenario layer number 1 is prepared because it is a left symbol (step D778), and the address of the left symbol scenario 3rd table (scenario table for 3rd (second half) for the left symbol) is prepared from the symbol variation scenario table area. Load and prepare (step D779).
Next, based on the data prepared in the previous steps D778 and D779, the scenario data setting process (step D780) described above is executed to set the address of the scenario management area 1 in the address area of the prepared scenario management area. (Step D781), and the variation scenario switching process is terminated. As a result, the scenario management area 1 is newly set as the target scenario management area.

Proceeding to step D782, it is determined whether the data of the operand is the right symbol scenario 3rd (command to switch the right symbol variation display to 3rd), and if it is the right symbol scenario 3rd (step D782; Y). In step D783, if it is not the right symbol scenario 3rd (step D782; N), the process proceeds to step D787.
Proceeding to step D783, scenario layer number 2 is prepared because it is a right symbol (step D783), and the address of the right symbol scenario 3rd table (scenario table for 3rd for the right symbol) is loaded from the symbol variation scenario table area. Preparation is made (step D784).
Next, based on the data prepared in the previous steps D783 and D784, the scenario data setting process (step D785) described above is executed to set the address of the scenario management area 2 in the address area of the prepared scenario management area. (Step D786), and the fluctuation scenario switching process is terminated. As a result, the scenario management area 2 is newly set as the target scenario management area.

Proceeding to step D787, it is determined whether or not the data of the operand is middle symbol scenario 3rd (instructing switching to 3rd of variable symbol display), and if it is middle symbol scenario 3rd (step D787; Y). In step D788, if it is not the middle symbol scenario 3rd (step D787; N), the variation scenario switching process is terminated.
Proceeding to step D788, scenario layer number 3 is prepared since it is a middle symbol (step D788), and the address of the middle symbol scenario 3rd table (scenario table for 3rd for medium symbols) is loaded from the symbol variation scenario table area. Preparation is made (step D789).
Next, based on the data prepared in the previous steps D788 and D789, the scenario data setting process (step D790) described above is executed to set the address of the scenario management area 3 in the address area of the prepared scenario management area. (Step D791), and the variation scenario switching process is terminated. As a result, the scenario management area 3 is newly set as the target scenario management area.

According to the change scenario switching process described above, the scenario change in the above-described symbol change section, that is, the scenario change from 1st (early) to 2nd (first half) or 2nd (first half) to 3rd (second half). Is done. That is, the variation display effect of the decoration special drawing is divided into three sections, usually “early, first half, second half”, and the scenario of each section is switched and connected by this process. For example, when the operation code in the m-th line of the scenario table is the variable scenario switching code and the operand is the left symbol scenario 2nd, this process is executed and the determination result in Step D761 is Yes, and the above Steps D762 to D765 are performed. Is executed, and a new scenario table for 2nd (first half) for the left symbol is set as a scenario table to be controlled, and settings for executing this scenario table are performed.
Depending on the type of variation, the time values for the breaks of “early, first half, second half” are different. There are also fluctuations without 3rd (second half) (such as fluctuations without reach).

[Repetition processing]
Next, details of the repetitive processing (step D611) in the above-described scenario analysis processing will be described with reference to FIG. 114 (a).
When the iterative process is started, first, the table address in the scenario data table area of the target scenario management area is returned to the previous record (address specifying the previous line of the scenario table) (step D795). Proceed to step D796.
Proceeding to step D796, step D795 is executed for the number of operands acquired at step D588 to determine whether the table address has been returned to the previous record, and if it has been returned by the operand (step D796; Y), it is repeated When the process is finished and the operand is not returned (step D796; N), the process returns to step D795 and the process is repeated.

  The repetitive processing described above is used when returning to a predetermined stage of the scenario table and repeating the operation in the same scenario. For example, if the 25th line (// repeat) of the last line in the scenario table shown in FIG. 135 is a designated line, the opcode is a repeat code and the operand (ie, the return number) is “15”. When the process is executed and step D795 is executed 15 times, the determination result in step D796 is Yes, and this process ends. As a result, the designated line of the scenario table is the 10th line (15 lines before) // Back to BG continuation) The tenth line of the scenario table shown in FIG. 135 is a line for starting the symbol display of the customer waiting demonstration effect (customer waiting A). Following the symbol display of the customer waiting demonstration effect (customer waiting A), the customer waiting demonstration is performed. The table structure is such that a movie display (customer waiting B) is performed. For this reason, after that, the symbol display and the movie display as the customer waiting demonstration effects are repeated, and data for one loop (data from the 10th line to the last line of the scenario table shown in FIG. 135) is prepared. It will be over.

〔End processing〕
Next, details of the termination process (step D612) in the scenario analysis process described above will be described with reference to FIG.
When the termination process is started, NULL is set in the prepared address area of the scenario management area (step D798), and the termination process is terminated. As a result, the target scenario management area is not set, and the scenario ends.
For example, when the operation code in the m-th line of the scenario table is an end code, this process is executed, and the address area of the target scenario management area is set to NULL in step D798, and the scenario ends. This process is executed when all the series of scenarios are completed. That is, since all the scenarios are completed, the address in the scenario management area is deleted and the process ends.

[Motion control processing]
Next, details of the motion control process (step D30) in the main process described above will be described with reference to FIG.
When the motion control process is started, the loop process of steps D801 to D818 is repeatedly executed while increasing the number X of the target motion management area from 0, and the loop process end condition (14 motion management areas in this example) Therefore, when the condition that the control for all the motion management areas 0 to 13 is completed), the motion control process is terminated. That is, at the start of the motion control process, first, in step D801, the number of the target motion management area is set to 0 (X = 0), the process proceeds to step D802, and the processes after step D802 are executed. Is incremented by 1 (ie, X = X + 1), and it is determined in step D818 whether the above end condition (X = 14) is satisfied. If not, the process returns to step D801 and proceeds to step D802.

Hereinafter, Step D802 and the subsequent steps will be described on the assumption that the number of the target motion management area is X (actually, any one of 0 to 13 in this example).
In step D802, the initialization flag used in this process is cleared (step D802), the address of the motion management area X is loaded from the address area of the motion management area X (step D803), and then the process proceeds to step D804. move on. That is, one area is loaded at a time.
In step D804, it is determined whether the data at the address loaded in step D803 is NULL. If it is NULL (step D804; Y), the motion X (the motion layer corresponding to the motion management area X) is determined. Since control is not required, the process proceeds to step D817. If not NULL (step D804; N), the process proceeds to step D805.

In step D805, based on the address loaded in step D803, data in the motion list table area in the motion management area X (that is, data for designating the motion list table to be controlled this time and its row) is loaded and prepared. (Step D805), and the process proceeds to Step D806.
In step D806, data of the number of display frames in a row of the motion list table designated by the data loaded in step D805 (hereinafter referred to as “designated row”) is read, and the number of display frames (frame for executing a certain motion). If the number is less than or equal to 0 (step D806; Y), the process proceeds to step D817, which is abnormal, and if not less than 0 (step D806; N), the process proceeds to step D807 as normal. Since the execution period for each motion is different, the number of display frames corresponding to each motion is defined on the list table for motion, and the number of display frames should be defined for at least one frame. If the definition value on the list table is 0 or less, it is abnormal.

  In step D807, the value of the frame number in the motion management area X is read and it is determined whether the value of the frame number is less than 0. If it is less than 0 (step D807; Y), a motion is newly registered. The initialization flag is set (when the motion is registered) (step D808), and the process proceeds to step D809. If it is not less than 0 (step D807; N), step D808 is not executed because the motion is not registered. The process proceeds to step D809. Since the frame number is set to “−1” in steps D657 and D662 in the above-described motion data initialization processing 1 and 2 at the time of motion registration, the initialization flag is set in step D808 if the motion is registered. Is done. This initialization flag is a flag that is cleared in step D802 described above and determined in step D812 described later.

In step D809, it is determined whether the value of the frame number in the motion management area X has reached the final frame number (that is, the value obtained by subtracting 1 from the number of display frames described above). D809; N), the process proceeds to step D812, and if it is equal to or greater than the final frame number (step D809; Y), the process proceeds to step D810.
In step D810, the above-described motion data initialization process 1 (step D810) is executed, an initialization flag is set in the same manner as in step D808 (step D811), and the process proceeds to step D812.
Here, the fact that the frame number (starting from 0) has reached the final frame number means that the control of the target motion table has been completed up to the final frame. Therefore, if the determination result in step D809 is Yes (the frame number has reached the final frame number), the motion data initialization process 1 and the initialization flag are set in the same way as in motion registration, and the same The motion table is executed again from the beginning.

In step D812, it is determined whether the initialization flag is set. If the initialization flag is set (step D812; Y), the process proceeds to step D813 to execute the target motion table from the beginning. If the initialization flag is not set (step D812; N), that is, if it is cleared, the process proceeds to step D819.
In step D813, the frame number, display number, and command position values in the motion management area X are set to 0 (steps D813 to D815), and the process proceeds to step D816.
In step D819, the frame number value in the motion management area X is updated by +1 (step D819), and the process advances to step D816. The process proceeds to step D819 because the initialization flag is not set (that is, when the target motion table is being executed), so that the frame numbers need to be sequentially increased.

  Note that the value of the display number set to 0 in step D814 (a value indicating the number of objects under control) is added or deleted during the motion command execution process described later (for example, in step D881 described later). Updated (+1 or -1). In addition, the value of the command position set to 0 in step D815 (a value indicating the number of lines in the motion table) is also updated during a motion command execution process described later (for example, in step D880 described later). A command position value of 0 indicates that the designated line in the motion table is the first line. Further, the value of the display number is the number of objects being controlled, not the number of objects (such as symbols and notice characters) that are actually displayed on the display screen 41a at the same time.

In step D816, a motion command execution process (step D816) for executing control of the target motion table is executed, the address of the motion management area address area itself is updated (step D817), and step D818 is executed. Proceed to That is, in step D817, an update for increasing the value of the motion management area number X by 1 is executed. As a result, the target motion management area and the target motion layer are switched next. For example, if the motion management area 1 (motion layer is motion 1) is the control target before execution of step D817, the motion management area 2 (motion layer is motion 2) becomes the control target after execution. .
Proceeding to step D818, if the above-mentioned end condition (in this example, the number X = 14) is satisfied, the process returns; if not, the process returns to step D801 to repeat the processing from step D802. .

[Motion command execution processing]
Next, details of the motion command execution process (step D816) in the above-described motion control process will be described with reference to FIGS. 116 and 117. FIG.
When the motion command execution process is started, first, the data of the address of the motion list table (also referred to as “motion list table”) from the motion list table area in the motion management area X (target motion management area) (that is, “motion list table”) Then, the motion list table to be controlled this time and data specifying the row thereof are loaded (step D821), and the process proceeds to step D822.

  In step D822, the value of the command position in the motion management area X is read, and the value of this command position is the number of motion commands (the number of motion commands in the specified row of the motion list table specified by the address loaded in step D821). If the number of motion commands is greater than or equal to the number of motion commands (step D822; Y), since all commands (all rows of the target motion table) have been executed, motion command execution processing is performed. If the number of motion commands is not greater than or equal to the number of motion commands (step D822; N), the process proceeds to step D823 to execute the target motion table for the next one frame. For example, when the m-th row in the motion list table is a designated row and the number of motion commands in the m-th row is “1830”, the value of the command position in the motion management area X is “1830” in step D822. If it is not less than “1830”, the process proceeds to step D823. The value of the command position in the motion management area X is initially initialized to 0 in steps D658, D663, etc. in the above-described motion data initialization processes 1 and 2, and each row (command) of the motion table in step D843 described later. Each time is executed, +1 is updated. Therefore, if this value is equal to or greater than “1830”, all the rows in the target motion table have been executed, so the motion command execution process is terminated. ing.

In step D823, the motion table address (motion table name) is acquired from the designated row of the target motion list table (designated row of the motion list table designated by the address loaded in step D821). (Step D823), the process proceeds to Step D824. For example, if the m-th row in the motion list table is a designated row and the motion table name in the m-th row is “Mdat003”, this “Mdat003” is acquired as the motion table address (from ROM (PROM 321)). Take out). The motion list table area of the RAM (RAM in the CPU 311) stores the address (points to the address of the table in the ROM) of the leftmost column (the position of the number of frames) of the motion list table. In step D821, the address is loaded from the motion list table area of the RAM. In step D823, the value of “motion table name (address)” indicated by the address two records ahead of the address loaded in step D821 is read from the ROM (PROM 312 in this example).
In this example, since the motion table address corresponds to the motion table name, if the motion table name is obtained, the motion table address is obtained.

  The motion table is a control table for executing each of the blocked display effects, as described above, but will be described in detail here. In the present application, FIG. 136 shows an example of the motion table at the start of the left symbol normal variation, but many such motion tables are registered in the ROM (PROM 321 in this example). As shown in FIG. 136, in each row of the motion table, a command code is set at the head, and subsequently, a parameter corresponding to the command is set. However, there may be no parameters.

  For example, a command “additional 1 code” and a parameter “character No. (No.2: next symbol)” are set in the first line of FIG. 136, and “behavior code” is set in the second line. The command and the parameters “display information area No. (No. 0)” and “behavior No. (No. 0)” are set, and the command “movement 1 code” and the “display information area” are displayed on the seventh line. No. (No. 0) ”,“ X coordinate (0) ”,“ Y coordinate (−493) ”,“ image data width (296) ”, and“ image data height (518) ”are set. In the 10th line, only the command “end code” is set. Here, the object index (display information area No.) is a number assigned to the object to distinguish each object, and is automatically set in the order of registration with the additional code. For example, the character No. additionally registered in the first line of FIG. The character No. 2 (design “2”) has an object index (display information area No.) of “0”, and the character No. The character No. 1 (design “1”) has an object index (display information area No.) of “1”, and the character No. The character 9 (design “9”) has an object index (display information area No.) of “2”, and the object index (display information area No.) is based on the number of characters (number of objects) to be displayed. The value increases. 136 are the left symbol display information area 0 (next symbol) and the left symbol display information of the left symbol motion management area (see the top row on the right side of FIG. 134), respectively. It points to area 1 (current symbol) and left symbol display information area 2 (previous symbol).

The smaller the value of the object index (display information area No.), the deeper the screen is displayed. That is, when the display positions overlap, an object having a large object index (display information area No.) is preferentially displayed on the screen.
In the example of FIG. 136, three characters appear, but management is performed so that the total number of characters in all other categories (notices) used at the same time is 128. In other words, the VDP 312 in this example can display and control 128 characters simultaneously. Since characters can be arranged outside the display screen 41a, the number is not limited to 128 in the display screen 41a.
The example of FIG. 136 is data for the first four frames of the motion table of the normal variation (first half) of the left symbol. The break to the end code is data for one frame. For example, (a) from the first line to the tenth line is the data for the first frame. In addition, numerical values such as coordinate data and size data simply describe values that are meaningful in this example, and may be data including information after the decimal point. Actually, the data is a fixed decimal with a 16-bit sign (a 2's complement of a sign bit, an integer part 13 bits, and a fraction part 2 bits).
If the same state as the previous frame is continued, only the end code needs to be defined.

The types and meanings of the motion table commands in this example are as follows.
"Additional code": A command to add an object. There are an additional 1 code, an additional 2 code, and an additional 3 code, respectively, according to the type of object to be added (bitmap, moving image, single color rectangle).
“Insertion code”: a command for inserting an object as a specific object index (display information area No.). Depending on the type of object to be inserted (same as above), there are an insertion 1 code, an insertion 2 code, and an insertion 3 code. By executing this insertion code, the value of the object index (display information area No.) of the already registered object is lost. "Move code": A command that specifies the display position and display size of an object. Depending on the designation method (one point designation, three point designation), there are movement 1 code and movement 2 code.
"Effect code": A command that commands an effect that applies transparency or other processing to the image. There are an effect 1 code for specifying an effect type, an effect 2 code for specifying an effect parameter (for example, a transparency value (%)), and an effect 3 code for specifying an effect color.
"Delete code": A command to command deletion of an object.
"Change code": a command for instructing a change in which an object character (such as a symbol or a character) continues to move in the middle of movement and remains unchanged.
"Decode code": A command for instructing decoding (decoding) of moving image data.
“Replacement code”: a command for instructing object replacement (for example, control for replacing the character of the object index (display information area No.) 0 and the character of the object index (display information area No.) 1).
"Behavior code": A command to command replacement of an object character.
“End code”: a command indicating the end of data for one frame.
Note that the motion table commands are not limited to those described above, and may include a mode in which commands other than those described above are further included, or a mode in which any of the above commands is deleted.

  When the processing proceeds to step D824, loop processing with steps D824 and D844 as loop ends is repeatedly executed until the end condition (command = end) is satisfied. That is, immediately after the motion registration, the command position k of the target motion management area X is set to 0 (value specifying the first row of the motion table) by the above-described steps D658, D663, and D815 (k = 0), each time the loop process of steps D824 to D844 is repeated, the value of the command position k in the motion management area X is increased by 1 (k = k + 1) in steps D843 and D880, which will be described later, and the end condition in step D842 It is determined whether (command at the command position k is an end command) is established, and if established, the motion command execution process is terminated via step D844, and if not established, the process returns to step D824 via step D844. The configuration proceeds to step D825.

Hereinafter, Step D825 and the subsequent steps will be described on the assumption that the command position value of the target motion management area X is k.
Proceeding to step D825, the row corresponding to the command position k in the target motion table (the motion table at the address acquired in step D823) (for example, the first row if k = 0, the second row if k = 1, ... if k = N, the command of the (N + 1) th line is acquired (step D825), and this command is sequentially judged as to whether it corresponds to each code (steps D826 to D841). If the command determination result is Yes, the corresponding process (any of steps D851 to D866) is executed, and the process proceeds to step D844.

Specifically, when proceeding to step D826, it is determined whether the code is an additional code. If the code is an additional code (step D826; Y), after performing a bitmap addition process (step D851) for adding a still image as an object. The process proceeds to step D844, and if it is not the additional 1 code (step D826; N), the process proceeds to step D827.
When the process proceeds to step D827, it is determined whether the code is an additional 2 code. If the code is an additional 2 code (step D827; Y), the process proceeds to step D844 after performing a video addition process (step D852) for adding a video as an object. If it is not a code (step D827; N), the process proceeds to step D828.
When the process proceeds to step D828, it is determined whether the code is an additional 3 code, and if it is an additional code 3 (step D828; Y), a monochrome rectangle addition process for adding a monochrome rectangle image that does not use data in the character ROM (image ROM 325) as an object ( After performing Step D853), the process proceeds to Step D844, and if it is not the additional code 3 (Step D828; N), the process proceeds to Step D829.
When the process proceeds to step D829, it is determined whether the code is an insertion 1 code. If the code is an insertion 1 code (step D829; Y), a bitmap insertion process (step D854) for inserting a still image as an object is performed, and then the process proceeds to step D844. If it is not an insertion 1 code (step D829; N), the process proceeds to step D830.

When the process proceeds to step D830, it is determined whether the code is an insertion 2 code. If the code is an insertion 2 code (step D830; Y), a moving image insertion process (step D855) for inserting a moving image as an object is performed, and then the process proceeds to step D844. If not a code (step D830; N), the process proceeds to step D831.
In step D831, it is determined whether the code is an insertion 3 code. If the code is an insertion 3 code (step D831; Y), a monochrome rectangle insertion process (step D856) for inserting the monochrome rectangle image as an object is performed, and then the procedure proceeds to step D844. If it is not an insertion 3 code (step D831; N), the process proceeds to step D832.
When the process proceeds to step D832, it is determined whether the code is a movement 1 code, and if it is a movement 1 code (step D832; Y), a one-point designation object movement process for setting the display position and display size of the object by a one-point designation method ( After performing Step D857), the process proceeds to Step D844, and if it is not the movement 1 code (Step D832; N), the process proceeds to Step D833.
When the process proceeds to step D833, it is determined whether the code is a movement 2 code, and if it is a movement 2 code (step D833; Y), a 3-point designation object movement process for setting the display position and display size of the object by a 3-point designation method ( After performing Step D858), the process proceeds to Step D844, and if it is not the movement 2 code (Step D833; N), the process proceeds to Step D834.

In step D834, it is determined whether the code is an effect 1 code. If the code is an effect 1 code (step D834; Y), the effect type designation process (step 859) is performed and then the process proceeds to step D844. Step D834; N), and proceeds to Step D835.
When the process proceeds to step D835, it is determined whether the code is an effect 2 code. If the code is an effect 2 code (step D835; Y), the effect parameter designation process (step D860) is performed and then the process proceeds to step D844. Step D835; N), the process proceeds to Step D836.
In step D836, it is determined whether the code is an effect 3 code. If the code is an effect 3 code (step D836; Y), an effect color specifying process (step D861) for setting an effect color is performed, and then the process proceeds to step D844. If it is not a code (step D836; N), the process proceeds to step D837.
In step D837, it is determined whether the code is a deletion code. If the code is a deletion code (step D837; Y), an object deletion process for deleting an object (step D862) is performed, and then the process proceeds to step D844. Step D837; N), the process proceeds to Step D838.

In step D838, it is determined whether the code is a change code. If the code is a change code (step D838; Y), an object change process for changing an object (step D863) is performed, and then the process proceeds to step D844. Step D838; N), the process proceeds to Step D839.
In step D839, it is determined whether the code is a decode code. If the code is a decode code (step D839; Y), the object moving image decoding process (step D864) is performed, then the process proceeds to step D844, and if it is not a decode code (step D839; N), go to Step D840.
In step D840, it is determined whether the code is a replacement code. If it is a replacement code (step D840; Y), an object replacement process (step D865) for replacing an object is performed, and then the process proceeds to step D844. D840; N), the process proceeds to step D841.
In step D841, it is determined whether the code is a behavior code. If the code is a behavior code (step D841; Y), the behavior index setting process (step D866) is performed, and then the process proceeds to step D844. N), go to Step D842.

When the process proceeds to step D842, it is determined whether the code is an end code. If the code is an end code (step D842; Y), the process proceeds to step D843.
When the process proceeds to step D843, the value of the command position k is updated by +1 (step D843), and the process proceeds to step D844.
In step D844, if the determination result in step D842 is Yes, the motion command execution process is terminated. If no, the process returns to step D824 to execute step D826 and subsequent steps for the updated command position k.

A specific example of the operation for one frame by the loop processing in steps D824 to D844 will be described with reference to FIG.
That is, first, since the command position k = 0 and the first line in which the additional 1 code is set is the designated line, the result of the step D826 is Yes, and the bitmap addition process in the step D851 is executed. Character No. on the line 2 character (symbol “2”) is registered as object index (display information area No.) 0. Here, since the normal fluctuation start is started, first, the image data of the symbol “2” as the reference symbol is registered as the next symbol in the upper stage. The first additional registration is advanced and the image data is automatically registered in the image index area of the display information area 0.
Next, k = 1, the second line in which the behavior code is set is the designated line, and object index (display information area No.) 0 and behavior index (behavior No.) 0 are set as parameters. Therefore, the result of step D841 is Yes, and the behavior index setting process of step D866 is executed, and the behavior index (behavior No.) is applied to the character corresponding to the object index (display information area No.) 0 (that is, symbol “2”). .) 0 is set. Since the symbol “2” which is the reference symbol is meaningless every time, it is necessary to replace the symbol data. Therefore, here, the subroutine specified by the behavior index (behavior No.) is executed, and the data of the symbol number corresponding to the value of the display symbol area (current symbol area) is used.

Next, k = 2, and the third line in which the additional 1 code is set is the designated line. Therefore, the result of step D826 is Yes, and the bitmap addition process in step D851 is executed, and the third line is present. Character No. One character (symbol “1”) is registered as an object index (display information area No.) 1. Here, the image data of the symbol “1” as the reference symbol is registered as the current symbol in the middle stage. The image data is automatically registered in the image index area of the display information area 1.
Next, k = 3, the fourth line in which the behavior code is set is the designated line, and object index (display information area No.) 1 and behavior index (behavior No.) 0 are set as parameters. Therefore, the result of step D841 is Yes, and the behavior index setting process of step D866 is executed, and the behavior index (behavior No.) is applied to the character corresponding to the object index (display information area No.) 1 (that is, the symbol “1”). .) 0 is set.

Next, k = 4, and the fifth line in which the additional 1 code is set is the designated line. Therefore, the result of step D826 is Yes, and the bitmap addition process in step D851 is executed, and the fifth line is present. Character No. Nine characters (symbol “9”) are registered as the object index (display information area No.) 2. Here, the image data of the symbol “9” as the reference symbol is registered as the previous symbol in the lower stage. The image data is automatically registered in the image index area of the display information area 2.
Next, k = 5, the sixth line in which the behavior code is set is the designated line, and object index (display information area No.) 2 and behavior index (behavior No.) 0 are set as parameters. Therefore, the result of step D841 is Yes, and the behavior index setting process of step D866 is executed, and the behavior index (behavior No.) is applied to the character corresponding to the object index (display information area No.) 2 (that is, the symbol “9”). .) 0 is set.

Next, k = 6, and the 7th line in which the movement 1 code is set is the designated line, and the object index (display information area No.) 0 or the like is set as a parameter. Therefore, “Yes” is set in step D832. In step D857, the one-point designated object moving process is executed, and the image of the object index (display information area No.) 0 according to the coordinate data and the display size data in the seventh row (that is, the symbol “ 2)) is set. Here, the designated coordinates and the designated size data are written in the area of the designated character (that is, the character corresponding to the display information area 0) by the movement 1 code.
Next, k = 7, and the 8th line in which the movement 1 code is set is the designated line, and the object index (display information area No.) 1 or the like is set as a parameter. Therefore, “Yes” is set in step D832. The one-point designated object moving process in step D857 is executed, and the image of the object index (display information area No.) 1 according to the coordinate data and display size data in the eighth row (that is, the symbol “ 1)) is set.

Next, k = 8, the 9th line in which the movement 1 code is set is the designated line, and the object index (display information area No.) 2 or the like is set as a parameter. Therefore, “Yes” is set in step D832. The one-point designated object moving process in step D857 is executed, and the image of the object index (display information area No.) 2 according to the coordinate data and display size data in the ninth line (that is, the symbol “ 9 ”) is set.
Next, k = 9, and the tenth line in which the end code is set is the designated line. Therefore, the result in Step D842 is Yes, and in Step D844, the loop process is terminated and the process returns.
In this way, the first frame shown by (a) in FIG. 136 is completed. Since the data up to the end code is a cluster of data drawn in one frame, each frame period (the above-described processing) is also applied to the second and subsequent frames shown in FIGS. 136 (b), (c), and (d). It is executed in the same manner every cycle (for example, 1/30 second). Unless there is an additional code or a deletion code, the character information of the previous frame is inherited, so only the coordinates and size data are specified in the second and subsequent frames.

[Bitmap addition processing]
Next, details of the bitmap addition process (step D851) in the motion command execution process described above will be described with reference to FIG. The bitmap addition process is a process for adding a still image character as a display object as described above.
When the bitmap addition process is started, first, the motion list table address (that is, the data for specifying the motion list table to be controlled this time and its row) is loaded from the motion list table area in the motion management area X. (Step D871), the process proceeds to Step D872.
Proceeding to Step D872, it is determined whether the value of the display number in the motion management area X is equal to or greater than the maximum number of display elements. When the addition process is finished and the number is less than the maximum number of display elements (step D872; N), the process proceeds to step D873. Here, the maximum number of display elements is the limit value of the number of displays (number of objects to be controlled) that can be handled in one motion in consideration of the hardware limit of the VDP 312 and the capacity of the VRAM 326 (such as an area for expanding a moving image). In this example, it is set to 18 (still image 16 + moving image 2). However, 18 is only an example, and the present invention is not limited to this.

  In step D873, the display information area address corresponding to the display number is set (step D873). For example, when an object is added for the first time, since the number of displays is 1, an address of the display information area corresponding to the number of displays 1 in the motion management area X is set. Specifically, for example, the display information area of the motion management area 5 (the motion management area for the left symbol) is 3 for the first next symbol, the second current symbol, and the third previous symbol. There are pieces. Now, for example, assuming that the motion management area X = 5 (left symbol), the target motion table is as shown in FIG. 136, and the command position k = 0, the command on the first line as the designated line is Since this is an additional 1 code, this processing is executed. In this case, among the three display information areas of the motion management area 5, the display information area for the first symbol corresponding to the display number 1 (display Since the data of the object (character No. 2 (symbol “2”)) specified by the parameter in the first line is set in the information area 0), in step D873, for the first next symbol. The address of the display information area is set. Similarly, if k = 2 (the designated line is the third line), the object specified by the parameter on the third line in the display information area (display information area 1) for the second current symbol corresponding to the display number 2 (Character No. 1 (symbol “1”)) is set, the address of the display information area for the second current symbol is set in step D873, and k = 4 (specified line). Is the third display information area (display information area 2) for the previous symbol corresponding to the display number 3 (character No. 9 (design “9”). ))) Data is set, the address of the display information area for the third previous symbol is set in step D873.

  The “display number” set (saved) in the motion management area basically represents the MAX number of objects to be displayed (that is, the number of all objects set as control targets). In such additional processing, the number of objects increases, so the “display number” fluctuates by +1 (for example, updated in step D881 to be described later), but when such additional processing is no longer performed. The display number indicates the MAX number of the displayed object.

Next, each data in one display information area (hereinafter referred to as “target display information area”) specified by the address set in step D873 is cleared to 0 (step D874). This is because once the values of the target display information area are all set to 0, initial values are set in necessary areas. Here, only one display information area corresponding to the number of displays is cleared to zero.
Next, an undefined value (for example, “−1”) is saved as the value of the behavior index (behavior No.) in the target display information area (step D875). This is for setting the state without behavior as an initial value. In this example, even when the value of the behavior index (behavior No.) is 0 (when the behavior index (behavior No.) 0 is specified as the parameters in the second, fourth, and sixth lines in FIG. 136). , There is a behavior (replacement of symbols, etc.).

Next, the still image information is saved as display type data in the target display information area (step D876). That is, here, information indicating that the object to be added is a still image is set.
Next, the motion table address (motion table name) is acquired from the designated row of the target motion list table (designated row of the motion list table designated by the address loaded in step D871) (step D877). This is the same processing as in step D823 described above.

Next, a still image index corresponding to the command position k is acquired (step D878). Here, the still image index is a registration number of a still image character registered in the character ROM (image ROM 325), and is a parameter for designating a row of the still image ROM member list table. Now, for example, if the motion management area X = 5 (left symbol), and the target motion table is as shown in FIG. The object with character no. Since it is 2 (design “2”), the value of the still image index designating the row corresponding to the design “2” is acquired in step D878.
Next, the value of the still image index acquired in step D878 is saved as an image index (step D879). The image index is information indicating a specific character (an image such as a still image or a moving image) as a display target, and is information used in step E51 or the like in an effect display editing process described later.

Next, the command position is updated to the next record (step D880). In other words, the command position value k is updated by one. This is because when the motion command execution process is executed in the next cycle, the next row of the motion table is controlled as the designated row.
Next, since the object is added by this processing, the value of the display number in the motion management area X is updated by +1 (step D881), and then the bitmap addition processing is terminated.

The contents of each parameter of the still image ROM member list table are as follows.
Image address offset: Indicates an offset value to the address where the character is stored in the character ROM.
Palette address offset: Indicates an offset value to an address where palette data used by the character is stored in the character ROM. Locations using different pallets will have different offset values.
-Image width and height; represents the size of the original image of the character. For example, the unit is pixel. There are various values for each character. Also, even in normal symbols, for example, the size of the person drawn on the symbol may be slightly different, and the size of the appearance may be different, but in order to make it easier to handle with internal control, the size of the character in the transparent part Adjust the height and set the characters to the same size if they are in the same category.
Width on VRAM; indicates the width when the character is expanded in VRAM. If lossy compression is used or the number of bits in the color palette is reduced, the size will be reduced.
Image compression type: Indicates the compression type of each character stored in the character ROM. Examples of the compression type include the following types 0 to 6. There may be other types.
0: No 32 bit full color image compression 1: No 8 bit full color image compression 2: No 4 bit full color image compression 3: Lossless compression 32 bit full color image 4: Lossless compression 8 bit full color image 5: Lossless compression 4 bit full color image 6: Lossless compression image / image The compressed size of image data (character data) after compression. It is used as a parameter or the like when data is transferred from the character ROM (image ROM 325) to the VRAM 326.
The category setting of the still image ROM member list table described above is an example, and other parameters may be set.

[Video addition processing]
Next, details of the moving image addition process (step D852) in the motion command execution process described above will be described with reference to FIG. As described above, the moving image addition processing is processing for adding a moving image character as a display object.
When the moving image addition process is started, first, similarly to step D871, the address of the motion list table is loaded (step D891), and the process proceeds to step D892.
When the process proceeds to step D892, it is determined whether the value of the display number in the motion management area X is equal to or greater than the maximum display element number as in step D872, and if it is equal to or greater than the maximum display element number (step D892; Y) When the addition process is finished and the number is less than the maximum number of display elements (step D892; N), the process proceeds to step D893.

When the process proceeds to step D893, the address of the display information area corresponding to the display number is set as in step D873 (step D893), and the address specified in step D893 is specified as in step D874. Each data in one display information area (target display information area) is cleared to 0 (step D894).
Next, similarly to step D875, an undefined value (for example, “−1”) is saved as the value of the behavior index (behavior No.) in the target display information area (step D895), and similarly to step D877. The address of the motion table is obtained from the designated row of the target motion list table (designated row of the motion list table designated by the address loaded in step D891) (step D896).

  Next, a moving image index corresponding to the command position k is acquired and prepared (step D897), and the process proceeds to step D898. Here, the moving image index is a registration number of a moving image character registered in the character ROM (image ROM 325), and is a parameter for designating a row of the moving image ROM member list table.

  When the processing proceeds to step D898, the encoding type (described later) data in the designated row of the moving image ROM member list table corresponding to the moving image index value acquired in step D897 is read, and the encoding of the moving image to be added based on this data is read. It is determined whether the type is an I picture moving image. If it is an I picture moving image (step D898; Y), the process proceeds to step D899, and if it is not an I picture moving image (step D898; N), the process proceeds to step D904. Note that the I picture means frame data of an image that can be decoded independently without performing inter-frame prediction, and the I picture moving picture means a moving picture composed of only I pictures.

When the processing proceeds to step D899, the initial value “−1” is set as the data of the I-picture frame count in the target display information area (frame count for a moving picture of only I pictures) (step D899). If “−1” is set as the initial value, the frame count for I picture starts from “0”.
Next, I picture moving image information is saved as display type data in the target display information area (step D900). That is, here, information indicating that the object to be added is an I picture moving image is set.
Next, the moving image index value acquired in step D897 is saved as an image index (step D901), and the process proceeds to step D902.

In step D904, a loop reproduction flag is set in order to instruct the VDP 312 to loop the moving image (step D904). It is also possible to set so as not to loop.
Next, a moving image decoding area securing process (step D905) for securing a storage area of a RAM (RAM in the CPU 311) for decoding moving image data is executed, and the process proceeds to step D906.
When the process proceeds to step D906, it is determined whether the area has been correctly allocated as a result of the video decoding area securing process. If the area has been correctly allocated (step D906; Y), the process proceeds to step D907, where In step D906; N), the moving image adding process is terminated. It is No when the area cannot be correctly secured due to capacity over.
In step D907, the normal moving image information is saved as display type data in the target display information area (step D907). That is, here, information indicating that the object to be added is a normal moving image (that is, not an I picture moving image) is set.
Next, the index value of the area allocated by the moving image decoding area securing process is saved as an image index (step D908), and the process proceeds to step D902.

  In step D902, the command position is updated to the next record (step D902) as in step D880, and the display number value in the motion management area X is updated by +1 as in step D881 (step D902). D903), the moving image adding process is terminated.

The contents of each parameter of the moving image ROM member list table are as follows.
Movie address offset: Indicates an offset value to the address where the movie is stored in the character ROM.
-Width and height of the movie: Represents the size of the original image of the movie. For example, the unit is pixel. As in the case of still images, the size of movies in the same category is adjusted with the transparent portion so as to be the same.
-Number of frames of moving image: Indicates how many continuous pictures the movie is composed of. In this example, since 1 second = 30 frames of control, a movie is created with that in mind. If the control is executed so as to be 60 frames per second, double speed reproduction is performed. The reverse is also true.

Α value setting: Information indicating whether the movie includes alpha channel information. 0 = no alpha, 1 = alpha present. If you have alpha, you can change the transparency of the movie. If not, it is only opaque.
-Encoding type: Indicates how the movie is structured. There are the following types 0-2.
0 = Configuration only with I picture 1 = Configuration including I picture and one reference P picture (P-picture is created by referring to one previous I-picture or P-picture)
2 = a configuration including two P reference pictures in addition to the above 1 (refer to two past I or P and two past I or P to create the P picture)
However, the encoding type is not limited to the above, and a configuration including a B picture, for example, may be used.
Note that the category setting of the moving image ROM member list table described above is an example, and other parameters may be set.

[One-point specified object movement processing]
Next, details of the one-point designated object moving process (step D857) in the motion command execution process described above will be described with reference to FIG.
When the one-point designated object moving process is started, the address of the motion list table is first loaded (step D911) as in step D871, and the designated row of the target motion list table (loaded in step D911) is loaded. The address of the motion table is acquired from the designated row of the motion list table designated by the address (step D912).

Next, an object index (display information area No.) corresponding to the command position k is acquired from the target motion table specified by the address acquired in step D912 (step D913). For example, if FIG. 136 is the target motion table and k = 6 (the designated line is the 7th line), this command is executed because the command is a movement 1 code, but in this case, the 7th line Since the object index (display information area No.) is 0, 0 is acquired as the object index (display information area No.) in step D913.
Next, the address of the display information area (display information area in the motion management area X) corresponding to the object index (display information area No.) acquired in step D913 is set (step D914). For example, when k = 6 in FIG. 136 (the designated row is the seventh row), the object index (display information area No.) 0 is the symbol “2” (next symbol) added in the first row. The address of the first display information area (display information area 0) corresponding to the symbol is set.
Next, X coordinate data corresponding to the command position k is obtained (step D915), and the upper left point of the display in the target display information area (the display information area whose address is set in step D914, hereinafter the same in this processing) is obtained. The X coordinate data acquired in step D915 is saved as the X coordinate and the X coordinate of the lower left display point (step D916).
Next, Y coordinate data corresponding to the command position k is acquired (step D917), and the Y coordinate data acquired in step D917 is used as the Y coordinate of the display upper left point and the Y coordinate of the display upper right point in the target display information area. Save (step D918).

Next, width data and height data corresponding to the command position k are acquired (step D919), and the width data acquired in step D919 is added to the X coordinate data acquired in step D915 (step D920). The addition result is saved as the X coordinate of the display upper right point in the target display information area (step D921).
Next, the height data acquired in step D919 is added to the Y coordinate data acquired in step D917 (step D922), and the addition result is saved as the Y coordinate of the display lower left point in the target display information area (step D923). ).
Next, as in step D880, the command position is updated to the next record (step D924), and the one-point designated object moving process is terminated.

  According to steps D915 to D923, the following operation is realized. For example, in FIG. 136, when k = 6 (the designated row is the seventh row), the X coordinate data is “0” and the Y coordinate data is “−493” (minus indicates a position outside the display screen 41a on the upper side of the display screen 41a. The image data width is “296” and the image data height is “518”. Therefore, “0” is acquired in step D915, “−493” is acquired in step D917, and “296” and “518” are acquired in step D919. The addition result in step D920 is “296” (= 0 + 296), and the addition result in step D922 is “25” (= −493 + 518). Accordingly, in step D916, “0” is saved as the X coordinate of the upper left display point and the lower left display point, and “−493” is saved as the Y coordinate of the upper left display point and the upper right display point in step D918. Then, "296" is saved as the X coordinate of the display upper right point, and "25" is saved as the Y coordinate of the display lower left point in step D923. Thereby, the display position of the target object (in this case, the next symbol “2”) is set as the coordinates of the three points (display upper left point, display lower left point, display upper right point) (see FIG. 137 (a)). . In the present embodiment, since the position of the upper left corner on the display screen 41a is the origin (X coordinate = 0, Y coordinate = 0), all the Y coordinates set for the target object are negative values. In some cases, the display position of the target object is set outside the display screen 41a on the upper side of the display screen 41a, and the image of the target object is not yet visible on the display screen 41a.

As described above, according to the one-point designation object moving process, although one point designation method is used, three points are designated as a result. Because the object (character) has a quadrangular shape, if there are the upper left reference point coordinates and the object height data and width data, the upper right point, lower left point as in steps D920 and D922 above. This is because the coordinates of the point are obtained. As described above, the display information area in the motion management area includes an area for entering the coordinate values of the three points thus determined (see FIG. 106 (c)). In steps D916, D918, D921, and D923, Registering to the area.
The three-point designated object movement process (step D858) in the motion command execution process described above will not be described in detail with reference to a flowchart, but this process is also performed in substantially the same manner as the one-point designated object movement process described above. Is called. However, in the case of specifying 3 points, each coordinate data is on the motion table, so the addition processing as in steps D920 and D922 described above is unnecessary, and all the coordinate data acquired from the motion table are all intact. The processing contents are simply saved in each area of the display information area.

[Effect type specification processing]
Next, details of the effect type designation process (step D859) in the motion command execution process described above will be described with reference to FIG.
When the effect type designation process is started, the motion list table address is first loaded (step D931) in the same manner as in step D871, and the designated row of the target motion list table (the address loaded in step D931). The address of the motion table is obtained from the designated row of the motion list table specified in (Step D932).

Next, an object index (display information area No.) corresponding to the command position k is acquired from the target motion table specified by the address acquired in step D932 (step D933), and the object index acquired in step D933 is obtained. An address of a display information area (display information area in the motion management area X) corresponding to (display information area No.) is set (step D934).
Next, the data of the effect type corresponding to the command position k is acquired (step D935), and the effect type in the target display information area (the display information area whose address is set in step D934, hereinafter the same in this processing) is obtained. The data acquired in step D935 is saved (step D936).
Next, the effect parameter, foreground color, and background color data in the target display information area are cleared (steps D937 to D939), and the command position is updated to the next record (step D880) (step D880). D940), the effect type designation process is terminated.

  In the effect type designation process described above, for example, the type of blending method for displaying a plurality of objects in a superimposed manner is set. That is, for example, the effect type (1) is a kind of effect that imparts transparency (transparency), and the effect that imparts transparency is the same as the image of the rear (back side) display layer that overlaps at the same display position. In other words, the blend type is set in this process.

[Effect parameter specification processing]
Next, details of the effect parameter designation process (step D860) in the motion command execution process described above will be described with reference to FIG. 121 (b).
When the effect parameter designation processing is started, first, the motion list table address is loaded (step D941) in the same manner as in step D871, and the designated row of the target motion list table (address loaded in step D941) is loaded. The address of the motion table is obtained from the designated row of the motion list table specified in (Step D942).

Next, an object index (display information area No.) corresponding to the command position k is acquired from the target motion table specified by the address acquired in step D942 (step D943), and the object index acquired in step D943. The address of the display information area (display information area in the motion management area X) corresponding to (display information area No.) is set (step D944).
Next, the effect parameter data corresponding to the command position k is acquired (step D945), and the effect parameter data in the target display information area (the display information area whose address is set in step D944, hereinafter the same in this processing) is obtained. The data acquired in step D945 is saved (step D946).

Here, the effect parameter indicates the ratio of the transparency (darkness) of the object when blending. Assuming that the value of the effect parameter is P, in this example, data obtained by converting the percentage of transparency into a numerator of “P / 255” is defined on the table. Specifically, for example, when 100% is normal display (no transparency), the parameter P for displaying at a density of about 10% is 25 (≈255 × 10/100). For example, when the value of the parameter P is 7, the transparency is about 2.7% (= 100 × 7/255), which is quite thin. However, when 100% display is performed, the effect type designation process and the effect parameter designation process are not executed.
Next, as in step D880, the command position is updated to the next record (step D947), and the effect parameter designation process is terminated.

[Object deletion processing]
Next, details of the object deletion process (step D862) in the motion command execution process described above will be described with reference to FIG. The object deletion process is a process for deleting an object that no longer appears.
When the object deletion process is started, first, the address of the motion list table is loaded (step D951) as in step D871, and the process proceeds to step D952.
In step D952, it is determined whether the value of the display number in the motion management area X is 0 or less. If it is 0 or less (step D952; Y), there is no display number (that is, deletion is performed). If there is no object, the object deletion process is terminated. If it is not 0 or less (step D952; N), the process proceeds to step D953.

When the process proceeds to step D953, the address of the motion table is obtained from the designated row of the target motion list table (the designated row of the motion list table designated by the address loaded in step D951) (step D953). The object index (display information area No.) corresponding to the command position k is acquired from the target motion table specified by the address acquired in step D953 (step D954).
Next, the address of the display information area (display information area in the motion management area X) corresponding to the object index (display information area No.) acquired in step D954 is set (step D955), and the process proceeds to step D956.

In step D956, it is determined whether the display type data in the motion management area X is normal moving picture information. If it is normal moving picture information (step D956; Y), a moving picture decoding area release process (step D957) is performed. After the execution, the process proceeds to Step D958, and if it is not normal moving picture information (Step D956; N), that is, if it is an I picture moving picture, the process proceeds to Step D958 without executing Step D957.
In step D958, the information in the display information area after the acquired object index (display information area No.) is shifted (moved) forward (step D958). That is, in the motion management area X, the data in the display information area after the address set in step D955 is shifted to the previous display information area by one. As a result, the data in the display information area at the address set in step D955 is deleted, and the object corresponding to the deleted data is deleted.
Next, as in step D880, the command position is updated to the next record (step D959). Since the object is deleted by this processing, the value of the display number in the motion management area X is updated by -1 (step D960). ), The object deletion process is terminated.

[Object change processing]
Next, details of the object change process (step D863) in the motion command execution process described above will be described with reference to FIG. The object change process is a process for replacing the displayed character.
When the object change process is started, first, the motion list table address is loaded (step D961) as in step D871, and the designated row of the target motion list table (the address loaded in step D961) is loaded. The motion table address is obtained from the designated motion list table) (step D962), and the object index corresponding to the command position k from the target motion table identified by the address obtained in step D962 (Display information area No.) is acquired (step D963).

Next, an address of a display information area (display information area in the motion management area X) corresponding to the object index (display information area No.) acquired in step D963 is set (step D964), and the address in the target motion table is set. The index (the still image index or the moving image index) of the changed character (character after the change) corresponding to the command position k is acquired (step D965), and the index value acquired in step D965 is saved as an image index (step D965). Step D966). Thereby, the object change which changes only an image (characters, such as a symbol and a character) is implement | achieved.
Next, as in step D880, the command position is updated to the next record (step D967), and the object change process is terminated.

[Object video decoding process]
Next, the details of the object moving image decoding process (step D864) in the motion command execution process described above will be described with reference to FIG.
When the object moving image decoding process is started, the motion list table address is first loaded (step D971) as in step D871, and the designated row of the target motion list table (the address loaded in step D971) is loaded. The address of the motion table is acquired from the designated row of the motion list table specified in (Step D972).

Next, an object index (display information area No.) corresponding to the command position k is acquired from the target motion table specified by the address acquired in step D972 (step D973), and the object index acquired in step D973 The address of the display information area (display information area in the motion management area X) corresponding to (display information area No.) is set (step D974), and the process proceeds to step D975.
In step D975, it is determined whether the display type data in the motion management area X is I picture moving image information. If it is I picture moving image information (step D975; Y), the flow proceeds to step D977, and the I picture moving image information is displayed. If it is not information (step D975; N), the process proceeds to step D976.
Proceeding to step D977, the number of I-picture frame counts in the target display information area (the display information area to which an address is set in step D974, hereinafter the same in this processing) The address of the area is set (step D977), and based on the address set in step D977, the I-picture frame count data in the target display information area is updated by 1 (step D978), and the process proceeds to step D979. .

Proceeding to step D979, it is determined whether the I-picture frame count updated at step D978 is equal to or greater than the number of moving image frames (the number of moving image frames corresponding to the image index data at this time). If it is (step D979; Y), the process proceeds to step D980. If it is not equal to or greater than the number of moving image frames (step D979; N), the process proceeds to step D983.
In step D980, since the moving image specified by the image index (in this case, the moving image index) has been displayed up to the last frame, the frame count for I picture in the target display information area in order to restart the moving image from the beginning. The numerical data is set to 0 (start value) (step D980), and the process proceeds to step D983.

In step D976, it is determined whether the display type data in the motion management area X is normal moving image information. If the display type data is normal moving image information (step D976; Y), the flow proceeds to step D981, and is not normal moving image information. At (Step D976; N), the object moving image decoding process is terminated because it is abnormal.
In step D981, the data registered as the image index at this time (in this case, the data of the moving image index) is loaded and prepared (step D981), and 1 of the moving image corresponding to the index loaded in step D981 is loaded. The moving image decoding process (step D982) for decoding (decoding) the frame is executed, and the process proceeds to step D983.
When the process proceeds to step D983, the command position is updated to the next record (step D983), and the object moving image decoding process is terminated, as in step D880.
In the case of an I picture moving image, since the picture of each frame exists independently, the number of frames may be managed. When an instruction is given later to the internal register of the VDP 312, the count (I-picture frame count) becomes important.

[Behavior index setting process]
Next, details of the behavior index setting process (step D866) in the above-described motion command execution process will be described with reference to FIG.
When the behavior index setting process is started, the address of the motion list table is first loaded (step D991) as in step D871, and the designated row of the target motion list table (the address loaded in step D991). The address of the motion table is obtained from the designated row of the motion list table specified in (Step D992). Note that the behavior table name corresponding to the address of the behavior table is also set in the designated row of the motion list table (however, it may be NULL).

Next, an object index (display information area No.) corresponding to the command position k is acquired from the target motion table specified by the address acquired in step D992 (step D993). For example, if FIG. 136 is a target motion table and k = 1 (the designated line is the second line), this command is executed because the command is a behavior code. In this case, an object with k = 1 is used. Since the index (display information area No.) is “0”, 0 is acquired as the object index (display information area No.) in step D993.
Next, the address of the display information area (display information area in the motion management area X) corresponding to the object index (display information area No.) acquired in step D993 is set (step D994). For example, when k = 1 in FIG. 136, the object index (display information area No.) 0 is the “next symbol” added at k = 0 (first line), and therefore corresponds to this “next symbol”. The address of the display information area is set.

Next, the behavior index (behavior No.) data corresponding to the command position k is acquired (step D995), and the target display information area (the display information area in which the address is set in step D994). ) Is saved as the behavior index (behavior No.) in step D995 (step D996). For example, when k = 1 in FIG. 136, since the behavior index (behavior No.) is “0”, this is acquired in step D995 and set in the target display information area in step D996.
Next, as in step D880, the command position is updated to the next record (step D997), and the behavior index setting process is terminated.

  The behavior table is a table (a data table registered in the PROM 321) that includes a line in which a processing address of a behavior (character replacement) is set, and specifies a specific line (specified line) of the lines. Is the behavior index (behavior No.). Therefore, when the values of the behavior table and the behavior index (behavior No.) are determined, the processing address of the behavior is determined, and the contents of the behavior are specified. This process performs a control process for designating the contents of such behavior. For example, the second line of k = 1 in FIG. 136 shows the behavior (character's Since the execution of replacement is commanded, the target information display area is set accordingly. The behavior specified by the behavior index (behavior No.) 0 is, for example, control in which a decorative symbol of a special figure is replaced with a predetermined symbol to be displayed from a basic symbol (reference symbol).

[Direction display edit processing]
Next, details of the effect display editing process (step D31) in the main process described above will be described with reference to FIGS. As described in the main process, this effect display editing process is a process for setting various commands for instructing the VDP 312 to draw contents on the display device 41 and parameters thereof. In this effect display editing process, commands are set in a table form, and the commands set in this way are sequentially transmitted to the VDP 312 in step D34 (instructing screen drawing) of the main process.
When the effect display editing process is started, the loop process A of steps E1 to E50 is repeatedly executed for the number of motion management areas, and then the effect display editing process is ended. The loop process A includes the loop process B of steps E6 to E48, and the loop process B includes the loop process C of steps E39 to E43.

In the loop process A, X = 0 is initially set, and the process is executed from step E2 for the motion management area X (that is, the motion management area 0 is initially), and when the process proceeds to step E49, the address area of the motion management area is updated (that is, X = X + 1), it is determined in the next step E50 whether the loop processing A has been completed for all motion management areas (in this example, X = 14), and the determination result in step E50 is Yes. When it becomes (that is, when the end condition of the loop process A is satisfied), the effect display edit process is ended. If No, the loop process A is repeated from step E2.
Hereinafter, the process after step E2 is demonstrated.
In step E2, it is determined whether the data in the address area of the motion management area X is NULL. If the data is NULL (step E2; Y), control is not required for the motion management area X, and the process proceeds to step E49. If not NULL (step E2; N), the process proceeds to step E3. If it is determined as NULL (Yes) in step E2 and the process proceeds to step E49, the following processes including the loop process B and the loop process C are naturally not executed for the motion management area X.

In step E3, the motion list table to be controlled this time is loaded, prepared (step E3), and all blend information areas are cleared (step E4). The blend information area is an area in the RAM (RAM in the CPU 311) that stores information on the parameters of the internal register of the VDP 312 for comparison between old and new. In other words, the VDP 312 has four types of internal register parameters that indicate the inter-pixel calculation fixed value during blending for effects. An area for storing the current setting information and the previous setting information is provided in the RAM in the CPU 311 for each of the four types of parameters, and this is a blend information area.
Next, inter-pixel calculation parameters (that is, four types of parameters set in the internal register of the VDP 312) are set (step E5), and the process proceeds to step E6.

  In step E6, the loop process B is started. In the loop process B, steps E6 to E48 are repeatedly executed while increasing the variable i from the initial value 0 by an increment 1 until reaching the closing price (closing price = number of displays−1), and then the process proceeds to step E49. That is, in step E6, immediately after the start of the loop, the variable i is set to 0 and the process proceeds to step E7. In step E48, if the variable i is less than the closing price, the process returns to step E6, and if the variable i is greater than or equal to the closing price, the process proceeds to step E49. Then, when returning to step E6, the value of the variable i is increased by 1, and the process proceeds to step E7. Note that the closing price value is a value obtained by subtracting 1 from the display number data set in the motion management area X. That is, in the loop process B, steps E6 to E48 are repeatedly executed for the number of displays, and then the process proceeds to step E49.

Hereinafter, the process after step E7 is demonstrated.
In step E7, the color parameter of the internal register of the VDP 312 is set corresponding to the α value (step E7), an α flag used for processing to be described later is set to α (step E8), and the motion management area X The address of the display information area (hereinafter referred to as “target display information area”) corresponding to the variable i is loaded (step E9), and the process proceeds to step E10.
Proceeding to step E10, the value of the behavior index (behavior No.) in the display information area of the address loaded at step E9 is read to determine whether any behavior index (behavior No.) data that is not NULL is set. If it is set (step E10; Y), the process corresponding to the behavior index (step E11) is executed and then the process proceeds to step E12. If it is not set (step E10; N), step E11 is executed. Without proceeding to step E12.

The process corresponding to the behavior index (behavior No.) executed in step E11 is the behavior specified by the behavior index (behavior No.) for the object (target object) corresponding to the target display information area. This is a process for executing (image data replacement), and is a process specified by the process address set in the row specified by the behavior index in the behavior table described above.
For example, when the target object is the current symbol of the left symbol, the process of the flowchart shown in FIG. 129 (a) (displayed left symbol conversion process) described later is executed in step E11. In the present application, specific examples of the processing executed in step E11 are also shown in FIGS. 129 (b), (c) and FIG. 130, and details thereof will be described later.
When step E11 is executed, the image index data is changed immediately before display, for example, the basic symbol is replaced with a predetermined symbol to be displayed, or the image color of the PB (push button) is changed from the basic color. It may be replaced with a predetermined color (for example, a specific color representing the big hit reliability) according to the gaming state. Since the display pattern of the character defined on the motion table is fixed, basically, unless the motion table is changed, it is not possible to cope with different stop symbols for each change or different notice characters due to distribution. . Therefore, in this example, a behavior can be flexibly handled by embedding a behavior in a necessary portion and performing a process of replacing the character.

  In step E12, the data of the effect type set in the target display information area is read, and it is determined whether this is the basic blend, the addition blend, or the subtraction blend (steps E12 to E14). If it corresponds to the blend type, the process proceeds to step E15, and if it does not correspond to any blend type, the process proceeds to step E21.

In step E15, the effect parameter value set in the target display information area is loaded and applied to the color parameter (step E15), and then the process proceeds to step E16.
Proceeding to step E16, it is determined from the data such as the display type set in the target display information area whether the rendering designation is normal movie non-transparent reproduction, and when normal movie non-transmission reproduction is performed (step E16; Y). ), The process proceeds to step E17, and if the normal moving image is not reproduced without transmission (step E16; N), the process proceeds to step E21.
Proceeding to step E17, it is determined whether or not the target moving image (the one determined to be playback without transmission of the normal moving image in step E16) is registered without α, and when registered without α (step E17; Y ), The α flag is set to no α (step E18), and the process proceeds to step E21. If not registered without α (step E17; N), the process proceeds to step E21 without executing step E18. .

In step E21, the data of the effect type set in the target display information area is read, and whether this is addition blend, subtraction blend, multiplication blend, screen blend, difference blend, or comparison (dark) blend. Each of the inversion blends is determined (steps E21 to E27), and if any of the blend types is satisfied, the corresponding process (corresponding process among steps E31 to E37) is executed and then the process proceeds to step E39. If it does not correspond to the blend type, the process proceeds to step E28.
Here, step E31 is a process executed in the case of addition blending (a process of setting an addition type drawing effect), and step E32 is a process executed in the case of subtraction blending (setting a subtraction type drawing effect). Step E33 is a process executed in the case of multiplication blending (a process for setting a multiplication type drawing effect), and step E34 is a process executed in the case of screen blending (a screen type drawing effect). Step E35 is a process executed in the case of difference blending (a process of setting a difference type drawing effect), and step E36 is a process executed in the case of comparison (dark) blending (dark process). Step E37 is a process for setting the type of drawing effect). A process that is executed if (processing for setting a drawing effect of inverting type).

In step E28, it is determined whether the α flag is set to α. If α is not present (step E23; Y), a drawing effect without α is set (step E29), and the flow proceeds to step E39. If α is not present (step E23; N), that is, if α is present, the α-type drawing effect is set (step E38), and the process proceeds to step E39.
In step E29 and steps E31 to E38, various parameters for blending (four types in this example) are set in the corresponding blend information area according to the setting of the effect type and the like of the target display information area. Yes.

In step E39, the loop process C is started. In the loop process C, steps E39 to E43 are repeatedly executed until the variable j corresponding to the above-described four types of blend information areas is increased from the initial value 0 by an increment 1 until the final value (closing value = 3) is reached. Proceed to E44.
That is, in step E39, immediately after the start of the loop, the variable j is set to 0 and the process proceeds to step E40.
In step E40, it is determined whether or not the blend information area corresponding to the variable j has been changed. If the blend information area has been changed (step E40; Y), the process proceeds to step E41. To step E43. Here, the determination in step E40 is performed by determining that the previous data and the current data in the corresponding blend information area have been changed if they do not match, and by determining that they have not been changed if they match.
In step E41, the inter-pixel calculation fixed value of the registration parameter corresponding to the variable j is set in the internal register of the VDP 312 (step E41), and the current blend information is set as the previous blend information (step E42). The process proceeds to step E43.

In step E43, if the variable j is less than the closing price, the process returns to step E39. If the variable j is the closing price, the loop process C is exited and the process proceeds to step E44. Then, when returning to step E39, the value of the variable j is increased by 1, and the process proceeds to step E40.
The reason why there are four ranges of the variable j is that, as described above, the VDP 312 has four types of internal register parameters that indicate the inter-pixel calculation fixed value at the time of blending. In addition, the area corresponding to each register (blend information area) is provided for the previous time and the current time, and the setting process of step E41 is performed only when the old and new data of this blend information area are compared and do not match. This is because the value is set in the register of the VDP 312 only when the value to be changed changes (to make the setting process to the VDP more efficient).

In step E44, the display type (display type) data set in the target display information area is read to determine whether this is a still image, a normal moving image, an I picture moving image, or a monochromatic square ( Steps E44 to E47), if corresponding to any display type excluding a single color square, the corresponding processing (corresponding processing among Steps E51 and E52, Steps E53 and E54, or Steps E55 to E57) is executed The process proceeds to E58, and if it is a monochromatic square, the process proceeds to Step E59, and if it does not correspond to any display type, the process proceeds to Step E48.
Here, steps E51 and E52 are executed in the case of a still image. In step E51, image index data is loaded. In step E52, attributes of still image data are set based on the loaded image index data. Execute the process. After step E52, a character drawing process (step E58) is executed based on the data loaded in step E51 and the setting in step E52.

Steps E53 and E54 are executed for a normal moving image. In step E53, image index data is loaded. In step E54, attributes of normal moving image data are set based on the loaded image index data. Execute the process. After step E54, the character drawing process (step E58) is executed based on the data loaded in step E53 and the setting in step E54.
Steps E55 to E57 are executed in the case of an I picture moving image. In step E55, image index data is loaded. In step E57, processing such as setting the attributes of I picture moving image data is executed based on the loaded data. After step E57, a character drawing process (step E58) is executed based on the data loaded in steps E55 and E56 and the setting in step E57.
Step E59 is executed in the case of a single-color quadrangle, and a process of drawing a rectangular image (single-color quadrangle image) in the virtual drawing space (frame buffer) 326a of the VRAM 326 (that is, the sprite of the rectangular image in the virtual drawing space 326a). Pasting process).
Note that after step E58 or step E59, the process proceeds to step E48.

When the process proceeds to step E48, it is determined whether or not the variable i of the loop process B has reached the final value (the display number −1). Returning to E6, the loop process B is repeated.
In step E49, the target motion management area number X is updated by +1 (step E49), and the process proceeds to step E50.
Proceeding to step E50, it is determined whether X has reached the final value of loop processing A (14 in this example). Returning to step E1, loop processing A is repeated from step E2.

  In the step of setting the attributes of steps E52, E54, and E57, the process of transferring the character data (still image data or moving image data) from the character ROM (image ROM 325) to the VRAM 326 is also performed at the same time. However, this data transfer is not performed if the same VRAM 326 already exists. In the case of a single-color square, the character ROM data is not used, so this data transfer is not necessary. Here, the attribute is basic information of the character, and includes, for example, an α mode, a color mode (how many colors are displayed), a character size, a color palette designation, and others.

[Character drawing process]
Next, details of the character drawing process (step E58) in the effect display editing process described above will be described with reference to FIG.
When the character drawing process is started, first, in step E61, the X coordinate of the display upper left point and the X coordinate of the lower left display point are displayed from the target display information area (display information area corresponding to the variable i) in the motion management area X. Is read out, it is determined whether or not they match. If they match (step E61; Y), the process proceeds to step E62. If they do not match (step E61; N), the process proceeds to step E77.
In step E62, the Y coordinate of the display upper left point and the Y coordinate of the display upper right point are read from the target display information area in the motion management area X, and it is determined whether or not they match (step E62). Y), the process proceeds to step E63. If they do not match (step E62; N), the process proceeds to step E77.
If the image is a quadrilateral (rectangular) image, the determination result in steps E61 and E62 is Yes and the process proceeds to step E63. Then, the process proceeds to Step E77.
In step E77, a triangle character drawing process (step E77) is executed, and the character drawing process is terminated.

In step E63, the X coordinate data of the display upper left point is read from the target display information area in the motion management area X, and is set as the upper left base point X coordinate of the character (step E63). Data of the Y coordinate of the display upper left point is read from the target display information area, and this is set as the upper left base point Y coordinate of the character (step E64).
Next, the X coordinate of the display upper right point and the X coordinate of the display upper left point are read from the target display information area in the motion management area X, and the difference between these is obtained (= X coordinate of the display upper right point−X coordinate of the display upper left point). Is set as the character width data (step E65), the Y coordinate of the lower left display point and the Y coordinate of the upper left display point are read out from the target display information area in the motion management area X, and the difference between these (= display lower left) The Y coordinate of the point-the Y coordinate of the upper left point of display) is set as the character height data (step E66).
Next, no horizontal flip and no vertical flip are set (step E67), and the process proceeds to step E68. Here, horizontal flip means image inversion in the horizontal direction (X coordinate direction), and vertical flip means image inversion in the vertical direction (Y coordinate direction).

In step E68, it is determined whether the width data set in step E65 is less than 0 (that is, a negative value). If the width data is less than 0 (step E68; Y), the process proceeds to step E69 because there is a horizontal flip. If it is not less than 0 (step E68; N), since there is no horizontal flip, the process proceeds to step E72.
In step E69, the X coordinate data of the upper left display point is read from the target display information area in the motion management area X, and the addition result obtained by adding the width data (negative value) set in step E65 to the upper left corner of the character. The base X coordinate is updated and set (step E69), the width data (minus value) set in step E65 is converted to a positive number, and this is updated and set as new width data (step E70).
Next, processing for setting horizontal flip (setting of step E67) is performed (step E71), and the process proceeds to step E72.

Proceeding to step E72, it is determined whether the height data set in step E66 is less than 0 (that is, a negative value). If it is less than 0 (step E72; Y), there is a vertical flip, so the process proceeds to step E73. If it is not less than 0 (step E72; N), since there is no vertical flip, the process proceeds to step E76.
In step E73, the Y coordinate data of the display upper left point is read from the target display information area in the motion management area X, and the addition result obtained by adding the height data (minus value) set in step E66 to this is added. The upper left base point Y coordinate is updated and set (step E73), the height data (minus value) set in step E66 is converted to a positive number, and this is updated and set as new height data (step E74).
Next, a process of setting the presence of vertical flip (changing the setting of step E67) is performed (step E75), and the process proceeds to step E76.
In step E76, based on the settings made so far (steps E63 to E75), an image of a predetermined character corresponding to the image index data loaded in any of the steps E51, E53, E55 (designation) A process of drawing an image) in the virtual drawing space (frame buffer) 326a of the VRAM 326 (that is, a process of pasting a sprite of a predetermined character image (designated image) into the virtual drawing space 326a) is executed (step E76). The character drawing process is terminated.

[Display left symbol conversion process]
Next, details of the display left symbol conversion process executed in step E11 in the above-described effect display editing process will be described with reference to FIG.
When the display left symbol conversion process is started, first, the image index data (data before replacement by the behavior) is loaded (step E81), and the index (symbol number) data of the current symbol (left) to be displayed is loaded. (For example, the data set in step D727 or D747 described above) is loaded (step E82). In the case of this example, since there are nine types of symbols, the index (symbol number) data of the symbols (decorative symbols of special symbols) is any numerical value from 0 to 8.

  Next, the index data of the current symbol (left) loaded in step E82 is added to the index data of the current symbol (left) set in the image index loaded in step E81, and the addition result is used as an update index. After setting (step E83), the process proceeds to step E84. For example, if the value of the image index before replacement (conversion) loaded in step E81 is 0 and the index data of the current symbol (left) to be replaced loaded in step E82 is 6, In step E83, 6 (= 0 + 6) is set as the update index value.

When the process proceeds to step E84, it is determined whether or not the update index data set at step E83 exceeds the symbol upper limit (8 in this example), and if it exceeds (step E84; Y), the process proceeds to step E85. If not exceeded (step E84; N), the process proceeds to step E86.
Proceeding to step E85, the value obtained by adding 1 to the symbol upper limit (9 in this example) is subtracted from the update index value, and this subtraction result is set as the new update index value (step E85). Proceed to step E86. According to these steps E84 and E85, when the value of the update index exceeds the symbol upper limit, the value of the update index is updated to a value that makes a round.

In step E86, the left symbol index conversion table is set (step E86), and the flow advances to step E87. The left symbol index conversion table is a table in which a row is designated by the update index, and the value of the image symbol of the left symbol to be displayed in the designated row is set.
Proceeding to step E87, a new image index value is acquired from the row specified by the update index in the left symbol index conversion table set in step E86 (step E87), and the value acquired in step E87 is newly set. As the value of the correct image index, it is saved in the image index area (area where the image index is saved) (step E88), and then the display left symbol conversion process is terminated.
In addition, although the display left symbol conversion process was demonstrated above, the same process also exists about a right symbol and a middle symbol (details are abbreviate | omitted).

[PB color conversion processing]
Next, details of the PB color conversion process executed in step E11 in the effect display editing process described above will be described with reference to FIG.
When the PB color conversion process is started, first, the distribution result is loaded from the PB color area of the effect distribution result area (step E91), and the PB index conversion table is set (step E92). The PB index conversion table is a table in which a row is designated by the distribution result saved in the PB color area, and an image index value of a PB (push button) image to be displayed in the designated row is set. .

Next, a new image index value (PB index value) is acquired from the row specified by the distribution result in the PB index conversion table set in step E92 (step E93), and the value acquired in step E93 is obtained. Then, a new image index value is saved in the image index area (step E94), and the PB color conversion process is terminated.
As the motion control data (especially image index data) for the PB notice (push button notice), only the button character that is the default color is registered, so the color is changed from the default color for notification of the big hit reliability. When changing, this process (PB color conversion process) is executed. Not only this notice but also a process of converting (replacing) an appearing warrior character by behavior.

[Reach character conversion processing]
Next, details of the reach character conversion process executed in step E11 in the effect display editing process described above will be described with reference to FIG.
When the reach character conversion process is started, first, a distribution result is loaded from the reach character area of the effect distribution result area (step E101), and a reach character index conversion table is set (step E102). The reach character index conversion table is a table in which a row is designated by the sorting result saved in the reach character area, and an image index value of a reach character image to be displayed on the designated row is set.
Next, a new image index value (reach character index value) is acquired from the row specified by the above-described distribution result in the reach character index conversion table set in step E102 (step E103), and the process proceeds to step E104.

In step E104, it is determined whether or not the reach character index acquired in step E103 is a value indicating “no character”. If the reach character index is a value indicating “no character” (step E104; Y), the character of the reach character is determined. The size of (image) is set to 0 (step E105), the reach character conversion process is terminated, and if it is not a value indicating “no character” (step E104; N), the reach is not executed without executing step E105. The character conversion process ends.
In this example, reach characters such as “reach!”, “Fighter”, and “win” that are displayed at the moment when the reach occurs also display default characters in motion control data (especially image index data). It has a configuration, and if necessary, the character change or the color difference of each character is replaced by the behavior as needed.
In the reach character conversion processing described above, for example, when the reliability of the jackpot notice changes with low reliability, the character size is set to 0 in step E105, so that the reach character exists for control but is actually visible. There is no control. However, the method of not displaying may not be limited to this configuration, for example, a configuration that does not display reach characters.

[Bushou 1 serif conversion process]
Next, details of the warrior 1-line conversion process executed in step E11 in the above-described effect display editing process will be described with reference to FIG.
When the warrior 1 line conversion process is started, first, the line SU distribution result is loaded from the line SU area of the effect distribution result area (step E111), and the process proceeds to step E112.
Proceeding to step E112, it is determined whether or not the line SU is SU1 system (not SU2 system or SU3 system) based on the result of the line SU distribution loaded at step E111. Proceeding to step E117, if not the SU1 system (step E112; N), proceeding to step E113.
When the process proceeds to step E117, the distribution result is loaded from the line 1 area of the effect distribution result area (step E117), the military commander 1 SU1 line index conversion table is set (step E118), and the process proceeds to step E115. The warrior 1 SU1 serif index conversion table is a table in which a row is specified by the sorting result saved in the serif 1 area, and the image index value of the serif image to be displayed in the specified row is set.

Proceeding to step E113, it is determined whether or not the line SU is a SU2 system (SU2 system has only one appearance character) based on the result of the line SU distribution loaded in step E111. Proceeding to step E119, if not the SU2 system (step E113; N), proceeding to step E114.
When the process proceeds to step E119, the distribution result is loaded from the line 2 area of the effect distribution result area (step E119), the military commander 1SU2 line index conversion table is set (step E120), and the process proceeds to step E115. The warrior 1 SU2 serif index conversion table is a table in which a row is designated by the sorting result saved in the serif 2 area, and the image index value of the serif image to be displayed in the designated row is set.

Proceeding to step E114, it is determined whether or not the line SU is SU3 type (SU3 type has two characters appearing) based on the result of the line SU distribution loaded at step E111. If it is SU3 type (step E114; Y) The process proceeds to step E121, and if it is not the SU3 system (step E114; N), the process proceeds to step E115.
When the process proceeds to step E121, the distribution result is loaded from the line 3 area of the effect distribution result area (step E121), the military commander 1 SU3 line index conversion table is set (step E122), and the process proceeds to step E115. The warrior 1 SU3 serif index conversion table is a table in which a row is designated by the sorting result saved in the serif 3 area, and the image index value of the serif image to be displayed in the designated row is set.

Proceeding to step E115, a new image index is calculated from the line specified by the loaded distribution result in the serif index conversion table set in the immediately preceding step (any one of step E118, step E120, step E122, etc.). A value (line index value) is acquired (step E115), and the value acquired in step E115 is saved in the image index area (bitmap index area) as a new image index value (step E116). The 1-line conversion process ends.
Note that there may be a type other than the SU1 system, the SU2 system, and the SU3 system as the type of the line SU, and in that case, a processing step corresponding to a portion omitted by the wavy line in FIG. 130 is provided.

[VDP interrupt processing]
Next, the VDP interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG. As described above, in the production control device 300, the CPU 311 receives the interrupt signals INT0 to INT0 from the VDP 312 which is an interrupt factor. n power interrupts (hereinafter referred to as “VDP interrupts”) can be accepted. In this example, the VDP interrupt includes a V blank start interrupt, a V line start interrupt, a drawing command INT interrupt, a drawing error interrupt, a drawing end interrupt, a data transfer 1 completion interrupt, a data transfer 2 completion interrupt, and a data transfer 3 completion. Interrupt, checksum end interrupt, compression decompression event interrupt, serial command interrupt.
This process (VDP interrupt process) is started when at least one of the plurality of VDP interrupts occurs. When at least one of the plurality of VDP interrupts is generated, the ON data of the interrupt flag indicating the occurrence of the interrupt is set in the register of the CPU 311.

When the VDP interrupt processing is started, first, the status of each interrupt factor (information on whether or not the plurality of VDP interrupts are generated) is obtained by reading the interrupt signals INT0-INT (step E131). This status information is set in the interrupt register of the VDP 312.
Next, since the status is read in step E131, each interrupt factor is cleared (step E132). That is, the setting is made to return all the status data (interrupt register data of the VDP 312) to the values without interrupts. The CPU 311 and the VDP 312 are capable of bidirectional communication, and the setting in step E132 is performed by this communication.
Next, based on the status acquired in step E131, processing for each interrupt (processing such as determining the presence or absence of an interrupt and setting a flag) is executed (steps E133 to E143), and the interrupt flag is set. It is cleared (step E144) and the VDP interrupt process is terminated. That is, the off data of the interrupt flag is set in the register of the CPU 311.

Although the production control device 300 has a function of monitoring various interrupts of the VDP 312 as described above, not all of them are used.
The conditions for generating each interrupt are as follows.
• V blank start interrupt; an interrupt is generated at the start of the V blank period.
V line start interrupt: An interrupt occurs at the start of the display line specified by the user. • Drawing command INT interrupt: Occurs when drawing command analysis is interrupted.
・ Drawing error interrupt: Occurs when the drawing circuit becomes abnormal.
・ Drawing end interrupt; occurs when drawing is finished.
-Data transfer 1 to 3 completion interrupt; Occurs when data transfer between each memory is completed.
Data transfer can be performed between the image ROM 325, the CPU 311 (data in the RAM in the CPU 311 or data in the control ROM 321), the VRAM 326, and the like. Since the three sets of data transfer 1 to 3 are independent of each other, they can be transferred at the same time. However, priority is set in the order of 1>2> 3, and waiting occurs when the transfer destination is the same. .
Checksum end interrupt: There is a function for automatically calculating the checksum of the image ROM 325 (in response to an instruction from the CPU 311), and occurs at the end of the calculation.
Regarding the checksum calculation, it is possible to specify parameters such as an address to start calculation, an end address, and a unit to be calculated (for example, 32-bit unit / 64-bit unit).
-Compression / decompression event interrupt: Occurs when decoding of one frame of a moving image is completed or when a decoding error occurs.
Serial command interruption; for example, when a sound command LSI 314 connected to the serial interface is instructed by a serial command and the execution is completed.

[V blank start interrupt processing]
Next, the V blank start interrupt process (step E133) in the VDP interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG. Note that a V blank start interrupt (also referred to as “V blank interrupt” or “V sync interrupt”) occurs every time scanning of the entire screen for drawing is completed by the VDP 312. The generation period of this V blank start interrupt is, for example, 1/60 seconds as described above.
When the V blank start interrupt process is started, it is first determined in step E151 whether or not a V blank start interrupt has occurred based on the status acquired in step E131 described above (step E151; Y) Proceed to step E152, and if it has not occurred (step E151; N), the V blank start interrupt process is terminated.
When the processing proceeds to step E152, the value of the V blank count is updated by +1 (step E152), and then the processing proceeds to step E153. The V blank count is a counter for executing the same drawing a predetermined number of times (in this example, twice). In principle, the frame switching timing described in step D33 in the main process is the time when the V blank count reaches a predetermined value (2 in this example). In other words, in this example, the value of the V blank count is normal except for the moment when the V blank count instantaneously becomes 2 (the moment until it becomes 2 after the update of step E152 and is cleared to 0 at step E155). If there is, 0⇔1 is repeated alternately, and as a result, the frame is switched every two V blank interrupts. Since the V blank interrupt is generated every 1/60 seconds, the frame is switched every 1/30 seconds (33.333 ms).

  In step E153, it is determined whether or not the compression / decompression execution result is an error. If the error is an error (step E153; Y), the V blank start interrupt process is terminated. Proceed to E154. Here, the execution result of the compression / decompression means a result of whether or not the process of expanding the compressed movie data is successful. The determination value indicating the compression / decompression execution result is set in the compression / decompression event interrupt process in step E142, and the determination in step E153 is executed based on the determination value. If the movie development fails due to the processing time being over due to the presence of step E153, frame switching is not executed even if the V blank count reaches a predetermined value, and the same drawing is repeated.

  Proceeding to step E154, it is determined whether or not the value of the V blank count is greater than or equal to a predetermined value (in this example, whether it is greater than 1). If it is greater than or equal to the predetermined value (step E154; Y), that is, greater than 1. In step E155, if it is not equal to or greater than the predetermined value (step E154; N), that is, if it is not greater than 1, the V blank start interrupt process is terminated. This step E154 substantially determines whether or not the frame switching timing has come. In this example, if the same drawing is executed twice as described above, this frame switching timing is in principle (that is, if the execution result of compression / decompression is not an error). However, it is not limited to twice, and may be three or more times.

Steps E155 to E158 are processing for frame switching for switching the drawing contents. In step E155, the above-mentioned V blank count is cleared to 0 (step E155), the ON data of the frame switching flag is set (step E156), the frame buffer is switched (step E157), and the corresponding frame buffer ( Display of the frame buffer after switching) (display data generation) is permitted (step E158), and the V blank start interrupt process is terminated.
Here, the frame switching flag set in step E156 is used in step D33 in the main process described above. That is, in step D33 described above, it is determined that it is the frame switching timing when the ON data of the frame switching flag is set. In step E158, the display circuit of the VDP 312 is allowed to access the VRAM 326 and generate display data.

The frame buffer corresponds to the virtual drawing space 326a described in steps E59 and E76, and is a buffer configured by the VRAM 326. In this example, the frame buffer has a frame buffer number of 0 and a frame buffer number of 1 in this example. In this example, if the display frame buffer is number 0, for example, the number 1 frame buffer is used for drawing work and is alternately used for display. In step E157, a process of switching the display frame buffer to the next one (in this example, a process of switching from 0 to 1 or from 1 to 0) is executed. In step E158, display data generation in the display frame buffer switched in step E157 is permitted.
According to the V blank start interrupt processing described above, unless the compression / decompression error occurs, the same drawing is repeated a predetermined number of times, and frame switching is performed when the V blank start interrupt occurs a predetermined number of times. In the case of this example, when the same drawing is repeated twice and the V blank start interrupt is generated twice, the frame switching is performed, and the cycle of the frame switching timing is 2 of the cycle of the V blank start interrupt (for example, 1/60 seconds). Double (for example, 1/30 seconds≈33.33 ms).

[Specific example of effect control data table and effect display]
Next, a specific example of the data table used in the control of the effect control device 300 described above and a specific example of the effect display performed on the display screen 41a of the display device 41 by the same control will be described with reference to FIGS. 133 to 138. To do.

  Here, in the present embodiment, “scenario” means a flow of production (which determines which motion is executed when, etc.). That is, through all the effects as a pachinko machine, the display elements (background, left pattern,...) That constitute the display screen 41a are picked up, and the contents of the effects to be performed in the scene are managed. is there. As scenarios, those exemplified in this embodiment (background scenario, left symbol scenario, right symbol scenario, middle symbol scenario, notice one scenario, notice two scenario, hold scenario, and fourth scenario) In addition to the symbol scenario, an error message scenario (because the error message is displayed regardless of the game effect), a hall / player setting screen scenario, and the like are also conceivable.

  Further, “motion” means an effect operation that is made into a block (parts) (specifically, in the case of this embodiment, a display effect on the display device 41 is made into a block). That is, in order to draw on the display screen 41a, detailed control of the character image, the number of characters, coordinates, size, transparency,... Is performed. If the reference data (reference data) is defined, adjust the reference data by behavior processing (replace the character image in an effect that follows the same trajectory, adjust the size according to the character image, adjust the transparency Yes, etc.) is possible. If all character images and coordinate data are defined for all effects that are a little different, the amount of data will be enormous. It is only necessary to make (operation parts), saving data capacity and improving development efficiency.

  In addition, “behavior” is a definition of how a specific element operates under certain conditions in the field of programming or the like, but it is used for a display element on the display screen 41a. When a person performs a specific operation, it is used to describe a process such as executing a corresponding program.

FIG. 133 is a diagram illustrating an example of an address area and a scenario management area of the scenario management area.
In this embodiment, as shown on the left side of FIG. 133, the address area of the scenario management area is composed of eight areas for storing the address for scenario layer 0 to the address for scenario layer 7, respectively. The effect control device 300 executes a scenario setting process (see FIG. 103) at each process, checks all address areas in order from the top, and controls the addresses of the RAMs that control the corresponding address areas (in the case of the present embodiment, the scenario). Processing is performed for the scenario layer in which the start address of the management area is stored. In the address area corresponding to the scenario layer that is not drawn, not the RAM address but NULL is stored.

Each scenario management area has four areas for storing a scenario timer value, a PB timer value, a PB detection flag value, and a scenario data table address, as shown on the right side of FIG. It is a structure containing. For example, in the scenario management area 0 (see the top row on the right side of FIG. 133), which motion table is used as a background is managed. Until the scenario timer expires, drawing based on the designated motion is performed, and when the time expires, the process indicated by the next scenario is executed.
A scenario management area is provided for each scenario setting at the specified address, and no special settings are made for areas that are not required for scenario setting in each area of the scenario management area. Stores the address of the currently controlled data table (scenario table).

Since the PB (push button) is basically used only in the scenario for the advance notice, the “PB timer area” and the “PB detection flag area” in each area of the scenario management area are used for the advance notice. Although it is an area that is not required for scenario settings other than the scenario, in order to make the process common by sharing the configuration of the scenario management area, the scenario management area for notice (in this embodiment, scenario management area 4 and scenario management area) The scenario management areas other than 5) are also provided with a “PB timer area” and a “PB detection flag area”.
In this embodiment, two scenario layers for the notice 1 (scenario layer 4) and the scenario layer for the notice 2 (scenario layer 5) are secured as the notice scenario layers. An independent notice effect can be made available.

FIG. 134 is a diagram illustrating an example of the address area of the motion management area.
In the present embodiment, as shown on the left side of FIG. 134, the address area of the motion management area is composed of 14 areas for storing the motion 0 address to the motion 13 address, respectively.

Here, the address area for storing the address for motion 1 (notice A) to the address for motion 4 (notice D), that is, the address area of the motion management area 1 to the motion management area 4 is a decorative pattern (left symbol, right symbol, When a notice character is desired to appear behind the middle symbol), it is used by the notice 1 scenario or the notice 2 scenario. In the case of this embodiment, since four areas of the motion management area 1 to the motion management area 4 are secured, up to four motions can be executed simultaneously on the back side of the decorative design, that is, up to four different movements at the same time. It is possible to make a notice character appear. Thereby, it is possible to configure a notice that a plurality of notice characters move independently by lottery (specifically, for example, one notice is constituted by a combination of a plurality of notice characters). it can. If there is only a fixed movement from the beginning to the end, even if a plurality of notice characters appear, it can be controlled with one motion (that is, one motion management area).
In addition, the address area for storing the address for motion 8 (notice E) and the address for motion 9 (notice F), that is, the address area of the motion management area 8 and the motion management area 9, also depends on the scenario for notice 1 or the scenario for notice 2 used.
Further, the address area for storing the motion 11 (notice G) address and the motion 12 (notice H) address, that is, the address area of the motion management area 11 and the motion management area 12, is also determined by the notice 1 scenario or the notice 2 scenario. used.

As shown in FIG. 106 (b), each motion management area includes four areas for storing the display number, frame number, command position, and motion list table address, and display information for the number of displays. A structure including a region.
Further, as shown in FIG. 106C, each display information area includes a display type, an effect type, an effect parameter, an X coordinate of the display upper left point, a Y coordinate of the upper left display point, an X coordinate of the upper right display point, and an upper right display. Includes an area for storing the Y coordinate of the point, the X coordinate of the lower left display point, the Y coordinate of the lower left display point, the image index, background color, foreground color, frame count during IPicture-only video, and behavior index data It is out.

In the present embodiment, the left symbol motion management area (in the case of this embodiment, motion management), since the method of scrolling the three symbols (the next symbol, the current symbol, and the previous symbol) as the left symbol follows a fixed rule. In the area 5), as shown in the uppermost stage on the right side of FIG. 134, the left symbol display information area 0 (next symbol), the left symbol display information area 1 (current symbol), and the left symbol display information area 2 (previous symbol) These three display information areas are provided, and three characters of the next symbol, the current symbol, and the previous symbol are controlled in one motion. Changing the design of the next symbol, the current symbol, and the previous symbol is done by behavior. The same applies to the right symbol and the middle symbol.
Further, in the fourth symbol motion management area (in the case of this embodiment, the motion management area 13), as shown in the bottom row on the right side of FIG. 134, the fourth symbol display information area 0 to the fourth symbol display information area. 3 four display information areas are provided.
In addition, a background motion management area (in this embodiment, motion management area 0) and a warning motion management area (in this embodiment, motion management area 1, motion management area 2, motion management area 3, motion management area) 4, motion management area 8, motion management area 9, motion management area 11, and motion management area 12) have display information areas corresponding to the number of displays, and display information specified in the motion table from among the display information areas. A region is selected.

  FIG. 135 is an example of a scenario table used at the start of a customer waiting effect. The scenario table used at the start of the customer waiting effect defines the flow of the effect as the customer waiting effect. In the case of this embodiment, since the customer waiting effect (customer waiting demonstration effect) is only displayed in a fixed flow, as described above, the customer waiting effect is the scenario layer 0 (mainly for display control of the background image). Only the scenario layer to be used) is used, and the motion related to the symbols etc. is also set in the scenario layer 0. Therefore, the scenario table used at the start of the customer waiting effect is composed of only the background scenario table.

In the scenario table shown in FIG. 135, motion deletion codes (M1DEL, M2DEL, M3DEL, M4DEL, M8DEL) are provided as operation codes on the first line (// delete (castle gate)) to the eighth line (// delete (reach character)). , M9DEL, M11DEL, M12DEL) and 0 as the operand. As a result, the motions that need to be erased when executing the customer waiting effect are collectively deleted. Specifically, motion 1 (notice A), motion 2 (notice B), motion 3 (notice C), motion 4 ( In order to stop drawing of the advance notice D), motion 8 (notice E), motion 9 (notice F), motion 11 (notice G), and motion 12 (notice H), the motion management areas 1, 2, 3, 4 , 8, 9, 11, and 12 are deleted (initialized). The 0 in the right column operand is unused data.
In the 9th line (// 4th symbol), a motion registration code (M13SET) is set as an operation code, and 21 is set as an operand. Thus, the motion table number 21 of the fourth symbol stop display is registered in the motion management area 13 in order to stop and display the motion 13 (fourth symbol) at a predetermined position.

In the scenario table shown in FIG. 135, the next tenth line (// continuation of BG) is a line for starting the symbol display of the customer waiting effect (customer waiting A).
Specifically, on the 10th line (// BG continuation), the motion continuation code (M0KPX) is set as the operation code, and 12 is set as the operand. Thereby, in order to display the motion 0 (background) based on the motion table number 12, if the motion table number 12 of the background display is registered in the motion management area 0, the state is continued and registered. If not, the motion display area 12 is registered in the motion management area 0.
In the 11th line (// display (hold)), a motion registration code (M10SET) is set as an operation code, and -1 is set as an operand. Thereby, the motion 10 (hold) is displayed in a mode based on the RAM area containing the number of holds. When the number of holds is 0, only the hold display frame is displayed.

In the 12th line (// stop symbol set), a stop symbol set code (LZSTOP) is set as an operation code, and 0 is set as an operand. Thus, the value of the special symbol stop symbol area (left) is written to the display symbol region (current symbol region (left)) in order to rewrite the current symbol of the left symbol to the stop symbol of the left symbol.
In the 13th line (// the customer waiting left symbol), a motion registration code (M5SET) is set as an operation code, and 76 is set as an operand. Thereby, the left symbol for waiting for the customer is displayed as motion 5 (left symbol). When waiting for a customer, only the middle symbol (current symbol) is displayed, unlike during a change.
The same applies to the right symbol and the middle symbol (see the 14th to 17th lines).
In the 18th line (// wait), a constant wait code (CWAIT) is set as an operation code, and 3600 is set as an operand. This waits on this line for 3600 frames (ie, 120 seconds = 3600 × (1/30 seconds)).

In the scenario table shown in FIG. 135, the next 19th line (// deletion) is a line for starting movie display (customer waiting B) of the customer waiting effect.
Specifically, the motion deletion code (M5DEL, M6DEL, M7DEL, M10DEL) is set as the operation code in the 19th line (// delete) to the 22nd line (// delete (hold)), and 0 is set as the operand. Has been. Thereby, the control of the motion management areas 5, 6, 7, and 10 is stopped in order to stop the drawing of the motion 5 (left symbol), the motion 6 (right symbol), the motion 7 (middle symbol), and the motion 10 (hold). Delete (initialize) data.
In the 23rd line (// BG), a motion registration code (M0SET) is set as an operation code, and 13 is set as an operand. Thus, in order to display motion 0 (background) based on the motion table number 13 (specifically, to display a customer waiting movie), the motion table number 13 for background display is registered in the motion management area 0.
In the 24th line (// wait), a constant wait code (CWAIT) is set as an operation code, and 900 is set as an operand. This waits on this line for 900 frames (ie, 30 seconds = 900 × (1/30 seconds)).

In the 25th line (// repeat), a repeat code (SQRTN) is set as an operation code, and 15 is set as an operand. Thereby, in order to start again the symbol display of the customer waiting effect (customer waiting A), it returns to the data on the 15th line (that is, the 10th line (// BG continued)).
Note that data in a range enclosed by a square in the scenario table shown in FIG. 135 is processed within one frame.

136 is an example of a motion table at the start of the left symbol normal fluctuation, and FIG. 137 is an example of a display result by the motion table shown in FIG.
As shown in FIG. 137, the upper left corner of the display screen 41a is the origin (X coordinate = 0, Y coordinate = 0), and the vertical direction is the Y axis direction, so the lower left corner of the display screen 41a is the X coordinate. = 0 and Y coordinate = 767. Further, since the left and right direction in the display screen 41a is the X-axis direction, the upper right corner of the display screen 41a is X coordinate = 1023 and Y coordinate = 0, and the lower right corner of the display screen 41a is X coordinate = 1023 and Y Coordinates = 767. In addition, the specific numerical value of such a coordinate is only an example.

  FIG. 137 (a) corresponds to (a) of the motion table shown in FIG. 136, that is, the first frame (1/30 second). Symbol “2” is the next symbol (object index (display information area No.) 0), symbol “1” is the current symbol (object index (display information area No.) 1), and symbol “9” is the previous symbol. This is a symbol (object index (display information area No.) 2), and these objects are additionally registered in the first to sixth lines of the motion table shown in FIG. Also, the display positions and sizes of these objects are set in the seventh to ninth lines of the motion table shown in FIG. 136, whereby the display shown in FIG. 137 (a) is performed. However, in practice, a part of the next symbol and a part of the previous symbol are at positions outside the display screen 41a, so that the whole of the next symbol and the previous symbol cannot be seen.

  FIG. 137 (b) corresponds to (b) of the motion table shown in FIG. 136, that is, the second one frame (1/30 second). The setting of the design and behavior of each object remains the first frame (a), and the display position and size of these objects are set in the 11th to 13th lines of the motion table shown in FIG. Thereby, the display shown in FIG. 137 (b) is performed. In this case, the Y coordinate values are all changed by -8 from the first frame (a) (for example, the current symbol of the object index (display information area No.) 1 has a Y coordinate value of 7 to -1 As a result, each symbol is slightly moved upward on the display screen 41a. This is a part of the movement of once hopping in the operation of scrolling (fluctuating) downward after each symbol once hops (slightly rises) at the start of fluctuation. In the second one frame (b), the next symbol is entirely located outside the display screen 41a. In this way, character information outside the display screen 41a is also arranged in the VRAM 326.

  137 (c) corresponds to (c) of the motion table shown in FIG. 136, that is, the third one frame (1/30 second), and FIG. 137 (d) shows the motion shown in FIG. This corresponds to (d) of the table, that is, the fourth one frame (1/30 second). Since the third and fourth frames (c) and (d) are also part of the hopping motion, the Y coordinate is sequentially changed by -8.

In the present embodiment, the concept of scenario data (scenario layer) is used in the drawing control of the display screen 41 a displayed on the display device 41. Scenarios are divided into a plurality of display layers (scenario layers) such as background scenarios, left symbol scenarios, right symbol scenarios, etc. This is a method for generating a picture of one screen by setting, individually controlling them as a scenario, and synthesizing all the scenarios.
Multiple display layers (scenario layers) are categorized separately for each display element, for example, background, left design, right design,... Is set as a table of operation scenarios for effect display.

In the present embodiment, the display elements (display components) used in the production of the display device 41 are “background”, “left symbol”, “right symbol”, “middle symbol”, “notice 1 character”, “notice” It is divided into eight elements: “2 characters”, “hold display (decoration special figure start memory display)”, and “fourth symbol”.
And the scenario table in display effects, such as a change effect, is produced for every display element. In the present embodiment, the scenario tables are “background control scenario table (background scenario table)”, “left symbol control scenario table”, “right symbol control scenario table”, “middle symbol control scenario table”, “ There are 8 elements: “Scenario table for notice 1 character control”, “Scenario table for notice 2 character control”, “Scenario table for hold display control”, and “Scenario table for 4th symbol control (4th symbol scenario table)”. It is created separately.
Each display element is constituted by a display layer, and a plurality of display layers are sequentially stacked from the back side of the screen toward the front side of the screen to create one display screen 41a. In the case of the present embodiment, the display layer includes “background layer”, “left symbol layer”, “right symbol layer”, “middle symbol layer”, “notice A layer” to “notice H layer”, “hold layer”. , And 14 types of “4th symbol layer”.

In the effect display editing process (see FIGS. 125 to 127), the effect control device 300 repeatedly executes the loop process A of steps E <b> 1 to E <b> 50 in the order of the number of motion management areas by the number of motion management areas. In the loop process A, if the address area data of the motion management area X is not NULL, step E59 is executed to draw a rectangular image in the virtual drawing space 326a of the VRAM 326 (ie, a sprite of the rectangular image). Or a predetermined step (step E76) in the triangle character drawing process (step E77) of the character drawing process (step E58) or step E76 in the character drawing process (step E58). Step) is executed to perform the process of drawing the designated image in the virtual drawing space 326a of the VRAM 326 (that is, the process of pasting the sprite of the designated image into the virtual drawing space 326a).
As shown in FIG. 138, the virtual drawing space 326a is divided into 14 drawing areas, ie, a motion management area 0 drawing area to a motion management area 13 drawing area. Each drawing area is arranged in the order of the number of the corresponding motion management area, and a display layer on which a rectangular image or a designated image is drawn is stored in each drawing area.

Specifically, in the effect display editing process, the effect control device 300 first executes the loop processing A of steps E1 to E50 for the motion management area 0, and the data in the address area of the motion management area 0 is not NULL. In addition, the “background layer” on which the rectangular image or the designated image is drawn is stored in the drawing area for the motion management area 0 in the virtual drawing space 326a.
Next, the loop processing A of steps E1 to E50 for the motion management area 1 is executed, and when the data in the address area of the motion management area 1 is not NULL, the “notice A layer” in which the rectangular image or the designated image is drawn is displayed. And stored in the drawing area for the motion management area 1 in the virtual drawing space 326a.
Next, the loop processing A of steps E1 to E50 for the motion management area 2 is executed, and when the address area data of the motion management area 2 is not NULL, the “notice B layer” in which the rectangular image or the designated image is drawn is displayed. And stored in the drawing area for the motion management area 2 in the virtual drawing space 326a.

  Hereinafter, similarly, the loop process A for the motion management area 3 is executed to store the “notice C layer” in the drawing area for the motion management area 3 in the virtual drawing space 326a, and then the loop process for the motion management area 4 A is executed to store the “notice D layer” in the drawing area for the motion management area 4 in the virtual drawing space 326a, and then the loop processing A for the motion management area 5 is executed to virtually draw the “left symbol layer”. Store in the drawing area for the motion management area 5 in the space 326a, and then execute the loop process A for the motion management area 6 to store the "right symbol layer" in the drawing area for the motion management area 6 in the virtual drawing space 326a. Then, the loop processing A for the motion management area 7 is executed, and the “medium symbol layer” is set in the virtual drawing space 326a. Is stored in the drawing area for the motion management area 7, loop processing A is executed for the motion management area 8, and the "notice E layer" is stored in the drawing area for the motion management area 8 in the virtual drawing space 326a. Loop processing A for the motion management area 9 is executed to store “notice F layer” in the drawing area for the motion management area 9 in the virtual drawing space 326a, and then loop processing A for the motion management area 10 is executed. The “holding layer” is stored in the drawing area for the motion management area 10 in the virtual drawing space 326a, and then the loop process A for the motion management area 11 is executed to set the “notice G layer” as the motion management area in the virtual drawing space 326a. 11 is stored in the drawing area for 11 and then loop processing A for the motion management area 12 is executed. The “notice H layer” is stored in the drawing area for the motion management area 12 in the virtual drawing space 326a, and then the loop processing A for the motion management area 13 is executed to set the “fourth symbol layer” as the motion in the virtual drawing space 326a. It memorize | stores in the drawing area | region for the management area | region 13, and complete | finishes an effect display edit process.

Here, when the data in the address area of the motion management area X is NULL, the display layer is not stored in the corresponding drawing area, and the drawing area remains blank. Specifically, for example, if the data in the address area of the motion management area 11 is NULL, the display layer (in the case of this embodiment, “notice” in the drawing area for the motion management area 11 in the virtual drawing space 326a of the VRAM 326). Since the G layer ") is not stored, the drawing area for the motion management area 11 remains blank. It is possible to sequentially store the display layers so that non-blank drawing areas are continuous (that is, store the display layers in front of each other), but in this case, one display screen 41a is displayed. Since the drawing area for storing display layers other than the background layer changes according to the number of display layers to be configured, each time these display layers are stored in the virtual drawing space 326a, the drawing area for storing the display layer (that is, It is necessary to search for the foremost (first) drawing area among the blank drawing areas, and the processing becomes complicated accordingly. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, each display layer is configured to be stored in a predetermined drawing area regardless of the effect contents (that is, the number of display layers constituting one display screen 41a). Each time the display layer is stored in the virtual drawing space 326a, it is not necessary to search for the drawing area for storing the display layer, so that the processing load can be reduced.
As shown in FIG. 138, the display layers stored in each drawing area are sequentially stacked in the order of drawing area from the back side (lower layer side) to the front side (upper layer side) of the screen. 41a is created. Specifically, for example, when all of the 14 drawing areas are filled, in the present embodiment, “14” is stored in the drawing area for the motion management area 1 located at the head of the 14 drawing areas. “Background layer” is arranged on the farthest screen (lowermost layer), and “4th symbol layer” stored in the drawing area for motion management area 13 located at the end of the 14 drawing areas is the most screen. It is arranged on the front side (uppermost layer).

  In such production control, when the production screen (display screen 41a) is generated, it is set in advance as a table divided into a plurality of display layers (scenario layers) corresponding to the display elements of the production screen, and then these are set. By individually controlling as a scenario and synthesizing all scenarios in the form of a display layer, a picture of one screen is generated and displayed as an effect screen of the display device 41 to display a variation effect or the like of a symbol (special figure) Production is performed.

As described above, in the present embodiment, in the rendering control of the display device 41 controlled by the effect control device 300, the background, the left symbol, the right symbol,... Then, a table of operation scenarios for effect display by switching a plurality of motion information simultaneously or continuously is set for each display element, a scenario table is selected according to the effect command from the game control device 100, and combined In this way, the drawing content (for each frame) of one screen is created.
Therefore, according to the above configuration, it is only necessary to define a minimum operation pattern (parts of operation), and it is possible to obtain an effect that data capacity can be saved and development efficiency can be improved.

The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
A game control device for controlling the progress of the game;
In a gaming machine provided with an effect control device capable of performing an effect by controlling an effect means including a display means based on a command from the game control device,
The production control device
Scenario data setting means for setting scenario data for each display element in the drawing control of the screen displayed on the display means;
In accordance with a command from the game control device, screen creation means for selecting and synthesizing preset scenario data for each display element and creating one screen drawing content;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:
Here, the PROM (control ROM) 321 constitutes scenario data setting means, and the VDP 312 constitutes screen creation means.

Second Embodiment
Next, the gaming machine 10 of the second embodiment will be described.
Note that the gaming machine 10 of the second embodiment is different from the gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment in that the decorative symbols are divided into a numeric part and a character part and drawn on different display layers. Therefore, hereinafter, parts having the same configurations as those of the first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, description thereof is omitted, and different parts are mainly described.

The decorative design Z is composed of only the numerical part Z1, or is composed of a numerical part Z1 and a character part Z2 as shown in FIG. 139 (a), for example.
In the case of the first embodiment, for example, as shown in FIG. 139 (b), the decorative design Z is drawn on the same display layer (decorative design layer) in which the numeric part Z1 and the character part Z2 are shown. Then, for example, as shown in FIG. 139 (c), the decorative design Z is divided into the number part Z1 and the character part Z2, and the number part Z1 is drawn on the number part layer, and the character part Z2 is drawn on the character part layer. To do. When one display screen 41a is created by sequentially stacking a plurality of display layers, the character part layer is arranged on the back side of the screen with respect to the number part layer.

In the present application, when the left symbol layer, the right symbol layer, and the middle symbol layer are not distinguished, they are simply referred to as a decorative symbol layer.
In addition, the left symbol number layer layer in which the left symbol number portion Z1 is drawn, the right symbol number portion layer in which the right symbol number portion Z1 is drawn, and the middle symbol number portion in which the middle symbol number portion Z1 is drawn. When the layers are not distinguished from each other, they are simply referred to as number part layers.
The left symbol character portion layer in which the left symbol character portion Z2 is drawn, the right symbol character portion layer in which the right symbol character portion Z2 is drawn, and the middle symbol character portion in which the middle symbol character portion Z2 is drawn. When the layer is not distinguished, it is simply referred to as a character part layer.

In the first embodiment, when the notice character Y is caused to appear, the notice character Y is, for example, as shown in FIG. 140 (a), a notice layer (first embodiment) arranged on the near side of the screen from the decorative symbol layer. In the case of the notice layer (any one of the notice E layer to the notice H layer) or, for example, as shown in FIG. In the case of the first embodiment, drawing is performed on any one of the notice A layer to the notice D layer. When the notice character Y is drawn on the notice layer arranged on the near side of the screen from the decorative symbol layer, the decorative symbol Z is hidden by the notice character Y as shown in FIG. If the notice character Y is drawn on the notice layer arranged on the back side of the screen with respect to the decorative symbol layer, the predictive character Y is hidden by the decorative symbol Z as shown in FIG.
If the decorative symbol Z, in particular, the numerical part Z1 is hidden by the notice character Y, the state of the decorative special symbol fluctuation display game (whether it is changing, whether the reach is occurring, etc.) and the stop result mode It becomes difficult to understand what the stop symbol is (such as “stop” includes “temporary stop”).
Further, if the notice character Y is hidden by the decorative design Z, the effect of the notice character Y is reduced.

  On the other hand, in the case of this embodiment, the decorative design Z is divided into a numeric part Z1 and a character part Z2, and the numeric part Z1 is drawn on the numeric part layer, and the character part Z2 is displayed on the screen more than the numeric part layer. Since the drawing is performed on the character part layer arranged on the back side, for example, as shown in FIG. 141 (a), a notice layer can be arranged between the number part layer and the character part layer. And when the notice character Y appears, by drawing the notice character Y in the notice layer arranged between the number part layer and the character part layer, for example, as shown in FIG. Z1 is not hidden by the notice character Y, and the portion where the notice character Y is hidden (the portion in a non-display state) can be minimized. Therefore, since the number part Z1 is not hidden by the notice character Y, even if the notice character Y appears, it is not difficult to grasp the state of the special display variation display game, the stop result mode, and the like. In addition, in the decorative design Z, only the numeral part Z1 hides the notice character Y, and the character part Z2 does not hide the notice character Y, so that the part where the notice character Y is hidden can be minimized. Further, it is possible to suppress a reduction in the effect of the notice character Y.

FIG. 142 is a diagram illustrating an example of an address area of the motion management area in the second embodiment.
In the first embodiment, the following 14 motions can be executed (see FIG. 134). -Motion 0 = Background motion-Motion 1 = Notice A motion-Motion 2 = Notice B motion-Motion 3 = Notice C motion-Motion 4 = Notice D motion-Motion 5 = Left symbol motion-Motion 6 = Right symbol motion-Motion 7 = Medium symbol motion / motion 8 = Notice E-motion / motion 9 = Notice F-motion / motion 10 = Pending display motion / motion 11 = Notice G-motion / motion 12 = Notice H-motion / motion 13 = 4th symbol motion

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the following 14 motions can be executed (see FIG. 142).
-Motion 0 = Background motion-Motion 1 = Background notice motion-Motion 2 = Middle symbol character part motion-Motion 3 = Left symbol character part motion-Motion 4 = Right symbol character part motion-Motion 5 = Inter-symbol notice motion 6 = middle symbol number motion / motion 7 = left symbol number portion motion / motion 8 = right symbol number portion motion / motion 9 = front notice 1 motion / motion 10 = front notice 2 motion / motion 11 = hold display motion / motion 12 = Front notice motion / motion 13 = 4th pattern motion

In the present embodiment, as in the first embodiment, there are eight scenario layers, and the scenario layer numbers are 0 to 7. Of these eight scenario layers, scenario layer 0 is basically for background, scenario layer 1 is for left symbol, scenario layer 2 is for right symbol, and scenario layer 3 is for middle symbol. Scenario layer 4 is for notice 1, scenario layer 5 is for notice 2, scenario layer 6 is for holding, and scenario layer 7 is for the 4th symbol.
In the first embodiment and the second embodiment, the number of scenarios is not limited to eight. The number of scenarios increases / decreases depending on the model specifications. In the first and second embodiments, the number of scenarios is limited to as few as possible.
In the first embodiment and the second embodiment, the number of motions is not limited to 14. The number of motions increases / decreases depending on the model specifications, and the first and second embodiments are described as limited to a small number as possible.

In the first embodiment, the order of the scenario and the motion is the same, but the order may be different as in the second embodiment. That is, in the first embodiment, the scenario and motion are in the order of “left symbol” → “right symbol” → “middle symbol”. For example, the scenario is “left symbol” → “right symbol” → “middle symbol”. As the order, the motion may be in the order of “middle symbol” → “left symbol” → “right symbol” or “right symbol” → “middle symbol” → “left symbol”.
Further, in the second embodiment, the order of the scenario and the motion is different, but the order may be the same as in the first embodiment. That is, in the second embodiment, the scenario is in the order of “left symbol” → “right symbol” → “middle symbol”, and the motion is in the order of “middle symbol” → “left symbol” → “right symbol”. For example, the scenario and motion may be in the order of “left symbol” → “right symbol” → “middle symbol”.

In this embodiment, the address area for storing the address for motion 2 (medium symbol character part) and the address for motion 6 (medium symbol number part), that is, the address areas of the motion management area 2 and the motion management area 6 are the same. Are used at the same time by the scenario (medium symbol scenario). However, when the middle symbol is composed only of the numeric part Z1, only the motion management area 6 is used.
In addition, the address area for storing the address for motion 3 (left symbol character part) and the address for motion 7 (left symbol number part), that is, the address area of the motion management area 3 and the motion management area 7, is the same scenario (left symbol Used simultaneously). However, when the left symbol is composed only of the numeric part Z1, only the motion management area 7 is used.
The address area for storing the address for motion 4 (right symbol character part) and the address for motion 8 (right symbol number part), that is, the address area of the motion management area 4 and the motion management area 8, is the same scenario (right symbol). Used simultaneously). However, when the right symbol is composed only of the numeric part Z1, only the motion management area 8 is used.

  Also, an address for motion 1 (background notice), an address for motion 5 (announcement between symbols), an address for motion 9 (front notice 1), an address for motion 10 (front notice 2), and a motion 12 (front notice) Address areas for storing addresses, that is, the address areas of the motion management area 1, the motion management area 5, the motion management area 9, the motion management area 10, and the motion management area 12, are used by the notice 1 scenario or the notice 2 scenario. The All of the motion management areas 1, 5, 9, 10, and 12 may be used, or only a part may be used. The scenario for the notice 1 and the scenario for the notice 2 are included in the contents of the notice effect. The motion management area to be used is selected accordingly. In the present embodiment, as in the first embodiment, the same motion management area is not used at the same time in the scenario for notice 1 and the scenario for notice 2.

In the case of the present embodiment, the display layer includes “background layer”, “background notice layer”, “middle symbol character portion layer”, “left symbol character portion layer”, “right symbol character portion layer”, “design” “Advance notice layer”, “Middle design numeric part layer”, “Left design numeric part layer”, “Right design numeric part layer”, “Front notice 1 layer”, “Front notice 2 layer”, “Pending layer”, “ There are 14 types of “front notice layer” and “4th symbol layer”.
In this embodiment, as in the first embodiment, the virtual drawing space 326a is divided into 14 drawing areas, ie, a motion management area 0 drawing area to a motion management area 13 drawing area, as shown in FIG. ing. Each drawing area is arranged in the order of the number of the corresponding motion management area, and a display layer on which a rectangular image or a designated image is drawn is stored in each drawing area.

Then, in the effect display editing process, the effect control device 300 first executes the loop process A of steps E1 to E50 for the motion management area 0, and if the data in the address area of the motion management area 0 is not NULL, the rectangle is displayed. The “background layer” on which the image or the designated image is drawn is stored in the motion management area 0 drawing area of the virtual drawing space 326 a of the VRAM 326.
Next, the loop processing A of steps E1 to E50 for the motion management area 1 is executed, and when the data in the address area of the motion management area 1 is not NULL, the “background notice layer” in which the rectangular image or the designated image is drawn is displayed. And stored in the drawing area for the motion management area 1 in the virtual drawing space 326a.
Next, the loop processing A of steps E1 to E50 for the motion management area 2 is executed, and when the address area data of the motion management area 2 is not NULL, a rectangular image or a designated image is drawn “middle symbol character portion layer Is stored in the drawing area for the motion management area 2 in the virtual drawing space 326a.

  Thereafter, similarly, the loop processing A for the motion management area 3 is executed to store the “left symbol character part layer” in the drawing area for the motion management area 3 in the virtual drawing space 326a. The loop process A is executed to store the “right symbol character part layer” in the drawing area for the motion management area 4 in the virtual drawing space 326a, and then the loop process A for the motion management area 5 is executed to execute the “inter-symbol notice” “Layer” is stored in the drawing area for the motion management area 5 in the virtual drawing space 326a, and then the loop processing A for the motion management area 6 is executed to set the “middle symbol number part layer” as the motion management area in the virtual drawing space 326a. 6 is stored in the drawing area, and then the loop processing A is executed for the motion management area 7 " The “number part layer” is stored in the drawing area for the motion management area 7 in the virtual drawing space 326a, and then the loop processing A for the motion management area 8 is executed to set the “right figure number part layer” as the motion in the virtual drawing space 326a. Store in the drawing area for the management area 8, and then execute the loop process A for the motion management area 9 to store “front notice 1 layer” in the drawing area for the motion management area 9 in the virtual drawing space 326a. Loop processing A for the motion management area 10 is executed to store “front notice 2 layer” in the drawing area for the motion management area 10 in the virtual drawing space 326a, and then loop processing A for the motion management area 11 is executed. The “holding layer” is stored in the drawing area for the motion management area 11 in the virtual drawing space 326a, and then The loop processing A for the motion management area 12 is executed to store the “frontmost notice layer” in the drawing area for the motion management area 12 in the virtual drawing space 326a, and then the loop processing A for the motion management area 13 is executed. Then, the “fourth symbol layer” is stored in the drawing area for the motion management area 13 in the virtual drawing space 326a, and the effect display editing process is ended.

  In this embodiment, as in the first embodiment, when the data in the address area of the motion management area X is NULL, the display layer is not stored in the corresponding drawing area, so the drawing area remains blank. It becomes. Specifically, for example, when the data in the address area of the motion management area 11 is NULL, the display layer (in the case of this embodiment, “pending” in the drawing area for the motion management area 11 in the virtual drawing space 326a of the VRAM 326). Since the layer “) is not stored, the drawing area for the motion management area 11 is left blank. It is possible to sequentially store the display layers so that non-blank drawing areas are continuous (that is, store the display layers in front of each other), but in this case, one display screen 41a is displayed. Since the drawing area for storing display layers other than the background layer changes according to the number of display layers to be configured, each time these display layers are stored in the virtual drawing space 326a, the drawing area for storing the display layer (that is, It is necessary to search for the foremost (first) drawing area among the blank drawing areas, and the processing becomes complicated accordingly. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, each display layer is configured to be stored in a predetermined drawing area regardless of the effect contents (that is, the number of display layers constituting one display screen 41a). Each time the display layer is stored in the virtual drawing space 326a, it is not necessary to search for the drawing area for storing the display layer, so that the processing load can be reduced.

For example, as shown in FIG. 144 (b), the display layers stored in each drawing area are sequentially stacked from the back side of the screen (lower layer side) toward the front side of the screen (upper layer side) in the order of drawing area. For example, as shown in FIG. 144 (a), one display screen 41a is created. Specifically, for example, when all of the 14 drawing areas are filled, in the present embodiment, “14” is stored in the drawing area for the motion management area 1 located at the head of the 14 drawing areas. “Background layer” is arranged on the farthest screen (lowermost layer), and “4th symbol layer” stored in the drawing area for motion management area 13 located at the end of the 14 drawing areas is the most screen. It is arranged on the front side (uppermost layer).
Specifically, as shown in FIG. 144 (b), the display screen 41a shown in FIG. 144 (a) has a “background layer”, “character part layer”, “numerical part layer”, and “front notice 1 layer”. And a “holding layer” and a “fourth symbol layer” are sequentially displayed on one display screen. That is, the “background layer”, “character part layer”, “number part layer”, “front notice 1 layer”, “holding layer”, and “fourth symbol layer” are stored in the virtual drawing space 326a of the VRAM 326. This is one display screen created without storing the “background notice layer”, “inter-symbol notice layer”, “front notice 2 layer”, and “front notice layer”.

The notice character Y drawn in the inter-symbol notice layer arranged between the number part layer and the character part layer is not limited to the character image as shown in FIG. 141 (b), and can be changed as appropriate. 145 (b) may be an effect image, or a character image as shown in FIGS. 146 (a) to (c), FIGS. 147 (a), (b), and 148 (b). May be.
FIG. 145 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen 41a created by stacking a plurality of display layers including a numeric part layer and an inter-symbol notice layer, and in the case of an effect that the notice character Y appears momentarily. It is a figure which shows the display screen displayed on. In the example shown in FIG. 145, the notice character Y is an effect image imitating lightning.

FIG. 146 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen 41a created by stacking a plurality of display layers including a numeric part layer and an inter-symbol notice layer, and the notice character Y scrolls with the decorative design Z. It is a figure which shows the display screen displayed in the case of production. In the example shown in FIG. 146, the notice character Y is a character image imitating a sword. According to the example shown in FIG. 146, for example, the degree of expectation can be suggested by the type of weapon (notice character Y) that scrolls along with the decorative symbol Z.
FIG. 147 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen 41a created by laminating a plurality of display layers including a numeric part layer and an inter-symbol notice layer, and in the event that the notice character Y is visible and hidden. It is a figure which shows the display screen displayed. In the example shown in FIG. 147, the notice character Y is a character image simulating the sun. In the example shown in FIG. 147, by changing the position of the notice character Y (relative position with respect to the number part Z1), specifically, the notice character Y is displayed on the inter-symbol notice layer, and all the figures of the left figure are displayed. By moving between the position that overlaps the part Z1 in the front and back and the position that at least a part does not overlap the number part Z1 of the left symbol and the front and rear, an effect that the notice character Y is visible and hidden is realized. In FIG. 147 (a), the notice character Y is entirely in a position overlapping the front and back of the number part Z1 of the left design, and is entirely hidden behind the number part Z1 (that is, the whole is not visible). Is not displayed), and is indicated by a broken line.

FIG. 148 is also a diagram showing an example of a display screen 41a created by laminating a plurality of display layers including a numeric part layer and an inter-symbol notice layer, and in the event that the notice character Y is visible and hidden. It is a figure which shows the display screen displayed. In the example shown in FIG. 148, the notice character Y is a character image imitating a smile. In the example shown in FIG. 148, the notice character Y is visible and hidden by changing the size of the number portion Z1. According to the example shown in FIG. 148, for example, the degree of expectation can be suggested by the expression of the notice character Y.
Specifically, in the example shown in FIG. 148, although not shown in the figure, a movie effect is executed by an image (moving image) drawn on the background notice layer in the central portion of the display screen 41a. The decorative design Z is composed only of the numeral part Z1, and is variably displayed in such a manner that the disk rotates about the axis along the radial direction. Therefore, not only the front surface (the surface on which the numbers are written) but also the back surface of the disk can be visually recognized. Also, in the inter-symbol notice layer, as the notice character Y, the left character, which overlaps with the numerical part Z1 of the left design, and the middle character, which overlaps with the numerical part Z1 of the medium symbol, and the right character The number part Z1 and the right character that overlaps the front and rear are drawn.
For example, as shown in FIG. 148 (a), when a reach occurs, the reach formation symbol (in this example, the left symbol and the right symbol) has a period and a size during which the back of the symbol can be visually recognized by rotating the axis. It is changed from the normal size to 0 and apparently disappears. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 148 (b), the notice character Y (left character and right character in this example) corresponding to the reach formation symbol can be visually recognized during the period when the back side of the reach formation symbol is visible. Thus, as shown in FIGS. 148 (a) and 148 (c), the notice character Y corresponding to the reach formation symbol cannot be visually recognized during the period when the back surface of the reach formation symbol is not visible.

Here, in the present embodiment, when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the numeric part Z1 can be displayed with priority over the notice character Y by using the inter-symbol notice layer. That is, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, a notice character Y having a lower display priority than the number part Z1 and a higher display priority than the character part Z2 is caused to appear by using the inter-symbol notice layer. Is possible.
Specifically, in the present embodiment, when the predetermined condition is any one of a reach effect, a PB effect such as a promotion effect, a temporary stop display effect, and a time reduction (general power support) effect. It is assumed that it is established.

That is, in this embodiment, the address area for storing the address for motion 5 (symbol notice), that is, the address area of the motion management area 5, is used by the notice 1 scenario or the notice 2 scenario at the time of “reach effect”. The By configuring in this way, the numerical part Z1 is displayed with priority over the notice character Y during reach occurrence or SP reach development, so that the effect of the reach effect is reduced by the appearance of the notice character Y. Can be prevented.
Further, the address area of the motion management area 5 is used by the notice 1 scenario or the notice 2 scenario at the time of “PB effect”. By configuring in this way, when a character image simulating a PB (push button) appearing in a PB effect such as a promotion effect is used as the notice character Y, the number part Z1 has priority over a character image simulating PB. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the effect of the effect due to the symbol variation effect from being lowered by the PB effect.

Further, the address area of the motion management area 5 is used by the scenario for notice 1 or the scenario for notice 2 at the time of “temporary stop display effect”. With this configuration, when the decorative symbol Z is temporarily stopped (for example, displayed in a rocking manner at a fixed position (see FIG. 147)), the numeral portion Z1 is displayed with priority over the notice character Y. Therefore, the appearance effect of the temporary stop display effect can be prevented from deteriorating due to the appearance of the notice character Y.
Further, the address area of the motion management area 5 is used by the scenario for the notice 1 or the scenario for the notice 2 at the time of “short time effect”. During the time reduction, the fluctuation time is short, and there is a high possibility that the game result is displayed during the appearance of the notice character Y. With this configuration, the numeric part Z1 is larger than the notice character Y during the time reduction. Since the priority is displayed, it is possible to prevent the game result (stop result mode) from being hidden by the notice character Y.

  In the present embodiment, when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the case where any one of the reach effect, the PB effect such as the promotion effect, the temporary stop display effect, and the short-time effect is satisfied is assumed. Although the inter-symbol advance notice layer is used, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, the present invention is not limited to these and can be changed as appropriate. The predetermined condition may be satisfied, for example, when the stage change effect is being performed, when the background change effect is being performed, or when the decorative design Z is composed of only the numeric part Z1.

If the decorative design Z is composed of a numeric part Z1 and a character part Z2, and the type of the numeric part Z1 and the type of the character part Z2 are associated with each other, the user is used to the model. Since the player can estimate the number part Z1 (the number shown in the number part Z1) by the character part Z2, even if the number part Z1 is hidden by the notice character Y, a part of the character part Z2 (that is, As long as at least the part that can specify the type is not hidden, it is possible to grasp the state of the special display variation display game, the stop result mode, and the like. However, the decorative design Z may be displayed at the corner of the display screen 41a at the time of SP reach development, time reduction, or the like, when the decorative design Z is displayed at the center of the display screen 41a. (Refer to FIG. 145 to FIG. 148) Since the display is reduced, it is often the case that the decorative design Z is composed only of the numerical part Z1 in order to ensure the visibility of the numerical part Z1. In such a case, that is, when the decorative design Z is composed only of the number part Z1, even the player who is used to the model cannot estimate the number part Z1 by the character part Z2. Use of the inter-symbol notice layer is effective.
From that point of view, for example, even when the type of the numeric part Z1 and the type of the character part Z2 are associated with each other, the numeric part Z1 and the character part Z2 are displayed separately from each other. In this case, the numeric part Z1 cannot be estimated by the character part Z2. Therefore, when the predetermined condition is satisfied when the number part Z1 and the character part Z2 constituting the decorative design Z are displayed separately, the inter-symbol notice layer is used in that case. May be.

In the present embodiment, when a notice character Y whose display priority is lower than that of the number portion Z1 appears, it is possible to perform an effect of changing the variation display mode of the decorative design Z.
Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 149 (a), a notice character Y appears while the decorative symbol Z is variably displayed in a fluctuating display mode in which the decorative symbol Z is horizontally scrolled. When the part Z1 is displayed preferentially, the decorative design Z is displayed in a variable display mode (normal state) before the notice character Y appears, for example, as shown in FIGS. 149 (b) and 149 (c). It is possible to produce an effect of variably displaying in a variation display mode different from the variation display mode). By configuring in this way, not only the notice character Y appears, but also the variation display mode of the decorative design Z changes, so that interest can be enhanced.

As a variation display mode different from the normal variation display mode, FIG. 149 (b) illustrates a variation display mode in which the decorative symbol Z is vertically scrolled, and FIG. 149 (c) illustrates a variation in which the decorative symbol Z is rotated about its axis. Although the display mode has been exemplified, the variable display mode different from the normal variable display mode is not limited to these, and can be changed as appropriate. For example, even in the variable display mode in which the decorative design Z is scrolled obliquely good.
Further, the normal variable display mode is not limited to the variable display mode in which the decorative symbol Z is scrolled horizontally, and can be appropriately changed. For example, the variable display mode in which the decorative symbol Z is vertically scrolled may be used. In addition, it may be a variable display mode in which the decorative design Z is obliquely scrolled (moved from the upper right to the lower left, or moved from the upper left to the lower right), or a variable display mode in which the decorative design Z is rotated. Also good. Further, the variation display mode different from the normal variation display mode may be horizontal scrolling as long as the normal variation display mode is other than horizontal scrolling.

  According to the gaming machine 10 of the second embodiment described above, a gaming machine capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player when the result of the variable display game for variably displaying a plurality of identification information results in a predetermined result. The display includes a presentation control means (production control apparatus 300) for displaying a variation display game (decoration special figure variation display game) on a presentation display device (display device 41), and the presentation control means has a predetermined presentation image at a predetermined timing. (In the case of the present embodiment, the notice character Y) can be displayed on the effect display device, and the predetermined effect image has a lower display priority than the identification information (in the case of the present embodiment, the numeric part Z1). The coincidence portion where the identification information matches the display position is hidden by the identification information.

Accordingly, since the identification information (numerical part Z1) is displayed with priority over the predetermined effect image (notice character Y), even if the predetermined effect image appears, the identification information can be visually recognized and displayed in a variable manner. It is not difficult to grasp the state of the game (decoration special figure variation display game) and the stop result mode.
Here, the predetermined effect image is an image that is displayed at a predetermined timing such as the notice character Y, and the predetermined effect image does not include an image that is always displayed, such as a background image.
In addition, the matching portion where the identification information and the display position in the predetermined effect image coincide with each other may be a part or all of the predetermined effect image.

Further, according to the gaming machine 10 of the second embodiment described above, the effect control means (the effect control device 300) identifies corresponding to the display of a predetermined effect image (in the present embodiment, the notice character Y). It is possible to configure the variable display mode of the information (in the present embodiment, at least the numeric part Z1) to be changeable (see FIG. 149).
By configuring in this manner, not only the predetermined effect image (notice character Y) appears, but also the variable display mode of the identification information (numeric part Z1 (decoration symbol Z)) changes, which can enhance the interest. it can.

Further, according to the gaming machine 10 of the second embodiment described above, the predetermined effect image (the notice character Y in the case of this embodiment) is more than the identification information (in the case of the present embodiment, the numeric part Z1). The first effect image (notice character Y drawn on the inter-symbol notice layer) in which the matching priority where the display priority is low and the identification information matches the display position is hidden by the identification information, and the identification information is displayed. A second effect image (front notice 1 layer, front notice 2 layer, or foreground that hides a part corresponding to the coincidence part of the identification information by a coincidence part having a high priority and the display position coincides with the identification information. The notice character Y) drawn on the notice layer can be included.
By configuring in this way, an effect in which one of a predetermined effect image that is not displayed with priority over the identification information (numerical part Z1) and a predetermined effect image that is displayed with priority over the identification information appears. Since it is also possible to execute an effect in which both appear, it is possible to enhance the effect of the effect by a predetermined effect image (notice character Y).

Further, according to the gaming machine 10 of the second embodiment described above, the predetermined effect image (the notice character Y in the present embodiment) can be configured to be a moving image (FIG. 146 or the like). (See FIG. 147).
By configuring in this way, the predetermined effect image (notice character Y) fluctuates with the identification information (number part Z1) or is hidden or hidden by the identification information (number part Z1), so that the interest is enhanced. it can.
On the other hand, even if the predetermined effect image is a still image, the predetermined effect image (notice character Y) is identified even when the identification information is variably displayed in a variable display mode such as scroll display or shaft rotation display. Since it is visible and hidden by information (numerical part Z1), interest can be enhanced.

  In addition, according to the gaming machine 10 of the second embodiment described above, the effect control means (the effect control device 300) includes additional information (in the case of the present embodiment) together with the identification information (in the case of the present embodiment, the numeric part Z1). The character portion Z2) can be displayed on the effect display device (display device 41), and the additional information has a lower display priority than the identification information and the predetermined effect image (the notice character Y in this embodiment). It can be configured as follows. That is, the additional information has a lower display priority than the identification information and the predetermined effect image, and the portion where the display position matches the identification information and the predetermined effect image is hidden by the identification information and the predetermined effect image. It is possible to configure.

  With this configuration, only the identification information hides the predetermined effect image (notice character Y) of the identification information (numerical part Z1) and additional information (character part Z2), and the additional information is predetermined. Since the effect image is not hidden, a portion where the predetermined effect image is hidden can be suppressed to a necessary minimum, and a decrease in effect due to the predetermined effect image can be suppressed.

  According to the gaming machine 10 of the second embodiment described above, a gaming machine capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player when the result of the variable display game for variably displaying a plurality of identification information results in a predetermined result. The display includes a presentation control means (production control apparatus 300) for displaying a variation display game (decoration special figure variation display game) on a presentation display device (display device 41), and the presentation control means has a predetermined presentation image at a predetermined timing. (In the case of this embodiment, the notice character Y) can be displayed on the effect display device, and the display screen 41a displayed on the effect display device is created by one display layer or by a plurality of stacked display layers. Creating means (VDP 312 etc.) and display control means (signal conversion circuit 313 etc.) for displaying the display screen 41a created by the creating means on the effect display device. The creating means includes a display layer (left symbol number portion layer, right symbol number portion layer, middle symbol number portion layer) for displaying the identification information (in the case of the present embodiment, the number portion Z1) and a predetermined effect image. A predetermined display screen 41a can be created by a plurality of display layers including a display layer (inter-symbol notice layer) for display, and a predetermined effect image is displayed on the predetermined display screen 41a. The display layer is positioned below the display layer for displaying the identification information, and a matching portion in which the identification information and the display position coincide in the predetermined effect image is hidden by the identification information.

  Accordingly, since the identification information (numerical part Z1) is displayed with priority over the predetermined effect image (notice character Y), even if the predetermined effect image appears, the identification information can be visually recognized and displayed in a variable manner. It is not difficult to grasp the state of the game (decoration special figure variation display game) and the stop result mode.

Further, according to the gaming machine 10 of the second embodiment described above, on the predetermined display screen 41a, the variable display mode of the identification information (in the case of the present embodiment, at least the numeric part Z1) is the predetermined display. The display screen 41a other than the screen 41a (for example, a display screen created by stacking a plurality of display layers not including the inter-symbol notice layer) can be configured to be different from the variable display mode.
By configuring in this manner, not only the predetermined effect image (notice character Y) appears, but also the variable display mode of the identification information (numeric part Z1 (decoration symbol Z)) changes, which can enhance the interest. it can.

Further, according to the gaming machine 10 of the second embodiment described above, the predetermined effect image (the notice character Y in the case of the present embodiment) includes the first effect image and the second effect image, and is created. The means (VDP 312 etc.) includes a display layer (left symbol number portion layer, right symbol number portion layer, middle symbol number portion layer) for displaying identification information (in the case of the present embodiment, the number portion Z1), A display layer for displaying the effect image (inter-symbol notice layer) and a display layer for displaying the second effect image (in this embodiment, the front notice layer 1, the front notice layer 2 or the front notice layer) The predetermined display screen 41a can be created by a plurality of display layers including at least one of the display layer, and the display layer for displaying the first effect image is identification information on the predetermined display screen 41a. A matching portion that is located on the lower layer side (the back side of the screen) than the display layer for display and whose display position matches the identification information in the first effect image is hidden by the identification information. The display layer for displaying the effect image is positioned on the upper layer side (front side of the screen) with respect to the display layer for displaying the identification information, and the identification information and the display position of the second effect image match. It is possible to configure such that the portion corresponding to the matching portion of the identification information is hidden by the matching portion.
By configuring in this way, an effect in which one of a predetermined effect image that is not displayed with priority over the identification information (numerical part Z1) and a predetermined effect image that is displayed with priority over the identification information appears. Since it is also possible to execute an effect in which both appear, it is possible to enhance the effect of the effect by a predetermined effect image (notice character Y).

  In addition, according to the gaming machine 10 of the second embodiment described above, the effect control means (the effect control device 300) includes additional information (in the case of the present embodiment) together with the identification information (in the case of the present embodiment, the numeric part Z1). , The character portion Z2) can be displayed on the effect display device (display device 41). On the predetermined display screen 41a, display layers (left symbol character portion layer, right symbol character portion layer) for displaying additional information are displayed. The middle symbol character part layer) displays a display layer (left symbol numeral part layer, right symbol numeral part layer, middle symbol numeral part layer) for displaying identification information and a display layer for displaying a predetermined effect image ( It can be configured to be located on the lower layer side (screen rear side) than the inter-symbol notice layer.

  With this configuration, only the identification information hides the predetermined effect image (notice character Y) of the identification information (numerical part Z1) and additional information (character part Z2), and the additional information is predetermined. Since the effect image is not hidden, a portion where the predetermined effect image is hidden can be suppressed to a necessary minimum, and a decrease in effect due to the predetermined effect image can be suppressed.

According to the gaming machine 10 of the second embodiment described above, a gaming machine capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player when the result of the variable display game for variably displaying a plurality of identification information results in a predetermined result. The display includes a presentation control means (production control apparatus 300) for displaying a variation display game (decoration special figure variation display game) on a presentation display device (display device 41), and the presentation control means has a predetermined presentation image at a predetermined timing. (In the case of this embodiment, the notice character Y) can be displayed on the effect display device, and the display screen 41a displayed on the effect display device is created by one display layer or by a plurality of stacked display layers. Creation means (VDP 312 etc.), display control means (signal conversion circuit 313 etc.) for displaying the display screen 41a created by the creation means on the effect display device, Storage means (virtual drawing space 326a of the VRAM 326) for storing the information of the display layer used to create 41a, and the storage means for displaying identification information (in the case of the present embodiment, the numeric part Z1). It includes at least an identification information layer storage area for storing display layer information, and a first effect image layer storage area and a second effect image layer storage area for storing display layer information for displaying a predetermined effect image. A plurality of layer storage areas are provided side by side from the head side of the storage means, and the information of the display layer stored in the layer storage area indicates that the closer the position of the layer storage area is to the head of the storage means, When the display layer is stacked, it is arranged on the lower layer side (the back side of the screen), and the identification information layer storage area is located on the rear side of the storage means with respect to the first effect image layer storage area When the information of the display layer for displaying the predetermined effect image is stored in the first effect image layer storage area because it is located on the head side of the storage means relative to the second effect image layer storage area. In the predetermined effect image, the matching portion where the display position matches the identification information is hidden by the identification information, and information on the display layer for displaying the predetermined effect image is stored in the second effect image layer storage area. In such a case, the matching information is displayed so as to hide the portion corresponding to the matching portion of the identification information by the matching portion whose display position matches the identification information of the predetermined rendering image. Display layer information to be displayed when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, any one of a reach effect, a PB effect such as a promotion effect, a temporary stop display effect, and a short-time effect) Is stored in the first effect image layer storage area, and when the predetermined condition is not satisfied, it is stored in the second effect image layer storage area.
In the present embodiment, the identification information layer storage area includes a drawing area for the motion management area 6 in which the middle symbol number layer is stored, a drawing area for the motion management area 7 in which the left symbol number layer is stored, and the right symbol. This is a drawing area for the motion management area 8 in which the numeric part layer is stored.
The first effect image layer storage area is a drawing area for the motion management area 5 in which the inter-symbol notice layer is stored.
The second effect image layer storage area stores the drawing area for the motion management area 9 in which the front notice layer 1 is stored, the drawing area for the motion management area 10 in which the front notice layer 2 is stored, and the front notice layer. This is a drawing area for the motion management area 12.

Accordingly, since the identification information (numerical part Z1) is displayed with priority over the predetermined effect image (notice character Y), even if the predetermined effect image appears, the identification information can be visually recognized and displayed in a variable manner. It is not difficult to grasp the state of the game (decoration special figure variation display game) and the stop result mode.
In addition, since information on each display layer is stored in a predetermined layer storage area (drawing area) regardless of the production content (that is, the number of display layers constituting one display screen 41a), Each time information is stored in the storage means (virtual drawing space 326a of the VRAM 326), it is not necessary to search for the layer storage area for storing the information of the display layer, and the processing load can be reduced.

In addition, according to the gaming machine 10 of the second embodiment described above, the effect control means (the effect control device 300) includes additional information (in the case of the present embodiment) together with the identification information (in the case of the present embodiment, the numeric part Z1). The character portion Z2) can be displayed on the effect display device (display device 41), and the plurality of layer storage areas include an additional information layer storage area for storing display layer information for displaying additional information. The additional information layer storage area is located on the head side of the storage means (virtual drawing space 326a of the VRAM 326) with respect to the identification information layer storage area, the first effect image layer storage area, and the second effect image layer storage area. Is possible.
In the present embodiment, the additional information layer storage area includes a drawing area for the motion management area 2 in which the middle symbol character part layer is stored, a drawing area for the motion management area 3 in which the left symbol character part layer is stored, and the right symbol. This is a drawing area for the motion management area 4 in which the character part layer is stored.

  With this configuration, only the identification information hides the predetermined effect image (notice character Y) of the identification information (numerical part Z1) and additional information (character part Z2), and the additional information is predetermined. Since the effect image is not hidden, a portion where the predetermined effect image is hidden can be suppressed to a necessary minimum, and a decrease in effect due to the predetermined effect image can be suppressed.

In the present embodiment, in the decorative design Z, the numerical part Z1 is used as identification information and the character part Z2 is used as additional information. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the character part Z2 is connected to the first character part and the second character part. Separately from the character part, the numerical part Z1 and the first character part are used as identification information, and the second character part is used as additional information, and the display priority of the numerical part Z1 and the first character part is determined according to a predetermined effect image. It may be higher than (notice character Y), and the display priority of the second character portion may be lower than a predetermined effect image (notice character Y).
Further, the identification information can be displayed small in the corner of the display screen 41a (smaller than when displayed in the central portion of the display screen 41a).

In the present embodiment, the inter-symbol notice layer is arranged between the numeric part layer of the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol and the character part layer of the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, as the inter-symbol notice layer, the left-symbol notice layer arranged between the left-number numeric part layer and the character part layer, the middle-design numeric part layer, and the character part. An intermediate symbol notice layer arranged between the layers and a right symbol notice layer arranged between the numeric part layer and the character part layer of the right pattern may be provided.
That is, in this embodiment, when a plurality of display layers are stacked, the character part layer (middle symbol character part layer → left symbol number part layer → right symbol number part layer) → inter-symbol notice layer → number part layer (medium symbol number) Placed in the order of part layer → left symbol number part layer → right symbol number part layer), but is not limited to this. For example, middle symbol character part layer → middle symbol inter-announcement layer → middle symbol number part layer → left You may make it arrange | position in order of a symbol character part layer-> left symbol notice layer-> left symbol number part layer-> right symbol character part layer-> right symbol notice layer-> right symbol number part layer.

  Further, the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine as shown in the above embodiment as a gaming machine, for example, other pachinko gaming machines, arrange ball gaming machines, sparrow ball gaming machines, etc. It can be applied to all gaming machines that use this game ball. The present invention can also be applied to a slot machine. In particular, it is possible to apply a screen shot function and a setting function for demonstration of waiting for a customer. The slot machine is not limited to a slot machine that uses medals, and includes, for example, all slot machines such as a slot machine that uses game balls. In addition, the configurations of the above-described modifications can be applied in appropriate combination.

  In addition, it should be considered that the embodiment disclosed this time is illustrative and not restrictive in all respects. The scope of the present invention is defined by the terms of the claims, rather than the description above, and is intended to include any modifications within the scope and meaning equivalent to the terms of the claims.

10 gaming machine 41 display device (effect display device)
41a Display screen Y Notice character (predetermined effect image)
Z1 Number part (identification information)
Z2 character part (additional information)
300 Production control device (production control means)
312 VDP (creating means)
313 Signal conversion circuit (display control means)
326 VRAM (storage means)

Claims (1)

In a gaming machine capable of executing a special game advantageous to a player when a result of a variable display game that displays a plurality of identification information in a variable manner is a predetermined result,
Effect control means for displaying the variable display game on the effect display device;
A starting storage means for storing a starting memory as an execution right of the variable display game, with a predetermined number as an upper limit;
The production control means includes
A start memory display corresponding to the start memory stored in the start memory means can be displayed on the effect display device;
A predetermined effect image can be displayed on the effect display device at a predetermined timing;
Additional information can be displayed on the effect display device together with the identification information,
Creating means for creating a display screen to be displayed on the effect display device by one display layer or by a plurality of laminated display layers;
Display control means for displaying the display screen created by the creating means on the effect display device,
The creation means displays a display layer for displaying the identification information, a display layer for displaying the additional information, a display layer for displaying the start-up memory display, and the predetermined effect image. A plurality of display layers including a display layer for generating a predetermined display screen,
On the predetermined display screen, a display layer for displaying the start-up storage display is positioned above the display layer for displaying the identification information, and a display for displaying the predetermined effect image A layer is positioned below the display layer for displaying the identification information, and the display layer for displaying the additional information includes a display layer for displaying the identification information and the predetermined effect image. A gaming machine, which is located on a lower layer side than a display layer for displaying, and a matching portion in which the identification information and the display position coincide in the predetermined effect image is hidden by the identification information.